Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPermit D06-147 - SEGMENT 9 - Westfield Southcenter Mall - ExpansionD06-147 WESTFIELD EXPANSION 633 SOUTHCENTER MALL Due to the file size, this record has been broken down into 13 segments for easier download. Click on the following links to review the permit segments: Segment 1 - Westfield Expansion Permit D06-147 Segment 2 - Westfield Expansion Permit D06-147 Segment 3 - Westfield Expansion Permit D06-147 Segment 4 - Westfield Expansion Permit D06-147 Segment 5 - Westfield Expansion Permit D06-147 Segment 6 - Westfield Expansion Permit D06-147 Segment 7 - Westfield Expansion Permit D06-147 Segment 8 - Westfield Expansion Permit D06-147 Segment 9 - Westfield Expansion Permit D06-147 Segment 10 - Plans I - Westfield Expansion Permit D06-147 Segment 11 - Plans II - Westfield Expansion Permit D06-147 Segment 12 - Plans III - Westfield Expansion Permit 006-147 Segment 13 - Plans IV - Westfield Expansion Permit D06-147 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated. C. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following: 1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings: a. Couplings: Standard duty couplings. b. Couplings: Heavy-duty couplings. 2. 1-1/4- and 1 -1/2 -Inch NPS: Copper drainage tube; wrought copper, solder joint drainage fittings; and soldered joints. D. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following: 1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings: a. Couplings: Heavy-duty couplings. E. Above and Belowground Rainwater and Overflow Rainwater Piping: Use the following: 1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings: a. Couplings: Heavy-duty couplings. F. Aboveground, Sewage Force Mains: Use the following: 1. Galvanized steel pipe and cast-iron, threaded fittings. G. Indirect Drain Piping: Use the following: 1. Copper drainage tube; wrought copper, solder joint drainage fittings; and soldered joints. 3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the fol- lowing requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use gate or ball valves. 3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping instal- lation. DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING 15420 4 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.5 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 2 for sanitary and storm sewer piping. B. Extend building sanitary drain piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping in sizes and locations indicated. Install cleanout and extension to grade at connections of building sanitary drains with building sanitary sewers. C. Extend building storm drain piping and connect to storm sewer piping in sizes and locations in- dicated. Install cleanout and extension to grade at connections of building storm drains and building storm sewers. D. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service entrance pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. 3.6 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." B. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long -sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short -sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long -turn, double Y -branch and 1/8 -bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not make change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if different sizes of piping are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohib- ited. C. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. All building drainage systems at 1/4 per foot downward in direction of flow. 2. Vent Piping: 1/8 -inch per foot down toward vertical fixture vent. D. Install force mains at elevations indicated. E. Install engineered, sanitary drainage and vent systems in locations indicated and as follows: 1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction. F. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slab on grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing. DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING 15420 5 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.7 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction. B. Cast -Iron, Soil -Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fit- tings Handbook," Chapter W, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 3.8 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each pump discharge and where indicated. Use gate or ball valves for piping 2 -inch NPS and smaller. Use gate valves for piping 2 -1/2 -inch NPS and larger. B. Check Valves: Install swing check valve on each pump discharge, downstream from shutoff valve. 3.9 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. In- stall the following: 1. Riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or Type 42, for vertical runs. 2. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual, straight, horizontal runs 100 feet and less. 3. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, for individual, straight, horizontal runs longer than 100 feet. 4. Spring cushion rolls, MSS Type 49, if indicated, for individual, straight, horizontal runs Ionger than 100 feet. 5. Pipe rolls, MSS Type 44, for multiple, straight, horizontal runs 100 feet or longer. Sup- port pipe rolls on trapeze. 6. Spring hangers, MSS Type 52, for supporting base of vertical runs. B. Install supports and seismic restraints according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" and "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints." C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor (15 -ft. maximum). D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double -rod hangers, with 3/8 -inch minimum rods. E. Install hangers for horizontal piping with following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: Nom. Pipe Steel Pipe Copper Tube Max. Min. Rod Diameter (Inches) Size (Inches) Max. Span (Feet) Span (Feet) Up to 3/4 7 5 3/8 1 7 6 3/8 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING 15420 6 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION Nom. Pipe Steel Pipe Copper Tube Max. Min. Rod Diameter (Inches) Size (Inches) Max. Span (Feet) Span (Feet) 1-1/4 7 6 3/8 1-1/2 9 6 3/8 2 10 8 3/8 2-1/2 11 9 1/2 3 12 10 1/2 4 14 12 5/8 6 17 14 5/8 1. Support vertical steel pipe and copper tube at each floor. 2. Support horizontal hubless cast iron pipe at every other joint, unless over four feet, then support at every joint not to exceed 10 -feet. 3.10 CONNECTIONS A. Connect service entrance piping to exterior sewage and drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. B. Connect drainage piping to service entrance piping, and extend to and connect to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect soil, waste, and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fix- tures." 2. Plumbing Specialties: Connect soil, waste, and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Spe- cialties." 3. Equipment: Connect waste piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections 2 -1/2 -inch NPS and larger. C. Connect force -main piping as indicated on drawings, and extend to and connect to the follow- ing: 1. Sump Pumps: Connect force -main piping to sump -pump discharge. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect soil, waste, and vent piping as follows: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspec- tion must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having juris- diction. DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING 15420 7 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION a. Roughing -In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in after roughing -in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or in- spection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdic- tion. B. Test drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedure, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been al- tered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or con- cealed before it has been tested and approved. 3. Roughing -In Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing -in. Close openings in piping system and fill with wa- ter to point of overflow, but not less than 10 feet of head. Water level must not drop from 15 minutes before inspection starts through completion of inspection (24 hours). Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent - stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1 -inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without in- troducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture con- nections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until sat- isfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare and submit reports for tests and required corrective action. C. Test force -main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedure, as follows: 1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force -main piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved. 2. Cap and subject piping to static -water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, with- out exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 3. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until sat- isfactory results are obtained. 4. Prepare and submit reports for tests and required corrective action. DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING 15420 8 '`w' '`r' WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. END OF SECTION 15420 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING Sari 15420 9 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining mate- rials, joint construction, basic installation requirements, and labeling and identifying re- quirements; and escutcheons, dielectric fittings, sleeves, and sleeve seals that are not in this Section. 2. Division 15 Section "Valves" for general -duty ball, butterfly, check, gate, and globe valves. 3. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identifying require- ments. 4. Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Piping" for water -supply piping and connec- tions. 5. Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Piping" for drainage and vent piping and con- nections. 6. Division 15 Section "Valves" for general duty gate, globe, ball, check and balancing valves applicable to this section. 7. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hangers and seismic restraints. 8. Division 16 for wiring of electronic trap primers and grease interceptors. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes plumbing specialties for the following: 1. Water distribution systems. 2. Soil, waste, and vent systems. 3. Storm drainage systems. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following mini- mum working -pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Water Distribution Piping: 125 psig. 2. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10 -foot head of water. 3. Storm Drainage Piping: 10 -foot head of water. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 1 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 4. Force -Main Piping: 50 psig. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each plumbing specialty indicated. Include rated capacities of selected equipment and shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate materials, finishes, dimen- sions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections for the following plumbing specialty products: 1. Backflow preventers. 2. Water pressure regulators. 3. Balancing valves. 4. Thermostatic water mixing valves. 5. Water tempering valves. 6. Strainers. 7. Trap seal primer valves. 8. Hydrants. 9. Cleanouts. 10. Drains. 11. Miscellaneous piping specialties. B. Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. C. Maintenance Data: For specialties to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Divi- sion 1. Include the following: 1. Backflow preventers. 2. Water pressure regulators. 3. Thermostatic water mixing valves. 4. Water tempering valves. 5. Trap seal primer valves. 6. Miscellaneous piping specialties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on plumbing specialties made to speci- fied standards. B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated plumbing specialties specified in this Sec- tion that are listed and labeled. 1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: "Nationally Recognized Testing Labora- tory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. C. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installa- tion. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 2 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION D. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," for electrical components. *try, E. Comply with Washington State Department of Health Publication 331-137 "Backflow Preven- tion Assemblies Approved for Installation in Washington State." 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels de- scribing contents. 1. Operating Key Handles: Furnish one extra key for each key -operated hose bibb and hy- drant installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Backflow Preventers: a. CMB Industries; Febco Div. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Eurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. 2. Water Pressure Regulators: a. Cashco, Inc. b. Cla-Val Co. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. FLOMATIC Corp. e. Honeywell Braukmann. f. IMI Cash Valve. g. Spence Engineering Co., Inc. h. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. i. Turn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. 3. Balancing Valves: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Flow Design, Inc. d. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett Div. e. Taco, Inc. f. Tour & Anderson, Inc.; Valve Div. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 3 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION g. Watts Industries; Water Products Div. 4. Thermostatic Water Mixing Valves: a. Lawler Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Leonard Valve Co. c. Mark Controls Corp.; Powers Process Controls. d. Symmons Industries, Inc. e. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. 5. Water Tempering Valves: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Honeywell Braukmann. c. IMI Cash Valve. d. Leonard Valve Co. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 6. Strainers: a. Ames Co., Inc. b. Cla-Val Co. c. CMB Industries; Febco Div. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. FLOMATIC Corp. f. Grinnell Corp.; Mueller Co. Marketing Group for Hersey Products Div. g. IMI Cash Valve. h. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. i. Darn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. 7. Trap Seal Primer Valves: a. Josam Co. b. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. c. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. L]urn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. S. Trap Seal Primer Systems: a. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc., or approved equivalent. 9. Hydrants: a. Josam Co. b. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. c. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. d. Qurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 4 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 10. Cleanouts: a. Josam Co. b. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. c. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. d. 'urn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. 11. Drains: a. Josam Co. b. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. c. Tyler Pipe, Wade Div. d. ❑urn Industries, Inc. 12. Miscellaneous Piping Specialties: a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. b. Josam Co. c. Tyler Pipe, Wade Div. d. Dirn Industries, Inc. 2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. General: ASSE standard, backflow preventers, of size indicated for maximum flow rate and maximum pressure loss indicated. 1. Interior Components: Corrosion -resistant materials. 2. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome -plate if used in chrome -plated piping system. B. Reduced Pressure Backflow Assemblies (RPBA): ASSE 1013, suitable for continuous pressure application. 1. 2 -Inch NPS and Smaller: a. Bronze body with threaded ends. b. Full port ball valves on inlet and outlet, strainer on inlet, test cocks, and pressure - differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air -gap fitting located between two positive -seating check valves. c. Pressure Loss: 15 psig maximum, through middle one-third of flow range. 2. 2-112-1nch NPS and Larger: a. Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless steel body with flanged ends. b. Interior Lining: AWWA C550 or FDA -approved, epoxy coating for backflow pre- venters having cast-iron or steel body. c. Full port gate valves on inlet and outlet, strainer on inlet, test cocks, and pressure - differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air -gap fitting located between two positive -seating check valves. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 5 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION d. Pressure Loss: 15 psig maximum, through middle one-third of flow range. C. Double Check Backflow Assemblies (DCBA): ASSE 1015, suitable for continuous pressure application 1. 2 -Inch NPS and Smaller: a. Bronze body with threaded ends. b. Full port ball valves on inlet and outlet, strainer on inlet, and test cocks with two positive -seating check valves. c. Pressure Loss: 7 psig maximum, through middle one-third of flow range. 2. 2 -1/2 -Inch NPS and Larger: a. Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless steel body with flanged ends. b. Interior Lining: AWWA C550 or FDA -approved, epoxy coating for backflow pre- venters having cast-iron or steel body. c. Full port gate valves on inlet and outlet, strainer on inlet, and test cocks with two positive -seating check valves. d. Pressure Loss: 7 psig maximum, through middle one-third of flow range. D. Anti -siphon Pressure Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1020, suitable for continuous pressure ap- plication. Include shutoff valves, spring-loaded check valve, spring-loaded floating disc, test cocks, and atmospheric vent. 1. Bronze body with threaded ends. 2. Full port ball valves on inlet and outlet, spring-loaded check valve, spring-loaded floating disc, test cocks, and atmospheric vent. 3. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle one-third of flow range. E. Pipe Applied, Atmospheric -Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001, bronze body with floating disc and atmospheric vent. F. Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASE 1011, brass body with non -removable and manual drain features, and ASME B 1.20.7 garden -hose threads on outlet. 2.3 WATER PRESSURE REGULATORS A. General: ASSE 1003, water regulators, rated for initial working pressure of 150 psig minimum, of size, flow rate, and inlet and outlet pressures indicated. Include integral factory -installed or separate field -installed Y -pattern strainer. 1. 2 -Inch NPS and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 2. 2 -112 -Inch NPS and Larger: Bronze or cast-iron body with flanged ends. Include AWWA C550 or FDA -approved interior epoxy coating for regulators with cast-iron body. 3. Interior Components: Corrosion -resistant materials. 4. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome -plate if used in chrome -plated piping system. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 6 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Single -seated, direct -operated type. C. Single -seated, direct -operated, integral -bypass type. D. Pilot -operated type, single- or double -seated, cast -iron -body main valve, with bronze -body pilot valve. 2.4 BALANCING VALVES A. Circuit Balancing Valves: Adjustable, with 2 readout ports and memory setting indicator. In- clude manufacturer's standard hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case. 1. 2 -Inch NPS and Smaller: Bronze body with brass ball, adjustment knob, calibrated nameplate, and threaded or solder joint ends. 2. 2 -Inch NPS and Smaller: Bronze, Y -pattern body with adjustment knob and threaded ends. 3. 2 -112 -Inch NPS and Larger: Cast-iron, Y -pattern body with bronze disc and flanged or grooved ends. B. Memory -Stop Balancing Valves, 2 -Inch NPS and Smaller: MSS SP -110, ball valve, rated for 400-psig minimum CWP. Include 2 -piece, ASTM B 62 bronze body with standard port, chrome -plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout -proof stem, solder joint ends, and vinyl -covered steel handle with memory -stop device. 2.5 THERMOSTATIC WATER MIXING VALVES A. General: ASSE 1017, manually adjustable, thermostatic water mixing valve with bronze body. Include check stop and union on hot- and cold -water -supply inlets, adjustable temperature set- ting. 1. Bimetal Thermostat, Operation and Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum. 2. Liquid -Filled Motor, Operation and Pressure Rating: 100 psig minimum. B. Thermostatic Water Mixing Valves: Unit, with the following: 1. Piping, of sizes and in arrangement indicated. Include valves and unions. 2. Piping Component Finish: Rough brass. 3. Thermometer: Manufacturer's standard. C. Manifolded, Thermostatic Water Mixing Valve Assemblies: Factory -fabricated unit consisting of parallel arrangement of thermostatic water mixing valves. 1. Arrangement: One large -flow, thermostatic water mixing valve with flow -control valve, pressure regulator, inlet and outlet pressure gages, and one small -flow, thermostatic water mixing valve with flow -control valve. Include outlet thermometer, factory- or field - installed inlet and outlet valves, and other indicated options. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 7 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 2. Piping, of sizes and in arrangement indicated. Include valves and unions. 3. Piping Component Finish: Rough brass. 2.6 WATER TEMPERING VALVES A. General: Manually adjustable, thermostatically controlled water tempering valve; bronze body; and adjustable temperature setting. B. System Water Tempering Valves: Piston or discs controlling both hot- and cold -water flow, capable of limited antiscald protection. Include threaded inlets and outlet, capacity at pressure loss, and temperature range or setting as indicated. 1. Finish: Rough bronze unless chrome -plated finish is indicated. C. Limited -Volume, Water Tempering Valves: Solder joint inlets and 3/4 -inch NPS maximum outlet, with minimum capacity and maximum pressure loss as indicated. 2.7 STRAINERS A. Strainers: Y -pattern, unless otherwise indicated, and full size of connecting piping. Include ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel screens with 3/64 -inch round perforations, unless oth- erwise indicated. 1. Pressure Rating: 125-psig minimum steam working pressure, unless otherwise indicated. 2. 2 -Inch NPS and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends. 3. 2 -1/2 -Inch NPS and Larger: Cast-iron body, with interior AWWA C550 or FDA - approved epoxy coating and flanged ends. 4. Y -Pattern Strainers: Screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown. a. Drain: Pipe plug. b. Drain: Factory- or field -installed, hose -end drain valve. B. Drainage Basket Strainers: Non -pressure -rated, cast-iron or coated -steel body; with bolted flange or clamp cover and drain with plug. 1. Basket: Bronze or stainless steel with 1/8- or 3/16 -inch- diameter holes and lift -out han- dle. 2. Female threaded ends for 2 -inch NPS and smaller, and flanged ends for 2 -1/2 -inch NPS and larger. 2.8 TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES A. Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1018, water -supply -fed type, with the following characteris- tics: 1. 125-psig minimum working pressure. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 8 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 2. Bronze body with atmospheric -vented drain chamber. 3. Inlet and Outlet Connections: 1/2 -inch NPS threaded, union, or solder joint. 4. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: 1/2 -inch NPS threaded or solder joint. 5. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome finished. B. Trap Seal Primer System: Factory -fabricated, automatic -operation assembly for wall mounting with the following: 1. Piping: 3/4 -inch NPS, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper, water tubing inlet and manifold with number of 1/2 -inch NPS outlets as indicated. 2. Cabinet: Steel box with stainless-steel cover. 3. Electric Controls: 24-hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for 120-V, ac power. 4. Water Hammer Arrester: ASSE 1010. 5. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001. 2.9 HYDRANTS A. Wall Hydrants: ASME Al12.21.3M or ASSE 1019, nonfreeze, automatic draining, antiback- flow type, key operation, with 3/4- or 1 -inch NPS threaded or solder joint inlet, and ASME B 1.20.7 garden -hose threads on outlet. Include operating key for each hydrant. 1. Type: Recessed. 2. Finish: Nickel bronze. B. Ground Hydrants: Flush with grade, non -freeze ground hydrant, cast iron box, bronze interior parts, bronze seat and replaceable seat washer, 1 -1/4 -inch inlet connection. Include operating key for each hydrant. Minimum 4E10" depth of bury. 2.10 CLEANOUTS A. General: Size cicanouts as indicated on drawings, or where not indicated, same size as con- nected drainage piping. I . Provide wall cleanouts on each end of water closet ends and one over main drops in addi- tion, provide all cleanouts required per code. B. Cleanouts: ASME Al122.36.2M, cast-iron body with straight threads and gasket seal or ta- pered threads for plug, flashing flange and clamping ring, and a brass closure plug. Cleanouts for installation in floors not having membrane waterproofing may be furnished without clamp- ing ring. 1. Tiled Areas: Round cleanout top with tile recess top. 2. Quarry Tiled Areas: Square nickel -bronze cleanout cover. 3. Walls: Round cleanout cover with stainless steel finish. 4. All Other Areas: Round cleanout top with nickel -bronze fmish. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 9 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.11 DRAINS A. General: Size outlets as indicated on drawings. B. Floor Drains: ASME A112.21.1M, cast-iron body, with seepage flange and clamping device, and trap seal primer valve connection. Floor drains for installation in floors not having mem- brane waterproofmg may have seepage flange with clamping device. Floor drains for use as area drains in exterior slab on grade may be furnished with anchor flange instead of seepage flange and clamping device. Provide the following options as indicated: 1. Trap primer connection. 2. Round strainer with integral funnel. 3. Polished nickel bronze top. 4. Slotted top. C. Roof Drains: ASME Al 12.21.2M, cast-iron body, with combination flashing ring and gravel stop, cast-iron dome except where other dome material is specified, extension collars, under - deck clamp, and sump receiver. Roof drains for installation in cast -in-place concrete decks may be furnished without underdeck clamp and sump receiver. D. Floor Sinks: Cast iron body, 12 -inch square by 8 -inch deep sump, 3 -inch bottom outlet, square slotted medium duty grate, with polished nickel bronze top, with interior dome strainer. 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASME A112.26. IM, ASSE 1010, or PDI -WH 201, bellows or piston type with pressurized cushioning chamber. Sizes are based on water -supply fixture units, ASME Al 12.26.1M sizes A through F and PDI -WH 201 sizes A through F. B. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body, with renewable composition disc, 1/2- or 3/4 -inch NPS threaded or solder joint inlet. Provide ASME 131.20.7 garden -hose threads on outlet and integral or field - installed, nonremovable, drainable, hose -connection vacuum breaker. 1. Finish: Rough brass. 2. Operation: Operating -key (handle) type. Include operation key. C. Roof Flashing Assemblies: Manufactured assembly made of 4-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625 -inch- thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches from pipe with galvanized steel boot re- inforcement, and counterflashing fitting. 1. Vent Cap: Extended model with field -installed, vandal -proof vent cap. D. Open Drains: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub -and -spigot, cast- iron, soil -pipe fittings. Include P -trap, hub -and -spigot riser section of length to provide depth indicated; and where indicated, increaser fitting of size indicated, joined with ASTM C 564 rubber gaskets. Size P -trap as indicated. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES �w 15430 10 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION E. Deep -Seal Traps: Cast iron or bronze, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping, clean- out where indicated, and trap seal primer valve connection where indicated. 1. 2 -Inch NPS: 4 -inch- minimum water seal. 2. 2-1/2 Inch NPS and Larger: 5 -inch- minimum water seal. F. Floor -Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap seal primer valve connection. G. Air -Gap Fittings: ASME A112.1.2, cast iron or cast bronze, with fixed air gap, inlet for drain pipe or tube, and threaded or spigot outlet. H. Stack Flashing Fittings: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminat- ing roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe. I. Vent Caps: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal -proof design. Include vented hood and set -screws to secure to vent pipe. J. Expansion Joints: ASME A112.21.2M, assembly with cast-iron body with bronze sleeve, pack- ing gland, and packing, of size and end types corresponding to connected piping. K. Downspout Nozzle: Nickel bronze body, threaded inlet, wall flange and outlet nozzle. L. Hose -End Drain Valves: MSS SP -110, 3/4 -inch NPS ball valve, rated for 400-psig minimum CWP. Include 2 -piece, ASTM B 62 bronze body with standard port, chrome -plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout -proof stem, and vinyl -covered steel handle. 1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 2. Outlet: Short -threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7 garden -hose thread and cap. M. Drain Outlet Backwater Valves: Cast-iron or bonze body, with removable ball float, threaded inlet, and threaded or spigot outlet. 2.13 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: 1. General Use: 4 lb/sq. ft. or 0.0625 -inch thickness. 2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3 lb/sq. ft. or 0.0469 -inch thickness. 3. Burning: 6 lb/sq. ft. or 0.0937 -inch thickness. B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless other- wise indicated: I. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft. 2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft. 11 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Dinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04 -inch mini- mum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated. D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40 -mil minimum thickness. E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed. G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy. H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent -type, bituminous mastic. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLUMBING SPECIALTY INSTALLATION A. General: Install plumbing specialty components, connections, and devices according to manu- facturer's written instructions. B. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated, at each water -supply connec- tion to mechanical equipment and systems, and to other equipment and water systems as indi- cated. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment. Install air -gap fitting on units with atmospheric -vent connection and pipe relief outlet drain to nearest floor drain. Do not install bypass around backflow preventer. C. Install pressure regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance valve bypass. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet. D. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure regulator, and solenoid valve, and where indicated. E. Install trap seal primer valves with valve outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a mini- mum of one percent and connect to floor -drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow. F. Install expansion joints on vertical risers, stacks, and conductors as indicated. G. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and where not indicated, according to the following: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to 4 -inch NPS. Use 4 -inch NPS for larger drainage pip- ing unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 12 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping 4 -inch NPS and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. H. Install cleanout deck plates, of types indicated, with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for piping below floors. I. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping. J. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through floors with waterproof membrane. K. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing accord- ing to manufacturer's written instructions. L. Install floor drains according to manufacturerC written instructions, in locations indicated. M. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained as indicated. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor or as indicated. Size outlets as indicated. N. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise in- dicated. O. Install floor -drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. P. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. Q. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's writ- ten installation instructions and size outlets as indicated. R. Install roof -drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. S. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance. T. Fasten wall -hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated. U. Fasten recessed, wall -mounting plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls. V. Secure supplies to supports or substrate. W. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. X. Install water -supply stop valves in accessible locations. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 13 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION Y. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is in- dicated. ❑ Locate drainage piping as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures and drains. AA. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep -pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. BB. Include wood -blocking reinforcement for recessed and wall -mounting plumbing specialties. CC. Include access for trap primers. DD. Install hose bibbs with integral or field installed vacuum breaker. EE. Install wall hydrants with integral or field installed vacuum breaker. FF. Install water hammer arrestors near quick acting valves at the end of pipe runs and batteries of fixtures, including flush valves, washing machines, dishwashers, and as indicated. Provide ac- cess. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install piping connections between plumbing specialties and piping specified in other Di- vision 15 Sections. 2. Install piping connections indicated between appliances and equipment specified in other Sections; connect directly to plumbing piping systems. 3. Install piping connections indicated as indirect wastes from appliances and equipment specified in other Sections, to spill over receptors connected to plumbing piping systems. B. Install hoses between plumbing specialties and appliances as required for connections. C. Arrange for electric -power connections to plumbing specialties and devices that require power. Electric power is specified in Division 16 Sections. D. Supply Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install hot- and cold -water -supply piping of sizes in- dicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. E. Drainage Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install drainage and vent piping, with approved trap, of sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. F. Ground electric -powered plumbing specialties. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 14 ti✓ WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those speci- fied in UL 486A and UL 486B. G. Arrange for electric -power connections to plumbing specialties and devices that require power. Electric power, wiring, and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16 Sections. 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate flashing manufactured from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. B. Burn joints of lead sheets where required. C. Solder joints of copper sheets where required. D. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. Pipe Flashing: SIeeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty. E. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. F. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device. G. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." H. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess. I. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes as indicated. Install drain connection if indicated. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of factory -authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly of components and installation of grease recovery units, including piping and electrical connections, and to report results in writing. 1. Test and adjust plumbing specialty controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunc- tioning controls and components. 15 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.5 START-UP PROCEDURES A. Before startup, perform the following checks: 1. System tests are complete. 2. Damaged and defective specialties and accessories have been replaced or repaired. 3. Clear space is provided for servicing specialties. B. Before operating systems, perform the following steps: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open general -duty valves to fully open position. 3. Remove and clean strainers. 4. Verify that drainage and vent piping are clear of obstructions. Flush with water until clear. 5. Fill grease interceptors with clean water. C. Startup Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If no procedures are prescribed by manufacturer, proceed as follows: 1. Energize circuits for electrically operated units. Start and run units through complete se- quence of operations. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Startup Services: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup services and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below: 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup of and servicing interceptors. 2. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1. 3. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1. 4. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 15430 16 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION Plumbing Fixture Data Sheet Water Closet — Wall Mounted PIA Manufacturer: American Standard Model 2257.103. Material: Vitreous china. Type: Siphon jet, elongated, 1.6 gpf, top spud, ADA compliant. Mounting: Wall mounted. Seat: Olsonite Model 95, open front seat less cover. Picture shown may not include all options and accessories indicated Accessories: Flushometer Sloan Model 111 ES -S. Exposed, infrared sensor operated flushometer with indicator light, 1.6 gpf, diaphragm type, chrome plated, 3 second flush delay, override button, angle stop, adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker. Support Adjustable, horizontal or vertical siphon jet water closet with no -hub or hub and spigot connections. Complete with cast-iron right hand, left hand, or double main fitting, with 2 -inch adjustable gasketed face plate, universal floor mounted foot supports, corrosion resistant adjustable ABS coupling with integral test cap, fixture bolts, trim, and stud protectors. burn Models 0-1203 through 0-1209 or equivalent of Wade, Jay R. Smith, Josam, or Mifab. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 4tri.*/ PIA WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION Plumbing Fixture Data Sheet Water Closet — Wall Mounted PIA Manufacturer: American Standard Model 2257.103. Material: Vitreous china. Type: Siphon jet, elongated, 1.6 gpf, top spud, ADA compliant. Mounting: Wall mounted. Seat: Olsonite Model 95, open front seat less cover. Picture shown may not include all options and accessories indicated Accessories: Flushometer Sloan Model 111 ES -S. Exposed, infrared sensor operated flushometer with indicator light, 1.6 gpf, diaphragm type, chrome plated, 3 second flush delay, override button, angle stop, adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker. Support Adjustable, horizontal or vertical siphon jet water closet with no -hub or hub and spigot connections. Complete with cast-iron right hand, left hand, or double main fitting, with 2 -inch adjustable gasketed face plate, universal floor mounted foot supports, corrosion resistant adjustable ABS coupling with integral test cap, fixture bolts, trim, and stud protectors. Zurn Models Z-1203 through Z-1209 or equivalent of Wade, Jay R. Smith, Josam, or Mifab. P1A PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 Now, WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION Plumbing Fixture Data Sheet Water Closet — Wall Mounted P1 Manufacturer: American Standard Model 2257.103. Material: Vitreous china. Type: Siphon jet, elongated, 1.6 gpf, top spud. Mounting: Wall mounted. Seat: Olsonite Model 95, open front seat less cover. Picture shown may not include all options and accessories indicated Accessories: Flushometer Sloan Model 111 ES -S. Exposed, infrared sensor operated flushometer with indicator light, 1.6 gpf, diaphragm type, chrome plated, 3 second flush delay, override button, angle stop, adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker. Support Adjustable, horizontal or vertical siphon jet water closet with no -hub or hub and spigot connections. Complete with cast-iron right hand, left hand, or double main fitting, with 2 -inch adjustable gasketed face plate, universal floor mounted foot supports, corrosion resistant adjustable ABS coupling with integral test cap, fixture bolts, trim, and stud protectors. Zurn Models Z-1203 through Z-1209 or equivalent of Wade, Jay R. Smith, Josam, or Mifab. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION Plumbing Fixture Data Sheet Water Closet — Wall Mounted P2A Manufacturer: American Standard Model 6501.010. Material: Vitreous china. Type: Washout flush action, fln •bing rim, 1.0 gpf, top spud, ADA compliant. Mounting: Wall mounted. Accessories: Flushorneter Picture shown may not include all options and accessories indicated Sloan Model 186-1.0 ES -S. Exposed, self -adaptive infrared sensor with indicator light flushometer, diaphragm type, chrome plated, vacuum breaker, angle stop. Support Wall urinal support system with top and bottom plates, complete with rectangular steel uprights with welded feet, adjustable support plates, and mounting fasteners. Zum Model Z-1222 or equivalent of Josam or Jay R. Smith. P2A PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 `war WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION Plumbing Fixture Data Sheet j Water Closet — Wall Mounted I P2 Manufacturer: American Standard Model 6501.010. Material: Vitreous china. Type: Washout flush action, flushing rim, 1.0 gpf, top spud. Mounting: Wall mounted. Picture shown may not include all options and accessories indicated Accessories: Flushometer Sloan Model 186-1.0 ES -S. Exposed, self -adaptive infrared sensor with indicator light flushometer, diaphragm 14100, type, chrome plated, vacuum breaker, angle stop. Support Wall urinal support system with top and bottom plates, complete with rectangular steel uprights with welded feet, adjustable support plates, and mounting fasteners. Zurn Model Z-1222 or equivalent of Josam or Jay R. Smith. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 P2 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION Plumbing Fixture Data Sheet Lavatory — Undercounter Mounted I P3 Manufacturer: Material: Mounting: Dimensions: American Standard Model 0496.221. Vitreous china with unglazed rim. Undercounter mounted, ADA compliant. 19-1/4" x 16-1/4". Picture shown may not include all options and accessories indicated Accessories: Faucet & Soap Dispenser Sloan Model EBF -85 Faucet. Battery powered, sensor operated electronic hand washing faucet, 0.5 gpm, vandal resistant spray head, chrome plated brass, audible tone low battery indicator. Include trim plate for 4" center -set sink, Sloan Model ETF -299-A. Sloan Model ESD -250 Soap Dispenser. Deck mounted, battery powered, sensor operated electronic soap dispenser, integral spout. Mixing Valve Include Sloan BDT mixing valve. Drain Sloan Model ETF -460-A. Chrome plated brass grid strainer with 1-1/4" outlet tube. PLUMBING FIXTURES `.- 15440 P3 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION Plumbing Fixture Data Sheet Lavatory — Wall Mounted P4 Manufacturer: American Standard Model No. 0195.073. Material: Vitreous china. Mounting: Wall hung, front overflow, faucet ledge, ADA compliant. Outlet: Bottom with grid strainer. Color: White. Dimensions: 14-1/4" wide, 10-3/4" front to back, 7" deep. Accessories: Picture shown may not include all options and accessories indicated Faucet & Soap Dispenser Sloan Model EBF -85 Faucet. Battery powered, sensor operated electronic hand washing faucet, 0.5 gpm, vandal resistant spray head, chrome plated brass, audible tone low battery indicator. Include trim plate for 4" center -set sink, Sloan Model ETF -299-A. Sloan Model ESD -250 Soap Dispenser. Deck mounted, battery powered, sensor operated electronic soap dispenser, integral spout. Mixing Valve Include Sloan BDT mixing valve. Support Lavatory support system with concealed arms. Complete with painted rectangular steel uprights with welded feet, cast-iron adjustable headers, concealed arms, steel sleeves, alignment truss and mounting fasteners. Zurn Model Z- 1231 or equivalent of Wade or Jay R. Smith. Drain Sloan Model ETF -460-A. Chrome plated brass grid strainer with 1-1/4" outlet tube. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 P4 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION Plumbing Fixture Data Sheet I Barrier -Free Bi -Level Water Cooler P5 Manufacturer: Sunroc Model ADAD8BL. Type: Provides 8 gallons per hour of chilled water, built-in 100 micron strainer, stainless steel top, flexible bubbler guard, heavy duty galva- nized steel frame, high efficiency cooling tank and coil, refrigerant R - 134a, three push pad activation, external stream height adjustment. Picture shown may not include all options and accessories indicated PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 P5 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION Plumbing Fixture Data Sheet Service Sink — Floor Mounted P6 Manufacturer: American Standard Model 7741.000. Material: Enameled cast iron. Type: Molded one-piece, corner model. Mounting: Floor mounted. Picture shown may not include all options and accessories indicated Accessories Faucet Chicago Model 897 -CP. Wall mounted fitting, vacuum breaker spout with pail hook and wall brace, 314" male hose thread outlet, lever handles. Guard American Standard Model 7745.811, or equivalent. Removable vinyl -coated guard. Drain American Standard Model 7736.018, Flat grid drain. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 P6 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION Plumbing Fixture Data Sheet Clothes Washer Supply and Drain Box P7 Manufacturer: Guy Grey Model BB200TS Material: Galvanized Steel Type: Washer box with top supplies, drain connection. Mounting: Recessed wall mounted. Picture shown may not include all options and accessories indicated Accessories Box 20 gauge box with 18 gauge faceplate, Spangle G90 hot dipped galvanized finish minimum Valves Bronze hose valves with handwheel, combination MIP or sweat connections. Drain 2" drain, male thread fitting and lockout. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 P7 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 15447 - PLUMBING PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for flexible pipe connec- tors. 2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling. 3. Division 15 Section "Valves" for general duty valves. 4. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure gages and gage connectors. 5. Division 15 Section "Motors" for general motor requirements. 6. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for pump supports. 7. Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Piping" for pipe materials. 8. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for strainers. 9. Division 16 Sections for power -supply wiring, field -installed disconnects, electrical de- vices, and motor controllers. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes pumps for the building plumbing systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities of selected models; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each type and size of pump specified. Indicate pumps' operating point on curves. B. Maintenance Data: For each pump specified to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of pumps through one source from a single manufac- turer. PLUMBING PUMPS 15447 1 WESTFIELD SHOPP1NGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage. B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Compact In -Line Circulators: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Grundfos Pumps Corp. c. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett Div. d. Taco, Inc. 2.2 PUMPS, GENERAL A. Description: Factory -assembled and -tested, single -stage, centrifugal pump units; complying with UL 778; suitable for potable -water service; with all -bronze or stainless steel construction and components in contact with water made of corrosion -resistant materials. B. Motors: Provide with built-in thermal -overload protection appropriate for motor size and duty. C. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. Pumps available only with flanged ends may be furnished with threaded companion flanges. D. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory -assembled and -tested units before shipping. F. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe open- ings, and nozzles. PLUMBING PUMPS 15447 2 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.3 COMPACT IN-LINE CIRCULATORS A. Description: Horizontal or vertical, in-line, replaceable -cartridge -design circulator; rated for 125-psig minimum working pressure and minimum continuous water temperature of 225 deg F. 1. Pump and Motor Assembly: On common shaft in hermetically sealed unit without stuff- ing box or mechanical seal, and with manufacturer's standard cooling and lubrication sys- tem. 2. Impeller: Corrosion -resistant material. 3. Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Volute: Cast bronze or non-magnetic stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing -in of plumbing piping systems to verify actual locations of connections be- fore pump installation. 3.2 WATER DISTRIBUTION PUMPS INSTALLATION A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions and with access for periodic maintenance, including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories. B. Support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps. 3.3 START-UP PROCEDURES A. Check suction piping connections for tightness. B. Clean strainers on suction piping. C. Controls: Set for automatic starting and stopping operation. D. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations: 1. Lubricate oil -lubricated -type bearings. 2. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquids is free to rotate with purnp hot and cold. Do not operate pump if it is bound or drags, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. 3. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application. E. Starting procedure for pumps is as follows: PLUMBING PUMPS 15447 3 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 1. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for opera- tion. 2. Open circulating line valve if pump should not be operated against dead shutoff. 3. Start motor. 4. Open discharge valve slowly. 5. Check general mechanical operation of pump and motor. 6. Close circulating line valve once there is sufficient flow through pump to prevent over- heating. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain pumps as specified below: 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stop- ping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining pumps. 2. Review data in maintenance manuals. END OF SECTION 15447 4 PLUMBING PUMPS 15447 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 15447 - PLUMBING PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for flexible pipe connec- tors. 2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling. 3. Division 15 Section "Valves" for general duty valves. 4. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure gages and gage connectors. 5. Division 15 Section "Motors" for general motor requirements. 6. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Seismic Restraints" for pump supports. 7. Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Piping" and Section "Drainage and Vent Piping" for pipe materials. 8. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for strainers. 9. Division 16 Sections for power -supply wiring, field -installed disconnects, electrical de- vices, and motor controllers. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes pumps for the building plumbing systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities of selected models; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each type and size of pump specified. Indicate pumps' operating point on curves. B. Maintenance Data: For each pump specified to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of pumps through one source from a single manufac- turer. PLUMBING PUMPS 15447 1 WESTFIELD SHOPP1NGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage. B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Submersible Sump Pumps: a. Grundfos Pumps Corp. b. Little Giant Pump Co. c. PACO Pumps, Inc. d. Weil Pump Co. e. Zoeller. 2.2 SUMP PUMPS, GENERAL A. Description: Factory -assembled and -tested, single -stage, centrifugal, end -suction sump pump units complying with UL 778. Include motor, operating controls, and construction for perma- nent installation. B. Discharge Pipe End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. Pumps available only with flanged -end discharge pipe may be furnished with threaded companion flanges. C. Discharge Pipe End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged. D. Motors: Single speed, with grease -Lubricated ball bearings, and non -overloading through full range of pump performance curves. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory -assembled and -tested units before shipping. F. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembling and testing. Protect flanges, pipe open- ings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed -in plugs. PLUMBING PUMPS 15447 2 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.3 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS A. Description: Submersible, direct -connected sump pump complying with HI 1.1-1.5 for sub- mersible sump pumps. 1. Pump Arrangement: Duplex. 2. Casing: Cast iron with cast-iron inlet strainer, legs that elevate pump to permit flow into impeller, and discharge companion flange suitable for plain -end pipe connection arranged for vertical discharge. 3. Impeller: ASTM A 48, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron; statically and dynamically balanced, open or semi -open nonclog design, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap screw. 4. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory -sealed, grease -lubricated ball bear- ings. 5. Seals: Double mechanical seals. 6. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor -start type, with built-in overload protection; and three -conductor waterproof power cable of length required, with grounding plug and ca- ble -sealing assembly for connection at pump. 7. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, galva- nized -steel pipe, bronze pipe, or copper tube. 8. Basin Cover: Cast iron or steel and suitable for supporting controls. Refer to "Sump Pump Basins" Article for other requirements. 9. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, pedestal mounted, unless wall mounting is in- dicated; with two micropressure switches in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric cables. 10. High -Water Alarm: Rod -mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with mercury -float - switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 120-V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell, unless battery operation is indicated. 2.4 SUMP PUMP PITS A. Description: Cast -in-place concrete with steel curb frames and covers. Refer to Division 3 Sec- tion "Cast -in Place Concrete." B. Curb Frames: Galvanized steel or steel with bitumastic coating of dimension to fit cover. 1. Pattern: Z -cross-section shape with raised outer rim of height matching cover for re- cessed mounting that will have installed cover flush with top of floor slab. C. Pit Cover: Fabricate with openings with gaskets, seals, and bushings, for access, pumps, pump shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables. PLUMBING PUMPS 15447 3 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing -in of plumbing piping systems to verify actual locations of connections be- fore pump installation. 3.2 SUMP PUMPS INSTALLATION A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance, including removal of motors, im- pellers, couplings, and accessories. C. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps. D. Submersible Sump Pumps: Set pumps on basin, pit, or sump floor. Make direct connections to drainage piping. E. Sump Pump Pits: Construct concrete pits and connect to drainage piping. Set basin cover and fasten to top edge of concrete pit. Install so top surface of cover is flush with finished floor. 3.3 SUMP PUMP CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements. 1. Install discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles, and con- nect to storm drainage piping. 2. Install swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each sump pump discharge. Include spring-loaded or weighted -lever check valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Install swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each automatic, packaged pump dis- charge. 3.4 START-UP PROCEDURES A. Controls: Set for automatic starting and stopping operation. B. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations: 1. Lubricate oil -lubricated -type bearings. 2. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquids is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. Do not operate pump if it is bound or drags, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. 3. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application. PLUMBING PUMPS 15447 4 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Starting procedure for pumps is as follows: `§41..." 1. Confirm all valves are open. 2. Add water to sump with hose to confirm pump and high water alarm operation. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain pumps as specified below: 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stop- ping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining pumps. 2. Review data in maintenance manuals. 3. Schedule 1 hour of training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. END OF SECTION 15447 5 PLUMBING PUMPS 15447 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 15485 - DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section. 1. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hangers and pipe seismic restraints. 2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for equipment tags and nameplates. 3. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for temperature and pressure gages. 4. Division 15 Section "Valves" for general duty valves. 5. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation." 6. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for seismic restraint requirements. 7. Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Piping." 8. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Pumps" for circulating pumps. 9. Division 15 Section "Direct Digital Control (DDC) Systems." 10. Division 16 for electrical connections. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following for domestic water systems: 1. Commercial, electric water heaters. 2. Expansion tanks. 3. Accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections. B. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater and heat exchanger. Include rated capaci- ties; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories. Detail water heater and heat exchanger assemblies and indicate dimensions, loads, required clearances, method of any field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Wir- ing Diagrams: Power, signal, and control systems. Differentiate between manufacturer - installed and field -installed wiring. C. Maintenance Data: For water heaters and heat exchangers to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 15485 1 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single manu- facturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for in- tended use. C. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label heat exchangers, water heaters, and hot-water storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Ves- sels," Division 1. D. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed for the following: 1. ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings," for commercial water heaters. 2. ASHRAE 90.2, "Energy Efficient Design of New Low -Rise Residential Buildings," for residential water heaters. 1.5 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addi- tion to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Warranty Period: From date of Substantial Completion: a. Storage Tanks: Ten years. b. Heating Elements: Five years. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Commercial, Point -of -Use, Storage, 6 to 40 Gallons, Electric Water Heaters: a. Bradford White Corp. b. Lochinvar Corp. 2 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 15485 "me' WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION c. Rheem Manufacturing Co.; Rheem/Ruud Water Heater Div. d. Smith: A. O. Smith Water Products Co. e. State Industries. 2. Point -of -Use, Tankless, Electric Water Heaters: a. Insta-Hot. b. Chronomite Laboratories, Inc. c. Eemax, Inc. d. Electric Heater Co. e. Hot Aqua, Inc. f. Waste King. 3. Expansion Tanks: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Taco, Inc. d. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. e. Bell & Gossett. 2.2 COMMERCIAL, POINT -OF -USE, STORAGE, 6 TO 40 GALLONS, ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A. Description: Comply with UL 174 or UL 1453, and listed by manufacturer for commercial ap- plications. B. Storage Tank Construction: Non-ASME-code steel with 150-psig working -pressure rating. 1. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank for piping connections, relief valve, drain, anode rod, and controls as required. Attach tappings to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B 1.20.1, pipe thread. 2. Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61, barrier materials for potable -water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets. 3. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE 90.1. Surround entire storage tank except connec- tions and controls. 4. Jacket: Steel, with enameled finish. C. Heating Elements: Two, unless otherwise indicated; electric, screw-in, immersion type. 1. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. D. Anode Rod: Factory installed, magnesium. E. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005, corrosion -resistant metal, factory installed. F. T&P Relief Valve: Factory installed, ASME rated. 3 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 15485 WESTFIELD SFOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 23 POINT -OF -USE, TANKLESS, ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A. Description: Comply with UL 499. B. Construction: Without hot-water storage. 1. Working -Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 2. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread. 3. Interior Finish: Materials complying with NSF 61, barrier materials for potable -water tank linings. 4. Heating Coils: Stainless steel. 5. Jacket: Aluminum or steel, with enameled finish, or plastic. 6. Flow control fitting in outlet piping. C. Heating System: Electric -resistance type. 1. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat, 2. Safety Control: Automatic, high -temperature -limit cutoff device or system. D. Mounting: Bracket or device for wall mounting. 2.4 EXPANSION TANKS A. Description: Steel, pressure -rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory -installed, bu- tyl -rubber diaphragm and poly -propylene liner. Include air precharge to minimum system - operating pressure at tank, B. Construction: 150-psig working -pressure rating. C. Tappings: Factory -fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread, brass or stainless steel. D. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61, barrier materials for potable -water tank Iinings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets. E. Tank Exterior Finish: Manufacturer's standard, unless finish is indicated. F. Air -Charging Valve: Factory installed, brass with plastic cap. G. Floor Mounting Stand: Provide integral floor mounting stand and bottom elbow system con- nection where vertical, floor -mounted tanks are indicated. 2.5 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: According to the following: 1. Electric Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and include pressure setting less DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 15485 4 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION than water heater working -pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into tank. 2. Option: Separate temperature and pressure relief valves are acceptable instead of combi- nation relief valve. 3. Exception: Omit combination temperature and pressure relief valve for tanldess water heater, and furnish pressure relief valve for installation in piping. B. Pressure Relief Valves: According to the following: 1. Electric Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include pressure setting less than heat -exchanger working pressure rating. C. Vacuum Relief Valves: According to the following: 1. Electric Water Heaters: Comply with ASME PTC 25.3. Furnish for installation in pip- ing. 2. Exception: Omit if water heater has integral vacuum -relieving device. D. Automatic Valves: ANSI Z21.21, appliance, electrically operated, on-off automatic valve. E. Water Heater Stand and Drain Pan Units: High -density -polyethylene -plastic, 18 -inch- high, en- closed -base stand complying with IAPMO PS 103 and IAS No. 2. Include integral or separate drain pan with raised edge and NPS 1 drain outlet with ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread. F. Water Heater Stands: Water heater manufacturer's factory -fabricated, steel stand for floor mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water. Include dimension that will sup- port bottom of water heater a minimum of 18 inches above the floor. G. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory -fabricated, steel bracket for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water. H. Drain Pans: Corrosion -resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4. I. Hose and Drain Valve: Provide with water heater. J. Install R-10 insulation on concrete pad for electric water heaters. K. Install restraints as required for seismic zone. L. Piping -Type Heat Traps: Field -fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. Install water heaters on concrete bases, unless indicated to be suspended. DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 15485 5 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and refer- enced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible. C. Install seismic restraints for water heaters. Anchor to substrate. D. Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend relief valve outlet with water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest floor drain. E. Install pressure relief valves in water piping for water heaters without storage. Extend relief valve outlet with water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest floor drain. F. Install vacuum relief valves in cold -water -inlet piping. G. Install vacuum relief valves in water heater storage tanks that have copper lining. H. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose -end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains. 1. Install thermometers on water heater and heat exchanger inlet and outlet piping. 1. Exception: Omit thermometers for the following: a. Residential, water heater inlet and outlet piping. b. Commercial, point -of -use, water heater inlet piping. J. Install pressure gages on water heater and heat exchanger piping. K. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters. Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water heater. Include shut- off valve, and thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each wa- ter heater outlet. L. Arrange for insulation on equipment and piping not furnished with factory -applied insulation. M. Fill water heaters and heat exchangers with water prior to activation. N. Charge expansion tanks with air. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 15485 6 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Connect hot- and cold -water piping with shutoff valves and unions. Connect hot -water - circulating piping with shutoff valve, check valve, and union. D. Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metal. E. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16 Sec- tions. Arrange wiring to allow unit service. Ground equipment. F. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. In addition to manufacturer's written installation and startup checks, perform the follow- ing: a. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. b. Verify that piping system tests are complete. c. Check for piping connection leaks. d. Check for clear relief valve inlets, outlets, and drain piping. e. Check operation of circulators. f. Test operation of safety controls, relief valves, and devices. g. Energize electric circuits. h. Adjust operating controls. i. Adjust hot -water -outlet temperature settings. Do not set above 140 deg F unless piping system application requires higher temperature. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain water heaters and heat exchangers. 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures for starting and stopping trouble- shooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment. 2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Sections. 3. Schedule 4 hours of training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' ad- vance notice. END OF SECTION 15485 7 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 15485 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 15530 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for roof curbs, piping supports, and roof penetra- tion boots. 2. Division .7 Section "Through -Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetra- tions through exterior walls. 4. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe supports and installation require- ments. 5. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identifying refrigerant piping. 6. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers and pressure gages. 7. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for thermostats, controllers, automatic -control valves, and sensors. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include pres- sure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for thermostatic expansion valves, solenoid valves, and pressure -regulating valves. B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance re- quirements. C. Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. REFRIGERANT PIPING 15530 1 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX; "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." B. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." C. ASME Standard: Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping." D, UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant -Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated Valves." 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of refrigerant piping and suspension system components with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression -system compo- nents, and partition assemblies. B, Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." C. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies. Co- ordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through - Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Refrigerants: a. Allied Signal, Inc./Fluorine Products; Genetron Refrigerants. b. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div. c. Elf Atochem North America, Inc.; Fluorocarbon Div. d. ICI Americas Inc./ICI KLEA; Fluorochemicals Bus. 2. Refrigerant Valves and Specialties: a. Climate & Industrial Controls Group; Parker -Hannifin Corp.; Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Division. REFRIGERANT PIPING 15530 2 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION b. Danfoss Electronics, Inc. c. Emerson Electric Company; Alco Controls Div. d. Henry Valve Company. e. Sporlan Valve Company. 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Drawn -Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR. B. Annealed -Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR. C. Wrought -Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. D. Wrought -Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (silver) or BAg-2 (silver). F. Flexible Connectors: 500-psig minimum operating pressure; seamless tin -bronze core, high - tensile bronze -braid covering, and solder joint end connections; dehydrated, pressure tested, minimum 7 inches long 2.3 VALVES A. Check Valves Smaller Than NPS 1: 400-psig operating pressure and 285 deg F operating tem- perature; cast -brass body, with removable piston, polytetrafluoroethylene seat, and stainless- steel spring; globe design. Valve shall be straight -through pattern, with solder -end connections. B. Service Valves: 500-psig pressure rating; forged -brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, re- movable valve core, integral ball check valve, and with solder -end connections. C. Pressure Relief Valves: Straight -through or angle pattern, brass body and disc, neoprene seat, and factory sealed and ASME labeled for standard pressure setting. 2.4 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALITIES A. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 500-psig maximum working pressure and 200 deg F operating temperature; all -brass body with replaceable, polished, optical viewing window with color - coded moisture indicator; with solder -end connections. B. Permanent Filter -Dryer: 350-psig maximum operating pressure and 225 deg F maximum oper- ating temperature; steel shell and wrought -copper fittings for solder -end connections; molded - felt core surrounded by desiccant. REFRIGERANT PIPING 15530 3 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.5 REFRIGERANTS A. ASHRAE 34, R-123: Dichlorotrifluoroethane. B. ASHRAE 34, R -134a: Tetrafluoroethane. C. ASHRAE 34, R-22: Monochlorodifluoromethane. D. ASHRAE 34, R-500: Azeotrope. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Aboveground, within Building: Type ACR drawn -copper tubing. 3.2 SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS A. Install moisture -liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter -dryers and thermostatic expan- sion valves and in liquid line to receiver. B. Install pressure relief valves on ASME receivers; pipe discharge to outdoors. C. Install permanent filter -dryers in low-temperature systems, in systems using hermetic compres- sors, and before each solenoid valve. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15. 13. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." C. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fit- tings. D. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of compressor and other equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. E. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation. F. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be ex- posed to mechanical injury. REFRIGERANT PIPING 15530 4 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION G. Slope refrigerant piping as follows: 1. Install horizontal hot -gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor. 2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. 3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level. H. When brazing, remove solenoid -valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near ex- pansion valve bulb. I. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Sup- ports." J. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long. 2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe rollers for multiple horizontal runs 20 feet or longer, supported by a trapeze. K. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 8. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 9. NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. L. Support vertical runs at each floor. 3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Braze joints according to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." B. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent scale formation. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI. REFRIGERANT PIPING 15530 5 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 1. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser, evapo- rator, and safety devices from test pressure. 2. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system at not less than the lower of the design pressure or the setting of pressure relief device protecting high and low side of system. a. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of test. b. Test joints and fittings by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerin solution over joint. c. Fill system with nitrogen to raise a test pressure of 150 psig or higher as required by authorities having jurisdiction. d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure. B. Adjust set -point temperature of the conditioned air controllers to the system design temperature. 3.7 CLEANING A. Before installing copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with trichloro- ethylene. B. Replace core of filter -dryer after system has been adjusted and design flow rates and pressures are established. 3.8 SYSTEM CHARGING A. Charge system using the following procedures: 1. Install core in filter -dryer after leak test but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to a vacuum of 500 micrometers. If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging. 3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig. 4. Charge system with a new filter -dryer core in charging line. Provide full -operating charge. END OF SECTION 15530 6 REFRIGERANT PIPING 15530 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 15738 - SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes split -system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separate evaporator -fan and compressor -condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or con- cealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pres- sures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Field quality -control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split -system air-conditioning units to include in emer- gency, operation, and maintenance manuals. E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split - system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Prod- uct Requirements." B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for in- tended use. C. Energy -Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Effi- cient Design of New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings." SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15738 1 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION D. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Ef- ficient Design of New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings." 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Con- crete. 11 B. Coordinate size, location, and'connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or re- place components of split -system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 13. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corporation. 2. First Co. 3. Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.; HVAC Division. 4. Sanyo Fisher (U.S.A.) Corp.. 5. Trane Company (The); Unitary Products Group. SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15738 2 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.2 WALL -MOUNTING, EVAPORATOR -FAN COMPONENTS A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends, and discharge drain pans with drain connection. Extend condensate drain line to approved receptor. B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with thermal -expansion valve. C. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel -chrome, resistance -wire heating elements with refractory ceramic support bushings; automatic -reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manual -reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent pro- tection. D. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal fan. E. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors." 1. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. F. Filters: Permanent, cleanable. 2.3 CEILING -MOUNTING, EVAPORATOR -FAN COMPONENTS A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends, and discharge drain pans with drain connection. Extend condensate drain line to approved receptor. B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with thermal -expansion valve. C. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel -chrome, resistance -wire heating elements with refractory ceramic support bushings; automatic -reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manual -reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent pro- tection. D. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal fan. E. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors." 1. Special Motor Features: Multi -tapped, multi -speed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. F. Filters: Permanent, cleanable. 3 SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15738 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.4 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR -CONDENSER COMPONENTS A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable pan- els for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing. B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current -sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor. 1. Compressor Type: Reciprocating or Scroll. 2. Two -speed compressor motor with manual -reset high-pressure switch and automatic - reset low-pressure switch. C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler. D. Fan: Aluminum -propeller type, directly connected to motor. E. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal -overload protection. F. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 0 deg F. G. Mounting Base: Polyethylene. 2.5 ACCESSORIES �.• A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 15 Sections "DDC Con- trols" and "Sequence of Operation." B. Thermostat: Low voltage with sub -base to control compressor and evaporator fan. C. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator fan, with the following features: 1. Compressor time delay. 2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start. 3. Liquid -crystal display indicating temperature, set -point temperature, time setting, operat- ing mode, and fan speed. 4. Fan -speed selection, including auto setting. D. Automatic -reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor. E. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft -annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory -insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends. F. Additional Monitoring: SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15738 4 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 1. Monitor constant and variable motor loads. 2. Monitor variable frequency drive operation. 3. Monitor economizer cycle. 4. Monitor cooling load. 5. Monitor air distribution static pressure and ventilation air volumes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb. B. Install evaporator -fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fas- tened to building structure. C. Install roof -mounting compressor -condenser components on equipment supports specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium - plated fasteners. D. Install seismic restraints. E. Install and connect refrigerant tubing to component's connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." B. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to in- spect, test, and adjust field -assembled components and equipment installation, including con- nections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15738 5 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.4 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division 1. END OF SECTION 15738 6 SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15738 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 15764 - CONVECTION HEATING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Electric convectors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and ac- cessories for each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connec- tion. 1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Details of fabricated enclosures indicating dimensions. 3. Location and size of each field connection. 4. Enclosure joints, corner pieces, access doors, and other accessories. 5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items in- volved: 1. Structural members, including wall construction, to which convection units will be at- tached. 2. Method of attaching convection units to building structure. D. Field quality -control test reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For convection heating units to include in emergency, opera- tion, and maintenance manuals. COMVECTION HEATING UNITS 15764 1 WESTFIELD SHOPP1NGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for in- tended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRIC CONVECTORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Markel Products; a division of TPI Corporation. 2. Qmark Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products. B. Description: Factory -packaged units constructed according to UL 499, UL 1030, and UL 2021. C. Heating Elements: Nickel -chromium -wire heating element enclosed in metallic sheath me- chanically bonded into aluminum fins, with high-temperature cutout and sensor running the full length of element. Element supports shall eliminate thermal expansion noise. 1. Volts/Phase: 277/1. 2. Hertz: 60 Hz. 3. Heat Output: Wattage as scheduled on drawings. D. Front and Top Panel: Minimum 16 gauge steel or 12 gauge aluminum with exposed comers rounded; removable front panels with tamper-resistant fasteners braced and reinforced for stiff- ness. E. Wall -Mounting Back and End Panels: Minimum 0.0428 -inch- thick steel. F. Floor -Mounting Pedestals: Conceal conduit for power and control wiring at maximum 36 -inch spacing. Pedestal -mounting back panel shall be solid panel matching front panel. G. Support Brackets: Locate at maximum 36 -inch spacing to support front panel and element. H. Finish: Baked -enamel finish in manufacturer's standard color as selected by Architect. I. Access Doors: Factory made, permanently hinged with tamper-resistant fastener, minimum size 6 by 7 inches, integral with enclosure. J. Unit Controls: Integral low -voltage relay and control transformer for remote thermostat or in- put from building DDC control system. K. Accessories: Integral disconnect switch, recessing flanges finished to match enclosure or over- lapping front cover for fully recessed units, and robber gaskets to seal cabinet at wall. COMVECTION HEATING UNITS 15764 2 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive convection heating units for compliance with requirements for instal- lation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing -in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before convection heating unit installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 CONVECTOR INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb. B. Install air -seal gasketing between wall and recessing flanges or front cover of fully recessed unit. C. Install power conduit within pedestals for freestanding units. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Ground electric convection heating units according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper convection heating unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Remove and replace convection heating units that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 15764 3 COMVECTION HEATING UNITS 15764 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 15785 - AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Packaged energy recovery units. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs for mounting rooftop equipment. 2. Division 15 Section "DDC System" for control wiring and control devices connected to energy recovery units. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attach- ments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights. 4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Field quality -control test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain air-to-air energy recovery units through one source from a single manufacturer. AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS 15785 1 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air-to-air energy recovery units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Sec- tion "Product Requirements." C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for in- tended use. D. ASHRAE Compliance: Capacity ratings for energy recovery devices shall comply with ASHRAE 84, "Method of Testing Air -to -Air Heat Exchangers." E. NRCA Compliance: Roof curbs for roof -mounted equipment shall be constructed according to recommendations of NRCA. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Filters: Furnish one set of each type of filter specified. 2. Fan Belts: Furnish one set of belts for each belt -driven fan in energy recovery units. 3. Wheel Belts: Furnish one set of belts for each heat wheel. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following require- ments apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offer- ing products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manu- facturers specified. AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS 15785 2 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.2 PACKAGED ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Loren Cook. 2. Des Champs Laboratories Inc.; a unit of Entrodyne Corporation. 3. Gaylord Industries, Inc. 4. Greenheck. 5. SEMCO Incorporated. B. Housing: Manufacturer's standard construction with corrosion -protection coating and exterior finish, gasketed and calked weathertight, hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspec- tion and access to internal parts, minimum 1 -inch thick thermal insulation, knockouts for elec- trical and piping connections, exterior drain connection, and lifting lugs. 1. Inlet: Weatherproof louver, with gravity backdraft damper for exhaust and spring -return, two -position, motor -operated damper with blade seals for supply. 2. Roof Curb: Refer to Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for roof curbs and equipment supports. C. Heat Recovery Device: Heat wheel. D. Supply and Exhaust Fans: Forward -curved centrifugal fan with spring isolators and flexible duct connections. 1. Motor and Drive: Direct driven or Belt driven with adjustable sheaves, motor mounted on adjustable base. 2. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors." E. Filters: 2 -inch -thick disposable type, in galvanized steel frame, mounted upstream of unit in both supply and exhaust airstreams. F. Piping and Wiring: Fabricate units with space within housing for piping and electrical conduits. Wire motors and controls so only external connections are required during installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install heat wheels so supply and exhaust airstreams flow in opposite directions and rotation is from exhaust side to purge section to supply side. 1. Install access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and downstream, for access to wheel surfaces, drive motor, and seals. 2. Install removable panels or access doors between supply and exhaust ducts on building side for bypass during startup. 3. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS 15785 3 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Install heat -pipe heat exchangers so supply and exhaust airstreams flow in opposite directions. Install flexible connectors on ducts to enable tilt control; make connections airtight and with slack to compensate for full tilt. 1. Install heat exchanger with clearance space for heat -pipe coil removal. 2. Install duct access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and down- stream, for access to both sides of heat -pipe coil. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." 3. Install tilt -control components, including electronic controller, electric actuator and link- age, thermostats, and sensors. C. Install fixed -plate heat exchangers so supply and exhaust airstreams flow in opposite directions. 1. Install duct access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and down- stream, for access to heat exchanger. Access doors and panels are specified in Divi- sion 15 Section "Duct Accessories." D. Install roof -mounted units on fabricated roof curb. E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. F. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, and bal- ancing. G. Pipe drains from units and drain pans to nearest floor drain; use ASTM B 88, Type L, drawn - temper copper water tubing with soldered joints, same size as condensate drain connection. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. C. Duct and fan installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and specialties. D. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS 15785 4 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connec- tions. Report results in writing. 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Adjust seals and purge. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 4. Set initial temperature setpoints. 5. Set field -adjustable switches and circuit -breaker trip ranges as indicated. B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division 1. END OF SECTION 15785 5 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS 15785 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 for fire-resistant sealants for use around duct penetrations and fire -damper in- stallations in fire -rated floors, partitions, and walls. 2. Division 8 for wall- and ceiling -mounted access doors for access to concealed ducts. 3. Division 10 for intake and relief louvers and vents connected to ducts and installed in ex- terior walls. 4. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for duct insulation. 5. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for vibra- tion isolation of metal ducts and seismic restraint criteria of equipment. 6. Division 15 Section "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field -fabricated casings for me- chanical equipment. 7. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for volume dampers, fire dampers, combination fire/smoke dampers, duct silencers, duct -mounted access doors and panels, turning vanes, screened openings, flexible connectors, and flexible ducts. 8. Division 15 Section "Air Terminals" for air terminals and additional installation require- ments. 9. Division 15 Section "Diffusers and Grilles." 10. Division 15 Section "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System" for automatic control damp- ers and operators. • 11. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air balancing and final ad- justing of manual -volume dampers. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fabrication and installation of rectangular, round, and flat -oval metal ducts and plenums for heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10 -inch wg. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air -moving and -distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or configuration of duct sys- tem must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout METAL DUCTS 15815 1 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design re- sults without increasing system total pressure. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: See Section 15050 for general requirements of Product Data, Shop Drawings, Reports and Certificates, and Operation and Maintenance data submittals. B. Product Data: Provide submittals of the following: 1. Duct Liner 2. Joint Sealants C. Reports and Certificates: Provide submittals of the following: 1. Duct Leakage Test Report. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate ducts and fittings according to SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -- Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. B. Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform welding processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code --Steel," for hang- ers and supports; AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code --Aluminum," for aluminum supporting members; and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. C. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" unless otherwise indicated. D. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Op- erations," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Keep metal ducts and duct liner dry and dust free during fabrication and storage at factory. B. Before shipment shrink-wrap all openings of ducts fabricated with duct liner. During shipment protect alI metal ducts from weather. C. Store all metal ducts in dry location on-site on elevated dunnage. Protect metal ducts from moisture, dirt and dust. D. Retain shrink-wrap protection of openings (where required to be protected) until immediately prior to connection of that opening to erected duct system. METAL DUCTS 15815 2 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION E. On the event that any duct liner does get wet, dry duct liner within 48 -hours using forced air heater. Ducts detected with moist fiberglass liner will be required to be replaced at no addi- tional cost to the Owner. F. Remove dust from the inside of metal duct sections as they are erected. Cover all openings with 6 -mil poly and duct tape at the end of each workday to prevent dust migration into ducts. G. Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill -applied adhesive protective paper maintained through fabrication and installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock -forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designa- tion; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view. B. Carbon -Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold -rolled sheets; commercial quality; with oiled, exposed matte finish. C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, sheet form with polished finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view; Type 304, sheet form with No. 1 finish for concealed ducts. D. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form with standard, one -side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and with mill finish for concealed ducts. E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galva- nized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter for 36 -inch length or less; 3/8 -inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.2 DUCT LINER A. General: Comply with NFPA 90A and NAIMA "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." Can op- erated in temperatures up to 250 -Degrees F and air velocities up to 5,000 fpm. B. Materials: ASTM C 1071 with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of glass fibers. Coating contains EPA registered anti -microbial agent so it will not support the growth of fungus or bacteria, and is water repellent. 1. Thickness: 1 -inch, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Density: Minimum 2 Ib per cubic foot. 3. Maximum Thermal Conductivity (k -Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature. 4. Fire -Hazard Classification: Maximum flame -spread rating of 25 and smoke -developed rating of 50, when tested according to ASTM E 84 and UL 723. METAL DUCTS 15815 3 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 5. Minimum Noise Reduction Criteria (NRC): 0.55 for 1/2 -inch, 0.70 for 1 -inch, 0.90 for 1- 1/2 -inch and 1.0 for 2 -inch tested per ASTM C 423 using Type A mounting. 6. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical at- tachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recom- mended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct. a. Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50 -lb -tensile, dead -load test perpendicular to duct wall. b. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without project- ing more than 1/8 inch into airstream. c. Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire -hazard classifica- tion of duct liner system. 7. Johns Manville Spiraeoustic Plus Round Duct Lining System. 1 -inch thick; preformed liner for ducts 8 -inch through 18 -inch diameter, round duct liner board for ducts greater than 18 -inch diameter. 2.3 SEALANT AND ADHESIVE MATERIALS A. Joint and Seam Sealants: 1. Joint and Seam Sealant: Water-based vinyl or acrylic copolymer mastic formulated to withstand temperatures from minus 20 to plus 180 Degrees F, minimum of 65 percent solids. 2. Flanged Joint Gasket Material: Elastomer butyl. B. Duct Liner Adhesive: Water-based vinyl copolymer adhesive formulated to withstand tempera- tures from minus 20 to plus 160 Degrees F. Comply with NFPA 90A and ASTM C 916 2.4 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTS A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, mechanical -anchor fasteners, or structural -steel fasten- ers appropriate for building materials. Powder actuated concrete fasteners are not allowed. 1. If concrete inserts cannot be used, install mechanical -anchor fasteners m concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. Concrete inserts and mechanical -anchor fasteners shall be made of steel. 2. Expanding concrete anchors shall be made of steel. B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod. 1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all -thread rod or galva- nized rods with threads painted after installation. 2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -- Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod diameters. METAL DUCTS 15815 R"''" 4 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self -tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Supports for Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless -Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials, unless materials are elec- trolytically separated from ductwork. E. Duct Seismic Restraint: Comply with SMACNA "Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems". 2.5 DUCT PRESSURE CLASSIFICATIONS A. Rectangular Duct Static -Pressure Classifications: Construct ducts to the following: 1. Supply Ducts, unless indicated otherwise: 3 -inch wg. 2. Supply Ducts: 3 -inch wg for ducts between the supply fan and first combination fire/smoke damper in each branch downstream of the supply fan. 3. Supply Ducts: 3 -inch wg for ducts between the supply fan or air handling unit and air terminals. 4. Return Ducts: 2 -inch wg, negative pressure. 5. Exhaust Ducts: 2 -inch wg, negative pressure. 6. Outside Air Intake Ducts: 2 -inch wg, negative pressure. B. Round Duct Static Pressure Classifications: Construct ducts to the following: 1. Supply Ducts, unless indicated otherwise: 2 -inch wg. 2. Supply Ducts: 4 -inch wg for ducts between the supply fan or air handling unit and air terminals. 3. Return Ducts: 2 -inch wg, negative pressure. 4. Exhaust Ducts: 2 -inch wg, negative pressure. 5. Outside Air Intake Ducts: 2 -inch wg, negative pressure. C. Flat Oval Static Pressure Classifications: Construct ducts to the following: 1. Supply Ducts, unless indicated otherwise: 2 -inch wg. 2. Supply Ducts: 4 -inch wg for ducts between the supply fan or air handling unit and air terminals. 3. Return Ducts: 2 -inch wg, negative pressure. 4. Exhaust Ducts: 2 -inch wg, negative pressure. 5. Outside Air Intake Ducts: 2 -inch wg, negative pressure. METAL DUCTS Ikew" 15815 5 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construc- tion with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards- -Metal and Flexible," unless indicated otherwise. Comply with requirements for metal thick- ness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie -rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure classification. 2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, and discolorations. 3. Branch Connections: a. Round Branch: Use conical or bell mouth connections. b. Rectangular Branch: Use 45° entry. 4. Material Thickness: For SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standard — Metal and Flexible," but not less than 26 gauge. B. Fabricate dishwasher hood exhaust ducts with minimum 18 -gauge thick stainless steel. Weld and flange seams and joints. C. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of unbraced panel area, unless ducts are lined. 2.7 SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of adhesive at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated thickness is not allowed. B. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing. C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive. D. Fold and compress Iiner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted -edge overlapping. E. Do not apply liners in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at comers of ducts, unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary. F. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from comers and at intervals not exceeding 12 - inches transversely around perimeter; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not ex- ceeding 18 inches Iongitudinally. METAL DUCTS 15815 6 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION G. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the fol- lowing locations: 1. Fan discharge. 2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. H. Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane assem- blies, and other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. Termi- nate liner at fire dampers at connection to fire -damper sleeve. I. Protect lined ductwork from dampness. Any lined ductwork that becomes wet shall be dis- carded and replaced. 2.8 ROUND AND FLAT -OVAL DUCT FABRICATION A. General: Diameter as applied to flat -oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of the size of round duct that has a circumference equal to perimeter of a given size of flat -oval duct. Mini- mum 26 -gauge duct wall thickness. B. Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible," unless indicated otherwise. C. Flat -Oval Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts with standard spiral lock seams or with butt -welded longitudinal seams according to SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible," unless indicated otherwise. 2.9 ROUND AND FLAT -OVAL SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FITTING FABRICATION A. 90 -Degree Tee Fittings and Taps: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construc- tion Standards --Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal seam straight duct. Use 90 -degree conical tee fitting where diameter of branch duct is greater than two-thirds the diameter of the main duct or if branch duct diameter is greater than 12 -inches. 90 -degree conical taps or 90 -degree conical tee fittings can be used for all others. Saddle taps not allowed. 1. Use 45 -degree lateral and 45 -degree elbow in lieu of 90 -degree tee fitting or tap on sup- ply ductwork where space allows. B. 45 -Degree Lateral Fittings and Taps: Use 45 -degree lateral fitting where diameter of branch duct is greater than two-thirds the diameter of the main or if branch duct diameter is greater than 12 -inches. 45 -degree lateral taps or 45 -degree lateral fittings can be used for all others. Saddle taps not allowed. C. Diverging -Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess mate- rial projecting from body onto branch tap entrance. METAL DUCTS 15815 7 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION D. Elbow Application: 1. Round Elbows, 8 Inches and Smaller: Fabricate die -formed elbows for 45- and 90 - degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30-, and 60 -degree elbows. Die formed elbows shall be 20 gauge thick minimum with two-piece welded construction. Fabricate non- standard bend -angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with mitered con- struction. 2. Round Elbows, 9 through 12 Inches: Fabricate mitered or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees. Fabricate nonstandard bend -angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with mitered construction. 3. Round Elbows, Larger than 12 -Inches: Mitered elbows for all bend angle configurations. 4. Round Elbows, Mitered Two -Piece 90 -Degree: Use only where specifically indicated. Fabricate with single turning vane. 5. Flat Oval Elbows: Mitered type. E. Round Elbow Construction: Fabricate in die -stamped, pleated, or mitered construction as indi- cated above. Fabricate bend radius of elbows to one and one-half times elbow diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated otherwise, fabricate elbows as follows: 1. Mitered Elbow Pieces: Welded construction with 5 -pieces for 90 -degree elbow, 4 -pieces for 60 -degree elbow and 3 -pieces for 45 -degree elbow. 2. Metal Thickness, Pressure Classes from Minus 2- to Plus 2 -inch wg: a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 24 -gauge. b. Ducts 27 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 22 -gauge. c. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 20 -gauge. d. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 18 -gauge. e. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 16 -gauge. 3. Metal Thickness, Pressure Classes from Minus 2- to 10 -inch wg: a. Ducts 3 to 14 Inches in Diameter: 24 -gauge. b. Ducts 15 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 22 -gauge. c. Ducts 27 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 20 -gauge. d. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 18 -gauge. e. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 16 -gauge. F. Flat -Oval Elbow Construction: Welded construction with same metal thickness as longitudinal seam flat -oval duct. Use 5 -piece construction for hard bend 90 -degree elbows, 4 -piece con- struction for hard bend 45 -degree elbow and 3 -piece construction for easy bend 90 -degree el- bow. 2.10 SECIAL DUCTWORK A. Fabricate range hood exhaust ducts with minimum 16 -gauge thick, carbon -steel sheet for con- cealed ducts and 18 -gauge thick stainless steel for exposed ducts. Weld and flange seams and joints. Comply with NFPA 96. METAL DUCTS 15815 8 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Fabricate dishwasher hood exhaust ducts with minimum 18 -gauge thick stainless steel. Weld and flange seams and joints. C. Fabricate dryer exhaust ducts of aluminum sheet according to SMACNA "HVAC Duct Con- struction Standards — Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. At contractor's option, round or flat - oval ductwork may be substituted for rectangular where indicated and vice versa. Ductwork shall be sized for equal friction loss and shall fit the available space. B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated. C. Install round and flat -oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet, unless interrupted by fittings. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections. F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. G. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. I. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, unless specifically indicated. K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke -control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work. Allow for post -construction access to air terminals, volume dampers, and other components requiring maintenance and/or readjustment. L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures, unless ductwork is intended to serve these spaces. M. Non -Fire -Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exte- rior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. METAL DUCTS Niwni 15815 9 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION N. Fire -Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated combination fire/smoke damper or fire damper sleeve, and firestopping sealant. Fire, smoke and combination fire/smoke dampers are specified in Divi- sion 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are speci- fied in Division 7 Section "Firestopping." 3.2 DISHWASHER EXHAUST DUCT INSTALLATIONS A. Install dishwasher exhaust ducts according to SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards- -Metal and Flexible." 3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING A. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct seal class described in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible" corresponding to the pressure class given below. B. Pressure Classification: 1. 3 -inch wg and Greater: Seal Class A; all transverse joints, longitudinal seams and duct wall penetrations. 2. Below 3 -inch wg: Seal Class B; all transverse joints and longitudinal seams. C. Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation. 3.4 HANGING, RESTRAINING, AND SUPPORTING A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat -oval metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible." B. Install duct seismic restraints as indicated in SMACNA "Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems." C. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch in- tersection. D. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor. E. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of fail- ure (proof -test) load. F. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete. G. Install mechanical -anchor fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fas- teners according to manufacturer's written instructions. METAL DUCTS 15815 10 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Unless indicated otherwise, connect metal ducts to rotating equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible," unless indicated otherwise. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Conduct leakage tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing. Test ducts in shafts prior to shaft enclosure. B. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to surface area of test section. C. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Classification 3 for round and flat -oval ducts, Leakage Classification 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classifica- tions less than and equal to 2 -inch wg(both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Clas- sification 6 for pressure classifications from 2- to 10 -inch wg. D. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable. E. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit test report. 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed procedures. 3.8 CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the system. Vacuum ducts, and where possible, wipe ducts with moist cloth before final acceptance to re- move dust and debris. END OF SECTION 15815 11 METAL DUCTS 15815 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Access Doors" for wall- and ceiling -mounted access doors and pan- els. 2. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for intake and relief louvers and vents con- nected to ducts and installed in exterior walls. 3. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for ductwork, duct liner and duct sealants. 4. Division 15 Section "Air Terminals" for air terminals. 5. Division 15 Section "Diffusers and Grilles." 6. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for final positioning of manual - volume dampers. 7. Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm Systems" for duct -mounted fire and smoke detectors. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Manual -volume dampers. 3. Fire dampers. 4. Roof ventilation hoods. 5. Turning vanes. 6. Duct -mounted access doors. 7. Flexible ducts. 8. Flexible connectors. 9. Screened openings. 10. Duct accessory hardware. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Manual -volume dampers. 3. Fire dampers. 1 DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 4. Duct -mounted access doors and panels. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Flexible ducts. 7. Roof ventilation hoods. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, re- quired clearances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each field con- nection. Detail the following: 1. Special fittings and manual -volume -damper installations. 2. Fire damper installations, including sleeves and duct -mounted access doors and panels. C. Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self -noise power lev- els; and airflow performance data, static -pressure loss, dimensions, and weights. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA standards: 1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with pro- tective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 5 percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Backdraft Dampers: a. Ruskin. b. American Warming & Ventilating. c. Greenheck. 2. Fire Dampers: a. Ruskin, 2 DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION b. Air Balancing, Inc. c. Greenheck. d. National Controlled Air. 3. Roof Ventilation Hoods: a. Penn Ventilator. b. Cook. c. Greenheck. d. Ruskin. 2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock -forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designa- tion; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view. B. Carbon -Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold -rolled sheets, commercial quality, with oiled, exposed matte finish. C. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form; with standard, one -side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and mill finish for concealed ducts. D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6. E. Reinforcement Shapes and PIates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galva- nized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 114 -inch minimum diameter for 36 -inch length or less; 3/8 -inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Description: Suitable for horizontal or vertical installations as indicated. B. Counterbalance Type: Extruded aluminum with counterbalanced blades; blades begin to open at minimum 0.01 inches w.g. and be fully open at minimum 0.05 inches w.g. Designed for maximum 3500 feet per minute spot velocity and up to 4 -inches w.g. back pressure. 1. Frame: Minimum 0.125 inches thick extruded aluminum, braced at corners. 2. Blades: Minimum 0.070 inches thick extruded aluminum. Blade seals extruded vinyl, mechanically attached. 3. Bearings: Corrosion resistant, long life synthetic. 4. Linkage: 1/2 -inch diameter tie bar with stainless steel pivot pins; mounted on blades. Adjustable counterbalance. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 3 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Top -of -Blade Hinged Type: Extruded aluminum heavy duty backdraft dampers; blades begin to open at minimum 0.12 inches w.g. and be fully open at minimum of 0.20 inches w.g. Designed for maximum 3500 feet per minute spot velocity. 1. Frame: Minimum 0.125 inches thick extruded aluminum, braced at corners. 2. Blades: Minimum 0.70 inches thick extruded aluminum. Blade seals extruded vinyl, mechanical attached. 3. Bearings: Corrosion resistant, long life, synthetic. 4. Linkage: 112 -inch diameter tie bar with stainless steel pivot pins; mounted on blades. 2.4 MANUAL -VOLUME DAMPERS A. General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single -blade dampers in a fixed position without vibra- tion. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. 1. Pressure Classifications of 3 -Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. B. Steel Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single -blade, opposed -blade design unless indi- cated otherwise, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for hori- zontal or vertical applications. 1. Steel Frames: Hat -shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of 16 gauge thick, with mitered and welded comers; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 2. Roll -Formed Steel Blades: 16 gauge thick, galvanized, sheet steel. 3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 4. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. C. Aluminum Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single -blade, opposed blade design unless indicated otherwise, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 1. Aluminum Frames: Hat -shaped, 0.10 -inch thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 2. Aluminum Blades: Extruded 0.050 -inch thick extruded aluminum. 3. Blade Axles: Nonferrous. 4. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. D. Steel Low -Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single blade, opposed -blade design unless indicated otherwise, low -leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for hori- zontal or vertical applications. 1. Steel Frames: Hat -shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of 16 gauge thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 4 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 2. Roll -Formed Steel Blades: 16 gauge thick, galvanized, sheet steel. 3. Blade Seals: Vinyl. 4. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. E. Aluminum Low -Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single -blade, opposed -blade design unless indicated otherwise, low -leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 1. Aluminum Frames: Hat -shaped, 0.063 -inch thick, extruded -aluminum channels; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indi- cated for installing ducts. 2. Aluminum Blades: Extruded 0.050 -inch thick extruded aluminum. 3. Blade Seals: Vinyl. 4. Blade Axles: Nonferrous. 5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. F. Steel High -Performance Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single -blade, opposed -blade design unless indicated otherwise, low -leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 1. Steel Frames: Hat -shaped, galvanized steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 2. Steel Blades: 18 gauge thick, galvanized, sheet steel; airfoil shaped. 3. Blade Seals: Dual-durometer vinyl on blade edges; metallic compression on jambs. 4. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. G. High -Performance Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single -blade, opposed -blade design unless indicated otherwise, low -leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for hori- zontal or vertical applications. 1. Aluminum Frames: Hat -shaped, 0.125 -inch thick, extruded -aluminum channels; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indi- cated for installing in ducts. 2. Extruded -Aluminum Blades: Minimum of 0.081 -inch thick, 6063T extruded aluminum. 3. Blade Seals: Dual-durometer vinyl on blade edges; metallic compression on jambs. 4. Blade Axles: Nonferrous. 5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. H. Jackshaft: 1 -inch diameter, galvanized steel pipe rotating within a pipe -bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple -damper assemblies. 1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper of a multiple -damper assembly. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 5 WESTFIELD SHOPP1NGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION I. Damper Regulators: Zinc -plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32 -inch -thick zinc -plated steel, and a 3/4 -inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper oper- ating -rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. 2.5 FIRE DAMPERS A. General: Labeled to UL 555. "Standard for Fire Dampers" for use in dynamic systems. Damper shall close with air velocity of 2375 fpm and 4 -inch w.g. static pressure with airflow horizontal, airflow up or airflow down. B. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours. C. Frame: SMACNA Type B with blades out of airstream; fabricated with roll -formed, minimum 20 -gauge thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners. D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field -installed galvanized, sheet steel. 1. Minimum Thickness: 20 gauge or 0.138 inch thick as indicated, and length to suit appli- cation. Provide retaining angles. 2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of perime- ter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame com- plies with sleeve requirements. E. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated. F. Blades: Roll -formed, interlocking, minimum 24 -gauge thick, galvanized, sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, minimum 24 -gauge thick, galvanized steel blade connec- tors. G. Closure Spring: Include stainless-steel constant force closure spring. H. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated unless specifically indicated, 212 deg F or 285 deg F. 2.6 ROOF VENTILATION HOODS A. General Description: Low silhouette steel hood, or low silhouette aluminum spun housing, curb base, and accessories. Rated for 20 psf wind/snow load. B. Housing: Heavy -gauge, removable, steel or aluminum, rectangular or dome top and outlet baf- fle; affle; square, one-piece, hinged, steel or aluminum base. C. Accessories: 1. Bird Screens: Removable 1/2 -inch mesh, 16 -gauge, aluminum or brass wire. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 6 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 2. Backdraft Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel -blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base, factory set to close when fan stops. Provide where indicated. 3. Roof Curbs: Prefabricated, heavy -gauge, galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 2 -inch thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; built-in cant and mount- ing flange for flat roof decks; and 2 -inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof open- ing and fan base. 2.7 TURNING VANES A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexi- ble." B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1 -1/2 -inch -wide, curved blades set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches o.c.; and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ducts. C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate of airfoil -shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous -glass fill. 2.8 DUCT -MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. General: Fabricate doors and panels airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 14 -inch by 14 -inch, unless indicated otherwise. B. Frame: Unless indicated differently, minimum 24 -gauge thick galvanized, sheet steel, with bend -over tabs and foam gaskets. C. Door: Double-wall, galvanized, sheet metal construction with insulation fill and thickness, and number of hinges and locks as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where in- dicated. Include piano hinge and cam latches. Multiple cam latches used on doors greater than 12 -inches in height. D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber. E. Insulation: 1 -inch -thick, fibrous -glass. 2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. General: Flame -retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1. Fabricate designed to meet UL 214, NFPA 90A, airtight and waterproof. B. Standard Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 3 -inches wide at- tached to two strips of 3 -inch -wide, minimum 24 -gauge thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.032 - inch aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with connected ducts. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 7 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Extra -Wide Metal -Edged Connectors:. Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 5-3/4 inches wide attached to two strips of 3 -inch -wide, minimum 24 -gauge thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.032 -inch aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with connected ducts. D. Transverse Flanged Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 4 -3/8 -inch -wide, 24 -gauge thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.032 -inch aluminum sheets formed for flanged type connection. Select metal compatible with connected ducts. E. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Woven nylon/polyester blend with vinyl coating. 1. Minimum Weight: 22 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 240 lbf/inch in the warp, and 220 lbf/inch in the filling. F. Conventional, Outdoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with a synthetic -rubber, weatherproof coating resistant to the sun's ultraviolet rays and ozone environ- ment. 1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 500 lbf/inch in the warp, and 500 lbf/inch m the filling. 2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1, UMC Standard 6-1, and NFPA Standards 90A and 90B. �wr/ B. Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory -fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket en- closing 1 -inch -thick, glass -fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner. Rated for maximum pressures of 6 -inches w.g. positive and 1 -inch w.g. negative. 1. Reinforcement: Steel -wire helix encapsulated in inner liner. 2. Outer Jacket: Glass -reinforced, silver Mylar with a continuous hanging tab, integral fi- brous -glass tape, and nylon hanging cord. 3. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film. C. Flexible Ducts, Uninsulated: Spiral -wound steel spring with reinforced flameproof vinyl sheathing. Rated for maximum pressures of 10 -inches w.g. positive and 2 -inches w.g. negative and maximum velocity of 4000 fpm. 2.11 SCREENED OPENINGS A. Screened Openings: 16 -gauge steel angle frame enclosing 1/2 -inch mesh, 14 -gauge galvanized steel wire screen. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.12 ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments, and length to suit duct insulation thickness. B. Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc -plated damper blade bracket; 1/4 -inch, zinc -plated operating rod; and a duct -mounted, ball joint bracket with flat rubber gasket and square -head set screw. C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium -plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm -gear action, in sizes 3 to 18 inches to suit duct size. D. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. E. Concealed Damper Regulators: Gear operated linkage, minimum 3/8 -inch diameter, steel rod, chrome plated ceiling cover, flush mount. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts. B. Volume Dampers: 1. Install volume dampers at all diffuser and grille duct connections. Place as far upstream as layout and accessibility allow. 2. Install manual volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner. C. Concealed Damper Regulators: Install concealed damper regulators in locations where manual volume dampers are inaccessible above ceilings or behind walls. D. Damper Actuators: Actuators shall not be mounted in the air stream. E. Maximum length of flexible duct is five feet. F. Install fire dampers according to manufacturer's UL -approved written instructions. 1. Install fusible links in fire dampers. G. Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils and every 50 -feet of duct run for general inspection. Install duct access panels downstream from branch volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes, and equipment. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 9 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 1. Install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning, inspecting, ad- justing, and maintaining accessories and terminal units. 2. Install access panels on side of duct where adequate clearance is available. H. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings. B. Adjust fire dampers for proper action. C. Final positioning of manual -volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing, Ad- justing, and Balancing." END OF SECTION 15820 10 DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 15850 - FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 7 for roof curbs and equipment supports not provided with units. 2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for vibra- tion and seismic restraints. 3. Division 15 Section "Motors" for fan motor requirements. 4. Division 15 Section "Variable Frequency Drives" for variable frequency, variable speed drives. 5. Division 15 Section "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System" for control devices. 6. Division 16 sections for power supply wiring, field installed disconnects, electrical de- vices, and motor controllers. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Utility Set Fans. 2. Downblast Roof Exhaust Fans. 3. Upblast Roof Exhaust Fans. 4. Wall Exhaust Fans. 5. Ceiling and Wall Cabinet Fans. 6. Cabinet Fans. 7. Propeller Wall Fans. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include roof curbs for roof -mounted ex- haust fans. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations. B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99. C. Fan Schedule: The following information is described in an equipment schedule on the Draw- ings. FANS 15850 1 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 1. Fan performance data including capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics. 2. Fan arrangement including wheel configuration, inlet and discharge configurations, and required accessories. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Divi- sion 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping, installed, and operat- ing), furnished specialties, accessories, and the following: 1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. C. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating clearly be- tween manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. E. Maintenance data for fans to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Di- vision 1 and in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements." 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are listed and labeled by UL. B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed and labeled by UL. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are licensed to use the AMCA Seal. D. NEMA Compliance: Provide components required as part of fans that comply with applicable NEMA standards. E. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated: FANS 15850 2 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Rever- berant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA Seal. 2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rota- tion, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances. B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and fans have been commissioned. 1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members. B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof spe- cialties are specified in Division 7 Sections. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish one set of belts for each belt -driven fan that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver fans as factory -assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with moisture proof protective crating and covering. B. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. C. Fans shall not be exposed to moisture or dust during construction or storage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Utility Set Fans: 3 FANS 15850 a. b. c. d. ACME Engineering & Mfg. Corp. Cook (Loren) Co. Greenheck Fan Corp. Twin City 2. Downblast Roof Exhaust Fans: a. b. c. d. ACME Engineering & Mfg. Corp. Cook (Loren) Co. Greenheck Fan Corp. Penn Ventilation. 3. Upblast Roof Exhaust Fans: a. b. c. d. ACME Engineering & Mfg. Corp. Cook (Loren) Co. Greenheck Fan Corp. Penn Ventilation. 4. Ceiling and Wall Cabinet Fans: a. b. c. d. ACME Engineering & Mfg. Corp. Cook (Loren) Co. Greenheck Fan Corp. Penn Ventilation. 5. Cabinet Fans: a. b. c. d. ACME Engineering & Mfg. Corp. Cook (Loren) Co. Greenheck Fan Corp. Penn Ventilation. 6. Propeller Wall Fans: a. b. c. d. ACME Engineering & Mfg. Corp. Cook (Loren) Co. Greenheck Fan Corp. Penn Ventilation. 2.2 UTILITY SET FANS A. Description: Belt -driven centrifugal fans consisting tor, drive assembly, and accessories. B. Construction: Minimum 14 -gauge steel with side welded to scroll sheets. 4 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, mo - sheets fastened with a deep lock seam or FANS 15850 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 1. Housings Discharge Arrangement: Adjustable to 8 standard positions. C. Fan Wheels: Single width, single inlet, welded to cast-iron or cast -steel hub and spun -steel inlet cone, with hub keyed to shaft. 1. Blade Materials: Steel. 2. Blade Type: Die formed, backward inclined or forward curved, as scheduled. D. Motor: Heavy duty type with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings. 1. Open drip proof. E. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel keyed to wheel hub. F. Bearings: Heavy duty regreasable ball type, pillow block cast iron housing, minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours. G. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.5. 2. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 horsepower (HP); fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 5 HP. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions. 3. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. 4. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on the outside of the fan cabinet. H. Finish: Baked polyester powder coating, electrostatically applied or air-dried phenolic resin. L Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated: 1. Backdraft Dampers: Gravity actuated with counterweight and interlocking aluminum blades and felt edges in steel frame installed on fan discharge. 2. Spark -Resistant Construction: AMCA 99 construction, as indicated. 3. Weather Hoods: Weather resistant with stamped vents over motor and drive compart- ment. 2.3 DOWNBLAST ROOF EXHAUST FANS A. Description: Belt -driven or direct -drive downblast centrifugal fans as indicated, consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories. B. Construction: Minimum 16 -gauge spun -aluminum, removable dome top and outlet baffle, square one-piece aluminum base with welded comers; venturi inlet cone, and integral conduit chase. C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward -inclined blades. D. Motor: Heavy duty type with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings. FANS 15850 5 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 1. Open drip proof. E. Belt -Driven Units: Motor mounted out of airstream on vibration isolator with the following fea- tures: 1. Bearings: Heavy duty regreasable ball type, pillow block cast iron housing, minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000. 2. Drives: Precision machined cast iron type, sized for 150 percent of motor horsepower. 3. Belts: Oil and heat resistant, nonstatic type. F. Bird Screen: 1/2 -inch wire mesh, aluminum or brass wire. G. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated: 1. Damper: Counterbalanced, parallel -blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; fac- tory set to close when fan stops. 2.4 UPBLAST ROOF EXHAUST FANS A. Description: Belt -driven or direct -drive upblast centrifugal fans as indicated, consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories. B. Construction: Minimum 16 -gauge, spun -aluminum, two-piece top including windband, square one-piece aluminum base with welded corners; venturi inlet cone, and integral conduit chase. C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward -inclined blades. D. Motor: Heavy duty type with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings. 1. Open drip proof. E. Belt -Driven Units: Motor mounted out of airstream on vibration isolator with the following fea- tures: 1. Bearings: Heavy duty regreasable ball type, pillow block cast iron housing, minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000. 2. Drives: Precision machined cast iron type, sized for 150 percent of motor horsepower. 3. Belts: Oil and heat resistant, nonstatic type. F. Direct -Drive Units: Motor mounted in airstream on vibration isolators. G. Bird Screen: 1/2 -inch wire mesh, aluminum or brass wire. H. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated: 1. Damper: Counterbalanced, parallel -blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; fac- tory set to close when fan stops. 2. Grease Trough: Continuously welded aluminum trough and removable lid. 3. Roof Curbs: Provide roof curbs that are compatible with the roof type. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for roof types. Minimum 0.08 -inch aluminum, FANS 15850 6 11, WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION welded corners, rigid fiberglass insulation, minimum 12 -inch, and wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base. 2.5 CEILING AND WALL CABINET FANS A. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall applications. B. Construction: 22 -gauge galvanized steel lined with acoustical insulation, complete with back - draft damper. C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal forward curved wheel directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service. D. Motor: Open drip proof type with permanently lubricated sealed bearings and include imped- ance or thermal overload protection. E. Grille: Aluminum, coated with baked enamel, white. F. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated: 1. Roof or Wall Caps: Complete with integral flashing, backdraft damper, and birdscreen. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for roof and wall types. 2.6 PROPELLER WALL FANS A. Description: Belt -driven or direct -drive propeller wall fans, as indicated, consisting of fan blades, hub, housing, orifice ring, motor, drive, and accessories. B. Wall fans used for smoke exhaust shall be constructed and UL -listed for the application. C. Construction: Minimum 14 -gauge steel, bolted and welded construction. D. Propeller: Cast aluminum airfoil design with cast aluminum hub. E. Motor: Heavy duty type with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings. 1. Open drip proof. F. Belt -Driven Units: Motor mounted out of airstream on vibration isolator with the following fea- tures: 1. Bearings: Heavy duty regreasable ball type, pillow block cast iron housing, minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours. 2. Drives: Precision machined cast iron type, sized for 150 percent of motor horsepower. 3. Belts: Oil and heat resistant, nonstatic type. G. Direct -Drive Units: Motor mounted in airstream on vibration isolators. 7 FANS 15850 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION H. Finish: Baked polyester powder coating, electrostatically applied or air dried phenolic resin. I. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated: 1. Backdraft Damper: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame, interlocked blades with nylon bearings. 2. Wall Sleeve: Steel to match fan and accessory size. 3. Weathershield Hood: Steel to match fan and accessory size. 4. Weathershield Front Guard: Steel with expanded metal screen. 2.7 CABINET FANS A. Description: Duct mounted, belt -driven centrifugal cabinet fans as indicated, consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, drive assembly, motor, mounting brackets, and accessories. B. Construction: Minimum 18 -gauge galvanized steel with integral duct collars, two removable access panels, and mounting brackets. C. Fan Wheel: Steel scroll fan, double -width, double -inlet (DWDI), forward curved centrifugal type mounted on internal vibration isolators. D. Motor: Heavy duty type with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings. 1. Open drip proof. E. Bearings: Permanently lubricated, sealed ball type, minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours. F. Drives: Precision machined cast iron type, sized for 150 percent of motor horsepower. G. Belts: Oil and heat resistant, nonstatic type. H. Finish: Baked polyester powder coating, electrostatically applied or air dried phenolic resin. I. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated: 1. Insulated Housing: Fan housing and motor cover lined with 1/2 -inch fiberglass duct liner. 2. Inlet/Discharge Guards: 1/2 by 1/2 -inch galvanized welded wire on a galvanized frame. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements of installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not proceed with installation until unsat- isfactory conditions have been corrected. FANS 15850 8 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Support units using the external vibration -control devices as indicated. Vibration -control de- vices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Re- straints." 1. Support floor mounted fans on concrete housekeeping bases or roof supports using housed spring isolators. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in housekeeping base. 2. Secure roof -mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium -plated hardware. a. Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 7 Sections. 3. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods and vibration isolation springs. 4. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure using steel wire or metal straps. C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. D. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identifica- tion. 11 3.3 HOUSEKEEPING BASES A. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct con- nections with flexible connectors. B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections. C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including ground- ing connections, according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. Where manu- facturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of a factory -authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly of components and installation of fans, including duct and electri- cal connections, and to report results in writing. FANS 15850 9 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Adjust belt tension. C. Lubricate bearings. 3.7 CLEANING A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction de- bris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions. B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet. 3.8 START-UP PROCEDURES A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks before startup: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for piping, ducts, and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal - overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects. 3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory -recommended lu- bricants. 6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in con- nected ductwork systems are in the fully open position. 7. Disable automatic temperature -control operators. B. Starting procedures for fans are as follows: 1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to indicated RPM. 2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage. C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature -control operators. D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for air - handling -system testing, adjusting, and balancing. E. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. FANS 15850 10 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.9 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shut- down, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance. B. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." C. Schedule 8 hours training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice. D. Demonstrate operation of fans. Conduct walking tour of the Project. Briefly identify location and describe function, operation, and maintenance of each power ventilator. END OF SECTION 15850 11 FANS 15850 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 15851— PACKAGED COMMERCIAL ROOFTOP UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following rooftop air conditioners: 1. Cooling and heating units 10 tons and smaller. 2. Cooling and heating units 12-1/2 to 25 tons. 3. Cooling and heating units 27-1/2 to 50 tons 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. DDC: Direct -digital controls. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accesso- ries. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connec- tion. Prepare the following by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer: 1. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate coordinat- ing requirements with roof membrane system. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that rooftop air condi- tioners, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Sec- tion "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." PACKAGED COMMERCIAL ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 15851 1 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. D. Field quality -control test reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For rooftop air conditioners to include in operation and maintenance manuals. F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of rooftop air conditioners and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Prod- uct Requirements." B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for in- tended use. C. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Me- chanical Refrigeration." D. Energy -Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Effi- cient Design of New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings" or local energy code, whichever is more stringent. E. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Ef- ficient fficient Design of New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings" or local energy code, whichever is more stringent. F. Comply with NFPA 54 for gas-fired furnace section. G. ARI Certification: Units shall be ARI certified and listed. H. ARI Compliance for Units with Capacities Less Than 135,000 Btuh: Rate rooftop air - conditioner capacity according to ARI 210/240, "Unitary Air -Conditioning and Air -Source Heat Pump Equipment." 1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with ARI 270, "Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment." I. ARI Compliance for Units with Capacities 135,000 Btuh and More: Rate rooftop air - conditioner capacity according to ARI 340/360, "Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air - Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment." PACKAGED COMMERCIAL ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 15851 2 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with ARI 270, "Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary ftlr' Equipment." 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. B. Coordinate size, location, and installation of rooftop air -conditioner manufacturer's roof curbs and equipment supports with roof installer. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of rooftop air conditioners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Packaged Commercial Rooftop Units: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than one year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following require- ments apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manu- facturers specified. 2.2 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 10 TONS AND SMALLER A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis for Design: Trane `Precedent' Series. 2. Products of the following substitute manufacturers may be considered subject to review of product submittals: a. Carrier Corp. b. McQuay International. c. YORK International Corporation. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for impacts to available space and to other trades for sub- stitute products. B. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for exterior installation; consisting of compressor, indoor and outside refrigerant coils, heating section, indoor fan and outside coil fan(s), refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers. Units shall have part load cooling capability. PACKAGED COMMERCIAL ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 15851 3 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Casing: Steel construction with enamel paint finish, removable panels or access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 1/2 -inch- thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate drain connec- tion, and lifting lugs. D. Indoor Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven by single -speed motor. E. Outside Coil Fan(s): Propeller type, directly driven by motor. F. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum -plate fm and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equaliz- ing -type vertical distributor. G. Compressor: Hermetic reciprocating compressor with integral vibration isolators, internal over - current and over -temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater. H. Refrigeration System: 1. Compressor. 2. Outside coil and fan(s). 3. Indoor coil and fan. 4. Four-way reversing valve and suction line accumulator. 5. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element. 6. Refrigerant dryer. 7. High-pressure switch. 8. Low-pressure switch. 9. Thermostat for coil freeze-up protection during low -ambient temperature operation or loss of air. 10. Low -ambient switch. 11. Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines. 12. Charge of refrigerant. I. Filters: 2 -inch -thick, pleated, throwaway filters in filter rack. J. Heat Exchanger: Corrosion -resistant steel construction for natural -gas-fired burners with the following controls: 1. Redundant single or dual gas valve with manual shutoff. 2. Direct -spark ignition. 3. Electronic flame sensor. 4. Induced -draft blower. 5. Flame rollout switch. K. Economizer: Return- and outside -air dampers with neoprene seals, outside -air filter, and hood. 1. Damper Motor: Fully modulating spring return with adjustable minimum position. 2. Control: Electronic -control system uses mixed -air and outside -air temperature to adjust mixing dampers. 3. Relief Damper: Gravity actuated with bird screen and hood. PACKAGED COMMERCIAL ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 15851 4 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION L. Power Connection: Provide for single connection of power to unit through base with control - circuit transformer with built-in circuit breaker. M. Unit Controls: Solid-state control board and components contain at least the following features: 1. Indoor fan on/off delay. 2. Default control to ensure proper operation after power interruption. 3. Service relay output. 4. Unit diagnostics and diagnostic code storage. 5. Field -adjustable control parameters. 6. Economizer control. 7. Gas valve delay between first- and second -stage firing. 8. Low -ambient control, allowing operation down to 0 deg F. 9. Minimum run time. 10. Night setback mode. 11. Return -air temperature limit. 12. Low -refrigerant pressure control. N. DDC: Install stand-alone control module providing link between unit controls and DDC sys- tem. Control module shall be compatible with temperature -control system specified in Divi- sion 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls." O. Optional Accessories: Furnish unit with the following: 1. Power exhaust fan. 2. Single phase reversal protection. 3. Oil sump heaters. P. Roof Curb: Steel with corrosion -protection coating, gasketing, and factory -installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards; minimum height of 14 inches. 2.3 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 12-1/2 TO 25 TONS A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis for Design: Trane `Voyager' Series. 2. Products of the following substitute manufacturers may be considered subject to review of product submittals: a. Carrier Corp. b. McQuay International. c. YORK International Corporation. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for impacts to available space and to other trades for sub- stitute products. B. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for exterior installation; consisting of compressor, indoor and outside refrigerant coils, indoor fan and outside coil fan, heating sec- tion, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers. Units shall have part load cooling capability. PACKAGED COMMERCIAL ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 15851 5 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Casing: Galvanized -steel construction with enamel paint finish, removable panels or access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 1/2 -inch -thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs. D. Indoor Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable motor sheaves, grease - lubricated ball bearings, and motor. E. Outside Coil Fan(s): Propeller type, directly driven by permanently lubricated motor. F. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum -plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equaliz- ing -type vertical distributor. G. Compressor(s): Number as scheduled hermetic scroll compressors with integral vibration isola- tors, internal over -current and over -temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crank- case heater(s). H. Refrigeration System: 1. Compressor(s). 2. Outside coil and fan(s). 3. Indoor coil and fan. 4. Four-way reversing valve and suction line accumulator. 5. Check valves. 6. Expansion valves with replaceable thermostatic elements. 7. Refrigerant dryers. 8. High-pressure switches. 9. Low-pressure switches. 10. Thermostats for coil freeze-up protection during low -ambient temperature operation or loss of air. 11. Independent refrigerant circuits. 12. Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines. 13. Charge of refrigerant. 14. Timed Off Control: Automatic -reset control shuts compressor off after five minutes. I. Filters: 2 -inch- thick, fiberglass, pleated, throwaway filters in filter rack. J. Electric Heat: Helix -wound, nickel -chrome, electric -resistance elements, factory wired for sin- gle -point wiring connection; with time delay for element staging, and overcurrent and overheat protective devices. K. Heat Exchanger: Corrosion -resistant steel construction for natural -gas-fired burners with the following controls: 1. Redundant dual gas valve with manual shutoff. 2. Direct -spark pilot ignition. 3. Electronic flame sensor. 4. Induced -draft blower. 5. Flame rollout switch. PACKAGED COMMERCIAL ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 15851 6 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION L. Economizer: Return- and outside -air dampers with neoprene seals, outside -air filter, and hood. 1. Damper Motor: Fully modulating spring return with adjustable minimum position. 2. Control: Electronic -control system uses mixed -air and outside -air temperature to adjust mixing dampers. 3. Relief Damper: Gravity actuated with bird screen and hood. M. Power Connection: Provide for single connection of power to unit through base with control - circuit transformer with built-in circuit breaker. N. Unit Controls: Solid-state control board and components contain at least the following features: 1. Indoor fan on/off delay. 2. Default control to ensure proper operation after power interruption. 3. Service relay output. 4. Unit diagnostics and diagnostic code storage. 5. Field -adjustable control parameters. 6. Economizer control. 7. Gas valve delay between first- and second -stage firing. 8. Minimum run time. 9. Night setback mode. 10. Return -air temperature limit. 11. Low -refrigerant pressure control. O. DDC Temperature Control: Install stand-alone control module providing link between unit con- trols and DDC temperature -control system. Control module shall be compatible with tempera- ture -control system specified in Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls." P. Optional Accessories: Furnish unit with the following: 1. Dirty -filter switch. 2. Power exhaust fan, propeller type. 3. Single phase reversal protection. 4. Oil sump heaters. Q. Roof Curb: Steel with corrosion -protection coating, gasketing, and factory -installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards; minimum height of 14 inches. 2.4 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 27-1/2 TO 50 TONS A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis for Design: Trane `Voyager III' Series. 2. Products of the following substitute manufacturers may be considered subject to review of product submittals: a. Carrier Corp. b. McQuay International. c. YORK International Corporation. PACKAGED COMMERCIAL ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 15851 7 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3. Contractor shall be responsible for impacts to available space and to other trades for sub- stitute products. B. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for exterior installation; consisting of compressor, indoor and outside refrigerant coils, indoor fan and outside coil fan, heating sec- tion, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers. Units shall have part load cooling capability. C. Casing: Galvanized -steel construction with enamel paint finish, removable panels or access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 112 -inch -thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs. D. Indoor Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable motor sheaves, grease - lubricated ball bearings, and motor. E. Outside Coil Fan(s): Propeller type, directly driven by permanently lubricated motor. F. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum -plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equaliz- ing -type vertical distributor. G. Compressor(s): Number as scheduled hermetic scroll compressors with integral vibration isola- tors, internal over -current and over -temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crank- case heater(s). H. Refrigeration System: 1. Compressor(s). 2. Outside coil and fan(s). 3. Indoor coil and fan. 4. Four-way reversing valve and suction line accumulator. 5. Check valves. 6. Expansion valves with replaceable thermostatic elements. 7. Refrigerant dryers. 8. High-pressure switches. 9. Low-pressure switches. 10. Thermostats for coil freeze-up protection during low -ambient temperature operation or loss of air. 11. Independent refrigerant circuits. 12. Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines. 13. Charge of refrigerant. 14. Timed Off Control: Automatic -reset control shuts compressor off after five minutes. I. Filters: 2 -inch- thick, fiberglass, pleated, throwaway filters in filter rack. J. Electric Heat: Helix -wound, nickel -chrome, electric -resistance elements, factory wired for sin- gle -point wiring connection; with time delay for element staging, and overcurrent and overheat protective devices. PACKAGED COMMERCIAL ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 15851 8 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION K. Economizer: Return- and outside -air dampers with neoprene seals, outside -air filter, and hood. 1. Damper Motor: Fully modulating spring return with adjustable minimum position. 2. Control: Electronic -control system uses mixed -air and outside -air temperature to adjust mixing dampers. 3. Relief Damper: Gravity actuated with bird screen and hood. L. Power Connection: Provide for single connection of power to unit through base with control - circuit transformer with built-in circuit breaker. M. Unit Controls: Solid-state control board and components contain at least the following features: 1. Indoor fan on/off delay. 2. Default control to ensure proper operation after power interruption. 3. Service relay output. 4. Unit diagnostics and diagnostic code storage. 5. Field -adjustable control parameters. 6. Economizer control. 7. Minimum run time. 8. Night setback mode. 9. Return -air temperature limit. 10. Low -refrigerant pressure control. 11. Variable -Air -Volume Control: Variable -frequency drive controls supply -air static pres- sure. N. DDC Temperature Control: Install stand-alone control module providing link between unit con- trols and DDC temperature -control system. Control module shall be compatible with tempera- ture -control system specified in Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls." O. Optional Accessories: Furnish unit with the following: 1. Dirty -filter switch. 2. Power exhaust fan, propeller type. 3. Single phase reversal protection. 4. Oil sump heaters. P. Roof Curb: Steel with corrosion -protection coating, Basketing, and factory -installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards; minimum height of 14 inches. 2.5 MOTORS A. General requirements for motors are specified in Division 15 Section "Motors." B. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated; if not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. C. Controllers, electrical devices, and wiring are specified in Division 16 Sections. PACKAGED COMMERCIAL ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 15851 9 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances. B. Curb Support: Install roof curb on roof structure, level and secure. Install and secure rooftop air conditioners on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction. Secure units to curb support with anchor bolts. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. 1. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section "Fuel Gas Pip- ing." Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service. C. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install ducts to termination in roof curb. 2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking un- der entire roof curb. 3. Connect supply ducts to rooftop unit with flexible duct connectors specified in Divi- sion 15 Section "Duct Accessories." 4. Terminate return -air duct through roof structure and insulate space between roof and bot- tom of unit with 2 -inch- thick, acoustic duct liner. D. Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls. E. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field -assembled components and equipment installation, including connections]. Report results in writing. PACKAGED COMMERCIAL ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 15851 10 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Perform the following field quality -control tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing rooftop air conditioners and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie -down straps. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above. 3.4 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup service. B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the following: 1. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing. 2. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber. 3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, air-cooled outside coil, and fans. 4. Inspect internal insulation. 5. Verify that labels are clearly visible. 6. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. 7. Verify that controls are connected and operable. 8. Verify that filters are installed. 9. Clean outside coil and inspect for construction debris. 10. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris. 11. Connect and purge gas line. 12. Adjust vibration isolators. 13. Inspect operation of barometric dampers. 14. Lubricate bearings on fan. 15. Inspect fan -wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and bind- ing. 16. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. 17. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. Start refrigeration system in summer only. b. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report. 18. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences. 19. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer. 20. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing and adjust burner for peak efficiency. Adjust pilot to stable flame. a. Measure gas pressure on manifold. b. Measure combustion -air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber. PACKAGED COMMERCIAL ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 15851 11 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION c. Measure flue -gas temperature at furnace discharge. d. Perform flue -gas analysis. Measure and record flue -gas carbon dioxide and oxy- gen concentration. e. Measure supply -air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing rate and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air. 21. Calibrate thermostats. 22. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits. 23. Inspect outside -air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return -air dampers. 24. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following: a. Coil leaving -air, dry- and wet -bulb temperatures. b. Coil entering -air, dry- and wet -bulb temperatures. c. Outside -air, dry-bulb temperature. d. Outside -air -coil, discharge -air, dry-bulb temperature. 25. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown. 26. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve. a. Supply -air volume. b. Return -air volume. c. Relief -air volume. d. Outside -air intake volume. 27. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following: �✓ a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot -gas pressures. b. Short circuiting of air through outside coil or from outside coil to outside -air in- take. 28. Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot -light operation and failure modes. In- spect the following: a. High -limit heat exchanger. b. Warm-up for morning cycle. c. Economizer to limited outside -air changeover. d. Alarms. 29. After startup and performance testing, change filters, vacuum heat exchanger and cooling and outside coils, lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and inspect operation of power vents. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust initial temperature setpoints. PACKAGED COMMERCIAL ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 15851 12 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Set field -adjustable switches and circuit -breaker trip ranges as indicated. C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose, without additional cost. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain rooftop air conditioners. END OF SECTION 15851 ftipe PACKAGED COMMERCIAL ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 15851 13 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 15858 - DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 10 for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are con- nected to ducts. 2. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume -control dampers not integral to diffusers and grilles. 3. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers and grilles. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes ceiling-, floor-, sill- and wall -mounted diffusers and grilles. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air. B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be lo- cated in a sidewall, ceiling, sill, or floor. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate con- struction, finish, and mounting details. 2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static -pressure drop, and noise ratings for each type of air outlet and inlet. 3. Schedule of diffusers and grilles indicating drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and methods of assembly of components. DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES *1%01 15858 1 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 13. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for diffusers and grilles with factory -applied color finishes. C. Samples for Verification: Of diffusers and grilles, in manufacturer's standard sizes, showing the full range of colors. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the In- stallation of Air -Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Air Systems Components; Krueger. 2. Titus. 3. Price Companies. 4. Air Concepts. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Per- formance of Air Outlets and Inlets." 2.3 CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufac- turer's current data. B. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with ceiling sys- tems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and ade- quate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling systems, which will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser. C. Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of type, construction, capacity, and with accessories and fm- ishes as indicated. 1. Ceiling Diffuser — Modular Core (MCD) DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES 15858 2 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION a. Material: 22 -gauge steel modular core, back pan shall be one piece stamped 22 - gauge steel. b. Diffuser Construction: Fixed louver directional modules, which can be easily re- positioned without tools in the field for one, two, three or four way discharge. Each module shall be removable. c. Finish: White, anodic acrylic paint. d. Accessories: Opposed blade damper, operable from the face of the diffuser (OBD). 2.4 LINEAR DIFFUSERS A. Performance: Provide linear air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufac- turer's current data. B. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with ceiling sys- tems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and ade- quate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling systems, which will contain each type of air diffuser. C. Wall Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with wall systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into wall construction with accurate fit and ade- quate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of wall con- struction, which will contain each type of wall diffuser. D. Floor Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with floor sys- tems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into floor construction with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of floor construction, which will contain each type of floor diffuser. E. Sill Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with sill systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into sill construction with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of sill construction, which will contain each type of sill diffuser. F. Types: Provide linear diffusers of type, construction, capacity, and with accessories and fin- ishes as indicated. 1. Linear Diffuser — Slot a. Materials: 0.063 -inch extruded aluminum frame; aluminum end borders, end caps and support bars. Steel pattern controller. b. Diffuser Construction: One piece lengths up to 6 feet long. Multiple units, placed end to end, shall be joined with alignment pins to for a continuous slot appearance. Pattern controller shall be aerodynamically curved shaped deflector capable of 180 degree pattern adjustment from the face of the diffuser and shall allow dampering if required. Maximum length of each pattern controller is 3 feet. Exposed frame shall be constructed with mitered corners. DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES 15858 3 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION e. Finish: Border, white anodic acrylic paint or aluminum; pattern controller, black. d. Accessories: Diffuser plenum; galvanized sheet metal construction, lengths and widths to match individual diffusers, 1 -inch internal duct liner. 2. Linear Diffuser — Bar a. Materials: Extruded aluminum bar core locked into 0.081 -inch aluminum frame. b. Diffuser Construction: Bars shall be fixed, 1/8 -thick, 0 degrees deflection, spaced on 114 -inch centers, parallel to the long dimension of the diffuser. The core shall have support bars perpendicular to the bars at no more than 9 inch centers. One piece lengths up to 6 feet long. Multiple units, placed end to end, shall be joined with alignment pins to for a continuous appearance. Exposed frame shall be con- structed with mitered corners. c. Finish: White anodic acrylic paint or anodized aluminum. 2.5 SUPPLY GRILLES A. Performance: Provide supply grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device and listed in manufacturer's cur- rent data. B. Wall Compatibility: Provide grilles with border styles that are compatible with wall systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into wall construction with accurate fit and ade- quate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of wall con- struction, which will contain each type of wall grille. C. Types: Provide supply grilles of type, construction, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as indicated. 1. Supply Grille — Louvered a, Materials: 20 gauge steel or 0.050 aluminum frame with heavy duty aluminum blades b. Grille, Construction: 1 -1/4 -inch wide border, corners assembled with full penetra- tion resistance welds. Screw holes countersunk. Double deflection solid airfoil blades, front blades parallel to the long dimension, spaced on 3/4 -inch centers. Blades shall extend through the side frame on each side. Blades shall be individu- ally adjustable, held in place with tension wire, adjustable without loosening or rat- tling. c. Finish: White, anodic acrylic paint. 2.6 EXHAUST/RETURN GRILLES A. Performance: Provide exhaust and return grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and veloc- ity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device and listed in manu- facturer's current data. DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES 15858 4 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide grilles with border styles that are compatible with ceiling sys- tems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and ade- quate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling systems, which will contain each type of grille. C. Wall Compatibility: Provide grilles with border styles that are compatible with wall systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into wall construction with accurate fit and ade- quate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of wall con- struction, which will contain each type of wall grille. D. Types: Provide exhaust and return grilles of type, construction, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as indicated. 1. Exhaust/Return Grille — Louvered a. Materials: 22 -gauge roll formed steel frame and blades or 0.040 minimum ex- truded aluminum frame and blades. b. Grille Construction: 1 -1/4 -inch wide border, corners assembled with full penetra- tion resistance welds. Screw holes countersunk. Blades at 35 degree deflection at 1/2 -inch spacing. Blades fixed in place, parallel to the long dimension of the grille. c. Finish: White, anodic acrylic paint or aluminum colored paint. 2. Exhaust/Return Grille — Airfoil Louvered a. Materials: 20 -gauge roll formed steel frame and blades or 0.040 minimum ex- truded aluminum frame and blades. b. Grille Construction: 1 -1/4 -inch wide border, comers assembled with full penetra- tion resistance welds. Screw holes countersunk. Airfoil shape blades at 45 -degree deflection at 1/2 -inch spacing. Blades fixed in place, parallel to the long dimen- sion of the grille. c. Finish: White, anodic acrylic paint or aluminum colored paint. 3. Exhaust/Return Grille — Eggcrate a. Materials: 22 -gauge roll formed steel frame with aluminum grid. b. Grille Construction: 1 -3/4 -inch wide border, corners assembled with full penetra- tion resistance welds. Screw holes countersunk. Eggcrate core shall provide a minimum of 90% free area with 1/2 x 1/2 x 1 -inch aluminum grid. c. Finish: White, anodic acrylic paint. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where diffusers and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES 15858 5 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, project Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards. B. Ceiling -Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design require- ments for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final loca- tions where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay -in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with instal- lation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Duct -Mounted Supply and Exhaust/Return Grilles: Mount to duct branch with 16 -gauge steel angle collar. Mounting screws to match grille frame. Screws shall not protrude more than 1/4 - inch past angle collar. D. Install diffusers and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and mainte- nance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. E. Install in-line multiple linear diffusers with alignment pins for a straight continuous appearance. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. 3.4 CLEANING A. After installation of diffusers and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to re- move burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers and grilles that have damaged finishes. END OF SECTION 15858 6 DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES 15858 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 15861 - AIR FILTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes factory -fabricated air -filter devices and media used to remove particulate matter from air for HVAC applications. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MERV: Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include dimensions; shipping and operating weights; required clearances and ac- cess; rated flow capacity, including initial and final pressure drop at rated airflow; ; MERV rat- ings, fire classification; furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details to illustrate component assem- blies and attachments. 1. Show filter rack assembly, dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of compo- nents. 2. Include setting drawings, templates, and requirements for installing anchor bolts and an- chorages. C. Maintenance Data: For each type of filter and rack to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. B. ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE 52.2 1999 for method of testing and rating air -filter units. C. Provide air filter units which have been listed and labeled by UL (Underwriters Laboratories). AIR FILTERS 15861 1 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of filter banks with other trades to verify adequate clearances for filter, installation, maintenance and replacement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Air Filters: a. AAF International. b. Camfil/Farr Co. c. Flanders Filters, Inc. 2.2 EXTENDED -SURFACE, DISPOSABLE PANEL FILTERS A. Description: Factory -fabricated, dry, extended -surface filters with holding frames. B. Media: High -loft, non -woven cotton/synthetic blend. C. Media Support: Diamond-shaped expanded metal. D. Pleat Design: Radial pleat. E. Frame: Moisture -resistant beverage board. F. Minimum MERV rating: 7. 2.3 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide new filters in all units at grand opening of expansion. B. Provide new filters in all units approximately 30 days after the majority of tenant construction is complete. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air. AIR FILTERS 15861 2 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. C. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air -handling unit installations. 3.2 CLEANING A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air -handling and air - distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media. END OF SECTION 15861 3 AIR FILTERS 15861 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 15975 — DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages." 2. Division 15 Section "Variable Frequency Drives." 3. Division 15 Section "Unit Heaters and Cabinet Heaters." 4. Division 15 Section "Packaged Commercial Rooftop Units." 5. Division 15 Section "Air Terminals." 6. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components, wiring and piping for equipment not directly controlled by the DDC system. B. Entire DDC system and components shall be U.L. Listed for application. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Control system consists of DDC controllers, sensors, indicators, actuators, final control ele- ments, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories connected to controllers to operate mechanical systems according to sequences of operation indicated or specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Divi- sion 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include manufacturer's technical Product Data for each control device furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance characteris- tics, electrical characteristics, finishes of materials, installation instructions, and startup instruc- tions, DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 1 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Shop Drawings (AutoCAD 2000, AutoCAD 14 or latest version) from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. D. Shop Drawings containing the following information for each control system: 1. Schematic flow diagram showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control de- vices. 2. Each control device labeled with setting or adjustable range of control. 3. Diagrams for all required electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between factory - installed and field -installed wiring. Label/tag all field installed wiring. 4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 5. Detailed written description of control sequence of operation. 6. Communication trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations and trunk data conductors. 7. Listing of connected data points, including connected control unit and input device. 8. Color system graphics diagrams indicating monitored systems, data (connected and cal- culated) point addresses, and operator notations. 9. System configuration showing peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams, modems, and interconnections. 10. Software description and sequence of operation. E. Provide Point -to -Point Test and Field Quality Control and Testing Plans as outlined in Part 3, "Execution." Test Plans shall be used in final acceptance to verify operation of all points and control functions specified. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar components in other systems. B. Coordinate installation of DDC system components and control wiring and piping with installa- tion of mechanical systems equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units. C. Ensure each system is completed and commissioned. D. Coordinate and support test/balance contractor for all balancing requirements. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Maintenance data for control systems equipment to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Maintenance instructions and spare parts list (including unit cost) for each type of control device. 2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and devices. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 2 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances. 5. Calibration records and list of set points. B. Field Test Reports: Procedure and certification of control system. C. Project Record Documents: 1. Accurately record actual location of control components, including panels, controllers, thermostats, and sensors. 2. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences. 3. Include data specified in "Submittals" in final "Record Documents" form. 4. System software flow chart reflecting operating sequences. 5. Perform and Document results of Field Test Plan. 6. Certificate stating that control systems have been tested and adjusted for proper opera- tion. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer specializing in control system installa- tions. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing control systems similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service per- formance. C. Startup Personnel Qualifications: Engage specially trained personnel in direct employ of manu- facturer of primary control system. D. Comply with NFPA 70 and 90A. E. Comply with Underwriters Laboratories (UL). F. Electrical wiring shall comply with Division 16. G. Coordinate equipment selection with Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm Systems" and/or "Light- ing Systems" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system. H. Perform calibration, testing and execution of sequence of operations. Provide software adjust- ments for stable operations and furnish trend logs to demonstrate system stability. Demonstrate to Owner or Owner's representative each system operation. 1.8 SERVICE AND GUARANTEE A. After completion of the system, including software, submit a warranty in accordance with Divi- sion 1. Provide all services, materials and equipment necessary for the successful operation of DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 3 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION the DDC hardware and controls during the warranty period. Preventive maintenance shall be included. Software and data shall be revised and updated as necessary during warranty period to maintain system performance. B. During the warranty period provide a 24-hour emergency service number where a qualified automation service engineer familiar with the installed system may be reached. This engineer shall have the capability of remotely communicating with the system for troubleshooting and program alterations. The service shall have a maximum four—hour response for critical compo- nent failures. C. Provide inspection for opposite season to test, calibrate, and adjust controls; submit written re- port for each inspection. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather. B. Factory -Mounted Controls: Provide control devices to be factory mounted on equipment, ar- range for shipping and labeling control devices to unit manufacturer. Installation requirements, wiring schematics shall be furnished and coordinated directly with respective unit manufacturer. Unless otherwise indicated, cost associated with factory mounted controls and wiring shall be included under this section. Provide factory mounted controls for the following equipment: 1. Packaged Commercial Rooftop Units. 2. Terminal Units. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Approved Manufacturers / Representatives: a. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. (Landis Division) / Seimens Building Tech- nologies, Inc. b. Alerton (IBEX) / Alerton Technologies Systems. c. Trane (Trace 700) / Trane Co. 2. Manufacturers Qualifications: A minimum of 5 (equivalent size and complexity of this project) operational systems within the last 5 years utilizing similar components located in the same State or within 100 miles of project site. Manufacturer or authorized manu- facturer's on-site service support shall also be available within the same location parame- ters indicated. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 4 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3. Installer Qualifications: By the District Office of the manufacturer as a subcontract, or by a firm regularly engaged in the installation of building direct digital HVAC control systems for a period of not less than 5 years. The entire control system shall be installed by qualified electricians and mechanics, all of whom are properly trained and qualified for the work they perform, and directly supervised by the local representative of the com- ponent manufacturer. 2.2 BASIC DDC SYSTEM A. General: The Direct Digital Control (DDC) System shall be fully integrated and installed as a complete package of controls and instrumentation. The system shall include, but not limited to, all computer software and hardware, operator input/output devices, sensors and controls re- quired for complete operation. Provide all wiring, installation, supervision and labor, including calibration, adjustments, operator training and checkout necessary for a complete and fully op- erating system. B. Dial -Up Communications: A telecommunication network shall integrate the DDC system to the Control Manufacturer's computer to support diagnostics and software upgrades. C. DDC system control components shall comply with ASHRAE 135 and Underwriter's Laborato- ries (U.L.). 2.3 OPERATOR WORKSTATION A. Provide a Personal Computer Workstation at project site for command entry, information man- agement, network alarm management, and database management functions. All real-time con- trol functions shall be resident in the Stand alone DDC panels. Workstation shall be general purpose, commercially available, personal computer with sufficient memory and processor ca- pacity to perform all functions described in this specification. Provide sufficient hard drive disk storage to accommodate all fully configured point databases, all application databases, all graphics databases, all user -defined reports, and alI historical data archives as described in this specification. Provide the capacity for future point expansion. System shall be able to support five times the initial point installation without system performance degeneration. Point shall be defined as individual line items on DDC point list. An allowance of $2,500 shall be allocated for each operator workstation, monitor and peripherals to provide a commercially available sys- tem at the time of project completion. System shall be provided with or upgraded to the latest and fastest processor, configured with standard peripherals and accessories available no less than 3 months prior to project completion date. As a minimum, system shall be configured as follows: 1. Operator Workstation: a. Provide an Intel Pentium 4 Processor 2.8GHz w/ 512K L2 Advanced Transfer Cache and 533MHz FSB. 512 DDR SDRAM (1-512MB Module) expandable to 1024MB. 120GB UATA100 7200RPM Hard Drive. Integrated 1.44MB 3.5" floppy diskette drive. Integrated 16x/10x/24x CDRW / 8X DVD Combo. One Type II PCMCIA Card slot. (6) USB, Parallel, Serial, (2) Integrated IEEE 1394 (FireWire) and (2) PS/2. Headphone/Speaker, Line -in and Microphone Jacks. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 5 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION Complete with operator workstation software specified. 17.0" LCD Flat Panel Display. Integrated 32MB NVIDIA GeForce2 MX400 Graphics with VGA Out. Logitech Wireless Keyboard and Wireless Optical Mouse. V.92 56K Modem. In- tegrated 10/100 Ethernet. b. Provide power line surge protector. c. Coordinate with Owner. B. Printer 1. Provide industry standard and commercially available Printer (Data -Log and Alarm). C. Provide a telecommunication interface with automatic dial and answer capabilities to allow the control manufacturer to support diagnostics and software upgrades. Provide log -on security screening to prevent unauthorized access. D. Portable Operator's Terminal: Provide one portable full function operator terminals for operator readout of system variables, override control, servicing, trouble -shooting and adjustment of con- trol parameters. Provide all software and hardware necessary for interface at stand atone DDC panels, air handling unit digital controllers, unitary digital controllers, variable air volume ter- minal unit controllers, and at space temperature sensors. If a DDC panel, controller or sensor requires a different portable operator terminal for interface, provide one of each type. Complete with carrying case. 2.4 OPERATOR WORKSTATION SOFTWARE A. Command Entry/Menu Selection Process: Provide all software for a complete and operational system as described herein. Software shall include manufacturer's standard multi -tasking, multi-user operating system for operator consoles and controllers, network communication software for dial-up and hard wired trunk applications, operator man -machine interface soft- ware, control application software and all other software necessary to provide the functions specified. Operator workstation shall use Microsoft "Windows or NT" operating platform. Op- erator Workstation interface software shall minimize operator training through the use of Eng- lish language prompting, English language point identification, and industry standard PC appli- cation software. The operator interface shall minimize the use of a typewriter style keyboard through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device, and "point and click" approach to menu selection. Users shall be able to start and stop equipment or change set points from graphical displays through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device. B. Password Protection: Multiple -level password access protection shall be provided to allow the userlmanager to limit workstation control, display and database manipulation capabilities as he deems appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned password. 1. Passwords shall be exactly the same for all operator devices, including portable or panel - mounted network terminals. Any additions or changes made to password definition shall automatically cause passwords at all DDC panels on a network to be updated and down loaded to minimize the task of maintaining system security. Users shall not be required to update passwords for DDC panels individually. 2. A minimum of (three](six][ ] levels of access shall be supported. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 6 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3. A minimum of [15][301[ ] passwords shall be supported at each DDC panel. 4. Operators will be able to perform only those commands available for their respective passwords. Menu selections displayed at any operator device, including portable or panel mounted devices, shall be limited to only those items defined for the access level of the password used to log -on. 5. User -definable, automatic log -off timers of from 1 to 60 minutes shall be provided to prevent operators from inadvertently leaving devices on-line. C. Operator Commands: The operator interface shall allow the operator to perform commands in- cluding, but not limited to, the following: 1. Start-up or shutdown selected equipment. 2. Adjust set points. 3. Add/Modify/Delete time programming. 4. Enable/Disable process execution. 5. Lock/Unlock alarm reporting for each point. 6. Enable/Disable Totalization for each point. 7. Enable/Disable Trending for each point. 8. Override PID Loop set points. 9. Enter temporary override schedules. 10. Define Holiday Schedules. 11. Change time/date. 12. Enter/Modify analog alarm limits. 13. Enter/Modify analog warning limits. 14. View limits. 15. Enable/Disable Demand Limiting for each meter. 16. Enable/Disable Duty Cycle for each load. D. Dynamic Color Graphics Software: System software shall provide user interface through which viewing and commanding may be done using a "mouse" pointing device. The operator shall be able to access to any level of desired system information without being required to enter any commands from the keyboard. 1. Windowing: Windowing user interface shall be provided to allow operator to simultane- ously view several different types of system displays at the same time to analyze system operation (i.e. air handling unit equipment graphic display and several trend graph of as- sociated space temperatures simultaneously displayed). The system shall be capable of a graphic display associated with an alarm to be viewed without interrupting work in pro- gress. 2. Dynamic Data Displays: Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values, and status indication shall be shown in their respective locations, area served, and shall auto- matically update to represent current conditions without operator interface. 3. System Selection and Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu se- lection, or text based commands. Provide a logical penetration of graphical displays from a site plan on down to each level of digital controllers. 4. Graphics Generation: Graphics generation software shall be provided to allow the user to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays. A minimum of 15 colors shall be avail- able for use. Provide a library of pre-engineered screens and symbols depicting standard DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 7 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION HVAC components (e.g. fans, coils, filters, dampers, terminal units, heat pumps, circula- tion pumps, cooling towers, etc.). E. Logs and Summaries: 1. Reports shall be generated automatically or manually, and directed to either CRT dis- plays, printers, or disk files. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily ob- tain the following types of reports: a. A general listing of all points in the network. b. List all points currently in alarm. c. List of all off-line points. d. List all points currently in override status. e. List of all disabled points. f. List all points currently locked out. g. List of all items defined in a "follow-up" file. h. List all Weekly Schedules. i. List all Holiday Programming. i. List of Limits and Deadbands. 2. Summaries shall be provided for specific points, for a logical point group, for a user - selected group of groups, or for the entire facility without restriction due to the hardware configuration of the facility management system. Under no conditions shall the operator need to specify the address of hardware controller to obtain system information. F. System Configuration and Definition: All temperature and equipment control strategies and en- ergy management routines shall be definable by the operator. System definition and modifica- tion �1 procedures shall not interfere with normal system operation and control. G. The system shall be provided complete with all equipment and documentation necessary to al- low an operator to independently perform the following functions: 1. Add/Delete/Modify Stand alone DDC Panels. 2. Add/Delete/Modify Operator Workstations. 3. Add/Delete/Modify Application Specific Controllers. 4. Add/Delete/Modify points of any type, and all associated point parameters, and tuning constants. 5. Add/Delete/Modify alarm reporting definition for each point. 6. Add/Delete/Modify control loops. 7. Add/Delete/Modify energy management applications. 8. Add/Delete/Modify time- and calendar -based programming. 9. Add/Delete/Modify Totalization for every point. 10. Add/Delete/Modify Historical Data Trending for every point. 11. Add/Delete/Modify custom control processes. 12. Add/Delete/Modify any and all graphic displays, symbols, and cross-references to point data. 13. Add/Delete/Modify dial-up telecommunication definition. 14. Add/Delete/Modify all operator passwords. 15. Add/Delete/Modify Alarm Messages. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 �rf WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION H. Programming Description: The system shall permit an operator to create, modify and document all process control sequences including all DDC application software, energy management software, and alarm processes. Manufacturer latest technology programming methods shall be provided, i.e. modified basic, graphical or block programming format. I. Network -Wide Strategy Development: Inputs and outputs for any process shall not be restricted to a single stand alone DDC panel, but shall be able to include data from any stand alone DDC panel to allow the development of network -wide control strategies. Processes shall also allow the operator to use the results of one process as the input to any number of the other processes (cascading). J. System Definition/Control Sequence Documentation: All portions of system definition shall be documented to provide hard copy printouts of all configuration and application data. Control process and DDC control loop documentation shall be provided in logical, graphical or block flow diagram format to allow control sequences to be easily interpreted and modified at any time in the future. K. Database Save/Restore/Back-Up: Back-up copies of all stand alone DDC panel databases shall be stored in at central operator workstation. Continuous supervision of the integrity of all DDC panel data bases shall be provided. In the event that any DDC panel on the network experiences a loss of its data base for any reason, the user shall have the ability to manually execute to download a new copy or any portions of the respective data base to restore proper operation. L. Third Party Software Package: Provide the capability and capacity to run specific third party software packages for word processing, spreadsheets and database management programs and shall provide for on-line data transfer from DDC network or from archived historical data. Use of third party software shall operate concurrently with other tasks such as alarm logging, and report data gathering. Provide software package to analyze trended point in graphic format with measured variable on y-axis and time variable on x-axis. 2.5 LOCAL AREA NETWORK A. Operator workstations and stand alone DDC panels shall reside directly on a local area network such that communications may be executed directly between controllers, directly between workstations, and between controllers and workstations on a peer to peer basis. All points con- nected to network shall be accessible through any operator workstation on the network. Any point on the network shall be available to any controller on the network for control loop proc- essing. B. All operator devices, either network resident or connected via dial-up modems, shall have the ability to access all point status and application report data, or execute control functions for any and all other devices via the local area network. Access to data shall be based upon logical identification of building equipment. Access to system data shall not be restricted by the hard- ware configuration of the facility management system. The hardware configuration of the net- work shall be transparent to the user when accessing data or developing control programs. 9 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Control Manufacture highest available speed data transfer rates shall be provided for all com- munications, alarm reporting, quick report generation from controllers, and upload/download efficiency between network devices. D. Provide synchronization of the real-time clocks in all DDC panels. E. Local Area network communication trunk and software shall support a minimum of [25J[30][50J[ J stand alone DDC panels or operator's workstations or any combination of both. 2.6 STAND ALONE DDC PANELS A. General: Standalone DDC panels shall be microprocessor based, multi -tasking, multi-user, real- time digital control processors. Modular in design and consisting of processor board with pro- grammable RAM memory, power supplies, and input/output modules. B. Each DDC panel shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data- bases including: 1. Control processes. 2. Energy Management Applications. 3. Alarm Management. 4. Historical/Trend Data for all points. 5. Maintenance Support Applications. 6. Custom Processes. 7. Operator 110. 8. Dial -Up Communications. 9. Manual Override Monitoring. C. Each DDC panel shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs: 1. Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts. 2. Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control, 3. Analog Inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow, and position measurements. 4. Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and speed capacity control of primary equipment. 5. Pulse Inputs for pulsed contact monitoring. 6. Spare points: Provide a minimum of [one][two][ ] spare point for each Input/Output point type (not including pulse inputs). D. Each stand alone DDC panel communication trunk and software shall support a minimum of [95][1001[125][150][ 1 controllers. Controllers shall consist of any combination of future ap- plication specific controllers such as air handling unit digital controllers, variable air volume terminal unit controllers, and unitary controllers. E. Stand alone DDC panels shall be provided with at least two RS -232C serial data communication port for operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, portable operators terminals or portable lap -top computers. In lieu of above, one RS -232C serial data communication port and a local operator access and display panel shall be provided. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 10 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION F. Each DDC panel shall continuously perform self -diagnostics, communication diagnosis and di- agnosis of all subsidiary equipment. The DDC panel shall provide both local and remote an- nunciation of any detected component failures, or repeated failure to establish communication. Indication of the diagnostic results shall be provided at each DDC panel, and shall not require the connection of an operator 110 device. G. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all stand alone DDC panels to prevent the Ioss of database or operating system software. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data, and battery back-up shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all RAM memory. Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC panel shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention. Should DDC panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of reload- ing the DDC panel via the local area network, via the local RS -232C port, or via telephone line dial -in. H. Agency Listing: UL 916 [UL 864]. 2.7 STANDALONE DDC PANEL SOFTWARE A. All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this specification shall be provided. The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an inte- gral part of the DDC panel and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for exe- cution. Provide multiple copies and licensing agreements as necessary to support the specified quantity of workstations and portable terminals. B. Pre -Tested Control Algorithms: The DDC panels shall have the ability to perform the following pre -tested control algorithms: 1. Two Position Control. 2. Proportional Control. 3. Proportional plus Integral Control. 4. Proportional, Integral, plus Derivative Control. 5. Automatic Control Loop Tuning. C. Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a provision for limiting the num- ber of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any given time period. D. Heavy Equipment Delays: The system shall provide protection against excessive demand situa- tions during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive start commands to heavy electrical loads. E. Power Failure Motor Restart: Upon the resumption of normal power, the DDC panel shall ana- lyze the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy scheduling, and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operation, including start time delays as described above. F. Energy Management Applications 11 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 1, DDC Panels shall have the ability to perform any or all of the following energy manage- ment routines: a. Time of Day Scheduling. b. Calendar Based Scheduling. c. Holiday Scheduling. d. Temporary Schedule Overrides. e. Optimal Start. f. Optimal Stop. g. Night Setback Control. h. Enthalpy or Dry bulb Switch over (Economizer). i. Peak Demand Limiting. j. Temperature Compensated Load Rolling. k. Fan Speed/CFM Control. 1. Heating/Cooling Interlock. m. Hot Water Reset. n. Chilled Water Reset. o. Condenser Water Reset. p. Chiller Sequencing. q. Boiler Sequencing. r. Enthalpy Control. s. Lighting Controls Interface. t. Power Monitoring Interface. 2. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention, and shall be flexible enough to allow user customization. Programs shall be applied to building equipment as described in the sequence of operation. G. Custom Process Programming Capability: DDC panels shall be able to execute custom, job - specific processes defined by the user, to automatically perform calculations and special control routines. 1. Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the following in a custom process: a. Any system -measured point data or status b. Any calculated data c. Any results from other processes d. User -Defined Constants e. Arithmetic functions (+, ,*,/, square root, exp., etc.) - Boolean logic operators (and, or, exclusive or, etc.) - On-delay/Off-delay/One-shot timers. 2. Process Triggers: Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of the following: a. Time interval b. Time of day c. Date d. Other processes 12 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION e. Time programming f. Events (e.g., point alarms). H. Dynamic Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any and all other DDC panels on the local area network. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other DDC panels on the local area network. Advisory/Message Generation: Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advi- sories to operator I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message to a specified device, buffer the information in a follow-up file, or cause the execution of a dial-up connection to a remote device such as a printer or pager. J. Custom Process Documentation: The custom control programming feature shall be self - documenting. All interrelationships defined by this feature shall be documented via graphics flowcharts and English language descriptors. K. Alarm Management: Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarm reports to operator devices and memory files. Each DDC panel shall perform distributed, inde- pendent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the DDC panel's ability to report alarms be affected by either operator activity at a PC Workstation or local I/O device, or communications with other panels on the network. 1. Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's English language description, and the time and date of occurrence. 2. Prioritization: The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point. Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to critical alarms. A minimum of three priority levels shall be provided. Each DDC panel shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point. The user shall also be able to define under which conditions point changes need to be acknowledged by an operator, and/or sent to follow-up files for retrieval and analysis at a later date. 3. Report Routing: Alarm reports, messages, and files will be directed to a user -defined list of operator devices, or PC's used for archiving alarm information. Alarms shall also be automatically directed to a default device in the event a primary device is found to be off- line. 4. Alarm Messages: In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be able to print, display or store an alarm message to more fully describe the alarm condition or direct operator response. 5. Alarms shall be generated for, but not limited to the following: a. Motor is commanded on or off but motor status input indicates no change. b. Room temperature or static pressure strays outside selectable limits. c. An analog input takes a value indicating sensor failure. d. A module or node is "dead" to the LAN. e. A power outage occurs. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 13 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION L. Historical Data and Trend Analysis: A variety of Historical data collection utilities shall be provided to automatically sample, store, and display system data in all of the following ways. 1. Point Histories: Stand alone DDC panels shall continuously and automatically sample the value of all analog inputs on a user defined time or change of state intervals. 2. Extended Sample Period Trends: Measured and calculated analog and binary data shall also be assign able to user -definable trends for the purpose of collecting operator speci- fied performance data over extended periods of time. Sample intervals shall be operator selected change of value based or time based shall be provided. Each stand alone DDC panel shall have a dedicated buffer for trend data. 3. Data Storage and Archiving: Trend data shall be stored at the Stand alone DDC panels, and uploaded to hard disk storage when archives is desired. Uploads shall occur based upon either user -defined interval, manual command, or when the trend buffers become full. M. Runtime Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall have the capability to automatically accu- mulate and store runtime hours for all binary input and output points. 1. The totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less. 2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for runtime totalization. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached. N. Analog/Pulse Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for user -selected analog and bi- nary pulse input -type points. 1. Totalization shall provide calculation and storage of accumulations of up to 99,999.9 units (e.g. KWH, gallons, KBTU, tons. etc.). 2. The totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less. 3. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached. O. Event Totalization: Stand alone DDC panels shall have the ability to count events such as the number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event totalization shall be per- formed on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis. 1. The event totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a user de- fined minimum before reset. 2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the Limit is reached. P. Interlocking: 1. Permit events to occur, based on changing condition of one or more associated master points. 2. Binary contact, hightlow limit of analog point or computed point shall be capable of be- ing utilized as master. Same master may monitor or command multiple slaves. 3. Operator Commands: DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 14 `,' WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION a. Define single master/multiple master interlock process. b. Define logic interlock process. c. Lock/unlock program. d. Enable/disable interlock process. e. Execute/terminate interlock process. f. Request interlock type summary. 2.8 AIR HANDLING UNIT CONTROLLER (AHU) A. AHU Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following configurations of systems to address current requirements and for future expansion: 1. Mixed Air -Single Path (Constant and Variable Air Volume Systems). 2. Mixed Air -Dual Path. 3. 100% Outside Air. B. AHU Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the speci- fied control sequences in a totally stand alone fashion. Provide a minimum of [one][two][ ] spare points for each Input/Output point type. Application programs and parameter data shall be stored in nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). C. The operator interface to any AHU point data or program shall be through any network -resident PC workstation, or any PC or portable operator's terminal connected to any DDC panel in the network. D. Provide NEMA rated enclosure suitable for application. A local disconnect shall be provided at each controller to individually disconnect control power without interruption to any other con- troller. E. Agency Listing: UL 916 [UL 864]. 2.9 UNITARY CONTROLLERS A. Unitary Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the control of the following configura- tions of unitary equipment to address current requirements as described in the sequence of op- eration, and for future expansion: 1. Unit Ventilators (ASHRAE Cycle I,II,III, or W). 2. Heat Pumps (Air to Air, Air to Water). 3. Packaged Rooftops. 4. Fan Coils. 5. Cabinet Heaters. B. Unitary Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the speci- fied control sequences in a totally stand alone fashion. Application programs and parameter data shall be stored in nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). 15 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION C. The modes of operation supported by the UV Controllers shall minimally include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Day/Weekly Schedule. 2. Comfort/Occupancy Mode. 3. Economy Mode (Standby Mode, Unoccupied, etc.). 4. Temporary Override Mode. D. The operator interface to any unitary controller point data or programs shall be through any net -work -resident PC workstation, any PC or portable operator's terminal connected to any DDC panel in the network, or through terminal jack at room temperature sensor. E. Provide NEMA enclosure rated for plenum use. A local disconnect shall be provided at each unitary controller to individually disconnect control power without interruption to any other digital controller. F. Agency Listing: UL 916 [UL 864]. 2.10 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL UNIT CONTROLLERS (VAV) A. VAV terminal Unit Controller shall be provided to terminal unit manufacturer for factory instal- lation. Application programs and parameter data shall be stored in nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). VAV terminal Unit Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the control of the following configurations of terminal units to address current requirements as described in the sequence of operation, point schedule, and for future expansion: 1. Single Duct Only (Cooling Only, or Cooling with Reheat. 2. Fan Powered (Parallel/Side Pocket, Series/On-Off Logic). B. VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall support the following types of input and output points: 1. Proportional Cooling Output. 2. Proportional Heating Output. 3. Fan Control Output (On/Off Logic, or Proportional Series Fan Logic). 4. Fan Status Input. 5. Space Temperature Input. 6. Velocity Sensor Input. 7. Auxiliary Temperature Input. 8. Override Push-button. C. The modes of operation supported by the VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall minimally in- clude, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Day/Weekly Schedule. 2. Comfort/Occupancy Mode. 3. Economy Mode (Standby Mode, Unoccupied, etc). 4. Temporary Override Mode. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 16 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION D. The operator interface to any VAV controller point data or programs shall be through any net- work -resident PC workstation, any PC or portable operator's terminal connected to any DDC panel in the network, or through terminal jack at room temperature sensor. E. Provide NEMA enclosure rated for plenum use. A local disconnect shall be provided at each VAV controller to individually disconnect control power without interruption to any other digi- tal controller. F. Agency Listing: UL 916 [UL 864]. 2.11 SURGE PROTECTION A. Provide Surge and transient protection consisting of devices installed externally to digital con- trollers and operator workstations. B. Power Line Surge Protection Surge suppressers external to digital controller, shall be installed on all incoming AC power. Surge suppresser shall be rated by UL 1449, and have clamping voltage ratings below the following levels: 1. Normal Mode (Line to Neutral): 350 Volts. 2. Common Mode (Line to Ground): 350 Volts. C. Telephone and Communication Line Surge Protection: Metal oxide varistor (MOV) protection or equivalent, rated for the application, shall be installed at the equipment. Additional protec- tion, gas tubes rated for the application, shall be installed within 3 feet of the building cable en- trance or within 3 feet of the telephone company's network interface. D. Sensor and Control Wiring Surge Protection: Controllers shall have sensor and control wiring surge protection with optical isolation, metal oxide varistors (MOV), or silicon avalanche de- vices. Fuses are not permitted for surge protection. 2.12 WIRING A. Provide complete electric wiring for temperature control apparatus, including transformer pri- maries. Control circuit conductors which run in the same conduit as power circuit conductors shall have the same insulation level as power circuit conductors. B. AC Control Wiring 1. Control wiring for 24 V circuits shall be insulated copper 18 AWG minimum and shall be rated for 300 VAC service. 2. Wiring for 120 VAC shall be 14 AWG minimum and shall be rated for 600 VAC service. C. DDC Analog Signal Wiring: Analog signal wiring for analog inputs and analog outputs shall be 18 AWG single or multiple twisted pair. Each pair greater than one shall be 100 percent shielded, and have 20 AWG drain wire. Exception is direct connect RTD wiring which shall be 18 AWG minimum twisted pair, 100 percent shielded, and with 20 AWG drain wire. Each wire DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 17 WESTFIELD SHOPP1NGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION shall have insulation rated to 300 VAC. Cables shall have an overall aluminum -polyester or tinned -copper cable -shield tape, overall 20 AWG tinned copper cable drain wire, and overall cable insulation rated to 300 VAC. D. Plenum Cable: Plenum cable shall be UL approved for use only in accessible ceiling spaces. Plenum cable external to electrical raceway is permissible in the following locations: 1. Stand alone DDC communication trunk serving application specific controllers within a building. 2. DDC system sensor wire installed above suspended accessible ceilings. 2.13 CONTROL COMPONENTS A. Temperature Sensors: 1. Duct or Pipe Temperature sensors shall be nickel or platinum type RTD's, factory cali- brated within plus or minus [0.1][0.5] degrees F. 2. Use insertion elements in ducts not effected by temperature stratification. Use averaging elements in duct prone to stratification with length at least the widest dimension of the duct cross section. 3. Insertion elements for liquids shall be stainless steel encased and matched with the tem- perature wells installed with a minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches. 4. Provide outside air temperature sensors with watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct rays of sun. 5. Room Temperature Sensors: Analog or thermistor type complete with mounting bracket, blank vertical locking cover. Each room temperature sensor shall be provided with an in- tegral terminal jack for portable operators terminal interface. [Provide with metal guards in gytnnasium.][Provide momentary push-button type override switch inte- gral to room temperature sensor and cover.] B. Spans and Ranges 1. Temperature: a. 50 degrees F span: Room, chilled water, cooling coil discharge air, return air sen- sors. b. 100 degrees F span: Outside air, hot water, heating coil discharge air, mixed air sensors. c. 200 degrees F span: High temperature hot water, heating hot water, chilled/hot wa- ter system sensors. 2. Pressure: a. [-0.5 to 0.5][-0.25 to .25] inches of water differential range: Static pressure of rooms. b. [0 to 2][0 to 5] inches of water differential range: Duct static pressure. c. [0 to 60][0 to 100][0 to 200] PSI differential range: Pumps. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 18 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3. Humidity: *gr" "" a. 0-100 percent relative humidity. C. Differential Static Pressure Sensors/Transmitters: Provide integral pressure transducer and transmitter. Output of pressure instrument shall be 4-20 mA signal proportional to the pressure span. Accuracy shall be 1.0 -percent, linearity shall be 0.1 -percent. Supply voltage shall be 24 V. Unidirectional with range not exceeding 150 -percent of maximum expected input. D. Relative Humidity Transmitters: Provide integral humidity transducer and transmitter. Output of relative humidity instrument shall be a 4 to 20 milliampere signal proportional to 0 to 100 percent relative humidity input. Accuracy shall be 2 percent of full scale within the range 20 to 80 percent relative humidity. Sensing element shall be chilled mirror type, polymer, or thin film polymer type. Supply voltage shall be 24 V dc. E. VAV Terminal Box Control Components: 1. Actuator: Provide DDC manufacturer's standard DDC system compatible VAV terminal unit damper actuator for each terminal unit. VAV terminal unit actuator shall be [field installed][provided to the terminal box manufacturer for factory installation]. 2. Air Flow Sensor: Sensor shall be provided by VAV terminal unit manufacturer. 3. Differential Pressure Transducer: Provide DDC manufacturer's standard DDC system compatible VAV terminal unit differential pressure transducer for each VAV terminal unit. VAV terminal unit pressure transducer for [field installed][provided to the termi- nal box manufacturer for factory installation]. The differential pressure transducer shall accept air flow measurement signal from the terminal box air flow sensor. F. Actuators: Provide for all motor -operated dampers, valves and AHU Fan Flow Control Device of sufficient size and type, matched to application and operating temperature/pressures. 1. Electric or Electronic Actuators: Provide with solid state positioner to stop automatically at end of travel. Complete with permanently lubricated gear train. Provide analog, cur- rent proportional, or 2 -position actuators with [visual position indication]. Provide with spring return to normally -open or normally -closed on loss of control power. Power re- turn type actuators shall not be acceptable. Substitution for 3 -point floating type actua- tors suitable for pulse width modulation control in lieu of analog type actuators shall be permitted only for Terminal Units, Unit Heaters, Fan Coil Units, Cabinet Heaters, Fin- ned Tube Radiation, and Convectors. Use of non -analog type actuators for any other ap- plications shall not be allowed without prior approval. [Provide position feedback for actuators as specified in "DDC Point List".] 2. [Pneumatic actuators: Provide proportional or two position actuators with spring return to normal position on loss of control air. Positive positioning devices shall be provided for sequencing between controlled devices to prevent overlap and/or for controlled variable stability.] G. Control Dampers: Provide low leakage control dampers where not furnished with package units. Damper leakage rate shall not exceed 0.5 percent (of damper based on 2000 fpm duct ve- locity) when closed against 4 -inch water gage static pressure; complete with extruded alumi- num, stainless steel or zinc -coated steel blades, with extruded vinyl or rubber edge seals: blade DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 19 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION ends sealed with aluminum or stainless steel "arc" seals. External frame of heavy gage welded steel with 1/4 -inch plate bearing bars and bronze insert bearings. [Coordinate with Ductwork and Accessories section for installation provisions]. H. Control Valves: Valves shall have stainless steel stems and stuffing boxes with extended necks to clear the piping insulation. Valve bodies shall be designed for not less than 125 psig working pressure or 150 percent of the system operating pressure, whichever is greater. Valve leakage rating shall be 0.01 percent of rated Cv. Unless otherwise specified, bodies for valves 1-1/2 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze, with threaded or union ends; bodies for 2 inch valves shall have threaded ends; and bodies for 2 inches to 3 inches shall be of brass, bronze or iron. Bodies for valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be provided with flanged -end connections. Valve Cv shall be within 100 to 125 percent of the calculated Cv. Valves shall provide effec- tive control at any pressure differential [to 50][at full pump head] psig with a minimum of 100:1 turndown. Pressure drop not to exceed [5] psig at maximum flow rate for hydronic sys- tems. 1. Two -Way Valves: Two-way modulating valves shall have equal -percentage characteris- tics. 2. Three -Way Valves: Three-way valves shall provide linear flow control with constant to- tal flow throughout full plug travel. 3. Valves for Chilled -Water and Condenser -Water: Internal valve trim shall be bronze ex- cept that valve stems may be type 316 stainless steel. Valves 4 inches and larger shall be butterfly. 4. Valves for Hot -Water Service Below 250 degrees F: Internal trim (including seats, seat rings, modulating plugs, and springs) of valves controlling water hotter than 210 degrees F shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Internal trim for valves controlling water 210 degrees F or less shall be brass or bronze. Nonmetallic parts of hot-water control valves shall be suitable for a minimum continuous operating temperature of 250 degrees F or 50 degrees F above the system design temperature, whichever is higher. 5. Valves for Steam Service: Bodies for valves 4 inches and larger shall be iron. Internal valve trim shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Steam valves shall have linear characteris- tics. I. Control Panels: Provide for controls and instruments. Panels shall be UL listed, NEMA type rated for application and location, surface or flush mounted panel as indicated with key locked door with continuous hinge. Manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish. J. Differential Pressure Switches: 1. Filter Status: Diaphragm operated which actuate a SPDT snap action switch. A field ad- justable pressure set point with a range suitable for air flow status applications. The switch voltage and current rating shall be double the load requirements. Provide sensing tubes connected to tips with multiple holes and bulkhead fittings specifically designed for air flow sensing. 2. High Limit Differential Pressure Switches: Pressure switches shall incorporate gauge and switch point indicator(s) for continuous indication of applied pressure and switch set- tings. Diaphragm operated with switching accomplished by photocell controlled relays. Set point adjustment controlled by knobs. Complete with high set point latching circuit DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 20 Niftie WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION and external push-button switch for manual reset. Range 0-8 inches water gauge. Dwyer Series 3000 or equal. 3. Pump Status: Provide with form -C contacts, automatic reset, screw -adjustable trip point, all components non -corrosive; wetted parts shall consist of a Buna-N diaphragm with 0 - ring seal; complete with NEMA rated enclosure suitable for application. Select operating range to match function. Provide instrument gage valve for each input. K. Current Transmitters: Provide to monitor amperage of motor or electrical equipment. Designed to convert monitored AC current to a proportional DC voltage of 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA output. Range 1 to 10, 50, 100 amps as required. Accuracy 1 -percent of full scale. Repeatability plus or minus 2 -percent of full scale. Response time 100 milliseconds. L. Current Sensing Relay: Provide 100 -percent solid state with adjustable range (+/- 1 -percent of range) trip setpoint to monitor AC current. Provide with contact transfer with no calibration drift, complete with LED status indicator. Limit off -state leakage to 2 mA or less. Rating (200 ampere minimum) shall exceed equipment being monitored. M. Indoor Air Quality Sensors: Provide CO2 sensors (duct or wall mounted) with integral trans- ducers. Output signal shall be 4 to 20 mA or 0-10 VDC. Accuracy shall be +5 percent. [Com- plete with calibration kit] N. Control Relays: Shall be rated for the application, with a minimum of two sets of Form C con- tacts, enclosed in a dustproof enclosure. Relays shall be rated for a minimum life of one million operations. Operating time shall be 20 milliseconds or less, with release time of 10 millisec- onds or less. Relays should be equipped with coil transient suppression devices to limit tran- sients to 150 percent of rated coil voltage. O. Low Limit Thermostat: DPDT, incremental bulb type; actuates if any 12 -inch maximum incre- ment is below its setting; adjustable setting, manual reset. Provide capillary element length of 2.14 equaling 2.14 square feet of coil area per foot capillary element. One DPDT contact shall shut down equipment and the second contact shall signal the DDC system. P. Contactors: Single coil electrically operated. Contacts shall be double break silver to silver. Number of contacts and rating shall be selected for the application intended. Operating and re- lease times shall be 100 milliseconds or less. Contactors shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices to limit transients to 150 percent of rated coil voltage. Q. Transformer: Provide transformers shall conformance to UL 506. Power digital controllers on the primary communication trunk from dedicated circuit breakers. Provide a fuse cutout on the secondary side of the transformer. R. Nameplates: Laminated plastic 1/16 -inch thick with neatly beveled edges and screwed to panel. Color shall be black with 0.375 -inch white engraved block lettering. S. Temperature Indication: Provide Bimetal dial type indicator suitable for duct -mounted air sens- ing as indicated. If readability is not possible with duct -mounted thermometers, provide remote bulb dial type mounted for easy reading and labeled to identify temperature as indicated; 3 -inch dial, range 0-160 F. Accuracy: 2 -percent of full range. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM Novi 15975 21 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION T. Pressure Indication: Provide gage range so normal pressures are approximately equal to the midpoint readings on the scale, unless otherwise specified, as indicated. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 2 percent of the range. Gages for differential pressure measurements shall be 4-1/2 inch (nominal) size with two sets of pressure taps and zero point adjustment. U. Refrigerant Detector: 1. Provide self-contained [R -11,][R -22,][R -123,][R -134a] refrigerant vapor detector capa- ble of detecting hazardous gas Levels at multiple locations. Minimum of 2 alarm contacts for separate and independent concentration levels. Complete with local audible and vis- ual alarms indications on preset alarm levels. 2. Manufacturer: Quatrosense Environmental Limited (QEL) Model QAS or approved equal. V. Carbon Monoxide Detector: 1. Provide self-contained carbon monoxide detection system. Complete portable gas genera- tor for calibration. 2. Single or multi -channel, dual level detectors, using solid state sensors with 3 -year mini- mum life, suitable over temperature range of 23 to 130 deg F, calibrated for 35 ppm and 100 ppm with maximum 2 -minute response time. 3. Manufacturers: a. Quatrosense Environmental Limited (QEL) Series 1000. b. MSA Instruments. W. Boiler Emergency Remote Shutdown Switches: Provide manually operated remote shutdown switches, palm -type, switch buttons that will shutdown the boiler systems. The emergency shutdown switches shall be clearly identified with signage. Emergency shutdown switches shall have a manual reset and shall be in accordance with ASME CSD -1, Direct Ignition System and Factory Mutual requirements. 2.14 FLOW MEASUREMENT A. Air Measuring Unit: 1. Manufacturer: Ebtron, Inc., Series 3000 and Series 4000 or approved equal. 2. Airflow and Temperature Measurement: Thermal anemometer using instrument -grade, self -heated thermistor sensors with thermistor temperature sensors. Flow measurement drift shall not exceed manufacturer's repeatability statement for the life of the equipment. Vortes sheeding arrays, pitot tube, differential pressure sensing arrays and auto -zeroing sensors are not acceptable. 3. Series 4000 Fan Inlet Sensor: a. Sensors: glass -encapsulated, self -heated thermistor with epoxy -encapsulated tem- perature sensor. b. Sensor Housing: Noryl. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 22 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION c. Sensors per Inlet: <12,000 CFM = 2; >12,000 CFM = 4. d. Support Struts: Tubular steel, adjustable to fit fan inlet with steel brackets. e. Electronics: Microprocessor -based solid state with NEC type CL2P cable. f. Performance: Electronics temperature range 30-160°F, flow station temperature range 30-160°F, flow station velocity range 0-10,000 FPM, analog output signals 4-20 mA, repeatability ±0.2% scale. 4. Series 3000 Duct -Mounted Sensor: a. Sensors: Glass -encapsulated, self -heated thermistor and epoxy -encapsulated tem- perature sensor. b. Sensor Housing: Noryl. c. Sensors per probe: 1 to 4. d. Electronics: Microprocessor -based, solid state. e. Performance: Electronics and flow station temperature range 20-160°F, flow sta- tion velocity range 0-5,000 FPM, analog output signals 4-20 mA, sensor velocity accuracy ±10 FPM <500 FPM, +2% of reading at velocities >500 FPM. B. Water Flow Meter: 1. [Provide turbine type meter complete with Hot Tap ball valve and installation hardware assembly suitable for service pressure and temperature. Manufacturer: Onicon F-1110 Series or approved equal.] 2. [ANSI B 16.5 Class 150 electromagnetic flow meter with integral sensor, counter and transmitter. Output of flow shall be 4-20 mA signal proportional to the span, complete with NEMA 4X Enclosure. Accuracy plus/minus 0.25% of rate. Manufac- turer: EMCO Model MAG 3100 sensor, remote wall mounted MAG 3000 Signal Converter.] C. Steam Flow Meter: 1. [Provide hot tap insertion turbine flowmeter with isolation valve to permit installa- tion and removal without process shutdown, suitable for service pressure and tem- perature. Output flow shall be 4-20 mA signal proportional to flow. Manufacturer: EMCO Turbo -bar or approved equal.] 2. [Provide hot tap insertion turbine flow meter with isolation valve to permit installa- tion and removal without process shutdown. Output of flow shall be 4-20 mA signal proportional to the span. Complete with pressure and temperature transmitters. Manufacturer: EMCO Turbo -bar Model TMP 600, G2 rotor (plus 2 spare rotors), with temperature transmitter (range: 212-400 F), pressure transmitter (range: 0- 150 psig), complete with full port 150 LB gate valve.] 3. [Steam Flow Processor: Provide processor for use with steam flow meter, complete with NEMA 4 enclosures. Manufacturer: EMCO FP -100 with Flo -link software, mechanical totalizer, and battery backup. Provide direct communication link to DDC system for monitoring, programming and printing.] D. Condensate Flow Meter: 23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 1. [Provide hot tap insertion flow meter with isolation valve, momentary DPDT relay output with frequency proportional to the flow rate. Paddle wheel type sensing mechanism suitable for minimum temperatures of 225 deg F. Complete with wa- terproof enclosure, counter and power converter. Manufacturer: Onicon Model F1200.] 2. [ANSI B 16.5 Class 300 electromagnetic flow meter with integral sensor, counter and transmitter. Ouput of flow shall be 4-20 mA signal proportional to the span, complete with NEMA 4X enclosure. Accuracy plus/minus 0.25% of rate. Manufac- turer: EMCO Model MAG 1100 sensor suitable for 390 deg F minimum fluid tem- perature, remote wall mounted MAG 3000 Signal Converter.] 2.15 [FIRE ALARM][SECURITY][LIGHTING CONTROLS] SYSTEM INTERFACE A. [Fire Alarm System Interface: Fire alarm system and air handling equipment smoke de- tectors shall be provided under Division 16 Section [ ]. Provide all hardware, software and wiring required for DDC system interface. Coordinate DDC requirements with Fire Alarm System Contractor.] B. [Security System Interface: Security system shall be provided under Section [ ]. Provide all hardware, software and wiring required for DDC system interface. Coordinate DDC requirements with Security System Contractor.] C. [Lighting Control System Interface: Occupancy sensors shall be provided under Section [ ]. Provide all hardware, software and wiring required for DDC system interface. Coordi- nate DDC requirements with Electrical Contractor.] 2.16 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE INTERFACE A. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) shall be provided under Division 15 Section [ ]. Provide all hardware, software and wiring required for DDC system interface. Coordinate DDC require- ments with VFD manufacturer. 2.17 UTILITY METERING A. Electrical Pulse Meter: Building Electric Pulse Initiator shall be provided under Section [ ]. Provide all hardware, software and wiring required for DDC interface. Coordinate DDC re- quirements with Electrical contractor. B. Natural Gas Pulse Meter: Provide to utility company a magnetic volume pulser for installation in the Gas Company's meter. Meter and installation cost shall be incurred by the controls con- tractor. Provide all hardware, software and wiring required for DDC interface. Manufacturer: Miners and Pisani or approved equal. C. Water Pulse Metering: Building water pulse generator shall be provided under Division 15 Sec- tion [Plumbing Specialties]. Provide all hardware, software and wiring required for DDC in- terface. Coordinate DDC requirements with water meter manufacturer. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 24 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.18 [PNEUMATIC CONTROL COMPONENTS A. IIP Transducer: Provide digital to pneumatic transducer to convert plus or minus 12 vdc pulse width modulation outputs or continuous proportional current or voltage to 0-20 psi. B. Control Air Piping 1. General: Control air supply is existing and shall be extended as required. 2. Copper tubing: ASTM B75 or ASTM B88. Tubing 0.375 -inch outside diameter and larger shall have a minimum wall thickness equal to ASTM B88, Type M. Tubing less than 0.375 -inch outside diameter shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.025 - inch. a. Concealed tubing shall be hard or soft copper: multiple tubing shall be racked or bundled. b. Exposed tubing shall be hard copper; rack multiple tubing. c. Fittings shall be solder type ANSI B16.18 or ANSI B16.22, using ASTM B32, 50-50 Lead -tin solder, or compression type ANSI 1316.26. 3. Polyethylene Tubing a. Flame -resistant, single or multiple polyethylene tubing in extruded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) protective sheath. b. Fittings shall be compression or barbed push -on type. 4. Air Pressure Gauges: 1-1/2 inch minimum diameter, 0-30 psi scale; Provide on con- trol signal tubing and main control air. C. Control Air Supply 1. Air Compressor: [Single][Duplex] tank mounted air compressor complete with in- tegral motor starters, [alternator, lead -lag controls,] and belt guard. Size compres- sor to run not more than 33 -percent of the time with full system load. Tank shall be ASME constructed for 150 psig. 2. Refrigerated Air Dryer: Packaged unit complete with 3 micron filter/separator, pressure reducing station, gauges, hot gas bypass valve, automatic condensate drain (pipe to nearest floor drain), non -cycling compressor, and two by-pass valves to fa- cilitate removal of heat exchanger and/or oil filter. Size dryer for continuous opera- tion to reduce the compressed air dew point temperature at 20 psig output pressure to 20 degrees F with average tank pressure of 80 psig and ambient temperature be- tween 50 and 95 degrees F. 3. Air Pressure Reducing Valve Station: Air pressure reducing valve station(s) com- plete with filter, pressure relief valve, pressure gauges, mounting bracket and shut- off valves shall be provided as required for control air main requirements. 4. Air Pressure Gauges: 1-1/2 inch minimum diameter, 0-30 psi scale; Provide on all control signal tubing and control air mains.] DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 25 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. B. Notify the Owner Representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION (GENERAL) A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide all miscellaneous devices, hardware, software, interconnections installation and pro- gramming required to insure a complete operating system in accordance with the sequences of operation and point schedules. 3.3 LOCATION AND INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS A. Locate and install components for easy accessibility; in general, mount 60 -inches (panels meas- ured from top edge) above floor with minimum 3'-0" clear access space in front of units. B. All instruments, switches, transmitters, etc., shall be suitably wired and mounted to protect them from vibration and high temperature. C. Identification: Provide permanently mounted tags to all instruments with point address designa- tion, system reference and description. Label all wiring, tubing at each end to match control diagrams. D. Control Panels 1. Provide for controls and instruments at equipment and in mechanical room. 2. Install temperature gages and pilot lights flush on the cabinet door. Install controllers, switches, timers, transformers, and relays in the interior of the cabinet; mount on a steel or aluminum subpanel or on the back panel of the cabinet. Provide and label control pa- rameters and test points within the panel for total evaluation of system operation. Elec- trical controls shall be wired to numbered screw type terminal strips. E. Digital Controllers: 1. Provide DDC controllers configured to control a single mechanical system such as an air handling unit, terminal unit, chilled water system, heating water system, etc., to operate a system in a complete standalone mode. DDC controllers shall be able to operate and con- trol respective system upon loss of DDC system network communication. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 26 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 2. Provide digital control cabinets that protect digital controller electronics from dust, at lo- cations shown on the drawings. 3. Provide a disconnect power switch and surge protector for each digital controller. F. Temperature Sensors: Provide temperature sensors in locations to sense the appropriate condi- tion. Provide sensor where they are easy to access and service without special tools. Calibrate sensors to accuracy specified. In no case will sensors designed for one application be installed for another application. 1. Room Temperature Sensors: Provide on interior walls to sense average room tempera- ture conditions. Avoid locations which may be covered by office furniture. Room tem- perature sensors should not be mounted on exterior walls when other locations are avail- able. Unless otherwise indicated, mount centerline of sensor at 5 feet above finished floor. 2. Duct Temperature Sensors: a. Select specific sensor location within duct to accurately sense appropriate air tem- peratures. Do not locate sensors in dead air spaces or positions obstructed by ducts or equipment. Install gaskets between the sensor housing and duct wall. Seal duct and insulation penetrations. b. Install duct averaging sensors, freeze protection sensors, between two rigid sup- ports in a serpentine position to sense average conditions. Thermally isolate tem- perature -sensing elements from supports. Provide duct access doors to averaging sensors. 3. Immersion Temperature Sensors: Provide thermowells for sensors measuring tempera- tures in liquid applications or pressure vessels. Locate wells to sense continuous flow conditions. Do not install wells using extension couplings. Where piping diameters are smaller than the length of the wells, provide wells in piping at elbows to effect proper flow across entire area of well. Wells shall not restrict flow area to less than 70 percent of the pipe area. Increase piping size as required to avoid restriction. Provide thermow- ells with thermal transmission material within the well to speed the response of tempera- ture measurement. Provide wells with sealing nuts to contain the thermal transmission material. 4. Outside Air Temperature Sensors: Provide outside air temperature sensor on north side of the building, away from exhaust hoods, air intakes and other areas that may affect temperature readings. Provide sunshields to protect outside air sensor from direct sun- light. G. Damper Actuators: Actuators shall not be mounted in the air stream. H. Thermometers: Provide thermometers at locations indicated. Mount thermometers to allow readability when standing on the floor. I. Pressure Sensors: 1. Differential Pressure: 27 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION a. General: Install pressure sensing tips in locations to sense appropriate pressure conditions. b. Duct Static Pressure Sensing: Locate duct static pressure tip approximately two- thirds of distance from supply fan to end of duct with the greatest pressure drop. c. Pumping Proof with Differential Pressure Switches: Install high pressure side be- tween pump discharge and check valve. d. Steam Pressure Sensing: Install snubbers and isolation valves on steam pressure sensing applications. 2. Pressure Gages: Install pressure gages at locations indicated. Mount pressure gages to allow readability while standing on the floor. Pneumatic output lines shall have pressure gages mounted near the digital controllers. J. Flow Measurement: Install and locate per manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 CONTROL WIRING AND CONDUIT A. All control wiring, all conduit for control wiring, and all miscellaneous accessory equipment for control wiring systems shall be provided by the Control Subcontractor as part of the control sys- tem. Conform to Division 16 requirements, NFPA 70, and all local code requirements. B. All wiring in or through mechanical rooms, finished spaces, on roofs, in walls, below grade and inside equipment (except within control wiring compartments or control panels) shall be in- stalled in conduit and properly supported. Label wire groups to match corresponding wiring diagrams. C. Plenum Cable: Plenum cable type, installation methods and use shall be subject to City and State Codes and Regulations. Within ceiling space, attach directly to wall or slab on 4 -foot cen- ters, or support from ceiling suspension wires on 4 -foot centers. Do not attach cables to pipes or ducts, or lay on ceilings. Cables shall be routed as high as possible without interference to equipment, ceiling, lighting access and removal. D. Instrumentation and communication cable shall not be run together in the same conduit or race- way as power wiring. E. Communication Cable: Provide all communication wiring between operator workstation and standalone DDC panels, between standalone DDC panels and application specific controllers such as AHU, Unitary or VAV digital controllers. All communication cable shall be checked for continuity, grounding, and shielding. [Local area network communication wiring between operator workstations and standalone DDC panels shall be in conduit.] F. Grounding: Ground controllers and cabinets to a good earth ground. Grounding of the green AC ground wire, at the breaker panel, alone is not adequate. Run metal conduit from controller panels to adequate building grounds. Ground sensor drain wire shields at controller end. All associated ground loop problems shall be corrected. G. Power provisions for the DDC system shall be provided by Division 16 to the locations indi- cated. Provide additional power requirements for any other components from nearest electrical DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 28 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION panel. Provide additional circuit breakers rated and labeled for service. Unless approved by the Electrical Engineer, spare breakers shall not be used. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor. H. Provide interface control wiring for equipment with remote sensors, panels, limits, and compo- nents, etc., to serve specified control functions. Materials, wiring and termination shall be pro- vided and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. 1. Chillers: Flow switches and temperature sensors. 2. Humidifiers: High limit sensors. 3. Boilers: Temperature sensors, remote control panel. 4. Kitchen Hood: Temperature sensors, filter switches, remote control panel. 5. Cooling Towers: Sump heater temperature sensor, level switches, and controls. 6. Pumping Package: Flow sensors and differential pressure sensors. 7. Indoor/Outdoor Split Unit: Evaporation/condenser sections. 8. AC Unit: Temperature, humidity and control panels. 9. Boiler Emergency Shutdown Switches: Provide interface wiring between each remote shutdown switch and the boiler controls. 3.5 [AIR PIPING A. Use copper tubing where subject to damage or temperatures in excess of 200 degrees F, where adjacent to heating pipes passing through common sleeve, and where not readily accessible. B. Exposed or Inaccessible Areas: Copper or single/bundled plastic tubing shall be provided with a tray, conduit or raceway with suitable junction boxes. Attached directly to wall or ceiling, 4 feet on centers, using pipe clamps; or install in metal trays supported by steel rod hangers, installed within 6 inches of slabs. Do not attach any tubing to pipes and ducts. C. Concealed Accessible Areas: Flame resistant polyethylene tubing may be used when con- cealed in walls or above ceilings and within control panels. Attach directly to wall or slab on 4 -foot centers, or support from ceiling suspension wires on 4 -foot centers using bridle rings and Erico "Caddy" Cat. No. 2-1-2-4 spring clips. Do not install any tubing attached to pipes or ducts, or laid on ceilings. D. Tubing Identification: Tubing shall be provided with identification tags. E. Test: Compressed air piping at 30% over operating pressure. Blow out clean before at- tachment ttachment of any control instrumentation.] 3.6 DDC POINT SUMMARY A. Provide all Data -base generation. B. Dynamic Color Display: Provide alI dynamic graphic displays at operator workstation [and at Facility Central Operator Workstation]. System graphical displays shall be color coded. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 29 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION Provide outside air temperature indication on all [air handling units, chilled water and heat- ing water system] displays. As a minimum, the following shall be provided: 1. Site Plan: Overall site plan, including all associated buildings. 2. Building Floor Plan: Each floor plan graphic shall contain all graphical displays, equip- ment with area served, and locations associated with that building floor plan. 3. Detailed Dynamic Color and data system graphics shall be provided for each piece of mechanical equipment including, but not limited to, [air handling units, chilled water system, heating water system, exhaust fans, domestic water systems, and make-up air unit]. 4. Provide equipment run status, alarms, and analog variables for each system. 5. Details, colors, and graphics shall be approved by the Owner prior to generation. C. Runtime Totalization: At a minimum, runtime totalization shall be incorporated, but not limited to, each monitored [supply fan, return fan, exhaust fan, hot and chilled water pumps, and hot water recirculation pumps]. Warning limits for each point shall be entered with owner de- fined messages. D. Trend Log: All binary and analog points shall be trended. Historical archiving of owner se- lected points shall be provided at the operator workstation [and/or at the Facility Central Op- erator Workstation] with the capability of transfer to graphic format representation. E. Alarm Points: All analog inputs (High/Low Limits) and selected digital inputs [audible] alarm points shall be prioritized, printed, routed, [auto -dial] with alarm message per owner's require- ments. Loss of communication network shall also initiate an alarm. [If the numbers are busy, retry until successful.] Provide all software timers necessary to prevent false alarms. F. Heavy Equipment Delays and Power Fail Restart Software: Each stand alone DDC panel shall be provided with heavy equipment and power fail restart application software. Each stand alone DDC panel shall start respective equipment in sequence and shall be time based and not de- pendent on prior system start-up. G. Database Save: Provide back-up database for all stand alone DDC panels at the operator work- station [and at the Facility Central Operator Workstation] computer hard disk. Provide ad- ditional back-up database for each stand alone DDC panel on floppy disk. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING A. Demonstrate compliance of the HVAC control system with the contract documents. Calibrate instrumentation and controls and verify the specified accuracy using calibrated test equipment. Adjust controls and equipment to maintain conditions indicated, to perform functions indicated, and to operate in the sequence specified. Furnish personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform calibration and site testing. Ensure that tests are performed by competent employees of the DDC system installer or the DDC system manufacturer regularly employed in the testing and calibration of DDC systems. Calibrate field equipment and verify equipment and system operation before placing the system on-line. Field testing will be wit- nessed by the Owner or Owner's representative and shall include the following: DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 30 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 1. System Inspection: Observe the HVAC system in its shutdown condition. Provide end- to-end wiring checkout. Check dampers and valves for proper normal positions. Docu- ment each position for the test report. 2. Calibration Accuracy and Operation of Inputs Test: Check for proper calibration and op- eration of' each input instrument. For each sensor (temperature), record the reading at the sensor, and using a traceable test equipment, and record the reading at the digital control- ler. Document each reading for the test report. 3. Operation of Outputs Test: Check the operation of each output to verify correct opera- tion. Command analog outputs to minimum range, such as 4 mA, and maximum range, such as 20 mA, measure and record commanded and actual output values. Document each command and result for the test report. 4. Actuator Range Adjustment Test: With the digital controller, apply a control signal to each actuator and verify that the actuator operates properly from its normal position to full range of stroke position. Record actual spring ranges and normal positions for all modulating control valves and dampers. Include documentation in the test report. 5. Digital Controller Start-up and Memory Test: Demonstrate that programming is not lost after a power failure, and digital controllers automatically resume proper control after a power failure. 6. Surge Protection: Show that surge protection, meeting the requirements of this specifica- tion, has been installed on incoming power to the digital controllers and on communica- tion lines, 7. Application Software Operation Test: Test compliance of the application for: a. Ability to communicate with the digital controllers, uploading and downloading of programs b. Text editing program: Demonstrate the ability to edit the control program off line c. Reporting of alarm conditions: Cause alarm conditions for each alarm, and ensure that workstation receives alarms d. Reporting trend and status reports: Demonstrate ability of software to receive and save trend and status reports e. Execution of Sequence of Operation: Furnish graphic trends to show the sequence of operation is executed in correct order. Demonstrate the HVAC system operates properly through the complete sequence of operation, for example seasonal, opti- mal start/warm-up, and occupied/unoccupied modes of operation. Demonstrate proper control system response for abnormal conditions for which there is a speci- fied response by simulating these conditions. Demonstrate hardware interlocks and safeties work. Demonstrate the control system performs the correct sequence of control after a loss of power f. Control Loop Stability and Accuracy: Furnish graphic trends of control loops to demonstrate the control loop is stable and that set point is maintained. Control loop response shall respond to set point changes and stabilize within 1 minute g. Opposite Season Test: Testing shall be repeated for opposite season. B. Document all tests with detailed results. Provide statement that all corrective action taken. In- clude test report in Operation and Maintenance Manuals. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 31 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.8 TRAINING A. Upon substantial completion of the mechanical system work, furnish the services of a compe- tent technician regularly employed by the DDC manufacturer for the instruction of facility per- sonnel in the operation and maintenance of each DDC system at project site. Provide a mini- mum of [40] hours for training. B. Furnish a written test plan and training schedule for approval 15 days prior to instructing operat- ing personnel including the following: 1. Recommended training schedule for operators workstation, standalone DDC controllers, Application specific digital controllers and field components, 2. List of all training materials, aids, etc. 3. List of customer training schools offered by the DDC manufacturer. C. Provide all training and materials necessary for a minimum of [two][five][ ] facility personnel, including: 1. Operations and Maintenance Manual 2. As -Built control diagrams 3. Detailed description of the system 4. Complete listing, graphical logic diagrams of all software programs required to perform the sequence of operation 5. Commands, operating and trouble shooting instruction and routine maintenance proce- dures. 6. Theory of operations 7. Hardware architecture 8, Operation of system 9. Operator Commands 10. Control sequence programming 11. Data base entry 12. Reports and logs 13. Alarm reports 14. Diagnostics. 15. Physical layout of each piece of hardware 16. Troubleshooting and diagnostics procedures 17. Repair instructions 18. Preventive maintenance procedures and schedules 19. Calibration procedures, D. Provide additional training for a total of [8][12][ ] hours between 3 and 6 months after project completion. Training to address specific topics that the facility personnel need to discuss and to answer questions concerning operation of the system. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 32 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION PART 4 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 4.1 GENERAL A. All controls shall be by the DDC system unless indicated to be by local controls. B. The DDC system shall schedule each system or zone independently per owner's operating schedule. All operating schedules shall be confirmed with Owner and adjusted as necessary. 4.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS A. [Sequence of Operation as indicated on Drawings.] PART 5 - DDC POINT LIST 5.1 GENERAL A. As a minimum, provide the following DDC points for monitoring and control [including all ex- isting systems]. Provide additional points as required to accomplish the sequence of operation. 5.2 ABBREVIATIONS A Summary Alarm AHU Air Handling Unit AI Analog Input AMU Air Measuring Unit AO Analog Output AUX Auxiliary Device or Contact CR Control Relay CS Current Sensor CT Current Transmitter DPH Differential Pressure Switch — High Limit DPL Differential Pressure Switch — Low Limit DDC Direct Digital Control DI Digital Input DP Differential Pressure Switch DPS Differential Pressure Sensor/Transmitter DO Digital Output FM Flow Meter FPT Freeze Protection Thermostat FS Flow Switch IAQ Indoor Air Quality LS Level Switch MOD Modulating Damper DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM '' 15975 33 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION NC Normally Closed NO Normally Open PB Push -Button PI Pulse Input PM Pulse Meter or Initiator SCR Silicon Rectifier SD Smoke Detector (Duct) SS Start/Stop T Temperature Sensor/Transmitter TCV Temperature Control Valve VAV Variable Air Volume VFD Variable Frequency Drive 5.3 POINT LIST A. Typical System Description Type Device B. Miscellaneous Monitoring Points Description Type Device Outside Air Temperature AI T Fire Alarm Panel DI AUX Electrical Consumption (KWH) Pulse PM Natural Gas Consumption (CFH) Pulse PM END OF SECTION 15975 34 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 15975 — DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages." 2. Division 15 Section "Variable Frequency Drives." 3. Division 15 Section "Packaged Commercial Rooftop Units." 4. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components, wiring and piping for equipment not directly controlled by the DDC system. B. Entire DDC system and components shall be U.L. Listed for application. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Control system consists of DDC controllers, sensors, indicators, actuators, final control ele- ments, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories connected to controllers to operate mechanical systems according to sequences of operation indicated or specified. B. The control system shall accommodate simultaneous multiple user operation. Access to the control system data should be limited only by operator password. Multiple users shall have ac- cess to all valid system data. An operator shall be able to log onto any workstation on the con- trol system and have access to all appropriate data. C. The control system shall be designed such that each mechanical system will be able to operate under stand-alone control. As such, in the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of any other controller, the control system shall continue to independently operate under con- trol. D. Communication between the control panels and all workstations shall be over a high-speed net- work. All nodes on this network shall be peers. The operator shall not have to know the panel identifier or location to view or control an object. Application Specific Controllers shall be constantly scanned by the network controllers to update point information and alarm informa- tion. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 1 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION E. The documentation is schematic in nature. The Contractor shall provide hardware and software necessary to implement the functions and sequences shown. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Divi- sion 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include manufacturer's technical Product Data for each control device furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance characteris- tics, electrical characteristics, fmishes of materials, installation instructions, and startup instruc- tions. C. Shop Drawings (AutoCAD 2000, AutoCAD 14 or latest version) from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. D. Shop Drawings containing the following information for each control system: 1. Schematic flow diagram showing fans, dampers, and control devices. 2. Each control device labeled with setting or adjustable range of control. 3. Diagrams for all required electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between factory - installed and field -installed wiring. Label/tag all field installed wiring. 4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 5. Detailed written description of control sequence of operation. 6. Communication trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations and trunk data conductors. 7. Listing of connected data points, including connected control unit and input device. 8. Color system graphics diagrams indicating monitored systems, data (connected and cal- culated) point addresses, and operator notations. 9. System configuration showing peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams, modems, and interconnections. 10. Software description and sequence of operation. E. Provide Point -to -Point Test and Field Quality Control and Testing Plans as outlined in Part 3, "Execution." Test Plans shall be used in final acceptance to verify operation of all points and control functions specified. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar components in other systems. B. Coordinate installation of DDC system components and control wiring and piping with installa- tion of mechanical systems equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units. C. Ensure each system is completed and commissioned. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 2 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION D. Coordinate and support test/balance contractor for all balancing requirements. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Maintenance data for control systems equipment to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Maintenance instructions and spare parts list (including unit cost) for each type of control device. 2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and devices. 3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances. 5. Calibration records and list of set points. B. Field Test Reports: Procedure and certification of control system. C. Project Record Documents: 1. Accurately record actual location of control components, including panels, controllers, thermostats, and sensors. 2. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences. 3. Include data specified in "Submittals" in final "Record Documents" form. 4. System software flow chart reflecting operating sequences. 5. Perform and Document results of Field Test Plan. 6. Certificate stating that control systems have been tested and adjusted for proper opera- tion. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer specializing in control system installa- tions. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing control systems similar to those indicated for this Project and that has a record of successful in-service perform- ance. C. Startup Personnel Qualifications: Engage specially trained personnel in direct employ of manu- facturer of primary control system. D. Comply with NFPA 70 and 90A. E. Comply with Underwriters Laboratories (UL). F. Federal Communications Commission — Part J. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 11411., 15975 3 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION G. ASHRAE/ANSI 135-1995 (BACnet). H. Electrical wiring shall comply with Division 16. I. Coordinate equipment selection with Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm Systems" and/or "Light- ing Systems" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system. J. All products used m this installation shall be new, currently under manufacture, and shall be ap- plied in similar installations for a minimum of 2 years. K. Perform calibration, testing and execution of sequence of operations. Provide software adjust- ments for stable operations and furnish trend logs to demonstrate system stability. Demonstrate to Owner or Owner's representative each system operation. 1.8 SERVICE AND GUARANTEE A. After completion of the system, including software, submit a warranty in accordance with Divi- sion 1. Provide all services, materials and equipment necessary for the successful operation of the DDC hardware and controls during the warranty period. Preventive maintenance shall be included. Software and data shall be revised and updated as necessary during warranty period to maintain system performance. B. During the warranty period provide a 24-hour emergency service number where a qualified automation service engineer familiar with the installed system may be reached. This engineer shall have the capability of remotely communicating with the system for troubleshooting and program alterations. The service shall have a maximum four—hour response for critical compo- nent failures. C. Provide inspection for opposite season to test, calibrate, and adjust controls; submit written re- port for each inspection. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather. B. Factory -Mounted Controls: Provide control devices to be factory mounted on equipment, ar- range for shipping and labeling control devices to unit manufacturer. Installation requirements, wiring schematics shall be furnished and coordinated directly with respective unit manufacturer. Unless otherwise indicated, cost associated with factory mounted controls and wiring shall be included under this section. Provide factory mounted controls for the following equipment: 1. Packaged Commercial Rooftop Units. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol- lowing: 1. Approved Manufacturers / Representatives: a. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. (Landis Division) / Seimens Building Tech- nologies, Inc. b. Alerton (IBEX) / Alerton Technologies Systems. c. Trane (Trace 700) / Trane Co. 2. Manufacturers Qualifications: A minimum of 5 (equivalent size and complexity of this project) operational systems within the last 5 years utilizing similar components located in the same State or within 100 miles of project site. Manufacturer or authorized manu- facturer's on-site service support shall also be available within the same location parame- ters indicated. 3. Installer Qualifications: By the District Office of the manufacturer as a subcontract, or by a firm regularly engaged in the installation of building direct digital HVAC control systems for a period of not less than 5 years. The entire control system shall be installed by qualified electricians and mechanics, all of whom are properly trained and qualified for the work they perform, and directly supervised by the local representative of the com- ponent manufacturer. 2.2 BASIC DDC SYSTEM A. General: The Direct Digital Control (DDC) System shall be fully integrated and installed as a complete package of controls and instrumentation. The system shall include, but not limited to, all computer software and hardware, operator input/output devices, sensors and controls re- quired for complete operation. Provide all wiring, installation, supervision and labor, including calibration, adjustments, operator training and checkout necessary for a complete and fully op- erating system. B. Dial -Up Communications: A telecommunication network shall integrate the DDC system to the Control Manufacturer's computer to support diagnostics and software upgrades. C. DDC system control components shall comply with ASHRAE 135 and Underwriter's Laborato- ries (U.L.). 2.3 OPERATOR WORKSTATION A. Provide a Personal Computer Workstation at project site for command entry, information man- agement, network alarm management, and database management functions. All real-time con- trol functions shall be resident in the Stand alone DDC panels. Workstation shall be general DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 5 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION purpose, commercially available, personal computer with sufficient memory and processor ca- pacity to perform all functions described in this specification. Provide sufficient hard drive disk storage to accommodate all fully configured point databases, all application databases, all graphics databases, all user -defined reports, and all historical data archives as described in this specification. Provide the capacity for future point expansion. System shall be able to support five times the initial point installation without system performance degeneration. Point shall be defined as individual line items on DDC point list. An allowance of $2,000 shall be allocated for each operator workstation, monitor and peripherals to provide a commercially available sys- tem at the time of project completion. System shall be provided with or upgraded to the latest and fastest processor, configured with standard peripherals and accessories available no less than 3 months prior to project completion date. As a minimum, system shall be configured as follows: 1. Operator Workstation: a. Provide an Intel Pentium 4 Processor 2.8GHz wl 512K L2 Advanced Transfer Cache and 533MHz FSB. 512 DDR SDRAM (1-512MB Module) expandable to 1024MB. 120GB UATA100 7200RPM Hard Drive. Integrated 1.44MB 3.5" floppy diskette drive. Integrated 16x/10x/24x CDRW / 8X DVD Combo. One Type II PCMCIA Card slot. (6) USB, Parallel, Serial, (2) Integrated IEEE 1394 (FireWire) and (2) PS/2. Headphone/Speaker, Line -in and Microphone Jacks. Complete with operator workstation software specified. 17.0" LCD Flat Panel Display. Integrated 32MB NVIDIA GeForce2 MX400 Graphics with VGA Out. Logitech Wireless Keyboard and Wireless Optical Mouse. V.92 56K Modem. In- tegrated 10/100 Ethernet. b. Provide power line surge protector. c. Coordinate with Owner. B. Printer 1. Provide industry standard and commercially available Printer (Data -Log and Alarm). C. Provide a telecommunication interface with automatic dial and answer capabilities to allow the control manufacturer to support diagnostics and software upgrades. Provide log -on security screening to prevent unauthorized access. D. Portable Operator's Terminal: Provide one portable full function operator terminals for operator readout of system variables, override control, servicing, trouble -shooting and adjustment of con- trol parameters. Provide all software and hardware necessary for interface at stand alone DDC panels, air handling unit digital controllers, unitary digital controllers, variable air volume ter- minal unit controllers, and at space temperature sensors. If a DDC panel, controller or sensor requires a different portable operator terminal for interface, provide one of each type. Complete with carrying case. 2.4 OPERATOR WORKSTATION SOFTWARE A. Command Entry/Menu Selection Process: Provide all software for a complete and operational system as described herein. Software shall include manufacturer's standard multi -tasking, multi-user operating system for operator consoles and controllers, network communication DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 6 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION software for dial-up and hard wired trunk applications, operator man -machine interface soft- ware, control application software and all other software necessary to provide the functions specified. Operator workstation shall use Microsoft "Windows or NT" operating platform. Op- erator Workstation interface software shall minimize operator training through the use of Eng- lish language prompting, English language point identification, and industry standard PC appli- cation software. The operator interface shall minimize the use of a typewriter style keyboard through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device, and "point and click" approach to menu selection. Users shall be able to start and stop equipment or change set points from graphical displays through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device. B. Password Protection: Multiple -level password access protection shall be provided to allow the user/manager to limit workstation control, display and database manipulation capabilities as he deems appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned password. 1. Passwords shall be exactly the same for all operator devices, including portable or panel - mounted network terminals. Any additions or changes made to password definition shall automatically cause passwords at all DDC panels on a network to be updated and down loaded to minimize the task of maintaining system security. Users shall not be required to update passwords for DDC panels individually. 2. A minimum of three levels of access shall be supported. 3. A minimum of 15 passwords shall be supported at each DDC panel. 4. Operators will be able to perform only those commands available for their respective passwords. Menu selections displayed at any operator device, including portable or panel mounted devices, shall be limited to only those items defined for the access level of the password used to log -on. 5. User -definable, automatic log -off timers of from 1 to 60 minutes shall be provided to prevent operators from inadvertently leaving devices on-line. C. Operator Commands: The operator interface shall allow the operator to perform commands in- cluding, but not limited to, the following: 1. Start-up or shutdown selected equipment. 2. Adjust set points. 3. Add/Modify/Delete time programming. 4. Enable/Disable process execution. 5. Lock/Unlock alarm reporting for each point. 6. Enable/Disable Totalization for each point. 7. Enable/Disable Trending for each point. 8. Override PID Loop set points. 9. Enter temporary override schedules. 10. Define Holiday Schedules. 11. Change time/date. 12. Enter/Modify analog alarm limits. 13. Enter/Modify analog warning limits. 14. View limits. 15. Enable/Disable Demand Limiting for each meter. 16. Enable/Disable Duty Cycle for each load. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 7 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION D. Dynamic Color Graphics Software: System software shall provide user interface through which viewing and commanding may be done using a "mouse" pointing device. The operator shall be able to access to any level of desired system information without being required to enter any commands from the keyboard. 1. Windowing: Windowing user interface shall be provided to allow operator to simultane- ously view several different types of system displays at the same time to analyze system operation (i.e. air handling unit equipment graphic display and several trend graph of as- sociated space temperatures simultaneously displayed). The system shall be capable of a graphic display associated with an alarm to be viewed without interrupting work in pro- gress. 2. Dynamic Data Displays: Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values, and status indication shall be shown in their respective locations, area served, and shall auto- matically update to represent current conditions without operator interface. 3. System Selection and Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu se- lection, or text based commands. Provide a logical penetration of graphical displays from a site plan on down to each level of digital controllers. 4. Graphics Generation: Graphics generation software shall be provided to allow the user to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays. A minimum of 15 colors shall be avail- able for use. Provide a library of pre-engineered screens and symbols depicting standard HVAC components (e.g. fans, filters, dampers, terminal units, etc.). E. Logs and Summaries: 1. Reports shall be generated automatically or manually, and directed to either CRT dis- plays, printers, or disk files. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily ob- tain the following types of reports: a. A general listing of all points in the network. b. List alI points currently in alarm. c. List of all off-line points. d. List all points currently in override status. e. List of all disabled points. f. List all points currently locked out. g. List of all items defined in a "follow-up" file. h. List all Weekly Schedules. i. List all Holiday Programming. i. List of Limits and Deadbands. 2. Summaries shall be provided for specific points, for a logical point group, for a user - selected group of groups, or for the entire facility without restriction due to the hardware configuration of the facility management system. Under no conditions shall the operator need to specify the address of hardware controller to obtain system information. F. System Configuration and Definition: All temperature and equipment control strategies and en- ergy management routines shall be definable by the operator. System defmition and modifica- tion procedures shall not interfere with normal system operation and control. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 8 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION G. The system shall be provided complete with all equipment and documentation necessary to al- low an operator to independently perform the following functions: 1. Add/Delete/Modify Stand alone DDC Panels. 2. Add/Delete/Modify Operator Workstations. 3. Add/Delete/Modify Application Specific Controllers. 4. Add/Delete/Modify points of any type, and all associated point parameters, and tuning constants. 5. Add/Delete/Modify alarm reporting definition for each point. 6. Add/Delete/Modify control loops. 7. Add/Delete/Modify energy management applications. 8. Add/Delete/Modify time- and calendar -based programming. 9. Add/Delete/Modify Totalization for every point. 10. Add/Delete/Modify Historical Data Trending for every point. 11. Add/Delete/Modify custom control processes. 12. Add/Delete/Modify any and all graphic displays, symbols, and cross-references to point data. 13. Add/Delete/Modify dial-up telecommunication definition. 14. Add/Delete/Modify all operator passwords. 15. Add/Delete/Modify Alarm Messages. H. Programming Description: The system shall permit an operator to create, modify and document all process control sequences including all DDC application software, energy management software, and alarm processes. Manufacturer latest technology programming methods shall be provided, i.e. modified basic, graphical or block programming format. I. Network -Wide Strategy Development: Inputs and outputs for any process shall not be restricted to a single stand alone DDC panel, but shall be able to include data from any stand alone DDC panel to allow the development of network -wide control strategies. Processes shall also allow the operator to use the results of one process as the input to any number of the other processes (cascading). J. System Definition/Control Sequence Documentation: All portions of system definition shall be documented to provide hard copy printouts of all configuration and application data. Control process and DDC control loop documentation shall be provided in logical, graphical or block flow diagram format to allow control sequences to be easily interpreted and modified at any time in the future. K. Database Save/Restore/Back-Up: Back-up copies of all stand alone DDC panel databases shall be stored in at central operator workstation. Continuous supervision of the integrity of all DDC panel data bases shall be provided. In the event that any DDC panel on the network experiences a loss of its data base for any reason, the user shall have the ability to manually execute to download a new copy or any portions of the respective data base to restore proper operation. L. Third Party Software Package: Provide the capability and capacity to run specific third party software packages for word processing, spreadsheets and database management programs and shall provide for on-line data transfer from DDC network or from archived historical data. Use of third party software shall operate concurrently with other tasks such as alarm logging, and DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 9 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION report data gathering. Provide software package to analyze trended point in graphic format with measured variable on y-axis and time variable on x-axis. 2.5 LOCAL AREA NETWORK A. Operator workstations and stand alone DDC panels shall reside directly on a local area network such that communications may be executed directly between controllers, directly between workstations, and between controllers and workstations on a peer to peer basis. All points con- nected to network shall be accessible through any operator workstation on the network. Any point on the network shall be available to any controller on the network for control loop proc- essing. B. All operator devices, either network resident or connected via dial-up modems, shall have the ability to access all point status and application report data, or execute control functions for any and all other devices via the local area network. Access to data shall be based upon logical identification of building equipment. Access to system data shall not be restricted by the hard- ware configuration of the facility management system. The hardware configuration of the net- work shall be transparent to the user when accessing data or developing control programs. C. Control Manufacture highest available speed data transfer rates shall be provided for all com- munications, alarm reporting, quick report generation from controllers, and upload/download efficiency between network devices. D. Provide synchronization of the real-time clocks in all DDC panels. E. Local Area network communication trunk and software shall support a minimum of 30 stand alone DDC panels or operator's workstations or any combination of both. 2.6 STAND ALONE DDC PANELS A. General: Standalone DDC panels shall be microprocessor based, multi -tasking, multi-user, real- time digital control processors. Modular in design and consisting of processor board with pro- grammable RAM memory, power supplies, and input/output modules. B. Each DDC panel shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data- bases including: 1. Control processes. 2. Energy Management Applications. 3. Alarm Management. 4. Historical/Trend Data for all points. 5. Maintenance Support Applications. 6. Custom Processes. 7. Operator I/O. 8. Dial -Up Communications. 9. Manual Override Monitoring. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 10 '40.1..J WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Each DDC panel shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs: I. Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts. 2. Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control. 3. Analog Inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow, and position measurements. 4. Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and speed capacity control of primary equipment. 5. Pulse Inputs for pulsed contact monitoring. 6. Spare points: Provide a minimum of two spare point for each Input/Output point type (not including pulse inputs). D. Each stand alone DDC panel communication trunk and software shall support a minimum of 100 controllers. Controllers shall consist of any combination of future application specific con- trollers such as air handling unit digital controllers, variable air volume terminal unit control- lers, and unitary controllers. E. Stand alone DDC panels shall be provided with at least two RS -232C serial data communication port for operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, portable operators terminals or portable lap -top computers. In lieu of above, one RS -232C serial data communication port and a local operator access and display panel shall be provided. F. Each DDC panel shall continuously perform self -diagnostics, communication diagnosis and di- agnosis of all subsidiary equipment. The DDC panel shall provide both local and remote an- nunciation of any detected component failures, or repeated failure to establish communication. Indication of the diagnostic results shall be provided at each DDC panel, and shall not require the connection of an operator 110 device. G. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all stand alone DDC panels to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data, and battery back-up shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all RAM memory. Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC panel shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention. Should DDC panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of reload- ing the DDC panel via the local area network, via the local RS -232C port, or via telephone line dial -in. H. Agency Listing: UL 916 and UL 864. 2.7 STANDALONE DDC PANEL SOFTWARE A. All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this specification shall be provided. The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an inte- gral part of the DDC panel and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for exe- cution. Provide multiple copies and licensing agreements as necessary to support the specified quantity of workstations and portable terminals, B. Pre -Tested Control Algorithms: The DDC panels shall have the ability to perform the following pre -tested control algorithms: '%8•0" 15975 DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 11 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 1. Two Position Control. 2. Proportional Control. 3. Proportional plus Integral Control. 4. Proportional, Integral, plus Derivative Control. 5. Automatic Control Loop Tuning. C. Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a provision for limiting the num- ber of tunes each piece of equipment may be cycled within any given time period. D. Heavy Equipment Delays: The system shall provide protection against excessive demand situa- tions during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive start commands to heavy electrical loads. E. Power Failure Motor Restart: Upon the resumption of normal power, the DDC panel shall ana- lyze the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy scheduling, and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operation, including start time delays as described above. F. Energy Management Applications 1. DDC Panels shall have the ability to perform any or all of the following energy manage- ment routines: a. Time of Day Scheduling. b. Calendar Based Scheduling. c. Holiday Scheduling. d. Temporary Schedule Overrides. e. Optimal Start. f. Optimal Stop. g. Night Setback Control. h. Enthalpy or Dry bulb Switch over (Economizer). i. Peak Demand Limiting. j, Temperature Compensated Load Rolling. k. Fan Speed/CFM Control. 1. Heating/Cooling Interlock. m. Enthalpy Control. n. Lighting Controls Interface. o. Power Monitoring Interface. 2. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention, and shall be flexible enough to allow user customization. Programs shall be applied to building equipment as described in the sequence of operation. G. Custom Process Programming Capability: DDC panels shall be able to execute custom, job - specific processes defined by the user, to automatically perform calculations and special control routines. 1. Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the following in a custom process: DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 12 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION a. Any system -measured point data or status b. Any calculated data c. Any results from other processes d. User -Defined Constants e. Arithmetic functions (+,-,*,/, square root, exp., etc.) - Boolean logic operators (and, or, exclusive or, etc.) - On-delay/Off-delay/One-shot timers. 2. Process Triggers: Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of the following: a. Time interval b. Time of day c. Date d. Other processes e. Time programming f. Events (e.g., point alarms). H. Dynamic Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any and all other DDC panels on the local area network. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other DDC panels on the local area network. Advisory/Message Generation: Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advi- sories to operator I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message to a specified device, buffer the information in a follow-up file, or cause the execution of a dial-up connection to a remote device such as a printer or pager. J. Custom Process Documentation: The custom control programming feature shall be self - documenting. All interrelationships defined by this feature shall be documented via graphics flowcharts and English language descriptors. K. Alarm Management: Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarm reports to operator devices and memory files. Each DDC panel shall perform distributed, inde- pendent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the DDC panel's ability to report alarms be affected by either operator activity at a PC Workstation or local I/O device, or communications with other panels on the network. 1. Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's English language description, and the time and date of occurrence. 2. Prioritization: The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point. Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to critical alarms. A minimum of three priority levels shall be provided. Each DDC panel shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point. The user shall also be able to define under which conditions point changes need to be acknowledged by an operator, and/or sent to follow-up files for retrieval and analysis at a later date. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 13 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3. Report Routing: Alarm reports, messages, and files will be directed to a user -defined list of operator devices, or PC's used for archiving alarm information. Alarms shall also be automatically directed to a default device in the event a primary device is found to be off- line. 4. Alarm Messages: In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be able to print, display or store an alarm message to more fully describe the alarm condition or direct operator response. 5. Alarms shall be generated for, but not limited to the following: ' a. Motor is commanded on or off but motor status input indicates no change. b. Room temperature or static pressure strays outside selectable limits. c. An analog input takes a value indicating sensor failure. d. A module or node is "dead" to the LAN. e. A power outage occurs. L. Historical Data and Trend Analysis: A variety of Historical data collection utilities shall be provided to automatically sample, store, and display system data in all of the following ways. 1. Point Histories: Stand alone DDC panels shall continuously and automatically sample the value of all analog inputs on a user defined time or change of state intervals. 2. Extended Sample Period Trends: Measured and calculated analog and binary data shall also be assign able to user -definable trends for the purpose of collecting operator speci- fied performance data over extended periods of time. Sample intervals shall be operator selected change of value based or time based shall be provided. Each stand alone DDC panel shall have a dedicated buffer for trend data. 3. Data Storage and Archiving: Trend data shall be stored at the Stand alone DDC panels, and uploaded to hard disk storage when archives is desired. Uploads shall occur based upon either user -defined interval, manual command, or when the trend buffers become full. M. Runtime Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall have the capability to automatically accu- mulate and store runtime hours for all binary input and output points. 1. The totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less. 2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for runtime totalization. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached. N. Analog/Pulse Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for user -selected analog and bi- nary pulse input -type points. 1. Totalization shall provide calculation and storage of accumulations of up to 99,999.9 units (e.g. KWH, gallons, KBTU, tons. etc.). 2. The totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less. 3. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 14 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION O. Event Totalization: Stand alone DDC panels shall have the ability to count events such as the number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event totalization shall be per- formed on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis. 1. The event totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a user de- fined minimum before reset. 2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached. P. Interlocking: 1. Permit events to occur, based on changing condition of one or more associated master points. 2. Binary contact, high/low limit of analog point or computed point shall be capable of be- ing utilized as master. Same master may monitor or command multiple slaves. 3. Operator Commands: a. Define single master/multiple master interlock process. b. Define logic interlock process. c. Lock/unlock program. d. Enable/disable interlock process. e. Execute/terminate interlock process. f. Request interlock type summary. 2.8 UNITARY CONTROLLERS A. Unitary Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the control of the following configura- tions of unitary equipment to address current requirements as described in the sequence of op- eration, and for future expansion: 1. Packaged Rooftops. 2. Fan Coils. 3. Cabinet Heaters. B. Unitary Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the speci- fied control sequences in a totally stand alone fashion. Application programs and parameter data shall be stored in nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). C. The modes of operation supported by the UV Controllers shall minimally include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Day/Weekly Schedule. 2. Comfort/Occupancy Mode. 3. Economy Mode (Standby Mode, Unoccupied, etc.). 4. Temporary Override Mode. D. The operator interface to any unitary controller point data or programs shall be through any network -resident PC workstation, any PC or portable operator's terminal connected to any DDC panel in the network, or through terminal jack at room temperature sensor. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 15 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION E. Provide NEMA enclosure rated for plenum use. A local disconnect shall be provided at each unitary controller to individually disconnect control power without interruption to any other digital controller. F. Agency Listing: UL 916 and UL 864. 2.9 SURGE PROTECTION A. Provide Surge and transient protection consisting of devices installed externally to digital con- trollers and operator workstations. B. Power Line Surge Protection Surge suppressers external to digital controller, shall be installed on all incoming AC power. Surge suppresser shall be rated by UL 1449, and have clamping voltage ratings below the following levels: 1. Normal Mode (Line to Neutral): 350 Volts. 2. Common Mode (Line to Ground): 350 Volts. C. Telephone and Communication Line Surge Protection: Metal oxide varistor (MOV) protection or equivalent, rated for the application, shall be installed at the equipment. Additional protec- tion, gas tubes rated for the application, shall be installed within 3 feet of the building cable en- trance or within 3 feet of the telephone company's network interface. D. Sensor and Control Wiring Surge Protection: Controllers shall have sensor and control wiring surge protection with optical isolation, metal oxide varistors (MOV), or silicon avalanche de- vices. Fuses are not permitted for surge protection. 2.10 WIRING A. Provide complete electric wiring for temperature control apparatus, including transformer pri- maries. Control circuit conductors which run in the same conduit as power circuit conductors shall have the same insulation level as power circuit conductors. B. AC Control Wiring 1. Control wiring for 24 V circuits shall be insulated copper 18 AWG minimum and shall be rated for 300 VAC service. 2. Wiring for 120 VAC shall be 14 AWG minimum and shall be rated for 600 VAC service. C. DDC Analog Signal Wiring: Analog signal wiring for analog inputs and analog outputs shall be 18 AWG single or multiple twisted pair. Each pair greater than one shall be 100 percent shielded, and have 20 AWG drain wire. Exception is direct connect RTD wiring which shall be 18 AWG minimum twisted pair, 100 percent shielded, and with 20 AWG drain wire. Each wire shall have insulation rated to 300 VAC. Cables shall have an overall aluminum -polyester or tinned -copper cable -shield tape, overall 20 AWG tinned copper cable drain wire, and overall cable insulation rated to 300 VAC. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 16 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION D. Plenum Cable: Plenum cable shall be UL approved for use only in accessible ceiling spaces. Plenum cable external to electrical raceway is permissible in the following locations: 1. Stand alone DDC communication trunk serving application specific controllers within a building. 2. DDC system sensor wire installed above suspended accessible ceilings. 2.11 CONTROL COMPONENTS A. Temperature Sensors: 1. Duct or Pipe Temperature sensors shall be nickel or platinum type RTD's, factory cali- brated within plus or minus 0.5 degrees F. 2. Use insertion elements in ducts not effected by temperature stratification. Use averaging elements in duct prone to stratification with length at least the widest dimension of the duct cross section. 3. Insertion elements for liquids shall be stainless steel encased and matched with the tem- perature wells installed with a minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches. 4. Provide outside air temperature sensors with watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct rays of sun. 5. Room Temperature Sensors: Analog or thermistor type complete with mounting bracket, blank vertical locking cover. Each room temperature sensor shall be provided with an in- tegral terminal jack for portable operators terminal interface. Provide momentary push- button type override switch integral to room temperature sensor and cover. B. Spans and Ranges 1. Temperature: a. 50 degrees F span: Room, cooling coil discharge air, return air sensors. b. 100 degrees F span: Outside air, heating coil discharge air, mixed air sensors. c. 200 degrees F span: Hot water system sensors. 2. Pressure: a. -0.25 to .25 inches of water differential range: Static pressure of rooms. b. 0 to 2 inches of water differential range: Duct static pressure. 3. Humidity: a. 0-100 percent relative humidity. C. Differential Static Pressure Sensors/Transmitters: Provide integral pressure transducer and transmitter. Output of pressure instrument shall be 4-20 mA signal proportional to the pressure span. Accuracy shall be 1.0 -percent, linearity shall be 0.1 -percent. Supply voltage shall be 24 V. Unidirectional with range not exceeding 150 -percent of maximum expected input. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 17 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION D. Relative Humidity Transmitters: Provide integral humidity transducer and transmitter. Output of relative humidity instrument shall be a 4 to 20 milliampere signal proportional to 0 to 100 percent relative humidity input. Accuracy shall be 2 percent of full scale within the range 20 to 80 percent relative humidity. Sensing element shall be chilled mirror type, polymer, or thin film polymer type. Supply 'voltage shall be 24 V dc. E. Actuators: Provide for all motor -operated dampers, valves and AHU Fan Flow Control Device of sufficient size and type, matched to application and operating temperature/pressures. 1. Electric or Electronic Actuators: Provide with solid state positioner to stop automatically at end of travel. Complete with permanently lubricated gear train. Provide analog, cur- rent proportional, or 2 -position actuators with visual position indication. Provide with spring return to normally -open or normally -closed on loss of control power. Power re- turn type actuators shall not be acceptable. Substitution for 3 -point floating type actua- tors suitable for pulse width modulation control in lieu of analog type actuators shall be pernutted only for Terminal Units. Use of non -analog type actuators for any other appli- cations shall not be allowed without prior approval. F. Control Dampers: Provide low leakage control dampers where not furnished with package units. Damper leakage rate shall not exceed 0.5 percent (of damper based on 2000 fpm duct ve- locity) when closed against 4 -inch water gage static pressure; complete with extruded alumi- num, stainless steel or zinc -coated steel blades, with extruded vinyl or rubber edge seals: blade ends sealed with aluminum or stainless steel "are" seals. External frame of heavy gage welded steel with 1/4 -inch plate bearing bars and bronze insert bearings. Coordinate with Ductwork and Accessories section for installation provisions. G. Control Panels: Provide for controls and instruments. Panels shall be UL listed, NEMA type �.► rated for application and location, surface or flush mounted panel as indicated with key locked door with continuous hinge. Manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish. H. Differential Pressure Switches: 1. Filter Status: Diaphragm operated which actuate a SPDT snap action switch. A field ad- justable pressure set point with a range suitable for air flow status applications. The switch voltage and current rating shall be double the load requirements. Provide sensing tubes connected to tips with multiple holes and bulkhead fittings specifically designed for air flow sensing. 2. High Limit Differential Pressure Switches: Pressure switches shall incorporate gauge and switch point indicator(s) for continuous indication of applied pressure and switch set- tings. Diaphragm operated with switching accomplished by photocell controlled relays. Set point adjustment controlled by knobs. Complete with high set point latching circuit and external push-button switch for manual reset. Range 0-8 inches water gauge. Dwyer Series 3000 or equal. Current Transmitters: Provide to monitor amperage of motor or electrical equipment. Designed to convert monitored AC current to a proportional DC voltage of 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA output. Range 1 to 10, 50, 100 amps as required. Accuracy 1 -percent of full scale. Repeatability plus or minus 2 -percent of full scale. Response time 100 milliseconds. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 18 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION J. Current Sensing Relay: Provide 100 -percent solid state with adjustable range (+1- 1 -percent of range) trip setpoint to monitor AC current. Provide with contact transfer with no calibration drift, complete with LED status indicator. Limit off -state leakage to 2 mA or less. Rating (200 ampere minimum) shall exceed equipment being monitored. K. Control Relays: Shall be rated for the application, with a minimum of two sets of Form C con- tacts, enclosed in a dustproof enclosure. Relays shall be rated for a minimum life of one million operations. Operating time shall be 20 milliseconds or less, with release time of 10 millisec- onds or less. Relays should be equipped with coil transient suppression devices to limit tran- sients to 150 percent of rated coil voltage. L. Low Limit Thermostat: DPDT, incremental bulb type; actuates if any 12 -inch maximum incre- ment is below its setting; adjustable setting, manual reset. Provide capillary element length of 2.14 equaling 2.14 square feet of coil area per foot capillary element. One DPDT contact shall shut down equipment and the second contact shall signal the DDC system. M. Contactors: Single coil electrically operated. Contacts shall be double break silver to silver. Number of contacts and rating shall be selected for the application intended. Operating and re- lease times shall be 100 milliseconds or less. Contactors shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices to limit transients to 150 percent of rated coil voltage. N. Transformer: Provide transformers shall conformance to UL 506. Power digital controllers on the primary communication trunk from dedicated circuit breakers. Provide a fuse cutout on the secondary side of the transformer. O. Nameplates: Laminated plastic 1/16 -inch thick with neatly beveled edges and screwed to panel. Color shall be black with 0.375 -inch white engraved block lettering. P. Temperature Indication: Provide Bimetal dial type indicator suitable for duct -mounted air sens- ing as indicated. If readability is not possible with duct -mounted thermometers, provide remote bulb dial type mounted for easy reading and labeled to identify temperature as indicated; 3 -inch dial, range 0-160 F. Accuracy: 2 -percent of full range. Q. Pressure Indication: Provide gage range so normal pressures are approximately equal to the midpoint readings on the scale, unless otherwise specified, as indicated. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 2 percent of the range. Gages for differential pressure measurements shall be 4-1/2 inch (nominal) size with two sets of pressure taps and zero point adjustment. 2.12 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INTERFACE A. Fire Alarm System Interface: Fire alarm system and air handling equipment smoke detectors shall be provided under Division 16. Provide all hardware, software and wiring required for DDC system interface. Coordinate DDC requirements with Fire Alarm System Contractor. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 19 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.13 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE INTERFACE A. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) shall be provided under Division 15. Provide all hardware, software and wiring required for DDC system interface. Coordinate DDC requirements with VFD manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. B. Notify the Owner Representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION (GENERAL) A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide all miscellaneous devices, hardware, software, interconnections installation and pro- gramming required to insure a complete operating system in accordance with the sequences of operation and point schedules. 3.3 LOCATION AND INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS A. Locate and install components for easy accessibility; in general, mount 60 -inches (panels meas- ured from top edge) above floor with minimum 3'-0" clear access space in front of units. B. All instruments, switches, transmitters, etc., shall be suitably wired and mounted to protect them from vibration and high temperature. C. Identification: Provide permanently mounted tags to all instruments with point address designa- tion, system reference and description. Label all wiring, tubing at each end to match control diagrams. D. Control Panels 1. Required control panels shall be located in electrical rooms. Coordinate exact locations and circuit requirements with electrical contractor. 2. Provide for controls and instruments at equipment and in mechanical room. 3. Install temperature gages and pilot lights flush on the cabinet door. Install controllers, switches, timers, transformers, and relays in the interior of the cabinet; mount on a steel or aluminum subpanel or on the back panel of the cabinet. Provide and label control pa - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 20 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION rameters and test points within the panel for total evaluation of system operation. Elec- trical controls shall be wired to numbered screw type terminal strips. E. Digital Controllers: 1. Provide DDC controllers configured to control a single mechanical system such as an air handling unit, terminal unit, chilled water system, heating water system, etc., to operate a system in a complete standalone mode. DDC controllers shall be able to operate and con- trol respective system upon loss of DDC system network communication. 2. Provide digital control cabinets that protect digital controller electronics from dust, at lo- cations shown on the drawings. 3. Provide a disconnect power switch and surge protector for each digital controller. F. Temperature Sensors: Provide temperature sensors in locations to sense the appropriate condi- tion. Provide sensor where they are easy to access and service without special tools. Calibrate sensors to accuracy specified. In no case will sensors designed for one application be installed for another application. 1. Room Temperature Sensors: Provide on interior walls to sense average room tempera- ture conditions. Avoid locations which may be covered by office furniture. Room tem- perature sensors should not be mounted on exterior walls when other locations are avail- able. Unless otherwise indicated, mount centerline of sensor at 5 feet above finished floor. 2. Duct Temperature Sensors: a. Select specific sensor location within duct to accurately sense appropriate air tem- peratures. Do not locate sensors in dead air spaces or positions obstructed by ducts or equipment. Install gaskets between the sensor housing and duct wall. Seal duct and insulation penetrations. b. Install duct averaging sensors, freeze protection sensors, between two rigid sup- ports in a serpentine position to sense average conditions. Thermally isolate tem- perature -sensing elements from supports. Provide duct access doors to averaging sensors. 3. Immersion Temperature Sensors: Provide thermowells for sensors measuring tempera- tures in liquid applications or pressure vessels. Locate wells to sense continuous flow conditions. Do not install wells using extension couplings. Where piping diameters are smaller than the length of the wells, provide wells in piping at elbows to effect proper flow across entire area of well. Wells shall not restrict flow area to less than 70 percent of the pipe area. Increase piping size as required to avoid restriction. Provide thermow- ells with thermal transmission material within the well to speed the response of tempera- ture measurement. Provide wells with sealing nuts to contain the thermal transmission material. 4. Outside Air Temperature Sensors: Provide outside air temperature sensor on north side of the building, away from exhaust hoods, air intakes and other areas that may affect temperature readings. Provide sunshields to protect outside air sensor from direct sun- light. G. Damper Actuators: Actuators shall not be mounted in the air stream. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 21 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION H. Thermometers: Provide thermometers at locations indicated. Mount thermometers to allow readability when standing on the floor. I. Pressure Sensors: 1. Differential Pressure: a. General: Install pressure sensing tips in locations to sense appropriate pressure conditions. b. Duct Static Pressure Sensing: Locate duct static pressure tip approximately two- thirds of distance from supply fan to end of duct with the greatest pressure drop. 2. Pressure Gages: Install pressure gages at locations indicated. Mount pressure gages to allow readability while standing on the floor. Pneumatic output lines shall have pressure gages mounted near the digital controllers. J. Flow Measurement: Install and locate per manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 CONTROL WIRING AND CONDUIT A. All control wiring, all conduit for control wiring, and all miscellaneous accessory equipment for control wiring systems shall be provided by the Control Subcontractor as part of the control sys- tem. Conform to Division 16 requirements, NFPA 70, and all local code requirements. B. All wiring in or through mechanical rooms, finished spaces, on roofs, in walls, below grade and inside equipment (except within control wiring compartments or control panels) shall be in- stalled in conduit and properly supported. Label wire groups to match corresponding wiring diagrams. C. Plenum Cable: Plenum cable type, installation methods and use shall be subject to City and State Codes and Regulations. Within ceiling space, attach directly to wall or slab on 4 -foot cen- ters, or support from ceiling suspension wires on 4 -foot centers. Do not attach cables to pipes or ducts, or lay on ceilings. Cables shall be routed as high as possible without interference to equipment, ceiling, lighting access and removal. D. Instrumentation and communication cable shall not be run together in the same conduit or race- way as power wiring. E. Communication Cable: Provide all communication wiring between operator workstation and standalone DDC panels, between standalone DDC panels and application specific controllers such as AHU, Unitary or VAV digital controllers. All communication cable shall be checked for continuity, grounding, and shielding. F. Grounding: Ground controllers and cabinets to a good earth ground. Grounding of the green AC ground wire, at the breaker panel, alone is not adequate. Run metal conduit from controller panels to adequate building grounds. Ground sensor drain wire shields at controller end. All associated ground loop problems shall be corrected. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 22 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION G. Power provisions for the DDC system shall be provided by Division 16 to the locations indi- cated. Provide additional power requirements for any other components from nearest electrical panel. Provide additional circuit breakers rated and labeled for service. Unless approved by the Electrical Engineer, spare breakers shall not be used. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor. H. Provide interface control wiring for equipment with remote sensors, panels, limits, and compo- nents, etc., to serve specified control functions. Materials, wiring and termination shall be pro- vided and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. 1. Indoor/Outdoor Split Unit: Evaporation/condenser sections. 2. AC Unit: Temperature, humidity and control panels. 3.5 DDC POINT SUMMARY A. Provide all Data -base generation. B. Dynamic Color Display: Provide all dynamic graphic displays at operator workstation. System graphical displays shall be color coded. Provide outside air temperature indication on all air conditioning units displays. As a minimum, the following shall be provided: 1. Site Plan: Overall site plan, including all associated buildings. 2. Building Floor Plan: Each floor plan graphic shall contain all graphical displays, equip- ment with area served, and locations associated with that building floor plan. 3. Detailed Dynamic Color and data system graphics shall be provided for each piece of mechanical equipment including, but not limited to, air conditioning units, exhaust fans, domestic water systems, and make-up air units. 4. Provide equipment run status, alarms, and analog variables for each system. 5. Details, colors, and graphics shall be approved by the Owner prior to generation. C. Runtime Totalization: At a minimum, runtime totalization shall be incorporated, but not limited to, each monitored supply fan, return fan, exhaust fan, and hot water recirculation pumps. Warning limits for each point shall be entered with owner defined messages. D. Trend Log: All binary and analog points shall be trended. Historical archiving of owner se- lected points shall be provided at the operator workstation with the capability of transfer to graphic format representation. E. Alarm Points: All analog inputs (High/Low Limits) and selected digital inputs alarm points shall be prioritized, printed., routed, with alarm message per owner's requirements. Loss of communication network shall also initiate an alarm. Provide all software timers necessary to prevent false alarms. F. Heavy Equipment Delays and Power Fail Restart Software: Each stand alone DDC panel shall be provided with heavy equipment and power fail restart application software. Each stand alone DDC panel shall start respective equipment in sequence and shall be time based and not de- pendent on prior system start-up. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 23 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION G. Database Save: Provide back-up database for all stand alone DDC panels at the operator work- station computer hard disk. Provide additional back-up database for each stand alone DDC panel on floppy disk. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING A. Demonstrate compliance of the HVAC control system with the contract documents. Calibrate instrumentation and controls and verify the specified accuracy using calibrated test equipment. Adjust controls and equipment to maintain conditions indicated, to perform functions indicated, and to operate in the sequence specified. Furnish personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform calibration and site testing. Ensure that tests are performed by competent employees of the DDC system installer or the DDC system manufacturer regularly employed in the testing and calibration of DDC systems. Calibrate field equipment and verify equipment and system operation before placing the system on-line. Field testing will be wit- nessed by the Owner or Owner's representative and shall include the following: 1. System Inspection: Observe the HVAC system in its shutdown condition. Provide end- to-end wiring checkout. Check dampers and valves for proper normal positions. Docu- ment each position for the test report. 2. Calibration Accuracy and Operation of Inputs Test: Check for proper calibration and op- eration of each input instrument. For each sensor (temperature), record the reading at the sensor, and using a traceable test equipment, and record the reading at the digital control- ler. Document each reading for the test report. 3. Operation of Outputs Test: Check the operation of each output to verify correct opera- tion. Command analog outputs to minimum range, such as 4 mA, and maximum range, such as 20 mA, measure and record commanded and actual output values. Document each command and result for the test report. 4. Actuator Range Adjustment Test: With the digital controller, apply a control signal to each actuator and verify that the actuator operates properly from its normal position to full range of stroke position. Record actual spring ranges and normal positions for all modulating control valves and dampers. Include documentation in the test report. 5. Digital Controller Start-up and Memory Test: Demonstrate that programming is not lost after a power failure, and digital controllers automatically resume proper control after a power failure. 6. Surge Protection: Show that surge protection, meeting the requirements of this specifica- tion, has been installed on incoming power to the digital controllers and on communica- tion lines. 7. Application Software Operation Test: Test compliance of the application for: a. Ability to communicate with the digital controllers, uploading and downloading of programs b. Text editing program: Demonstrate the ability to edit the control program off line c. Reporting of alarm conditions: Cause alarm conditions for each alarm, and ensure that workstation receives alarms d. Reporting trend and status reports: Demonstrate ability of software to receive and save trend and status reports e. Execution of Sequence of Operation: Furnish graphic trends to show the sequence of operation is executed in correct order. Demonstrate the HVAC system operates DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 24 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION properly through the complete sequence of operation, for example seasonal, opti- mal start/warm-up, and occupied/unoccupied modes of operation. Demonstrate proper control system response for abnormal conditions for which there is a speci- fied response by simulating these conditions. Demonstrate hardware interlocks and safeties work. Demonstrate the control system performs the correct sequence of control after a loss of power f. Control Loop Stability and Accuracy: Furnish graphic trends of control loops to demonstrate the control loop is stable and that set point is maintained. Control loop response shall respond to set point changes and stabilize within 1 minute g. Opposite Season Test: Testing shall be repeated for opposite season. B. Document all tests with detailed results. Provide statement that all corrective action taken. In- clude test report in Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 3.7 TRAINING A. Upon substantial completion of the mechanical system work, furnish the services of a compe- tent technician regularly employed by the DDC manufacturer for the instruction of facility per- sonnel in the operation and maintenance of each DDC system at project site. Provide a mini- mum of 40 hours for training. B. Furnish a written test plan and training schedule for approval 15 days prior to instructing operat- ing personnel including the following: 1. Recommended training schedule for operators workstation, standalone DDC controllers, Application specific digital controllers and field components. 2. List of all training materials, aids, etc. 3. List of customer training schools offered by the DDC manufacturer. C. Provide all training and materials necessary for a minimum of two facility personnel, including: 1. Operations and Maintenance Manual 2. As -Built control diagrams 3. Detailed description of the system 4. Complete listing, graphical logic diagrams of all software programs required to perform the sequence of operation 5. Commands, operating and trouble shooting instruction and routine maintenance proce- dures. 6. Theory of operations 7. Hardware architecture 8. Operation of system 9. Operator Commands 10. Control sequence programming 11. Data base entry 12. Reports and logs 13. Alarm reports 14. Diagnostics. 15. Physical layout of each piece of hardware DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM Nigro' 15975 25 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 16. Troubleshooting and diagnostics procedures 17. Repair instructions 18. Preventive maintenance procedures and schedules 19. Calibration procedures. D. Provide additional training for a total of 8 hours between 3 and 6 months after project comple- tion. Training to address specific topics that the facility personnel need to discuss and to answer questions concerning operation of the system. PART 4 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 4.1 GENERAL A. All controls shall be by the DDC system unless indicated to be by local controls. B. The DDC system shall schedule each system or zone independently per owner's operating schedule. All operating schedules shall be confirmed with Owner and adjusted as necessary. 4.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS A. Sequence of Operation as indicated on Drawings. PART 5 - DDC POINT LIST 5.1 GENERAL A. DDC point list as indicated on Drawings. Provide additional points as required to accomplish the sequence of operation. 5.2 ABBREVIATIONS A Summary Alarm ACU Air Conditioning Unit AI Analog Input AMU Air Measuring Unit AO Analog Output AUX Auxiliary Device or Contact CR Control Relay CS Current Sensor CT Current Transmitter DPH Differential Pressure Switch — High Limit DPL Differential Pressure Switch — Low Limit DDC Direct Digital Control DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 26 DI Digital Input DP Differential Pressure Switch DPS Differential Pressure Sensor/Transmitter DO Digital Output FM Flow Meter FPT Freeze Protection Thermostat FS Flow Switch IAQ Indoor Air Quality LS Level Switch MOD Modulating Damper NC Normally Closed NO Normally Open PB Push -Button PI Pulse Input PM Pulse Meter or Initiator SCR Silicon Rectifier SD Smoke Detector (Duct) SS Start/Stop T Temperature Sensor/Transmitter VAV Variable Air Volume VFD Variable Frequency Drive END OF SECTION 15975 27 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM 15975 WESTFIELD SHOPP1NGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are in- cluded in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment. 2. Field quality -control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and equipment installation is specified in system and equipment Sections. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design objec- tives, including the following: 1. Balancing airflow within distribution systems, including branches and terminals, to indi- cated quantities according to specified tolerances. 2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities. 3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment. 4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment. 5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 6. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Adjust: To regulate flowrate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to modify fan speed or adjust a damper. B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including sub -mains, branches, and terminals, according to design quantities. C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated. D. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 1 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION E. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. F. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was perform- ance erformance tested. G. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system. H. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment. I. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. J. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association. K. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. L. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. 1.4 ACCEPTABLE CONTRACTORS A. Neudorfer Engineers, Inc. B. Hardin and Sons, Inc. C. TAC Systems, LLC. D. Airtest Co., Inc. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Quality -Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this Project's testing, adjusting, and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in the "Quality Assur- ance" Article below. B. Report Forms: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent. C. Balancing Report: 1. Comply with Section 15050, paragraph "Submittals," subparagraph A, regarding format of TAB report. 2. Submit completed Balancing Report as indicated, including the following: TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 2 'tow' WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION a. System Diagrams/Floor Plans. b. Air Apparatus Test Reports. c. Gas/Oil Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports. d. Electric Coil/Duct Heater Test Reports. e. Fan Test Reports. f. Rectangular and Round Duct Traverse Reports. g. Air Outlet Test Reports. h. Package Rooftop Air Conditioning Unit Test Reports. i. Compressor and/or Condenser Test Reports. j. Instrument Calibration Report. 1.6 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING A. Phase in properly with Construction Schedule. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with all applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances. In case of con- flict with drawings or specifications, the codes and ordinances govern. 2. Basis: a. International Building Code, 2003. b. Uniform Plumbing Code, 2003. c. International Mechanical Code, 2003. d. NFPA-90A. e. NFPA 101. B. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by NEBB, not affiliated with mechanical contractor. Certified agent shall be a full time employee of the TAB contractor. C. Experience: Minimum 5 years on projects of similar scope and complexity. D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Owner's and the Architect's rep- resentatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of testing, adjusting, and balancing team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7 days' advance notice of sched- uled meeting time and location. 1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following: a. Submittal distribution requirements. b. Contract Documents examination report. c. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan. 3 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION d. Work schedule and Project site access requirements. e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow. E. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting, and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing, ad- justing, and balancing reports. 2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved test- ing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. F. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." G. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required In- strumentation for NEBB Certification." H. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments as required by NEBB certification or more frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: 1. The Owner and tenants will occupy existing areas of the facility during construction. Conduct testing, adjusting and balancing operations so as not to interfere with their op- erations. 2. The Owner may occupy completed areas of the building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing operations to mini- mize conflicts with the Owner's operations. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the efforts of factory -authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities. B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air distribution sys- tems have been satisfactorily completed. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 4 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 1.10 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special performance guarantee specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Docu- ments and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Con- tractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in com- pleting the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provi- sions: 1. The certified Agent has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Docu- ments. 2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Comply with "Quality Assurance" provisions, specifications, and manufacturer's data. Where these may be in conflict, the more stringent requirements govern. 2.2 TAB INSTRUMENTATION A. Furnish materials and equipment necessary to properly measure system capacities, electrical voltage and current, fan speeds, static pressures, air velocities, water pressure drops, refrigera- tion pressures, and other readings necessary to evaluate system performance and adjust quanti- ties to those indicated. TAB Contractor retains possession of materials and equipment after pro- ject is completed. B. Instrumentation shall be accurate, with calibration histories available for examination upon re- quest. C. Instrumentation shall be used in accordance with manufacturer instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section. Do not begin work until any unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 5 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of sys- tems and equipment. 1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. 2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow - control devices, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and Iocations of these balancing devices are accessible and appro- priate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment. C. Examine project record documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record Docu- ments." D. Examine equipment performance data, including fan curves. Relate performance data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. E. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been performed. F. Examine system and equipment test reports. G. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balanc- ing. Examine air -handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for opera- tion. I. Examine terminal units, such as variable -air -volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. J. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls. K. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following: 1. Dampers and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller. 2. Dampers are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in mixing boxes and variable -air -volume termi- nals. 4. Thermostats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls. 5. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 6 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 6. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. 7. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values. 8. Interlocked systems are operating. 9. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values. 10. Verify minimum outdoor supply air setting. L. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and balanc- ing procedures. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Field verify locations of new and existing work prior to commencing work of this Section. B. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of this Section. C. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step proce- dures. D. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Automatic temperature -control systems are operational. 3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 4. Manual volume dampers, smoke, fire, and combination fire/smoke dampers are open. 5. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air -pattern adjustments are required and ac- cess scess to balancing devices is provided. 6. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be met. 7. Building construction is sealed in areas where specified pressurization of an area is des- ignated on contract documents. 3.4 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Sys- tems" and this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum ex- tent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project. C. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, includ- ing damper -control positions, valve indicators, fan -speed -control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 7 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.5 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES A. Perform Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as -built" duct layouts. C. For variable -air -volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. E. Check the airflow patterns from the outside -air louvers and dampers and the return- and ex- haust -air dampers, through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start -stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. K. Check for proper sealing of air -handling unit components. L. Set balancing dampers at each duct stub in tenant spaces to airflows indicated. Provide ade- quate static pressure upstream to allow for future tenant terminal units. Ensure volume damper locking mechanisms are tightened down in the balanced position. M. Perform initial air system balance when system is commissioned and again when the majority of the tenants and storefronts are in service. 3.6 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system airflow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent. 3.7 REPORTING A. Initial Construction -Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as speci- fied in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facili- tate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 8 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and bal- ancing devices. B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, proce- dures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each build- ing floor for systems serving multiple floors. 3.8 FINAL REPORT A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter -quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3 - ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems. B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and bal- ancing engineer. 1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following: 1. Fan curves. 2. Manufacturers' test data. 3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop Drawings and Product Data. +44.1.." D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report. 10. Summary of contents, including the following: a. Design versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Docu- ments. 11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 12. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 13. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values. 14. Test conditions for fans performance forms, including the following: TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 9 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust -air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. d. Inlet vane settings for variable -air -volume systems. e. Settings for supply -air, static -pressure controller. f. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air distribution systems. Present with single - line diagrams and include the following: 1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 3. Terminal units. 4. Balancing stations. F. Air -Handling Unit Test Reports: For air -handling units with coils, include the following: 1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number of belts, make, and size. k Number of filters, type, and size. 2. Motor Data: Include the following: a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full -load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches. 3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Filter static -pressure differential in inches wg. f. Outside airflow in cfm. g. Return airflow in cfm. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 10 'fie WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION h. Outside -air damper position. i. Return -air damper position. G. Apparatus -Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following: 1. Coil Data: Include the following: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft.. h. Tube size in NPS. i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement. 2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Average face velocity in fpm. c. Air pressure drop in inches wg. d. Outside -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. e. Return -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f. Entering -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. g. Leaving -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. h. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. i. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig. j. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F. H. Gas -Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to the manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following: 1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Fuel type in input data. g. Output capacity in Btuh. h. Ignition type. i. Burner -control types. j. Motor horsepower and rpm. k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz. 1. Motor full -load amperage and service factor. m. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. 11 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION n. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Entering -air temperature in deg F. c. Leaving -air temperature in deg F. d. Air temperature differential in deg F. e. Entering -air static pressure in inches wg. f. Leaving -air static pressure in inches wg. g. Air static -pressure differential in inches wg. h. Low -fire fuel input in Btuh. i. High -fire fuel input in Btuh. j. Manifold pressure in psig. k. High -temperature -limit setting in deg F. 1. Operating set point in Btuh. m. Motor voltage at each connection. n. Motor amperage for each phase. o. Heating value of fuel in Btuh. I. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: Include the following: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Motor Data: Include the following: a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full -load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number of belts, make, and size. 3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 12 WESTFIELD SHOPP1NGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION e. Suction static pressure in inches wg. J. Round, Flat -Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid repre- senting the duct cross-section and record the following: 1. Report Data: Include the following: a. System and air -handling unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft.. g. Design airflow rate in cfm. h. Design velocity in fpm. i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig. K. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, stand-alone refrig- erant compressors or air-cooled condensing units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Unit make and model number. d. Manufacturer's compressor serial numbers. e. Compressor make. f. Compressor model and serial numbers. g. Refrigerant weight in lb. h. Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg F. 2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Entering -air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F. b. Leaving -air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F. c. Control settings. d. Unloader set points. e. Low -pressure -cutout set point in psig. f. High -pressure -cutout set point in psig. g. Suction pressure in psig. h. Suction temperature in deg F. i. Condenser refrigerant pressure in psig. j. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg F. k. Oil pressure in psig. 1. Oil temperature in deg F. m. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. The kW input. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 13 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTHCENTER MALL EXPANSION p. Crankcase heater kW. q. Number of fans. r. Condenser fan rpm. s. Condenser fan airflow rate in cfm. t. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower. u. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection. v. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase. 3.9 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct un- usual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed during near -peak sununer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and ad- justing during near -peak summer and winter conditions. END OF SECTION 15990 14 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16030 ELECTRICAL TESTING SECTION 16050 EXISTING SYSTEMS SECTION 16072 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS SECTION 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 16105 ELECTRICAL SITE WORK SECTION 16113 UNDERFLOOR DUCT SYSTEM SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS & CABLES SECTION 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES SECTION 16132 FLUSH FLOOR OUTLETS SECTION 16139 CABLE TRAYS SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES SECTION 16210 ELECTRIC SERVICE SECTION 16230 ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION EQUIPMENT SECTION 16390 TEMPORARY POWER SECTION 16415 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES SECTION 16425 SWITCHBOARDS SECTION 16452 GROUNDING SECTION 16460 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS SECTION 16472 METER CENTERS SECTION 16475 FUSES SECTION 16476 DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS SECTION 16481 MOTOR CONTROLLERS SECTION 16500 LIGHTING SECTION 16501 LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE SECTION 16620 BATTERY INVERTER UNIT SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SECTION 16724 SMOKE DAMPER CONTROL SECTION 16740 TELEPHONE, COMPUTER RACEWAY SYSTEMS SECTION 16999 PROJECT CLOSEOUT WES IHELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16010 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes general electrical requirements for all Division 16 work and is supplemental and in addition to the requirements of Division 1. B. It is the intention of this Division of the Specifications and the contract drawings to describe and provide for the furnishing, installing, testing and placing in satisfactory and fully operational condition all equipment, materials, devices and necessary appurtenances to provide a complete electrical system. Provide all materials, appliances and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or shown on the drawings, but which are necessary to make a complete, fully operational instaIIation of alI electrical systems shown on the contract drawings or described herein. Connect equipment and devices furnished and installed under other Divisions of this specification (or the Owner) under this Division. C. Workmanship shall be of the best quality and none but competent and experienced electricians shall be employed and shall be under the supervision of a competent and experienced foreman. D. The drawings and specifications are complimentary and what is called for (or shown) in either is required to be provided as if called for in both. E. See Division 1 for sequence of work. 1.3 WORK IN OTHER DIVISIONS A. See all other specifications for other work which includes but is not limited to: Temporary Power Cutting and Patching Door Hardware Painting, Refinishing and Finishes Equipment Wiring Conveying Systems Mechanical Control Wiring Mechanical Equipment Fire Protection GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010 1 WES1FIhLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 1.4 CODES, PERMITS, INSPECTION FEES A. The following code and standards are referenced in the Division 16 specifications. Perform all work and provide materials and equipment in accordance with the latest referenced codes and standards of the following organizations: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 4. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) B. Install the electrical systems based on the foIIowing: NFPA 70 National Electrical Code as adopted and amended by the Local Jurisdiction. IBC International Building Code as adopted and amended by the Local Jurisdiction C. The referenced codes establish a minimum level of requirements. Where provision of the various codes conflict with each other, the more stringent provision shall govern. If any conflict occurs between referenced codes and this specification, the codes are to govern. Compliance with code requirements shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from complying with any requirements of the drawings or specifications which may be in excess of requirements of the governing codes and rules and not contrary to same. D. Obtain and pay for all licenses, permits and inspections required by laws, ordinances and rules governing work specified herein. Arrange for inspection of work by the inspectors and give the inspectors all necessary assistance in their work of inspection. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work with that of the other Contractors and/or other trades doing work on the project. Examine all drawings and specifications of other trades for construction details and coordination Make every reasonable effort to provide timely notice of work affecting other trades to prevent conflicts or interference as to space requirements, dimensions, openings, block-outs, sleeving or other matters which will cause delays or necessitate work -around methods. B. Obtain submittals and shop drawings of all equipment with electrical connections furnished under other divisions of the specification and by the Owner. Provide all wiring in accordance with specific equipment requirements. Immediately advise the Architect of any changes which may affect the contract price. C. Special attention is called to the following items. Coordinate alI conflicts prior to installation: 1. Door swings such that switches will be located on the "strike" side of the door. 2. Location of grilles, pipes, sprinkler heads, ducts and other mechanical equipment so that all electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and other electrical outlets and equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items. GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010 2 �'I WESI'HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3. Location of cabinets, counters and doors so that electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items. 4. Recessing and concealing electrical materials in CMU walls, concrete construction and precast construction 5. At each switchboard, panelboard and motor control center location the Contractor shall monitor the work of all trades to assure that the space and clearance requirements of code are met. D. Furnish, install and place in satisfactory condition all raceways, boxes, conductors and connections and all other materials required for the electrical systems shown or noted in the contract documents to be complete, fully operational and fully tested upon completion of the project. Raceways, boxes and ground connections are shown diagrammatically only and indicate the general character and approximate location. The layout does not necessarily show the total number of raceways or boxes for the circuits required, nor are the locations of indicated runs intended to show the actual routing of the raceways. E. The horsepower of motors and apparatus wattage's shown on the drawings are estimated requirements of equipment furnished under other Divisions of this contract. Provide overload elements to suit actual equipment nameplate current. Advise Architect of any equipment changes or substitutions affecting electrical systems. F. Consult the architectural drawings for the exact height and Iocation of all electrical equipment not specified herein or shown on the drawings. Make any minor changes (less than 6'-6" horizontal) in the location of the raceways, outlets, boxes, devices„ wiring, etc., from those shown on the drawings without extra charge, where coordination requires or if so directed by the Architect before rough -in. G. Provide inserts or sleeves for outlet boxes, conductors, cables and/or raceways as required. Coordinate the installation thereof with other trades. H. The Contractor will not be paid for relocation of work, cuttings, patching and finishing required for work requiring reinstallation due to lack of coordination prior to installation. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Refer to General Conditions of the Contract. 1.7 CORRECTION OF WORK A. Within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the work, the Contractor shall correct any work found to be not in conformance with the Contract Documents promptly after written notice from the owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. This obligation shall survive acceptance of the work under this Contract and termination of the Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010 3 WES! HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 1.8 ITEMIZED SCHEDULE OF COSTS A. Complete the Schedule of Values included at the end of this section. This schedule shall be adhered to for the electrical contractor to facilitate analysis and approval of the monthly progress billings. Refer to the Supplementary Conditions of General Contract for details, and conform thereto. Provide a copy directly to Sparling. 1.9 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submittals and Shop Drawings: Schedule so as not to delay construction schedule and no later than 60 days after award of contract, submit common brochure(s) with index and divider tabs by specification section, containing all required catalog cuts. Allow two weeks for review for each submittal and resubmittal. Incomplete submittals and shop drawings which do not comply with these requirements will be returned for correction, revision and resubmittal. See General Conditions for format, quantity, etc. B. Submit in a three ring binder with hardboard covers. Submittals shall show: 1. Indicate listing by UL or other approved testing agency. 2. Highlight with yellow or blue marker adequate information to demonstrate materials being submitted fully comply with contract documents. 3. Review and check all material prior to submittal and stamp "Reviewed and Approved". C. Shop drawings shall show: 1. Ratings of items and systems. 2. How the components of an item or system are assembled, interconnected, function together and how they will be installed on the project. 3. System layout floor plans with complete device layout, point-to-point wiring connection between all components of the system, wire sizes and color coding. 4. Coordinate with other division shop drawings and submittals. Identify interface points and indicate method of connection. D. The Contractor agrees: 1. Submittals and shop drawings processed by the Architect are not change orders, 2. The purpose of submittals and shop drawings by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept. 3. Submittals demonstrate equipment and material Contractor intends to furnish and install and indicate detailing fabrication and installation methods Contractor intends to use. 4. To accept all responsibility for assuring that all materials furnished under this Division of the specifications meet, in full, all requirements of the contract documents. 5. To pay for Engineers review cost of submittal review beyond one resubmittal. E. The Engineer's review is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Corrections or comments made during this review do not relieve contractor from compliance with the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Contractor is responsible for: Dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site; GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010 4 WES l FtLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION fabrication process and techniques of construction; coordination of his work with that of all other trades; performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. F. Submittals and shop drawings are required per the submittals schedule at the end of this Section. 1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS A. Provide O&M manuals required in Division 1 plus one manual for Sparling for all equipment furnished under Division 16 of the specifications. Submit a preliminary copy, complete except for the bound cover, 60 days prior to completion of the project for checking and review. Deliver final bound corrected copies as noted in Division 1 plus a copy to Sparling 20 days prior to scheduled instruction periods. Obtain a receipt for the manuals and forward a copy of the receipt to the Engineer with the Job Completion Form. B. The information included must be the exact equipment installed. Where sheets show the equipment installed and other equipment, the installed equipment shall be neatly and clearly identified on such sheets. C. These O&M manuals shall contain all the information needed to operate and maintain all systems and equipment provided in the project Present and arrange information in a logical manner for efficient use by the Owner's operating personnel. The information provided shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Equipment manufacturer, make, model number, size, nameplate data, etc. 2. Description of system configuration and operation including component identification and interrelations. A master control schematic drawings(s) may be required for this purpose. 3. Dimensional and performance data for specific unit provided as appropriate. 4. Manufacturer's recommended operation instructions. 5. Manufacturer's recommended lubrication and servicing data including frequency. 6. Complete parts list including reordering information, recommended spares and anticipated useful life (if appropriate). Parts lists shall give full ordering information assigned by the original parts manufacturer. Relabeled and/or renumbered parts information as reassigned by equipment supplier not acceptable. 7. Shop drawings. 8. Wiring diagrams. 9. A complete list of local (nearest) manufacturer representative and distributor contacts for each type of equipment and manufacturer. Include name, company, address, phone, fax, e-mail address, and web site. D. Furnish complete wiring diagrams for each system for the specific system installed under the contract. "Typical" line diagrams will not be acceptable unless revised to indicate the exact field installation. E. Group the information contained in the manuals in an orderly arrangement by specification index. Provide a typewritten index and divider sheets between categories with identifying tabs. Bind the completed manuals with hard board covers not GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010 5 WES1 tLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION exceeding 5" thick. (Provide two or more volumes if required.) Signal and communication systems shall be in separate volumes. Imprint the covers with the name of the job, Owner, Architect, Electrical Engineer, Contractor and year of completion. Imprint the back edge with the name of the job, Owner and year of completion. Hard board covers and literature contained may be held together with screw post binding. 1.11 INSTRUCTION PERIODS A. After substantial completion of the work and 20 days after the O&M manuals have been delivered to the owner and after all tests and final inspection of the work by the Authority(s) Having Jurisdiction; demonstrate the electrical systems and instruct the Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of the various electrical systems. The Contractor shall arrange scheduled instruction periods with the Owner. The Contractor's representatives shall be superintendents or foremen knowledgeable in each system and suppliers representatives when so specified. When more than one training session is specified, the second session shall be 30 to 90 days after the first as agreed to by the Owner. B. Include in each instruction session an overview of the system, presentation of information in maintenance manuals with appropriate references to drawings. Conduct tours of the building areas with explanations of maintenance requirements, access methods, servicing and maintenance procedures, equipment cleaning procedures and adjustment locations. C. Include the following scheduled instruction periods: 1g Session 2nd Session 1. Power Distribution System 4 hours 4 hours 2. Lighting Control & Dimming System 4 hours 4 hours 3. Power Generation Equipment 4 hours 4 hours 4. Fire Alarm System 4 hours 4 hours 5. Security System 2 hours 2 hours D. Factory trained suppliers representatives shall provide instruction for lighting control/dimming, power generation, fire alarm, intercom & sound, television, clock program, nurse call, and security systems. E. Provide one professionally produced video tape of each training session in VHS format. Furnish two (2) copies to the owner. 1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Continually record the actual electrical system(s) installation on a set of prints kept readily available at the project during construction. These prints shall be used for this purpose alone. 1. Mark record prints with red erasable pencil. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the work as originally shown. 2. Accurately locate with exact dimensions all underground and underslab raceways and stub -outs. GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010 6 W ES' 1'1; HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3. Note changes of directions and locations, by dimensions and elevations, as utilities are actually installed. 4. Include addenda items and revisions made during construction. 5. Erase conditions not constructed or "X -out" and annotate "not constructed" to clearly convey the actual "as constructed" condition. 6. Organize record drawings sheets in manageable sets, bind and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set. B. Transmit the record drawing set to the Architect at the completion of the work. Final payment to the contractor will not be authorized until these prints have been submitted to and accepted by the Architect. C. Transfer the changes marked up on the record prints into AutoCAD Release 14 (or higher) at the completion of the work. Provide two (2) sets of prints, one set of fixed line reproducible drawings and one set of AutoCAD drawing files on 3-1/2" floppy disks (or zip disk). Transmit drawings, CAD files and the record drawing mark-ups to the Architect. Final payment to the contractor will not be authorized until these document have been submitted to and accepted by the Architect. 1.13 FINAL ACCEPTANCE REQUEST A. Submit to the Architect, with a copy to the Sparling Engineer, a Sparling Job Completion Form ( form attached in this section) properly filled out prior to the time final acceptance of the electrical work is requested. 1.14 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS A. When the following abbreviations and definitions are used in relation to the work for Division 16 they shall have the following meanings: Item Meaning AHJ Authority Having Jurisdiction. Boxes Outlet, Junction or Pull Boxes. Code All applicable codes currently enforced at project location. Compression Compressed using a leverage powered (hydraulic or equivalent crimping tool. Connection All materials and labor required for equipment to be fully operational. Exterior Location Outside of or penetrating the outer surfaces of the building weather protective membrane. Fully Operational Tested, approved, and operating to the satisfaction of the AHJ, manufacturer and contract documents. Furnish Deliver to the jobsite Install To enter permanently into the project and make fully operational. Kcml Thousand circular mils (formerly MCM). Mfr. Manufacturer. NEC National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association, Publication #70. Noted Shown or specified in the contract documents. GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010 7 WESiFIE I D SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION Provide Furnish and install. Required As required by code, AHJ, contract documents, or manufacturer for the particular installation to be fully operational. Shown As indicated on the drawings or details. Wiring Raceway, conductors and connections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All materials and equipment installed shall have been tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories or other approved testing organization and shall be so labeled unless otherwise permitted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (Inspector). B. All materials to be new, free from defects and not less than quality herein specified. Materials shall be designated to insure satisfactory operation and operational life in the environmental conditions which will prevail where they are being installed. C. Each type of materials furnished shall be of the same make, be standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such materials and be the manufacturer's latest standard design. D. All materials, equipment and systems furnished that include provisions for storing, displaying, reporting, interfacing, inputting, or functioning using date specific information shall perform properly in all respects regardless of the century. Any interface to other new or existing materials, equipment or systems shall function properly and shall be century compliant, both in regards to information sent and received. 2.2 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS A. No Substitute: Where a specified product is indicated "no substitute", it is the intent of this specification to require new materials to be compatible with the existing installation. To this end certain materials and systems no substitution will be allowed. B. Prior to Bid Opening: Acceptance of products other than those specified will be issued by addendum to the bid documents only after the following requirements are met and the proposed listed material is determined to meet or exceed the requirements: 1. Requests for listing to be original material, clearly indicating the product fully complies with contract documents and be neatly marked with yellow felt tip marker to clearly define and describe the product for which listing is requested. 2. Include certified laboratory test report for lighting fixtures. 3. Samples shall be submitted if requested. 4. Requests shall be received 10 days prior to bid opening. GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010 8 WEST WELD SHOPPJNGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 5. Requests containing insufficient information to confirm compliance with contract documents will not be considered. C. After Award of Contract: Substitution of products will be considered after award of contract only under the following conditions: 1. The Contractor shall have placed orders for specified materials promptly after contract is awarded and the specified products can not be delivered to the project to meet the Owner's construction schedule. 2. The reason for the unavailability is beyond the Contractor's control, i.e., due to strikes, bankruptcy, discontinuance of manufacturer, acts of God. 3. The specified product is no longer manufactured. 4. There is compelling economic advantage to the Owner. D. In all cases, should a substituted material result in requiring electrical system or building modifications; the Contractor alone shall pay all costs to provide these modifications including all costs to the Engineer and Architect for redesign, and updating of record drawings required to accommodate the required modifications. 2.3 NAMEPLATES A. Provide laminated plastic nameplates which are riveted or screwed to the equipment for each switchboard, panelboard, motor control center, equipment enclosure motor starter and disconnect switch. Nameplate material 0.125 inch thick plastic, minimum size of 1" X 2.5" with minimum lettering size of 0.25". Normal Power System - white letters on black background. Emergency Power System - white letters on red background. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Handle all equipment carefully to prevent damage, breakage, denting, and scoring of finishes. Do not install damaged equipment. B. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, undercover in a weather tight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instruction. 3.2 CUTTING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION A. Obtain permission from the Architect and coordinate with other trades prior to cutting. Locate cuttings so they will not weaken structural components. Cut carefully and only the minimum amount necessary. Cut concrete with diamond core drills or concrete saws except where space limitations prevent the use of such tools. GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010 9 WES 1 FILLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION B. All construction materials damaged or cut into during the installation of this work must be repaired or replaced with materials of like kind and quality as original materials by skilled labor experienced in that particular building trade. 3.3 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire rated floor and wall assemblies to maintain fire -resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 section "Firestopping". 3.4 PAINTING A. Items furnished under this Division that are scratched or marred in shipment or installation shall be refinished with touchup paint selected to match installed equipment finish 3.5 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION A. For equipment furnished under this or other Divisions of the specifications, or by owner, provide complete all electrical connections necessary to serve such equipment and provide required control connections to all equipment so that the equipment is fully operational upon completion of the project. Provide disconnect switch as required by code whenever an equipment connection is shown on the drawings. 13. Investigate existing equipment to be relocated and provide new connections as required. 3.6 HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. Provide steel reinforced concrete housekeeping pad under each floor mounted switchboard, transformer, motor control center, generator and/or other free standing electrical equipment. Size 4" greater (horizontal minimum) than base of equipment mounted thereon. Minimum height 3-1/2". Use 3000 -psi (20.7-Mpa), 28 day compressive strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete". Chamfer edges and finish smooth with all blockouts square and plumb. B. When housekeeping pad is poured on previously poured concrete or is for engine or motor driven equipment, the pad shall be reinforced (4# rebar, 12" o.c., both ways) and the rebar shall be tied to the existing floor via #4 rebar epoxy grouted into the existing concrete on 18" centers or other acceptable means. The existing slab shall be thoroughly cleaned and prepared for the pad just before the pour. 3.7 CLEAN UP A. Contractor shall continually remove debris, cuttings, crates, cartons, etc., created by his work. Such clean up shall be done daily and at sufficient frequency to eliminate hazard GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010 10 WESIHELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION to the public, other workmen, the building or the Owner's employees. Before acceptance of the installation, Contractor shall carefully clean cabinets, panels, lighting fixtures, wiring devices, cover plates, etc., to remove dirt, cuttings, paint, plaster, mortar, concrete, etc. Blemishes to finished surfaces of apparatus shall be removed and new finish equal to the original applied. 3.8 TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate that all electrical equipment operates as specified and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Perform tests in the presence of the Architect, Owner or Engineer. Provide all instruments, manufacturer's operating instructions and personnel required to conduct the tests. Repair or replace any electrical equipment that fails to operate as specified and or in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010 11 PROJECT NAME: PROJECT LOCATION: DATE: WEST FthLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SPARLING ELECTRICAL JOB COMPLETION FORM <insert Project Name Here> A. Electrical Inspectors Final Acceptance (Copy of certificate attached.) Name Agency Date B. Fire Marshal's Final Acceptance of Fire Alarm System (Copy of certificate attached.) C. Name Agency Date The following systems have been demonstrated to Owner's representative. 1. Power Systems 2. Lighting Control System 3. Engine Generator/Transfer System 4. Fire Alarm System 5. Communication Systems 6. Security System Owner's Rep. Date Owner's Rep Date Owner's Rep Date Owner's Rep. Date Owner's Rep Date Owner's Rep Date D. Record Drawings Attached Transmitted previously to Date E. O & M Manuals Attached Transmitted previously to F. Test Reports Attached Transmitted previously to Date G. The work is complete in accordance with contract documents and authorized changes except for and the architect/engineer's representative is requested to meet with at on Supervisor of Electrical Work Time Date Contractors Rep. Signature Date GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010 12 WES1'HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION Sparling Schedule of Values for <Insert Project Name Here> Description of Work Amount Utility Services (power, telephone and cable TV) - Labor & Materials Site Rough -in (ltg., pole bases, power & systems) - Labor and Materials Distribution Feeders Rough -in - Labor & Materials Distribution Feeders Conductors and Terminations - Labor & Materials Branch Circuit (lighting, receptacles, misc.) Rough -in - Material and Labor Branch Circuit Conductors and Terminations - Material and Labor Switchgear, Panelboards, Transformers, Starters, Disconnects - Material Switchgear, Panelboards, Transformers - Labor Lighting - Material Lighting Exterior (installation & checkout) - Labor Lighting Interior (installation, trimout) - Labor Devices (switches, receptacles, equip. connections) - Labor & Materials Mechanical Power Connections (starter & disconnects) - Labor Fire Alarm (devices, control panel, conductor, annunciator, etc.) - Materials Fire Alarm (rough -in, termination, checkout & instruction) - Labor Telecom (rough -in conductors) - Labor & Materials Telecom (terminations, devices, testing) - Labor & Materials Television Distribution System - Labor & Materials TVSS Devices - Labor & Materials Testing, Demonstration (AHJ approvals) Training Close Out (Record Dwgs, O&M, etc.) - Materials & Labor TOTAL DIVISION 16 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010 13 WES1'F1hLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SPARLING SUBMITTAL LIST <Insert Project Name Here> SECTION DESCRIPTION SUBMIT STATUS RECEIVE DATE 16030 ELECTRICAL TESTING 16070 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 16072 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16106 UTILITY SUPPORT STRUCTURES 16113 UNDERFLOOR DUCT SYSTEM 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16130 RACEWAY AND BOXES 16132 FLUSH FLOOR OUTLETS 16139 CABLE TRAYS 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16230 ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION EQUIPMENT 16415 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES 16430 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTION 16425 SWITCHBOARDS 16460 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16470 PANELBOARDS 16472 METER CENTERS 16475 FUSES 16476 DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16481 MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16500 LIGHTING 16620 BATTERY INVERTER UNIT 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16724 SMOKE DAMPER CONTROL 16788 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION RACEWAY SYSTEM 16930 LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 16999 PROJECT CLOSEOUT END OF SECTION 16010 14 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010 WEST FibLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16030 - ELECTRICAL TESTING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Test and provide written certification that the entire electrical installation complies with contract documents, code and proper system operation. Perform acceptance tests in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, NFPA 70B and International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) testing specifications NETA ATS -2003. B. The following testing shall be performed by an independent testing company: 1. Service Grounding Test 2. Ground Fault Protection Systems Test & Calibration 3. Transformers Dry Type 4. Motor Control Centers 5. Automatic Transfer Switch Test & Calibration 6. Switchboards 7. Molded -Case Circuit Breakers 8. Metering Test & Calibration 1.3 EQUIPMENT AND DEVICE TESTS A. Perform all equipment and device testing after installation and prior to substantial completion or owner occupancy, allowing enough time for corrective action of all deficiencies. B. Review manufacturer's installation instruction and confirm that equipment is installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Prior to performing tests confirm that the equipment is clean and free of construction debris and dust. D. Phase Relationship Tests: Check connections to all new and existing equipment for proper phase relationship. During such check, disconnect all devices which could be damaged by the application of voltage or reversed phase sequence. E. Test the open/close or energize/deenergize operation of each switch, circuit breaker, contactor and other item of electrical control with the systems fully energized and operating. Each shall be tested three times. Test report shall include a list of equipment tested and the signed initials of the electricians performing the test on a device by device basis. ELECTRICAL TESTING 16030 1 WEST HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 1.4 RECEPTACLES A. Receptacle Polarity Test: Test every receptacle installed or reconnected under this contract with a receptacle circuit tester. Tester shall test for open ground, reverse polarity, open hot, open neutral, hot and ground reversed, hot or neutral and hot open. Rewire receptacles with faults and retest. Submit statement of completed testing signed by the electrician that performed the test. B. Ground -Fault Receptacle Circuit Interrupter Tests: Test each receptacle or branch circuit breaker having ground -fault circuit protection to assure that the ground -fault circuit interrupter will not operate when subjected to a ground -fault current of less than 4 milliamperes and will operate when subjected to a ground -fault current exceeding 6 milliamperes. Perform testing using an instrument specifically designed and manufactured for testing ground -fault circuit interrupters. Apply the test to the receptacle. "TEST" button operation will not be acceptable as a substitute for this test. Replace receptacles that do not shutoff power with 7/1000 of an ampere within 1/40th of a second and retest. 1.5 WIRING - 600 VOLTS AND UNDER A. Scope: Test all circuits that are installed or reconnected under this contract. B. Test for continuity of each circuit. C. Test for grounds in each circuit which shall consist of the physical examination of the installation to ensure that all required ground jumpers, devices, and appurtenances do exist and are mechanically firm. D. Perform a 500 volt megohm meter test between the conductor and ground of every feeder and all circuits rated over 100 amperes. The insulation resistance shall not be less than 2 megohms for circuits under 115V, 6 megohms between conductor and ground on those circuits (115V -600V) with total single conductor length of 2,500 feet and over, nor less than 8 megohms for those circuits (115V -600V) with single conductor length of less than 2,500 feet. If conductor fails test replace wiring or correct defect and retest. Perform torque test for every conductor tested and terminated in an overcurrent device or bolted type connection; torque all connections per manufacturers recommendations and tabulate the results on a tabular form. 1.6 SERVICE GROUNDING A. Perform service ground test prior to installation of the ground level slab. B. Perform fall -of -potential tests on main grounding electrode system provided by this contract per IEEE Standard No. 81. Maximum resistance to ground shall be Iess than 10 ohms. If this resistance cannot be obtained with the ground system shown, notify the Architect immediately for further instruction. ELECTRICAL TESTING 16030 2 WES I HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Confirm that the neutral is grounded only at the service equipment by removing the service neutral grounding conductor and meggering the neutral bus. System neutral insulation resistance shall be two (2) megohm or greater. 1.7 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. Scope. Test all ground fault systems provided by this contract. 13. Prior to test: 1. Inspect neutral main bonding connection to assure: a. Zero sequence system is grounded upstream of sensor. b. Ground connection is made ahead of neutral disconnect link. c. Ground strap systems are grounded through sensing device. d. Verify ground electrode conductor(s) for proper size and connection. 2. Inspect control power transformer to insure adequate capacity for system. 3. Monitor panels (if present) shall be manually operated for. a. Trip test. b. No trip test. c. Non -automatic reset. d. Proper operation and test sequence shall be recorded. 4. Zero sequence systems shall be inspected for symmetrical alignment of core balance transformers about all current carrying conductors. 5. Ground fault system integral to the circuit breaker will have its current sensors and neutral sensor inspected for proper polarity. 6. Ground fault device circuit nameplate identification shall be verified by device operation. 7. Pickup and time delay settings shall be set in accordance with engineer's instructions or as shown. C. Electrical Test 1. The relay pickup current shall be determined by current injection at the sensor and the circuit interrupting device operated. 2. The relay timing shall be tested by injecting one hundred fifty percent (150%) and three hundred percent (300%) of pickup current into sensor. Total trip time shall be electrically monitored. 3. System operation shall be tested at fifty-seven percent (57%) rated voltage. 4. Zone interlock systems shall be tested by simultaneous sensor current injection and monitoring zone blocking function. D. Test Parameters 1. Relay pickup current shall be within ten percent (10%) of device dial of fixed setting. 2. Relay timing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published time -current characteristic curves. ELECTRICAL TESTING 16030 WES MELD MELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 1.8 TRANSFORMERS DRY TYPE A. Test transformers dry type rated 150 kVA and over provided by this contract. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection. Test dry type transformers per the following procedures: 1. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation, anchorage and grounding. 2. Verify transformer is supplied and connected in accordance with contract documents. C. Electrical Tests. Perform insulation resistance tests winding -to -winding and winding - to -ground. 1.9 MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection 1. Inspect for physical damage and code violation. 2. Inspect for anchorage and grounding. 3. Compare overload ratings or settings with motor full Load current, confirm correct application. 4. Compare starter size with motor horsepower. B. Electrical Tests 1. For each motor larger than 5 HP, measure overload time delay by primary current injection at three (3) times motor full load current. 2. Perform operational tests on each starter. 3. Confirm operational interface with Fire Alarm and Division 15 control signals. C. Motor Control Centers 1. Measure insulation resistance of line bus phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground. 1.10 MOLDED -CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Scope. Test all new circuit breakers 100 amps and over within new switchboards and panelboards. Bench test new circuit breakers 100 amps and over that are installed in existing switchboards and panelboards. B. Inspect each breaker, operate manually, and electrically. Test shunt trips and alarm devices manually and electrically. C. Adjust breaker trips to settings furnished by the coordination study and verify settings of the manufacturer's rating by passing controlled current through the trip devices. Record values and report deficiencies. D. Circuit Breaker Electrical Tests 1. Contact resistance shall be measured. 2. Time -current characteristic tests shall be performed by passing three hundred percent (300%) rated current through each pole separately. Trip time shall be determined. ELECTRICAL TESTING 16030 4 WES1'NIELD SHOPP1NGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3. Instantaneous pickup current shall be determined by run-up or pulse method. Clearing times should be within four (4) cycles or less. 4. Insulation resistance shall be determined pole to pole, across pole and pole to ground and across open contacts. Test voltage shall be 1000 volts D.C. 5. Check trip unit reset operation 1.11 SWITCHBOARDS A. Scope. Test all new switchboards. B. Inspect equipment and each breaker, fused switch and report installation or shipping damage, loose material, shipping blocks, contamination or unfavorable environmental conditions that must be corrected. Check equipment for operation of doors, security of mounting. Report deficiencies. C. Check the equipment ground and record the number and size of ground bus and straps. Report deficiencies. D. Inspect the bus assembly for deficiencies and torque test all bolted connections. Test insulation of each bus phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground and all control circuits to ground with a suitable megohmeter. Record values and report deficiencies. E. Inspect for proper identification of protective devices. F. Surge Arrestors. Test surge arresters per the following procedures: 1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection a. inspect for physical damage, such as chipped or fractured porcelain. b. Inspect ground and discharge counter connections for integrity. 2. Electrical Tests a. Perform ground continuity test to ground grid system. 1.12 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES A. Scope. Test Automatic Transfer Switches provided by this contract. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection 1. Inspect for physical damage, anchorage and grounding. 2. Perform manual transfer operation. 3. Clean and lubricate transfer mechanism as required. Check alignment and operation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Verify proper operation of all interlocks. 5. Perform bypass and isolation functions, if switches are so equipped. C. Electrical Tests. Monitor and verify correct operation and timing of the following applicable items: 1. Normal voltage sensing relays. 2. Emergency voltage sensing relays. ELECTRICAL TESTING 16030 5 WESI EIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3. Test switch 4. In-phase monitor. 5. Engine start sequence. 6. Time delay upon transfer. 7. Alternate voltage sensing relay. 8. Interlocks and limit switch function. 9. Timing delay and re -transfer upon normal power restoration. 10. Engine cool -down time delay and shutdown. 11. Contact resistance shall be measured across main contacts. D. Perform insulation resistance tests phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground with switch in both source positions. E. Set and calibrate in accordance with specifications: 1. Voltage sensing relay. 2. Frequency sensing relay. 3. Transfer time delay relay. 4. Engine shutdown relay. 5. Engine exercise time (if present). 1.13 ME mRING A. Scope: Test all new meters provided by this contract. B. Instrument Transformers 1. Verify correct taps and proper connection to meter, instrumentation or transducer. 2. Test transformer polarity electrically 3. Verify connection at secondary CT leads by driving a low current through the leads and checking for this amount at applicable devices 4. Confirm transformer ratio by primary current injection 5. Measure insulation resistance primary -to -ground, secondary -to -ground and primary -to -secondary. 6. Overpotential test primary insulation 7. Measure potential transformer ratio. C. Metering and Instrumentation 1. Calibrate all meters at midscale 2. Calibrate watt-hour meter to one-half percent 3. Verify all instrument multipliers D. Electrical Tests 1, Measure insulation resistance of each bus phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground for one (1) minute. 2. Inspect all accessible bus joints and cable connections by infrared scanner to detect loose of high-resistance connections and other circuit anomalies. ELECTRICAL TESTING 16030 6 WES I HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 1.14 POWER SYSTEM TESTS A. Scope. Inspect and test entire electrical systems provided by this contract to verify equipment and controls are correctly operating. Power system tests shall be performed 4 to 8 weeks after substantial completion, and at such time that the maximum possible load is connected (usually highest available occupancy at mid day.) B. Load Balance Tests: Checks all panelboards for proper load balance between phase conductors and make adjustments as necessary to bring unbalanced phases to within 15% of average load. Check shall consist of clamp on ampere readings on each phase for a period of 15 minutes, of each panelboard. Include phase realignment of 1% of the project's 3 pole circuit breakers in bid. C. Motor Tests: Check all motors and measure actual load current. Submit tabulation of motor currents for all motors 1 HP or more after the HVAC system has been balanced. D. Transformer Taps: Connect all transformers at "Normal" tap. Measure secondary voltages at all new and existing transformers. Forward a list to engineer including service switchboard voltmeter reading at the time of the test for evaluation. Reconnect taps as subsequently directed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TESTING COMPANY Retain the services of an independent testing company that is qualified to test electrical equipment, and is an approved testing company by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries. Approved companies: Cutler -Hammer Engineering Services and Systems Division (CH -ESS), Electro -Test, Apparatus Service and Engineering Technology, Inc. (ASET), Siemens Westinghouse Technical Services. B. Testing company shall prepare test reports on the systems they test. C. Testing company shall be an independent company, separate from the contractor, sub contractors, suppliers and others involved with the project. 2.2 TEST EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall provide all apparatus and material required for testing. The Contractor shall use installation tools and test equipment which are designed for the specific task and shall use this equipment per the manufacturer's instructions. All test equipment shall have current calibration certification by a third party calibration laboratory, and shall have a signed and dated calibration sticker affixed to the device. Calibration shall be traceable to the National Bureau of Standards and be less than 6 months since last calibration. Defective test equipment and installation tools shall not be used. Installation tools such as torque wrenches shall be calibration certified. ELECTRICAL TESTING 16030 7 WESrFILLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROJECT DOCUMENTS A. Deliver applicable project documents to testing company two weeks prior to testing. As a minimum include: Division 16 Specification Electrical Floor Plans showing equipment to be tested. Electrical One Line Diagrams Submittals of Manufacturers Data and Shop Drawings including engineers review letter of all systems to be tested. Coordination Study 3.2 SCHEDULE A. Notify Architect 10 working days prior to performance of any test. 3.3 TEST REPORTS A. The Contractor shall prepare test reports including description of project, description of equipment tested, description of test, test results, conclusions and recommendations, retesting results and list of test equipment used and calibration date. B. One copy of each test report shall be delivered directly to the electrical engineer and Owner within 7 calendar days of the test. C. Insert a copy of each test report in the operation and maintenance manuals. 3.4 RETESTING A. Any fault in material or in any part of the installation revealed by these tests shall be investigated, replaced or repaired by the Contractor and the same test repeated at Contractor's expense until no fault appears. 3.5 LABELS A. Upon completion of the tests a label shall be attached to all serviced devices. These labels shall indicate date serviced and the testing company. 3.6 OBSERVATIONS BY ENGINEER A. Contractor shall remove and replace covers of electrical equipment, open manholes and remove/replace ceiling tiles to permit engineer to observe equipment and wiring provided. Furnish ladder and flashlight. ELECTRICAL TESTING 16030 8 WES 1 }IhLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.7 TROUBLESHOOTING A. If a system or device provided under this contract does not operate per manufacturers specifications contractor shall provide qualified men with tools and test equipment to find and repair problem at contractor's expense. END OF SECTION 16030 9 ELECTRICAL TESTING 16030 Nearer WEST MELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16050 - EXISTING SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Same as in Section 16010. 1.3 EXISTING SYSTEMS MAINTAINED A. Prior to bidding, existing systems and systems adjacent to the work shall be investigated thoroughly. Any damage resulting from performance of work under this contract shall be repaired to assure continuing operation and integrity during and at completion of the project at no increase in contract cost. B. Any existing wiring serving devices to remain in service and which is interrupted by work performed under this contract shall be rerouted to maintain circuit continuity. Contractor shall assume the risk of maintaining existing systems except relocation of wiring of #2 AWG and above shall be considered an additional cost if not shown to be relocated. If such wiring is found the Contractor shall notify Architect of wiring location, reason it must be removed and cost of relocation and receive the Owner's approval before proceeding with the work C. The building will continue operation during the work and it is essential that no systems operation be interrupted unless scheduled with the Architect. Contractor shall assume responsibility for unscheduled interruptions and expedient repair. D. Provide new raceway support system for all existing raceways above existing or new accessible ceilings in the project area in accordance with Section 16130. (Note: The original construction consists of raceways being supported by the ceiling suspension system which is unacceptable to the Electrical Inspector.) Provide new earthquake support system for all existing fixtures in project area in accordance with Section 16500. 1.4 EXISTING SYSTEMS CONCEALED A. The electrical drawings show portions of the existing electrical systems which are to remain, be removed or be modified as a part of the Contractor's work Concealed features of the existing systems are derived from record drawings and the Engineer's best judgment of the configuration, but no guarantee is made as to their correctness. EXISTING SYSTEMS 16050 WES1'FIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION B. The Contractor shall inspect the existing installation prior to bidding and shall make his own judgment as to the work required to provide a complete installation within the intent of the contract documents. 1.5 DEMOLITION WORK A. All demolition work required under this contract is not shown on the drawings. B. The demolition drawings show portions of the existing systems which are derived from record drawings. The contractor shall assume there is 20% more electrical systems than what is shown on the demolition drawings. C. The Contractor shall inspect the existing installation prior to bidding and shall make his own judgment as to the work required to provide complete demolition within the intent of the contract documents. 1.6 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL EQU PMENT A. Removing, temporary hanging by chains and reinstalling in ceilings of light fixtures, speakers, detectors, exit signs and other electrical equipment is not shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall investigate the ceiling demolition work and include this work in the bid. The sequence of work shall be (1) Remove and store fixtures, detectors and speakers along with removal of ceiling, (2) Provide temporary support for wired fixtures and devices to be reinstalled in new ceiling at approximately the same location. Use chains for lighting fixture support, (3) Clean and reinstall in the new or replaced ceilings. Provide new lamps when so noted. Provide temporary relocation of exit signs to original location when exit is reactivated. 1.7 WORK OUTSIDE OF REMODEL AREAS A. Caution - this work is not shown on the contract documents. Provide new wiring systems in concealed ceiling spaces to switchboards, panelboards, communication and signaling and system control panels. Remove and relocate electrical equipment in the way of other trades work installed under this contract. Spaces above existing ceilings are highly congested. Route wiring around obstructions and provide pull boxes per code. 1.8 PREMIUM TIME A. Premium time shall be included in the Base Bid for electrical system(s) outages and for other work as required by the schedule, as shown on the drawings and as noted in other Divisions of the Specifications. 1.9 EXISTING STRUCTURAL CONDITIONS A. Existing floor slabs are post tensioned concrete slabs. Contractor shall penetrate floors by core drilling only. Extreme caution is required to avoid cutting post tensioned EXISTING SYSTEMS 16050 2 WES 1 F1hLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION cables. X-ray of floor shall be performed prior to selecting location of cores and anchors for electrical equipment. Cores and anchors shall be kept 2" minimum away from the post tensioning cables. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 21 EXISTING MATERIALS A. All materials which are a part of the building shall remain the property of the Owner. 2.2 EXISTING MATERIALS TO BE REINSTALLED A. Existing materials and equipment (except interior, undamaged raceways) that are removed as a part of the work or stored in surplus shall not be reinstalled as a part of the new systems unless specifically noted or authorized in writing by the Owner. Forward a copy of the authorization to the Engineer. The requirements of the specifications (i.e., condition, installation, testing, etc.) shall apply as if the materials were new, furnished by the Contractor. 2.3 EXISTING MATERIALS NOT TO BE REINSTALLED A. In coordination with the Architect, these materials shall be made available for his inspection and decision as to whether the Owner will retain possession. Items selected for retention shall be turned over to the Owner. These items shall be delivered to a location on the premises selected by the Owner. Take reasonable care to avoid damage to this material. If the Contractor fails to conform to this requirement, he shall purchase and turn over to the Owner replacement material of like kind and quantity. B. All material not selected for retention by the Owner and debris shall be legally disposed of by the Contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Examine the structure, building, and conditions under which electrical work is to be installed for conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of electrical work Do not proceed with work until deficiencies or detrimental conditions have been corrected. Report deficiencies or detrimental conditions of existing electrical work which might be unsuitable to connect with or receive other work. Failure to so report shall constitute acceptance of other work as being fit and proper for the reception of electrical work. EXISTING SYSTEMS 16050 3 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.2 DEMOLITION A. Switchboards, panelboards, signaling and communication systems, other electrical equipment free standing or surface mounted, raceway (exposed) and conductors; which are no longer in service presently or as a result of this contract shall be removed. Unused flush mounted devices, outlet and other boxes in finished areas shall be removed from wall and the remaining hole patched to match adjacent wall surfaces. Unused raceways and sleeves shall be cut flush at ceiling, floor or wall and filled with grout. Unused raceways above accessible ceilings shall be removed. B. Contractor shall remove all floor, wall or ceiling mounted electrical equipment in the "Demolition Area" indicated on the drawing even if the equipment/or device is not shown on the project drawings. If Contractor questions whether a particular device is to be removed notify the Architect noting type and location of device. If so directed the Contractor shall maintain the existing device in service without any change in contract price. 3.3 POWER OUTAGES A. The facility will continue its normal operation during the construction work; therefore it is required that the Contractor schedule electrical system(s) outages with the Owner. Electrical systems(s) outages to Owner occupied areas shall not be permitted from 7:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. on any day of the week. B. Submit a written request for a power outage at least one week in advance identifying the areas, and systems that will be affected, time and duration of the power outage. The Contractor shall receive written authorization to proceed with the outage and shall renotify the Owner verbally at least one hour prior to the outage and also notify the Owner when the outage is completed. C. Unscheduled Outages: In the event that the Contractor's work causes or contributes to an electrical system(s) outage (or other system fault), the Contractor is responsible for immediately correcting the problem. Included (as examples) shall be arty premium time required to stay on the job site until problem is corrected and air freight for parts not locally available. If the Contractor fails to correct the problem, the Owner's cost of correcting the problem shall be deducted from the Contractor's contract amount. 3.4 EXISTING SYSTEMS MAINTAINED A. General Reroute existing circuits that are interrupted as a result of this contract that serve devices to remain in service. 1. Power Circuits (Including removal or relocation of existing panelboards). Prior to demolition work trace out and identify each branch circuit and feeder circuit that serves loads in occupied areas. Provide temporary wiring, schedule outage and reconnect loads to temporary wiring. EXISTING SYSTEMS 16050 4 WESTHELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION Provide new wiring in new location. Schedule outage, disconnect temporary wiring, and connect loads to new wiring. Remove temporary wiring. Outage for each circuit shall not be more than 20 minutes. 2. Signal and Communication Systems Prior to demolition trace out and identify device and systems being served. Provide temporary wiring to maintain operation of system throughout facility. Schedule outage and connect to temporary wiring and test system. Provide new wiring on new location. Schedule outage, disconnect temporary wiring, and reconnect to new wiring. Remove temporary wiring. Outage for each system shall not be more than 20 minutes. 3.5 ACCESS TO PERFORM WORK A. Carefully remove, store or temporarily hang and re -install in undamaged condition all electrical equipment, lighting fixtures and ceiling tiles where access to perform work is required. Clean prior to re -installation. Provide new lamps when so noted. 3.6 NEW DEVICES IN REMODEL AREAS A. Provide flush mounting for devices in existing walls. Fish conduit in wall. Where existing boxes are indicated to be reused, extend box as necessary and provide new devices and plates. B. Contractor is cautioned that the existing building contains clay tile and concrete walls. New devices may require cutting and patching, and it shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide all cutting and patching required for the installation of the Division 16 work. Contractor shall investigate existing areas prior to bid and shall include all costs of such work in the bid. C. This facility has wiring embedded in raceways in concrete slabs. Provide new concealed wiring to last outlet or pull box before homerun to panel. END OF SECTION 16050 EXISTING SYSTEMS 16050 WES I HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16072 - ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Seismic restraints for electrical equipment and systems. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A325: American Society for Testing and Materials - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts. B. ASTM A603: American Society for Testing and Materials - Standard Specification for Zinc -Coated Steel Structural Wire Rope. C. IBC: International Building Code. D. ICC: International Code Council. E. MFMA-3: Metal Framing Manufacturers Association's Metal Framing Standards Publication. F. MSS SF -58: Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, and Manufacture. G. NECA 1: National Electrical Contractors Association Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting. H. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development. J. Seismic Restraint A structural support element such as a metal framing member, a cable, an anchor bolt or stud, a fastening device, or an assembly of these items used to transmit seismic forces from an item of equipment or system to building structure and to limit movement of item during a seismic event. UBC: Uniform Building Code. ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 16072 1 WESrrtt:LD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of electrical support[ and seismic -restraint] component used. 1. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by [an evaluation service member of the ICC Evaluation Program] [the ICBG Evaluation Service] [California OSHPD][an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction). 2. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating routing of single raceways, trapeze systems and cable trays requiring bracing. Indicate on the shop drawing the type and location of bracing to be used. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and anchorage devices, signed and sealed by a registered structural engineer in the state of [Insert State here]. Include the following: 1. Fabricated Supports: Representations of field -fabricated supports not detailed on Drawings. 2. Seismic Restraints: Detail anchorage and bracing not defined by details or charts on Drawings. Include the following a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile, compressive, and shear loads. b. Details: Detail fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Submit details and calculations for the following items: 1) Raceway Supports 2) Busways 3) Cable Trays 4) Electric Power Generation Equipment 5) Pad Mounted Transformers 6) Pad Mounted Switches 7) Secondary Unit Substations 8) Automatic Transfer Switches 9) Bypass/ Isolation Transfer Switches 10) Switchgear 11) Switchboards 12) Dry Type Transformers 13) Motor Control Centers ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 16072 2 WES1"FLELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 14) Uninterruptible Power System 15) Power Distribution Unit c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By [an evaluation service member of the ICC Evaluation Service Program] [California OSHPD] [the ICBG Evaluation Service] [an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction], showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations). C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints. D. Welding certificates. E. Qualification Data: For [professional engineer] [and] [testing agency]. F. Field quality -control test reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with seismic -restraint requirements in the [California Building Code, Code of Regulations of OSHPD] [IBC] [UBC] unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. B. Testing of Seismic Anchorage Devices: Comply with testing requirements in Part 3. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."<Confirm the section reference with the structural engineer> 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: [A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F]. B. S8, Mapped Maximum Considered Earthquake Spectral Response at Short Periods: <Insert mapped value for Project site from IBC Figures 1615(1) through 1615(15).> C. Si, Mapped Maximum Considered Earthquake Spectral Response at 1 -Second Period: <Insert mapped value for Project site from IBC Figures 1615(1) through 1615(15).> D. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: [I] [II] [III] [IV]. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Project Seismic Zone as Defined in the UBC: Zone [1] [2A] [2B] [3] [4]. B. Project Seismic Zone Factor as Defined in the UBC: Zone Factor [0.075] [0.15] [0.20] [0.30] [0.40]. ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 16072 3 WESIFIELD SHOPPJ NGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Occupancy Category as Defined in the UBC: [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed under this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of [two] <Insert number> times the applied force. B. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-3, factory -fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: a. Cooper B -Line; a division of Cooper Industries. b. ERICO International Corporation. c. Allied Support Systems; Power -Strut Unit. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O -Strut Div. f. National Pipe Hanger Corp. g. Thomas & Betts Corporation. h Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. i. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Finishes: a. Metallic Coatings: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-3. b. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-3. c. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-3. 3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for structural loading[ and applicable seismic forces]. C. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural -grade, factory -formed, glass -fiber - resin channels and angles with [9/16 -inch]- [(14 -mm-)] diameter holes at a maximum of [8 inches] [(200 mm)] o.c., in at least 1 surface. 1. Manufacturers: a. Allied Support Systems; Aickinstrut Unit. b. Cooper B -Line; a division of Cooper Industries. c. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited. d. Seasafe, Inc. 2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items. 3. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles[, except metal items may be stainless steel]. 4. Rated Strength Selected to suit structural loading[ and applicable seismic forces]. D. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1. ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 16072 4 WES i HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION E. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: [Steel] [Steel and malleable -iron] hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: 1) Hilti, Inc. 2) 1TW Construction Products. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong -Tie Co. Inc. 2. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type, [zinc -coated] [stainless] steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Manufacturers: 1) Cooper B -Line; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc 3) Hilti, Inc. 4) 1TW Construction Products. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 6) Powers Fasteners. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable -iron slotted -support -system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-3 or MSS SP -58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP -58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.2 SEISMIC -RESTRAINT COMPONENTS A. Rated Strength, Features, and Application Requirements for Restraint Components: As defined in reports by [an evaluation service member of the ICC Evaluation Service Program] [the ICBO Evaluation Service] [California OSHPD] [an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction]. 1. Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension, compression, shear, and pullout force of components used shall be at least [two] <Insert number> times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected. B. Angle and Channel -Type Brace Assemblies: Steel angles or steel slotted -support - system components; with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 16072 WESI'NILLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 1. Manufacture: International Seismic Application Technology (ISAT) (877) 999- 4728. C. Cable Restraints: ASTM A 603, zinc -coated, steel wire rope attached to steel or stainless-steel thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service. 1. Manufacturers: a. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. b. International Seismic Application Technology (ISAT) c. Loos & Co., Inc. d. Mason Industries, Inc. 2. Seismic Mountings, Anchors, and Attachments: Devices as specified in Part 2 "Support, Anchorage, and Attachment Components" Article, selected to resist seismic forces. 3. Hanger Rod Stiffener: [Steel tube or steel slotted -support -system sleeve with internally bolted connections] [Reinforcing steel angle damped] to hanger rod, of design recognized by [an evaluation service member of the ICC Evaluation Program] [the ICBG Evaluation Service] [California OSHPDj [an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction]. 4. Bushings for Floor -Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene units designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs used. 5. Bushing Assemblies for Wall -Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used. 2.3 FABRICA I'Ell METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural -steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems, except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as [required by] [scheduled in NECA 1, where Table 1 lists maximum spacings Tess than stated in] NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [3/8 inch (10 mm)] in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with steel slotted [or other ]support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least [25] <Insert number> percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 16072 6 WES! FIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 1. Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by [an evaluation service member of the ICC Evaluation Program] [the ICBG Evaluation Service] [California OSHPD] [an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction] 2. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with [two -bolt conduit clamps] [single -bolt conduit clamps] [single -bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel]. 3. Spring -steel damps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for [1 inch (25 mm)] [I -1/2 -inch (38 -mm) land smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT[ AND SEISMIC -RESTRAINT] INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements, except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, [EMT] [IMC] [RMC] [EMT, IMC, and RMC] may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Install seismic -restraint components using methods approved by the evaluation service providing required submittals for component. D. Strength of Support[ and Seismic -Restraint] Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static[ and seismic] loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg). E. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface -Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts or use expansion anchor fasteners. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle -type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder -actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard -weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight - aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 6. To Steel: [Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts] [Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP -69] [Spring -tension clamps]. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted -channel racks attached to substrate[ by means that meet seismic -restraint strength and anchorage requirements]. ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 16072 WES1'1.IhLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION F. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICAI EL) METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site -fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF SEISMIC -RESTRAINT COMPONENTS A. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor -mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base. B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall -mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment -mounting channels are attached to wall. C. Restraint Cables: Provide slack within maximums recommended by manufacturer. D. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing: Test pullout resistance of seismic anchorage devices. 1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless post connection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice. 3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load -spreading members. 4. Test at least [four] <insert number> of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect. 5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. C. Record test results in tabular form and submit to architect. ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 16072 8 END OF SECTION 16072 WES I WELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 16072 9 skim WES1'FIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Engraved Plastic Laminate Nameplates 2. Wire and Cable Markers 3. Primary Cable Tags 4. Posted Drawings and Operating Procedures 5. Safety Signs B. Related Sections: 1. 16425 Switchboards 2. 16470 Panelboards C. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and 'Slav/ conditions of Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI A13.1 Operational and Warning signs. B. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 29 CFR - Labor Chapter XVII Part 1910-145 "Occupational and Safety Health Standards" 1992. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions. B. Submit a complete nameplate schedule to indicate nameplate size, lettering size and color. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 WESU thLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ENGRAVED PLASTIC LAMINATE NAMEPLATES A. Materials: Three -layer laminated plastic with minimum nameplate dimensions of 1 3/4" high by 5" wide. Lettering height for panel or equipment identifier @ 1/4". Remaining lines ®1/8" high with 1/8" spacing between lines. 1. Normal System: White letters on black background. 2. Emergency System: White letters on red background. 3. Comply with ANSI 13.1. B. Switchboard Nameplates: 1. Provide engraved plastic nameplate for each new switchboard with the following information: Line 1: Switchboard Name Line 2: Source from which fed (i.e. "Fed From:") Line 3: Voltage, phase and wire Line 4: Branch from which served (Normal, Emergency, Legally Required Standby, Optional Standby). 2. Provide engraved plastic nameplates for each branch device in each switchboard with the following information: Line 1: Load Served (i.e. panel names, motor control center, etc.) Line 2: Area of building served (i.e. penthouse, lab, etc.) Line 3: Type of load served (i.e. lighting, receptacles, equipment, etc.) C. Panelboard Nameplates 1. Provide engraved plastic nameplate for each new panelboard with the following information Line 1: Panelboard Name Line 2: Source from which panel is fed Line 3: Transfer switch from which panel is fed (if applicable) Line 4: Voltage, phase and wire D. Transfer Switches 1. Provide phenolic nameplate for each new automatic and manual transfer switch with the following information: Line1: Transfer switch name (i.e. ATS...) ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 2 WES!HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION Line 2: Branch of Emergency system (Emergency, Legally Required Standby, Optional Standby) Line 3: Normal source feed Line 4: Emergency source feed Line 5: Load served E. Disconnects, Starters, Combination Starters and Other Devices 1. Provide phenolic nameplate for each device with the following information: Line 1: Load served Line 2: Panelboard and circuit number from which device is fed Line 3: Fuse size or breaker size as applicable F. Main Service Project Nameplate 1. At Main Service Distribution Switchboards, provide engraved nameplate on switchgear front with the following information Project Name: (3/8" lettering, all other 1/4") Architect Electrical Consultant (Sparling, Inc.) Electrical Contractor Year of Manufacturer 2. At Main Service Distribution Switchboard, provide engraved nameplate on switchgear front with the following information, per NEC 230 -2(e) Identification. "All other services, feeders, and branch circuits supplying the building or structure and the area served by each" 3. Emergency System: White letters on red background. 4. Comply with ANSI A13.1. 2.2 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3 for minimum lettering size. B. Adhesive Labels: Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive vinyl with legend overlaminated with a clear, weather -and chemical -resistant coating. C. Pretensioned, Wraparound Plastic Sleeves: Flexible, preprinted, color -coded, acrylic band sized to suit the diameter of the line it identifies and arranged to stay in place by pretensioned gripping action when placed in position ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 3 WES I FIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION D. Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters. E. Aluminum, Wraparound Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.014 -inch- (0.4 -mm-) thick aluminum sheet, with stamped or embossed legend, and fitted with slots or ears for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors. F. Plasticized Card -Stock Tags: Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field -printed legends. Orange background, unless otherwise indicated, with eyelet for fastener. G. Aluminum -Faced, Card -Stock Tags: Weather -resistant, 18 -point minimum card stock faced on both sides with embossable aluminum sheet, 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) thick, laminated with moisture -resistant acrylic adhesive, punched for fasteners, and preprinted with legends to suit each application. 2.3 PRIMARY CABLE TAGS A. Provide embossed copper tag with dimensions of 11/2" wide x 5" long x 0.05" thick. Use 1/2" high embossed letters. Apply white paint into embossed characters. Include phase information into indentifier. Permanently fasten to cable with plastic tie wraps. 2.4 POSTED DRAWINGS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Print electrical riser diagrams on 20 Ib. bond paper. (Blue print paper is not acceptable). Reduce drawings to approximately 1/2 size using Xerox reduction process. Contact engineer to obtain updated original plans for printing. B. Mounting Frames: Extruded aluminum, 4 point screw mount with 1/8" clear plexiglass cover. C. Operating Instructions: Printed in all capital letters of 12 pt size minimum. 2.5 SAI,E 1 Y SIGNS A. Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. B. Engraved Plastic Signs: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. C. Baked -Enamel Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, Iegend, and size required for the application. 1/4 -inch (6.4 - mm) grommets in corners for mounting. D. Exterior, Metal -Backed, Butyrate Signs: Weather -resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose -acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396 -inch (1mm) galvanized -steel backing; and ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 4 WES 1 HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION with colors, legend, and size required for the application. 1/4 -inch (6.4 -mm) grommets in corners for mounting. E. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self -tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32, stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ENGRAVED PLASTIC LAMINATE NAMEPLATES A. Provide nameplates for the following: 1. Equipment identification labels including, but not limited to: switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, disconnect switches, motor starters, transformers, capacitors, fixed equipment, motor control centers, and transfer switches. 2. Special equipment outlet labels. (1/4" letters). B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. C. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines. D. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws or rivets. Adhesive is unacceptable. E. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panel board that is recessed in finished locations. 3.2 WIRE AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide wire markers for control wiring as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams or equipment manufacturer's Shop Drawings for control wiring. B. Provide identification labels with the following information in accordance with NEC 210.4(d). Conductors of power systems in this building are identified as follows: 280Y/120V 480Y/277V A Phase (left bus in panel): Black Brown B Phase (center bus in panel): Red Orange C Phase (right bus in panel): Blue Yellow Neutral: White Gray Equipment Ground: Green Green Isolated Ground: Grn/Yel* Grn/YeI* ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 WEST' tIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION *Green with yellow tracer 1. 2.0 Mil, White Polyester, Permanent Adhesive Material. Peel -off self sticking type. 2. Lettering: Black #10 font Arial on white opaque background. 3. In electrical rooms and closets, mechanical rooms, and other similar areas, post decal on front of panel, MCC, and /or switchboard. 4. In finished areas, where panel may be painted at a later time, post decal behind circuit breaker doors or behind dead front door where decal can be easily seen when circuits are being added. 3.3 PRIMARY CABLE TAGS A. Install primary cable tags at all points of accessibility such as manholes, padmounted switches and interior switchgear. Firmly attach all tags to each cable phase using plastic tie wraps. Position tags so that they are dearly legible to the observer. 3.4 RACEWAY AND JUNCTION BOX COLOR CODING (IDENTIFICATION) A. Conduit Identification: 1. In accessible ceiling spaces and exposed in unfinished areas, using an indelible marking pen, label all conduits 1" larger with panel and circuit numbers of conductors routed through the conduit. Label conduit at all wall penetrations and connections to all panels, junction boxes, and equipment served. 2. Identify floor/wall area directly above or adjacent to medium voltage conduits within 12" of the floor or wall. 3.5 WARNING SIGNS A. General: Provide warning signs where there is hazardous exposure or danger associated with access to or operation of electrical facilities. Provide text of sufficient clarity and lettering of sufficient size to convey adequate information at each location; mount permanently in an appropriate and effective location. Comply with ANSI A13.1 standard color and design. B. Operational Tags: Where needed for proper and adequate information on operation and maintenance of electrical systems, provide tags of plasticized card stock, either pre- printed or hand printed to convey the message; example: "DO NOT OPEN THIS SWITCH WHEN BREAKER IS CLOSED." 3.6 POSTED DRAWINGS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Mount drawings and operating procedures on the wall immediately adjacent to the main piece of equipment for which the instructions apply. If sufficient wall space is available, mount directly to one of the sheet metal panels of the equipment. END OF SECTION 16075 6 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 WES ].HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16105 - ELECTRICAL SITE WORK PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Comply with OSHA standards and criteria. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Provide all excavation, trenching, backfill and surface restoration required for the electrical work. B. Coordinate electrical system placement with new and existing utilities. 1.3 REFERENCES A. APWA - American Public Works Association B. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MIXES A. Concrete shall be APWA Class 3000, manufactured with 1/2 inch aggregate and ASTM C150 Type 1 or Type 11 cement. 2.2 ASPHALT A. Asphalt shall match the standard specifications of the local municipality for public roads adjoining the site. 2.3 CRUSHED ROCK A. Crushed rock shall be 1 1/4" minus unless smaller is required for bedding material. 2.4 SAND 1111w01 A. Sand shall be clean and washed building sand. ELECTRICAL SITE WORK 16105 WES!FThLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.5 TOPSOIL A. Finish course of topsoil shall be adequate to support replanted or replacement vegetation. 2.6 SOD A. New sod shall be mature, densely rooted grass 99% free of weeds and objectionable grasses. 2.7 PLANTS A. Plants shall be obtained from a commercial nursery and be of the same type and maturity as the existing plants. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Prior to completion of work Contractor shall return site to the condition it was in before work commenced. B. Where existing materials must be removed to support electrical site work replacement materials shall be of the same type and quality, unless type and quality are defined herein. 3.2 EXISTING UTILTTIES A. The existing utilities shown on the contract drawings have been plotted from available records. No guarantee is made to the accuracy of the locations indicated, and is shown for whatever benefit the Contractor may derive therefrom. B. Contact all serving utilities and have them locate their lines prior to commencing work. Forty-eight (48) hours prior to commencing work telephone "Call Before You Dig" at 1- 800-424-5555. The Contractor shall also have the Owner locate all utility lines prior to commencing work. C. Protect shown, visible and located utilities from damage. Promptly repair all active shown, visible and located utilities damaged by construction. This repair shall be made solely at the expense of the Contractor. D. When despite all care and caution damage occurs to active utilities not visible, Iocated or shown on the contract documents, the Contractor shall immediately obtain a decision as to repair. When so directed the repair shall be made immediately by the Contractor whose trade is involved. The contract price shall not change when the conditions outlined above and utmost possible care and caution have not been followed. ELECTRICAL SITE WORK 16105 2 WES1'N1ELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION E. Adjust the depth of electrical utilities to avoid existing utilities with no change to contract price. F. Use metal detectors to search for unknown utilities in proposed route of electrical systems. 3.3 SECURING SITE WORK A. The Contractor is solely responsible for securing all electrical site work with adequate barriers, warning indicators and shoring. 3.4 TRENCHING A. Trenching shall be to depths as required by code, the particular installation, or as shown on the drawings. Trench width and length as required by the installation or as shown. B. Trench bottom shall be free of debris and graded smooth. Where trench bottom is rock, or rocky, or contains debris larger than 1", or material with sharp edges, Contractor shall over excavate 3" and fill with 3" of sand. C. Provide 11-0" minimum separation between new electrical utilities and other utilities, except gas lines shall be 1'-0" both vertical and horizontal and shall be 3'-0" (horizontal) for all water service lines. D. All crossings of concrete or asphalt shall be performed only after the surface material has been saw cut to required width and removed. 3.5 EXCAVATIONS A. Provide excavations as required for installation intended or as shown. B. Excavation bottom shall be free of debris and graded smooth Where bottom is rock, or rocky, or contains debris Iarger than 1", or material with sharp edges, over excavate 6" and fill with 6" sand. C. Conform to utility requirements for excavation and vault installation in addition to contract document requirements where excavations are for installing utility companies vaults. 3.6 DEWATERING A. Provide, operate and maintain all pumps or other dewatering equipment required for control of water in trenches and excavations for electrical site work during the entire construction period. ELECTRICAL SITE WORK 16105 WES1"Fll LD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.7 SHORING A. Provide as required by trenching and excavating to secure site work 3.8 BACKFILL, BEDDING AND COMPACTION A. Backfill around raceways per 16130. B. Bedding and backfill around precast vaults and handholes shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Where manufacturer has no recommendations provide O'-6" of 1/2" minus pea gravel or sand bedding for all vaults, and any handholes larger than 3'-0" x 3'-0". For handholes smaller than 3'-0" x 3'-0" provide 0'-3" pea gravel or sand. Backfill shall extend at Least 6" from structure. D. All other backfill shall be free of organic debris and inorganic materials larger than 6" in diameter. E. Place all backfill material so as to obtain a minimum degree of compaction of 95 percent of the maximum density at optimum moisture content. Moisten backfill material as required to obtain proper compaction F. Broken pavement, concrete, sod, roots and debris shall not be used for backfill. G. Within the one year guarantee period, re -fill, compact and re -finish all settled areas to grade. 3.9 WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL A. Promptly remove from the site and legally dispose of all materials from trenching and excavation which are remaining after backfill and compaction. 3.10 SURFACE REFINISHING A. Refinish every disturbed surface to its' original condition. B. Replace all planted materials not surviving 90 days after contract acceptance at Contractor's own expense. C. Return after one year and refinish all settled areas to grade. 3.11 CARE OF PLANTS AND TREES A. Unless specifically noted for demolition, remove and safely store all plants and trees in trenching or excavation areas prior to commencing site work ELECTRICAL SITE WORK 16105 4 WES I FIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Where plants and trees fail to survive storage replace with like kind, quality, and maturity. END OF SECTION 16105 'gi w 4110 ELECTRICAL SITE WORK 16105 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16113 - UNDERFLOOR DUCT SYSTEM PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Provide U.L. listed underfloor duct and trench duct system complete and fully operational with service fittings. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepare and submit for review shop drawings and catalog cuts of the underfloor duct, junction boxes, supports, service outlet fittings, and other accessories before work is started. Shop drawings shall consist of scaled, dimensioned floor plan(s) showing the complete installation including all materials, fittings, devices and complete dimensions. See 16100. 1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Shall include as -installed floor plans showing exact location of all underfloor ducts and junction boxes. Location and circuiting of all power service outlet fittings. See 16010. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Walker or Square D. Walker catalog numbers used for illustration. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. The system shall include all components necessary including all duct, junction boxes, fittings, supports, elbows, offsets, expansion joints, outlets, raceway, wiring (except telephone and computer wiring), connections, and any necessary accessories to form a complete installation. UNDERFLOOR DUCT SYSTEM 16113 1 WESIHELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.3 SYSTEM A. Shall be single level type, and shall consist of single, double and triple duct as shown. Duct system shall be located in the floor or floor topping slab. Underfloor power duct shall be No. 2, telephone and signal No. 4. 2.4 MARKER SCREWS A. Brass or cadmium plated Walker 1/4-20 corrosion resistant with escutcheon in insert cap. Walker No. 415B or No. 415N as selected by Architect. 2.5 CHAIRS A. Adjustable, designed for one, two or three ducts of height consistent with slab thickness. 2.6 UNDERFLOOR DUCTS A. Ducts shall have 2" IPS preset inserts 24 inches o.c. over the entire length of each duct except for blank duct. Insert height shall be such that top of insert shall be 1/8 inch below the finished pour line. Raceway hubs (3/4") shaIl be provided to feed wall outlets as shown. Additional hubs (size and uses as shown) shall be provided as shown. 2.7 JUNCTION BOXES A. Walker No. 224S for one Number 2 and one Number 4 duct. Walker No. 3244S for one Number 2 and two Number 4 ducts. Coordinate trim with floor finish. Furnish proper height to suit inserts. Provide with proper top and rings for finished floor surface. B. Provision shall be made at corners of junction boxes to accommodate raceway of size as shown. 2.8 CABINET TERMINAL BUSHINGS A. Manufacturer's standard for duct connections to cabinets. 2.9 SERVICE OUTLET FITTINGS A. All service outlet fittings shall be of the same manufacture, finished satin aluminum. Base to be locking type to prevent spinning fittings. Device plates shall be removable from housing. B. Telephone Service Fittings: Shall be of a type approved by the local telephone company. Service fittings shall permit the mounting of another standard fitting on the duct inserts adjacent to the telephone service fitting. Bushed -type fittings shall be of the UNDERFLOOR DUCT SYSTEM 16113 2 WES'I'I-IELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION same design as the receptacle service fittings, but with a single 1 1/4" inside -diameter, bushed -opening, faced so that the cable leaves the bushing in a horizontal plan. Walker #503. C. Receptacle Service Fittings: Walker #513D with #500DR receptacle plates and shall have back-to-back duplex receptacles of configuration in accordance with Section 16140 and shall be of the same manufacture as receptacles furnished under that Section except that NEMA 5-15R or 5-20R shall have ampere rating, voltage and phase engraved in the plate. D. Communication Service Fittings: Shall be identical to telephone service fittings. 2.10 BLANKING PLATES A. Walker #1043S stainless steel. Provide one for each outlet removed (remodel projects). For new projects furnish one for each 20'-0" lineal feet of duct installed, for future use by Owner. 2.11 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING A. Conform with Section 16120 except all conductors shall be stranded. 2.12 EXPANSION JOINT FITTINGS A. Provide at building expansion joints in the floor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. LOCATION AND ARRANGEMENT A. Where fixed dimensions are not indicated on drawings, ducts shall be installed as indicated on the shop drawings. Junction boxes and duct lines shall be located to clear permanent and future planned non -permanent partitions, and shall be coordinated with architectural modules. 3.2 UNDERFLOOR DUCT A. Duct shall be accurately aligned and leveled so that the top of the duct is the proper distance below the finished concrete floor. All ducts and junction boxes shall be aligned and leveled. Duct support chairs are to be used at 5 foot intervals. The top of the duct inserts shall be 1/8" +/- 1/16" below the finished concrete floor. UNDERFLOOR DUCT SYSTEM 16113 3 Register to Remove TrialAffla 3.3 DUCT SUPPORTS 6 tar. ft a SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION A. Metal duct supports shall be located as close as practicable to all duct joints, elbows, bends, terminations, within 30 inches on each side of junction boxes, and elsewhere at intervals of not over 5 feet. Supports not permitted to penetrate the vapor barrier. 3.4 DUCTS A. Blank duct may be used in lieu of insert duct for connecting between parallel duct runs Jess than 6 feet apart (center -to -center), and from wire closet or cabinet to first junction box. 3.5 INSERTS A. Inserts closest to junction box shall be not more than 12 inches from vertical faces of junction boxes. Inserts shall be aligned on the same centers for all services, and for duct rows. 3.6 JUNCTION BOXES A. Cover Plates: Cover plates shall be Leveled flush with the finished concrete floor. Square or rectangular plates shall be laid square with the wall limes. Finish coverplate with proper floor finish surface. B. Protection: Boxes, plates, and rings shall be protected from damage, distortion, and entry of concrete at all times. Boxes, plates, or rings that become marrred during placing of the floor shall be refinished equal to the original. Unused duct or conduit entrances to junction boxes shall be closed with blank closure plates or plugs. Termination of ducts at junction boxes shall be sealed against the ingress of concrete or fill. Boxes shall be held in place, and securely supported from the forms or rough slab, as applicable, during placing of concrete. C. Raceway Connections: Raceway shall not be run above or below the duct. Raceway shall enter junction boxes at corner, or at end duct openings through duct adapters. 3.7 CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS A. Seal all joints and openings watertight prior to concrete pour. Concrete shall be vibrated to eliminate void areas and to assure a solid base under and alongside the duct. Coordinate this work with the concrete pour to assure good workmanship where the concrete floor meets the duct. Do not remove coverplates until after concrete has hardened. 3.8 DUCT MARKERS A. Marker screws shall be provided at inserts at the following locations. UNDERFLOOR DUCT SYSTEM Register eDocPrinter PDF Pro inline Nb Register to Remove TrialWW Ita SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 1. In each insert adjacent to a junction box. 2. In the last insert in each run of duct. 3. At all changes of direction of duct run. 4. Within two feet (both sides) of walls installed over ducts. B. Marker screws shall be flush with the architectural floor finish material. 3.9 SERVICE OUTLET FITTINGS A. Number: Underfloor duct fittings shall be provided in the quantities indicated by the contract documents. Installation of the devices shall be at locations as shown on the shop drawings and/or as directed by the Architect with no additional cost to the Owner. 3.10 CUTTING OF FLOORS A. All necessary cutting of floor for the installation of service fittings shall be made in a neat workmanlike manner and as recommended by the duct manufacturer. Floor construction or finish damaged by the installation of fittings shall be patched or replaced as directed by the Architect. 3.11 WIRING A. All receptacle outlets shall be completely wired and connected at no additional cost to the Owner regardless of the selection of location by the Architect. Not more than eight 120 volt receptacle fittings shall be connected to a single circuit unless explicitly shown otherwise. Sufficient slack wire shall be left in junction boxes for future connection of outlets feeding from the same circuit. B. Wiring to each receptacle shall consist of dedicated individual conductors from the junction box to each individual receptacle outlet such that any receptacle could be removed without having to re -feed power to any other receptacle. Splice or feed thru connections are not permitted in service fittings. Loop wiring method is not permitted. C. When adding receptacle outlets to existing ducts, include in bid and provide wiring and re -wiring of existing loop wired outlets in the work area per above. Rewire from existing junction boxes immediately adjacent to work areas where existing loop method wiring is presently connected into work area. 3.12 ADDITIONAL FITTINGS A. Service fittings which the Architect does not direct to be installed, shall be turned over the Owner for future use. Obtain receipt and include in 0 & M manual. B. In addition to those shown on the drawings, provide in bid the following quantities of additional fittings complete with installation and all required mounting hardware for installation as directed by Architect: UNDERFLOOR DUCT SYSTEM Register eDocPrinterPDF Pro Online Nbw! Register to Remove Trial)Na,o,,reaI r SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 1. Power Receptacle -<Insert Note Here> 2. Telephone -<Insert Note Here> 3. Communications -<Insert Note Here> 3.13 FIELD OBSERVATION A. Upon completion of the underfloor duct system, and before ducts are covered, verify all ducts, boxes, etc., to be in place. Entire system must be free of obstructions and moisture before floor finish is applied and before wiring is installed. END OF SECTION 16113 UNDERFLOOR DUCT SYS I hM Register eDocPrinter PDF Pro Online Now!! WESI'HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (Copper Only) PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Building wire and cable Remote control and signal circuits Splices, connectors, and terminations B. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). C. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRE AND CABLE A. General 1. Copper conductor, single insulated wire. 2. ASTM B1 solid conductors; ASTM B8 for stranded conductors 3. 600 volt insulation class, 90°C maximum operating temperature for dry and wet locations B. Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables Type THEN/ THWN, UL 83 listed, comply with NEMA WC5. C. Rubber Insulated Wires and Cables Type )(HEW -2, UL 44 listed, comply with NEMA WC3. Type USE -2, UL 44 listed, comply with NEMA WC3. ftkvi CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 WESTF'IELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.2 REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CIRCUITS A. Class 1 1. Copper conductor, single insulated wire 2. Insulation type Tl -IN/ THWN (90°C), 600 volt insulation class 3. Type XHHW for ambient temperature less than 0°C 4. UL 83 listed, ASTM B1 solid conductors; ASTM B8 for stranded conductors B. Class 2 and 3 1. Copper conductor, multiple twisted conductors covered with an overall non- metallic jacket unless otherwise noted 2. 300 volt XLPE insulation rated 105°C 3. UL listed for use in the space in which circuits will be installed 2.3 SPLIC'FS, CONNECTORS & TERMINALS A. Splices 1. Electrical Tape: 7 nil thick, PVC backing with flexibility and adhesion at 0°F. 2. Pre -Stretched Tubing: En( pre -stretched tubular rubber sleeve suitable for insulation of voltages up to 600 volts. 3M PST series or equivalent. 3. Heat Shrink Tubing: Thermally stabilized cross-linked polyolefin with 3 to 1 expansion and internal adhesive sealant. Thomas & Betts Shrink -Kon or equivalent. 4. Resin Filled Insulators: Plastic mold body with pourable insulating and sealing compound. 3M Scotchcast 82 or 90 series or equivalent. B. Connectors 1. No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Pre -insulated "twist -on" type with integral spring and insulated housing per UL 486C. Manufacturers: Ideal, Thomas & Betts, or 3M. 2. No 8 AWG and Larger: Bolt or compression set type per UL 486C. Provide two hole compression set connectors for ground bus applications. Manufacturers: Thomas & Betts, O.Z. Gedney. C. Terminals 1. Stranded Conductors *10 and Smaller: Comply with UL 486A 2. Heavy wall thickness copper, tin plated with nylon insulation 3. Thomas & Betts Sta-Kon Terminals 4. Cable ties - nylon locking type. Thomas & Betts Ty -Rap 2.4 TERMINATIONS A. Compression set, bolted, or screw type lug or direct to bolted or screw type terminal. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 2 WES 1'r'IELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.5 PLASTIC CABLE TIES A. Nylon or approved, locking type. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRE & CABLE A. Sizing 1. Use stranded conductors for #8 AWG and larger. Conductors of #10 and #12 AWG may be solid or stranded at the contractor's option. 2. Minimum power and lighting branch circuit requirement of #12 AWG. B. Color Coding 1. Color code wire in accordance with the coding shown below: 208Y/120V 480Y/277V A Phase (Left bus in panel): Black Brown 13 Phase (Center bus in panel) Red Orange C Phase (Right bus in panel) Blue Yellow Neutral White Gray Equipment Ground Green Green Isolated Ground Grn/Yel* Grn/Yel* 2. If large conductors cannot be purchased with the correct insulation color, color code the conductors with wire and cable markers of the appropriate color. Completely encircle the conductor with color coding tape for a minimum length of 6 inches at all accessible locations. 3. In the event that separate neutrals are specified with each phase conductor, provide a white neutral conductor with a tracer of the same color as the corresponding phase conductor. C. Installation 1. Utilize type THHN/THWN wire for all power, lighting circuits except where the ambient temperature is below 0°C, use Type XHHW installation. 2. Install all wiring in a raceway system unless otherwise specified. 3. Install wire only after building interior has been protected from the weather. 4. Install wire only after mechanical work likely to damage wire has been completed. 5. Completely and thoroughly swab exterior raceways before installing wire. 6. Pull all conductors into a common raceway simultaneously. 7. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. 8. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards. 9. Provide conductor vertical supporting device as required by NEC 300-19. 10. Conductors from one system shall not be intermixed in the same raceway as another system unless shown otherwise. Examples of circuits not be to be CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 3 WES I k U LD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION intermixed are 480Y/277 with 208Y/120 volt circuits, emergency power, Line voltage circuits with low voltage wiring, etc. 3.2 REMOTE CONTROL & SIGNAL CIRCUITS A. Sizing - #16 AWG minimum. B. Installation: 1. Install cables in cable tray and cable rings. 2. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage. 3. Support cables above accessible ceilings; do not rest on ceiling tiles. 4. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. 3.3 SPLICES, CONNECTORS & TERMINALS A. Splices 1. Do not make splices without the approval of the engineer. 2. Splice wires and cables only in accessible locations such as within junction boxes. 3. Make splices to carry full capacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. 4. Make below -grade splices in manholes and handholes watertight with pre - stretched or heat shrinkable insulating tubing, or resin filled insulator. B. Connectors 1. Except where equipment is furnished with bolted or screw type lug, use compression set pressure connectors with insulating covers. Use compression tools and die compatible with the connectors being installed. 2. Use bolt or compression -set type with application of insulating tape, pre - stretched or heat shrinkable insulating tubing for splices and taps of #8 AWG copper conductors and larger. 3. Torque conductor connections to manufacturer's recommended values. 4. Use pre -insulated "twist -on" connectors with integral spring for splices and taps of #10 AWG copper conductors and smaller. C. Terminals 1. Insulate ends of spare conductors with electrical tape and identify spare circuit number where appropriate. 2. Eye type crimped terminal for removable screw type terminal. Forked torque terminal when screw terminal cannot be removed. 3. Train wires to eliminate fanning of stands, crimp with proper tool and die. 4. Torque screw termination per manufacturer's recommended values. 5. Cable ties: neatly bundle conductors and cables together for support. Size cable ties sufficiently to accommodate the multiple cables being supported. END OF SECTION 16120 4 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 4.0 WES'I'HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections 16105 Electrical Site Work 16132 Flush Floor Outlets 16740 Telephone Computer Raceways and Boxes 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures and cabinets for electrical wiring. B. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 16010 General Provisions. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 16010. Submit product data only for surface raceways and fittings, wireways, enclosures and cabinets. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways and boxes with other construction elements to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 WESrFtLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Rigid Steel Conduit ANSI C80.1, UL 6. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit: ANSI C80.6, UL 1242. C. Fittings: NEMA FB1, UL 514B, galvanized malleable iron or non -corrosive alloy threaded fittings. Erickson and watertight split couplings are permitted. Set screw and running thread fittings are not permitted. D. Conduit Bodies and Fittings Manufacturers: American Electric; Construction Materials Group, Crouse -Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Emerson Electric Co.; Appleton Electric Co., Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co., Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products, O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal, Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM, Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co., Link Seal, Thomas Sr Betts. E. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5. R Plastic Coated Rigid Steel Intermediate Metal Conduit: NEMA RNI. 2.2 ELECTRIC METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Hot dip galvanized, electrogalvanized or sherardized, steel tubing, ANSI C80.3, UL 797. B. Fittings: NEMA FB1 UL 5143, steel or malleable iron, compression or set screw. Indenntor, drive -on, die cast or pressure cast fittings not permitted. C. Conduit Bodies and Fittings Manufacturers: American Electric; Bridgeport, Construction Materials Group, Crouse -Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Emerson Electric Co.; Appleton Electric Co., Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co., Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products, O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal, Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM, Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co., Link Seal, Thomas & Betts. 2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT' (FMC) A. UL 1, galvanized, or zinc coated flexible steel or aluminum for dry locations. Flexible metallic tubing not permitted. Fittings: malleable iron or steel. B. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit. UL 360, PVC weatherproof cover aver flexible steel conduit. Fittings: galvanized or zinc coated. 2.4 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT (RNC) A. Schedule 40 and 80: UL 651. 2 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 WES 1 FIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Type EB and B: UL 651, NEMA TC6. Sim/ C. Fittings: NEMA TC3. 2.5 ELECTRICAL NON-METALLIC TUBING (ENT) A. NEMA TC -13. 2.6 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE NON-METALLIC CONDUIT (LFNC) A. UL 1660 2.7 EXPANSION FITTINGS A. Malleable iron, hot dip galvanized allowing 4"(100mm) (+/- 2" (50mm)) conduit movement. OZ/Gedney AX Series or equivalent by manufacturer listed in 2.1.D. 2.8 RACEWAY PENETRATION SEALS A. Thruwall and Floor Seals: New construction - OZ/Gedney FSK Series. Existing construction - OZ/Gedney CSM Series or equivalent by manufacturer lists in 2.1D. 2.9 RACEWAY SEALING FITTINGS A. For one through four conductors: OZ/Gedney CSB Series. B. For greater than four conductors: OZ/Gedney EYA Series with sealing compound. C. Low temperature or hazardous locations: OZ/Gedney EYA Series with sealing compound. 2.10 CABLE SUPPORTS A. OZ/Gedney Type S or equivalent by manufacturer listed in 2.1.D. 2.11 METAL WIREWAYS A. Material: Sheet metal, size and shape as indicated. Manufacturer's standard finish. UL 870. B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 3 WES1 FIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with the requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include: Hoffman Engineering Co., Keystone/Rees, Inc., Square D Co., Circle AW, B -Line. D. Wireway Covers: As indicated. E, Wireway Covers: Hinged type. F. Wireway Covers: Screw -cover type. G. Wireway Covers: Flanged-and-gasketed type. 2.12 NON-METALLIC WIREWAYS A. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with no holes or knockouts. Gasketed cover with oil -resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Flanged connections with stainless-steel screws and oil -resistant gaskets, B. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap -on cover and mechanically coupled connections using plastic fasteners. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include: Hoffman Engineering Co., Lamson & Sessions, Carlon Electrical Products. E. Wireway Covers: As indicated. F. Wireway Covers: Hinged type. G. Wireway Covers: Screw -cover type. H. Wireway Covers: Flanged-and-gasketed type. 2.13 ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS A. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush Latch. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio -frequency -resistant paint. B. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 4 WESI'HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage, and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 2.14 OUTLET JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. interior Wiring: 1. Outlet and Pull Boxes. Pressed steel, zinc coated with plaster ring where applicable. NEMA OS1, UL 514A. 2. Large Junction and Pull Boxes. Fabricated sheet steel, zinc coated or baked enamel finish, with return flange and screw retained cover. 3. Concrete and Masonry. Specifically designed boxes for casting in concrete or mounting in masonry walls for that purpose. 4. Mounting. Provide boxes with fan side box support Caddy JIA series or Caddy quick mount H series. B. Exterior Wiring: 1. Above Grade: a. Outlet and junction boxes: Cast or malleable iron or cast of corrosion resistant alloy, complete with conduit hubs, compatible with raceway to which it is connected. NEMA FB1. b. Pull boxes: Fabricated steel and hot dipped galvanized complete with malleable iron hubs. c. All boxes labeled for damp (NEMA 3R) or wet (NEMA 4) locations as applicable. 2. Below Grade: a. Where exposed to earth: Constructed of precast concrete with size, configuration, cover, grates and reinforcing as required by the particular installation. Manufacturer: Utility Vault or Renton Concrete Products. b. Where exposed to earth: Constructed of fiberglass or plastic with size, configuration, and cover as required by the particular installation. 2.15 SOUND ISOLATION PADS A. Polybutene putty sheet caulking with inert fillers. Lowry's outlet box pads (available from Harry A. Lowry & Associates, 11176 Penrose St., Sun Valley, CA 91352, phone (818) 768-4661). RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 5 WES1'k'1hLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of raceway installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 WIRING METHODS A. Interior: Use the following wiring methods: 1. Exposed: Electric Metallic Tubing. 2. Exposed Subject to Damage (i.e. from vehicles, carts and moving pallets including stubups in concrete): Rigid Steel or Intermediate Metal Conduit. 3. Concealed: Electric Metallic Tubing. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): Flexible Metal Conduit, (except in wet or damp locations, use Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit) with 90° loop, maximum 6 feet long. B. Exterior: Use the following wiring methods: 1. Exposed: Rigid Steel Conduit or Intermediate Metal Conduit. 2. Concealed: Rigid Steel Conduit, Intermediate Metal Conduit, or Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit. 4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, NEMA type 3R or type 4. C. Raceways Underground 1. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit, schedule 40 except use extra heavy-duty schedule 80 for road crossings where not encased in concrete. 2. Arrange and slope raceways entering building to drain away from building. 3. Provide marker tape over underground raceways. Marker tape to read "Caution - Electric Line Buried Below". Install l'-0" (300mm) below grade. 4. Install underground raceways a minimum of 24" (600mm) below final grade (36" (910mm) on public property) unless otherwise noted or required. 5. Provide backfill around underground raceways. Use 3/4" (20mm) minus material 6" (150mm) above and below rigid steel conduit and intermediate metal conduit. Use clean sand 6" (150mm) above and below PVC raceways. Backfill above 6" (150mm) free of debris or rocks greater than 1" (25mm) in diameter. Space raceways 7-1/2" (190n -un) minimum between centers and 3" (80mm) minimum between raceways. 6. Anchor raceways encased in concrete to prevent floating during pour. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 6 WEST HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Provide raceways concealed in construction unless noted otherwise or unless specifically authorized by the Architect. B. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Provide not less than 6'-6" (200cm) headroom. Where raceways are installed in exit pathways provide not less than 71-0" headroom Do not block access to junction boxes, valves, mechanical equipment or prevent removal of ceiling panels, etc. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Use raceway fittings compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. E. Install exposed raceways parallel to or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow the surface contours. 1. Run parallel or banked raceways together, on common supports where practical. 2. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make bends parallel. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways. F. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight. Use bonding bushings or wedges at connections subject to vibration. Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight. G. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations are not secure with 1 locknut, use 2 locknuts: 1 inside and 1 outside the box. Provide bushings on all raceways 1-1/2" (40mm) and larger. H. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so the coupling is square to the box and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed. I. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc -coated steel or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-1b (90 -kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of the pull wire. J. Size raceways not sized on the drawings per manufacturers shop drawings, applicable standards or other section of this specification. K. Maintain 12" (300mm) minimum clearance to high temperature (greater than 90°c) surfaces. L. When construction involves masonry work, assemble and install raceways at the same time as the wall is erected. Avoid surface cut masonry units whenever such units are to remain unplastered or uncovered in completed construction. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 7 WES I FIELD SHOPPINGTOW N SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.4 RIGID METAL AND INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT A. All connections watertight. B. Provide plastic coated rigid steel or IMC conduit for all exposed exterior raceways. Use only fittings approved for use with PVC coated raceways. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits. 3.5 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. May be used where permitted by code and as specified in 3.2 above. Exception Use rigid steel for elbows, penetrations through floors and walls and stub ups. Raceway size may need to be increased to include code required ground wire. Field bends limited to less than 44 degrees, formed with manufacturer's recommended heater. 3.6 RACEWAY PENETRATION SEALS A. Exterior wall surfaces above grade: Provide watertight seal around all raceways. For concrete construction above ground level, cast raceway in wall or core drill wall and hard pack with a mixture of equal parts of sand and cement. For other types of construction use method acceptable to Architect. B. Exterior surfaces below grade: Provide watertight seal around all raceways. Cast raceway into wall (or floor) or use manufactured seal assembly. C. Roofs: Provide flashed and hot mopped weatherproof seal, or a pitch pan filled and sealed to be weatherproof where raceway penetrates roof membrane. Provide a weatherhead on all raceway stubups penetrating roof. D. Fire rated construction: Seal penetrations to maintain fire rating of construction penetrated as specified in Division 7 Firestopping. 3.7 RACEWAYS SEALING FITTINGS A. Provide watertight seal in the interior of all raceways which pass through building roof, ground floor slab or through outside walls of the building above or below grade. Seal on the end inside the building, using raceway sealing fittings manufactured for the purpose. Locate fittings at suitable accessible locations. For concealed raceways install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank coverplate to match finish of adjacent plates or surfaces. Exception: Sealing fittings are not required on raceways through the floor slab when the raceway does not extend beyond the building footprint. B. Provide sealing fittings or duct seal in j -box for all raceways entering freezers and refrigeration units. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 WES I ILLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.8 HANGERS FOR RACEWAYS A. Raceways 1" and larger: Provide lay -in pipe hangers on 1/4" (6mm) or larger all threaded rods attached to metal ceiling inserts or to structural members at not greater than 10'-0" (3m) on center and within 12" (300mm) of each change in direction. B. When more than two raceways will use the same routing, group together on a channel trapeze support system supported by 3/8" (9.5mm) (minimum) threaded rods attached to metal ceiling inserts or structural members. Size supports for multiple raceways for 25% future capacity. C. Suspended ceiling systems: Do not attach raceways to ceiling suspension system hangers. Raceways 3/4" (20mm) and smaller serving equipment located within ceiling cavity or mounted on or supported by the ceiling grid system may be supported by dedicated #12 ga. galvanized, soft annealed mild steel wire hangers. Two raceways maximum per hanger. Attach raceways with clips manufactured for the purpose. 3.9 EXPANSION FITTINGS A. Provide expansion fittings for raceways crossing expansion joints, building separation walls, and seismic joints. Provide bonding jumper. 3.10 CABLE SUPPORTS A. Provide cable support for vertical cable runs as required by NFPA 70. 3.11 STUB -UP CONNECTIONS A. Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with the finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches (150 mm) above the floor. For future equipment connections install threaded plugs flush with floor. 3.12 OUTLET AND ]UNCTION BOXES A. Firmly anchor boxes directly or with concealed bracing to building studs or joists. Boxes must be so attached that they will not "rock" or "shift" when devices are operated. B. Flush Mounting. Install front edge (box or plaster ring) even with the finished surface of the wall or ceiling, except for those mounted above accessible ceilings or where drawings indicate surface mounting is permitted. C. Do not mount flush boxes back-to-back. Provide 6" (150mm) minimum horizontal separation between closest edges of the boxes. Option: Use sound isolation pads or other sound proofing method acceptable to Architect. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 9 WES l F1ELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION D. When boxes are installed in fire resistive walls and partitions provide 24" (600mm) horizontal separation between boxes on opposite sides of a wall in accordance with IBC 712.3.2. In addition, limit penetrations to 16 square inches (103 square centimeters) per penetration and not to exceed a total of 100 square inches per 100 square feet (9.3 square meters) of wall area. Option Apply fire stop putty pads acceptable to the fire marshal. 3.13 ELECTRICAL OUTLETS A. General: Coordinate the work of this Section with the work of other Sections and trades. Study all drawings that form a part of this contract and confer with the various trades involved to eliminate conflicts between the work of this Section and the work of other trades. Check and verify outlet locations indicated on Architectural drawings, door swings, installation details and layouts of suspended ceilings and locations of all plumbing, heating and ventilating equipment. B. Centered on Built -In Work: In the case of doors, cabinets, recesses or similar features, or where outlets are centered between two such features, such as between a door jamb and a cabinet, make these outlet locations exact. Relocate any outlets which are located off center. C. Vertical and Horizontal Relationships: Align outlets exactly on center lines horizontally or vertically where more than one outlet is shown or specified to be at the same elevation or one above the other. Relocate as directed all such outlets (including lighting, receptacle, power, signal and thermostat outlets) which are not so installed, at no additional cost to Owner. D. Device Outlet Height: Measure from the finished floor to the center line, unless otherwise noted. Switches 4 feet, set vertically Receptacles 18 inches, set vertically or as indicated Telephone 18 inches, set vertically or as indicated Other As noted or as directed by Architect E. Ceiling Location: Locate outlet either at the comer joint or in the center of a panel for acoustical material, whichever is closer to the normal spacing. Locate all outlets in the same room in same panel position. 3.14 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. In ceilings of Acoustical Material: Locate in accordance with approved ceiling layout plans and so that fixtures replace full size ceiling tiles wherever possible. 3.15 ELECTRICAL WORK IN COUNTERBACKS, MILLWORK AND CASEWORK A. Provide templates, where required, to other trades for drilling and cutting to insure accurate location of electrical fixtures (outlets and devices) as verified with the Architect. B. Provide all wiring, devices, plates and connections required by said fixtures. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 10 WES1HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.16 CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT `✓ A. Provide outlet boxes of sizes and at locations necessary to serve equipment furnished under this or other Divisions and provide final connections to all equipment. B. Outlet box required if equipment has pigtail wires for external connection, does not have space to accommodate circuit wiring or requires a wire with insulation rating different from circuit wiring used. C. Study equipment details to assure proper coordination. 3.17 BLANK COVERS A. Provide blank covers or plates to match coverplates specified in section 16140 over all boxes that do not contain devices or are not covered by equipment. 3.18 DEVICE BOXES CONTAINING EMERGENCY AND NORMAL DEVICES A. Permitted only with steel barrier manufactured especially for the purpose of dividing the box into two completely separate compartments. 3.19 DEVICE BOXES CONTAINING MULTIPLE DEVICES AND WIRING RATED OVER 150 VOLTS TO GROUND AND OVER 300 VOLTS BETWEEN CONDUCTORS A. Permitted only with steel barrier manufactured especially for the purpose of dividing the box into separate compartments for each device having exposed live parts. 3.20 JUNCTION OR PULL BOXES A. Pull and junction boxes: Install as shown, or as necessary to facilitate pulling of wire and to limit the number of bends within code requirements. B. Permanently accessible. C. Do not intermix conductors from one system in same junction box or pull box as another system unless shown or specifically authorized otherwise. D. In suspended ceiling spaces: Support from structure independently from ceiling suspension system. E. The drawings do not necessarily show every pull or junction box required. Add all required boxes. 3.21 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS A. Conceal the electrical outlet behind the unit housing when provided for by manufacturer. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 11 WES11~IELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.22 BOXES TN EARTH A. Provide for all wire splices and as required to pull conductors. Set boxes (handholes) smaller than 3' x 3' (910mm x 910/run) in place on a 3" (80mm) sand or pea gravel bed. Set larger boxes with a 6" (150mm) bed. B. Set boxes so that coverplates match the slope of, and are flush with the final surface grade. 3.23 COLOR CODING A. Color Code all junction boxes installed in accessible ceiling spaces and exposed in unfinished areas using spray paint on the box and entire cover in the following manner: 480 Power Brown Telephone Black 277V Lighting Yellow Nurse Call Lt. Blue 120/208V Unpainted Public Address Silver Emergency Power Orange Television Gold Clock & Program Green Intrusion Alarm Gray Fire Alarm Red Intercom White B. Use black felt tip marker following painting to indicate the circuit numbers in 1" (25mm) high letters contained within. END OF SECTION 16130 12 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 WES I HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16132 - FLUSH FLOOR OUTLETS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes flush floor outlets and covers for power, telephone, communications, and special purpose outlets. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 16010. Submit product data for each component utilized in the project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers: Hubbell, Thomas & Betts, Walker or Lew. Hubbell catalog numbers used for illustration. Provide same manufacturer for all products. B. Part numbers listed do not constitute a complete assembly. Contractor is responsible to supply additional accessories as required for a complete working system. 2.2 ROUND RECESSED BOX ASSEMBLY - SINGLE SERVICE A. Above Grade: Formed steel, concrete tight, shallow construction. Hubbell B-2529; except deep construction, B-2527 for 1-1/4" homeruns. B. On Grade: Cast Iron, threaded hubs, shallow construction. Hubbell B-2520; except deep construction,. B-2506 for 1-1/4" homeruns. C. Covers I. Power - duplex receptacle: Forged brass, duplex flap. Hubbell S-3925. 2. Telephone and communications outlet. a. Single: Forged brass, Hubbell 5-2525 cover with 2-1/8" and 3/4" threaded openings. b. Duplex: Forged brass duplex flap Hubbell S-3925. FLUSH FLOOR OUTLETS 16132 WES'1FthLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3. Special Purpose Outlet Forged brass, S-2525 cover, with 2-1/8" and 3/4" threaded openings. Provide accessories to suit device configuration. D. Carpet Flanges 1. Poly carbonate, Hubbell S-3079 2. Brass 6.25" diameter, Hubbell 5-3082 3. Brass 5.25" diameter, Hubbell 5-3182 4. Aluminum, Hubbell SA -3182 2.3 RECTANGULAR RECESSED BOX ASSEMBLY - SINGLE OR MUL 1'IFLE SERVICE A. Above Grade: Formed steel, concrete tight, shallow construction. 1. Single gang, Hubbell 8-2429; except deep construction, 8-2427 for 1-1/4" homeruns. 2. Two gang cast iron (formed steel not available), Hubbell 8-4214; except deep construction, 8-4233 for 1-1/4" homeruns. 3. Three gang cast iron (formed steel not available), Hubbell B-4314; except deep construction, B-4333 for 1-1/4" homeruns. B. On Grade:, cast iron, threaded hubs, shallow construction. 1. Single gang, Hubbell B-2414; except deep construction, 8-2436 for 1-1/4" home runs. 2. Two gang, Hubbell B-4214; except deep construction; 8-4233 for 1-1/4" homeruns. 3. Three gang, Hubbell 84314; except deep construction, B4333 for 1-1/4" homeruns. C. COVERS 1. Power -duplex receptacle: Forged brass, duplex flap. Hubbell 5-3825 per gang. 2. Telephone and communications outlet a. Single: Forged brass, Hubbell S-2425 cover with 2-1/8" and 3/4" threaded openings. b. Duplex: Forged brass duplex flap, Hubbell 5-3825. 3. Special Purpose Outlet Forged brass, 5-2425 cover with 2-1/8" and 3/4" threaded openings. Provide accessories to suit device configuration. D. Carpet Flanges 1. Single gang: a. Polycarbonate, Hubbell S-3083 b. Aluminum, Hubbell SA -3083 c. Brass, Hubbell SB -3083 2. Two Gang a. Polycarbonate, Hubbell 5-3084 b. Aluminum, Hubbell SA -3084 c. Brass, Hubbell SB -3084 3. Three Gang: a. Polycarbonate, Hubbell 5-3085 b. Aluminum, Hubbell SA -3085 c. Brass, Hubbell SB -3085 FLUSH FLOOR OUTLETS 16132 2 WES i kiELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.4 COMBINATION FLUSH FLOOR BOX A. Multi -Service flush outlet box suitable for poured concrete construction with adjustment after pour. Capacity for power, telephone and special systems, as shown on drawings. Duplex receptacle per Section 16140, provide communication device activation for telephone, data and special systems wiring. 1. Flush coverplate with wire access door or opening. Color as selected by Architect. 2. Recessed coverplate suitable for carpet installation with wire access door or opening. Color as selected by Architect. B. Multi -Service flush box suitable for up to (2) duplex devices. 1. Hubbell, 3SFBSS (stamped steel, or 3SFBC (cast iron). a. Cover - gray, Hubbell 3SFBCGY b. Cover - brown, Hubbell 3SFBCBR c. Cover - Ivory, Hubbell 3SFBCI 2. Thomas & Betts, 664 (stamped steel), or 664 -CI (cast iron). a. Cover - gray, Thomas & Betts 664-CST-GRY b. Cover - brown, Thomas & Betts 664-CST-BRN c. Cover - beige, Thomas & Betts 664 -CST -BGE d. Cover - Black, Thomas & Betts 664-CST-BLK C. Multi -Service flush box suitable for up to (4) duplex devices. 1. Hubbell, LCFBSS (stamped steel), or LCFBC (cast iron) a. Cover - gray, Hubbell LCFBCGY (for carpeted floors only) b. Cover - brown, Hubbell LCBCBR (for carpeted floors only) c. Cover - ivory, Hubbell LCFBCI (for carpeted floors only) 2. Thomas & Betts, 665SC (stamped steel) a. Cover - gray, Thomas & Betts 665-CST-GRY (for carpeted floors only) b. Cover - brown, Thomas & Betts 665-( T-BRN (for carpeted floors only) c. Cover - beige, Thomas & Betts 665 -CST -BGE (for carpeted floors only) d. Cover - black, Thomas & Betts 665-CST-BLK (for carpeted floors only) 3. Walker RFB4-SS (stamped steel) or RFB4-CI-1 (cast iron) a. Cover - Buffed finish, die-cast aluminum, Walker RAKMII (for carpeted floors only) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate with Architect for exact location of all floor outlets prior to rough -in. B. Install cast iron floor boxes on grade above moisture barrier. (Do not penetrate moisture barrier). Install stamped steel (concrete tight) floor boxes for above grade installations. C. Adjust top surface to level and flush with finished floor. FLUSH FLOOR OUTLETS 16132 WES i HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.2 RECEPTACLES A. Conform with 16140. 3.3 CARPET FLANGES A. Install carpet flanges after installation of final floor covering. END OF SECTION 16132 4 FLUSH FLOOR OUTLETS 16132 WES 1 FIhLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 16139 - CABLE TRAYS PART 1- GENFRAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes cable trays and accessories. B. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 16010 General Provisions. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) B. National Electrical Manufactures Association (NEMA) C. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 16010. Submit product data for each size and type of cable tray including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice -plate connectors, expansion -joint assemblies and fittings. B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of cable tray, including plans, elevations, and sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice - plate connectors, expansion joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings. C. Coordination Drawings: Include floor plans and sections drawn to scale. Fully dimension all cable tray components and lengths of runs. Determine exact layout and relationships between components adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Provide 1/8" scale (minimum) floor plans showing all cable tray components including transitions, expansion joints, supports, firestopping and sound wall penetrations. Show clearances between mechanical ducts and piping. AutoCAD backgrounds (Release 14) will be available upon request. CABLE TRAYS 16139 WES1'HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of cable tray with other construction elements to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance and access. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and as approved by Engineer. B. Examine drawings and existing conditions above ceilings and include bends and offsets in bid price to avoid ducts, pipes, conduits, etc. Installation in existing ceilings is very difficult. Include extra labor time involved in bid price. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. B -Line Systems, Inc. 2. Chalfant Cable Trays 3. GS Metals Corp. 4. Husky: MP Husky Corp. 5. Mono -Systems, Inc. 6. P -W Industries, Inc. 7. Thomas & Betts 2.2 MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Steel, mill galvanized before fabrication, complying with ASTM A 653, G90 (ASTM A 653M, Z275) coating. B. Cable Trays, Fittings and Accessories: Steel; hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, complying with ASTM A 123, Class B2. C. Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Aluminum complying with Aluminum Association's alloy 6063-T6 for rails, rungs, and cable trays, and alloys 5052-H32 or 6061-T6 for fabricated parts. D. Protect steel hardware against corrosion by galvanizing according to ASTM B 633 or cadmium plating according ASTM B 766. Interior installations may use painted hardware. 2.3 LADDER TYPE A. Flange -in with 4" (5", 6", T') high (minimum) side rails, rolled edges with 6" (9",12",18") maximum rung spacing. B. Cable tray width: 12" (6", 9",18", 24", 30", 36", 42") or as shown on drawings. CABLE TRAYS 16139 2 WES 1 HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Load Rating: NEMA (8A, 8B, 8C, 12A, 12B, 12C, 16A, 16B, 16C) in accordance with NEMA VE 1. D. Provide interior surfaces which are smooth and free of offset edges, projections or misalignment. Assembly bolts for end to end connections shall have a pattern, which does not cause any damage to cable sheaths of jackets. All edges smooth, de -burred. E. Provide accessories and special transitions (with 12" minimum radius turns) for all changes in direction and offsets. Use manufacturer's standard fittings including bolting assemblies for all end to end connections. 2.4 TROUGH TYPE A. Ventilated bottom, flange in, with 4" (5", 6", 7",) high (minimum) side rails, rolled edges, with openings not exceeding 4" in a longitudinal direction. B. Solid bottom, flange in, with 4", (5", 6", 7") high (minimum) side rails, rolled edges. C. Cable tray width: 12" (6", 9", 18", 24", 30", 36," 42") or as shown on drawings. D. Load Rating: NEMA (8A, 8B, 8C, 12A, 12B, 12C, 16A, 16B, 16C) in accordance with NEMA VE 1. E. Provide interior surfaces which are smooth and free of offset edges, projections or misalignment. Assembly bolts for end to end connections shall have a pattern, which does not cause any damage to cable sheaths of jackets. All edges smooth, de -burred. F. Provide accessories and special transitions (with 12" minimum radius turns) for all changes in direction and offsets. Use manufacturer's standard fittings including bolting assemblies for all end to end connections. 2.5 CHANNEL TYPE A. Channel width 3" (4", 6") or as shown on drawings. B. Load Rating: NEMA (8A, 8B, 8C, 12A, 12B, 12C) in accordance with NEMA VE 1. C. Provide interior surfaces which are smooth and free of offset edges, projections or misalignment. Assembly bolts for end to end connections shall have a pattern, which does not cause any damage to cable sheaths of jackets. All edges smooth, de -burred D. Provide accessories and special transitions (with 12" minimum radius turns) for all changes in direction and offsets. Use manufacturer's standard fittings including bolting assemblies for all end to end connections. CABLE TRAYS 16139 WESI'F'ThLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.6 SINGLE RAIL LADDER TYPE A. Center supported single rail with 3" (4", 6") high (minimum) rung height and 6", (3", 9", 12", 18") maximum rung spacing. The tray must not have side rails to provide open sided ladder type assembly. B. Cable tray width: 12" (6", 9", 18", 24") or as shown on drawings. C. Load Rating: NEMA (8A, 8B, 8C, 12A, 12B, 12C) in accordance with NEMA VE 1. D. Provide accessories and special transitions (with 12" minimum radius turns) for all changes in direction and offsets. Use manufacturer's standard fittings including bolting assemblies for all end to end connections. 2.7 WALL RACK A. Side supported single rail with 3" (4", 6") high (minimum) rung height and 6" (3", 9", 12") maximum rung spacing. The tray must not have side rails to provide open sided ladder type assembly. B. Cable Tray Width 12" (3", 6", 9") or as shown on drawings. C. Load Rating: NEMA (8A, 8B, 12A, 12B) in accordance with NEMA VE1. D. Provide accessories and special transitions (with 12" minimum radius turns) including wall spacers for all changes in direction and offsets. Use manufacturer's standard fittings including bolting assemblies for all end to end connections. 2.8 SUPPORTS A. Load Rating: As required to support cable tray load rating specified above. B. Single Channel Hangers: formed steel type. C. Wall Brackets: Steel without hooks or projections. 2.9 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and finishes as cable tray. B. Covers: Solid type, of same materials and finishes as cable tray. C. Covers: Louvered type, of same materials and finishes as cable tray. D. Covers: Ventilated -hat type, of same materials and finishes as cable tray. E. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as cable tray. CABLE TRAYS 16139 4 WES I HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION F. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cable tray level and plumb according to manufacturers written instructions, coordination drawings, original design, and referenced standards. B. Mount bottom of tray approximately 6" above suspended ceilings. Maintain 10" minimum vertical spacing between multiple cable trays. C. Support cable tray from single channel hangers with spacing in accordance with NEMA VE 1. Provide additional hangers on ends and two additional hangers at tees and corners. Attach brackets to structural ceiling with 3/8" threaded steel rods. D. Support single rail ladder type cable tray to structural ceiling with 3/8" threaded rods, spacing in accordance with NEMA VE 1. E. Brace cable tray to structure with diagonal braces spaced 30' maximum on center. F. Support cable tray from wall brackets where single channel hangers cannot be installed. G. Install expansion connectors where cable tray crosses a building expansion joint. Space connectors and set gaps according to NEMA VE 1. H. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable tray and to equipment. Support cable tray independently of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable tray on equipment enclosure. I. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and data processing; or of different insulation levels, such as 600, 5,000, and 15,000 V. J. Install covers after installation of cable is completed. 3.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of the cable tray with mechanical ductwork, piping, structural members, fireproofing and sprinkler system piping so that tray remains accessible (minimum 1 foot clear above tray bottom) after installation. Coordinate exact routing with all trades to avoid interference. 3.3 PENETRATIONS OF BUILDING FIRE SEPARATIONS A. Where cable tray is penetrating building fire separations, seal penetration according to Division 7 Firestopping. Seal penetration only after telephone cables and all other system distribution cables have been installed. CABLE TRAYS 16139 WES 1 FIhLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Sleeves for Future Cables: Install capped sleeves for future cables through firestopping- sealed cable tray penetrations of fire and smoke barriers. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and joints according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in LTL 486A and UL 486B. 3.5 GROUNDING A. Ground cable trays as required for conductor enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70. B. Provide a #6 bare ground cable the length of the tray. Bond to every tray section using clamps manufactured for the purpose. 3.6 CLEANING A. On completion of cable tray installation, including fittings, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damage finishes, including chips, scratches, and abrasions. B. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by cable tray manufacturer. END OF SECTION 16139 6 CABLE TRAYS 16139 WES1HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes switches, receptacles, dimmers, device plates and rnulti-outlet assemblies. B. Related sections include 16145 Lighting Control Devices. 1.3 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 16010. Submit product data for each device utilized in the project. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Provide receptacles to match plug configurations for Owner -furnished equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers listed in the following paragraphs. All devices utilized on the project shall be from the same manufacturer. 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Specification Grade:, Duplex NEMA 5-15R configuration (15 amp, 120V), Federal Specification WC -596F, back and side wired, nylon face, unless shown otherwise. WIRING DEVICES 16140 1 WESI'HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION Bryant 5262-1, Cooper BR15V, Hubbell I•IBL5262I, Leviton 5262-1, or Pass & Seymour 5262-1. B. Clock Receptacle: NEMA 5-15R with hanger bracket. Flush type: Hubbell 5235. Recessed type: Leviton 5261-CI3, or equivalent by manufacturer listed in 2.2A. C. Isolated Ground Receptacle: Specification Grade, NEMA 5-15R configuration, orange face and isolated ground terminal. Hubbell IG 5362, or equivalent by manufacturer listed in 2.2A. D. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacle: Specification Grade, NEMA 5-15R configuration, duplex receptacle with 4-6 milliamps leakage current trip level. Feed through type to protect downstream receptacles on the same circuit. Cooper GF15V, Hubbell GF -5262-I, Leviton 6599-1, or Pass & Seymour 1591 -SI. E. Surge Protection Receptacles: Specification grade, rectangular, l5 amp, 120 volt duplex configuration with built in surge protection and monitor/indicator lights. Surge protection receptacles shall be UL 1449 listed for both categories A and 13 and shall comply with ANSI/IEEE C62.41. Devices shall suppress transients in both normal mode (line to neutral) and common mode (line to ground). Energy dissipation shall be 70 Joules minimum with 6500 amp peak surge current. Cooper 1208V or 5250 VS, Hubbell HBL5260-ISA, Leviton 5280-I, or Pass & Seymour 6262 -ISP. 2.3 SWITCHES A. Specification Grade, Federal Specification WS -896, back and side wired, rated 277 volt, 20 amp. Single pole, double pole, keyed, 3- way, pilot light, locking type as required or as noted. Bryant 4901-I, Cooper 1221V, Hubbell 1221-I, Leviton 1221-1, or Pass & Seymour 20AC1-L B. Interchangeable type rated same as above. C. Momentary Contact Line Voltage Switches: Single pole, double throw, 3 -wire, spring return to open. Rating same as above. D. Pilot light switches: Lighted handle when "ON", or with separate pilot light. 2.4 COLOR A. <Ivory> <Gray> <White> for switch handles and receptacle faces except as follows; 1. Brown in areas selected by Architect (verify). 2. Red for emergency circuits. 3. Orange for isolated ground circuits. 2.5 DEVICE PLATES A. Configuration: Single and combination type to match corresponding wiring devices. WIRING DEVICES 16140 2 WES 1'1aIhLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Attachment Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. C. Interior Recessed Boxes: <smooth plastic, color to match corresponding wiring device> <high impact nylon or thermo plastic, color to match corresponding wiring device> <stainless steel type 302 with satin finish>. D. Interior Surface Boxes: Pressed raised steel to match size of outlet box. E. Exterior: Weather resistant hinged cover, Hubbell Bell 5028-0, Leviton 4992. For other receptacles provide cover to match receptacle. F. Exterior: Rain tight while in use hinged cover, Hubbell Bell 5752-0, Leviton 5977 -CL, Cooper 4966. For other receptacles provide cover to match receptacle. G. Identification: For receptacles other than 15 and 20 amp, 120 volts, engrave coverplate or provide separate nameplate with ampere rating, voltage and phase. Minimum lettering size 3/16". 2.6 CORD AND PLUG SETS A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected. 1. Cord: Rubber -insulated, stranded -copper conductors, with type SOW -A jacket. Green -insulated grounding conductor and equipment -rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent. 2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable -clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection. 2.7 MULTI -OUTLET ASSEMBLY A. Provide assemblies complete, including necessary fittings and hardware with circuits as indicated on drawings. Outlet spacing as indicated except a receptacle shall be located within 01-8" of each end and no receptacles shall be installed over sinks. All assemblies to contain ground wire. 1. Metal: 4 wire, 2 circuit, 12" outlet spacing, ivory color. Wiremold 20GBA_12 series or equivalent by Walker or Airey Thompson Co. 2. Non-metallic: 4 wire, 2 circuit, 12" outlet spacing, ivory color. Wiremold NM20 GBA series. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOUNTING A. Rigidly fasten (without play) outlet boxes and devices at proper position with wall to bring receptacle flush with plate or switch handle the proper distance through plate. Align devices and plates plumb. WIRING DEVICES 16140 WES 1 FthLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.2 RECEPTACLES A. Provide 15 amp receptacles in all locations except provide 20 amp receptacles on dedicated 20 amp circuits. B. Provide surge protection receptacle in the locations shown on the drawings. C. Provide isolated ground receptacles in the locations shown on the drawings. D. Provide exterior, GFCI receptacle within 251-0" of each roof mounted mechanical equipment, for all outdoor receptacles, and other locations shown on the drawings. 3.3 ORIENTATION A. Set switches with handle operating vertically, up position "ON". Set receptacles vertically with ground pin up or when construction requires horizontal mounting ground pin left. 3.4 DEVICE PLATES A. Provide for wiring devices, telephone and signal outlets. Plate to cover cutout for device outlet box. B. For remodel projects or for additions to existing construction provide new plates on existing outlet boxes unless the existing plate matches new plates in construction and appearance. C. Install device plates after painting is complete. D. Provide exterior rain tight while in use covers for exterior receptacles in wet locations. Otherwise provide weather resistant covers. 3.5 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES A. Rigidly fasten assemblies to the cabinet, wall, casework, or modular casework as indicated. Provide a chase nipple extension between outlet box in the wall and the raceway when the raceways are mounted to the support channels for the modular casework 3.6 DIMMERS A. Install wall box dimmers to achieve circuit rating after derating for ganging as required by manufacturer. B. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers. WIRING DEVICES 16140 4 Nkftwi WES1 HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.7 CLEANING A. Remove excess plaster from interior of outlet boxes. B. Oean devices and coverplates after painting is complete. Replace stained or improperly painted devices or coverplates. END OF SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16140 WEST HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16145 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1- GENER.AL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices: 1. Indoor occupancy sensors 2. Outdoor motion sensors 3. Outdoor photocell switches 4. Time switches 5. Multipole contactors B. This Section includes the following daylighting control devices: 1. Multi-level switching of electronic fluorescent ballasts with photo sensor, occupancy sensor and wall box switches. 2. Dimmed control of electronic dimming ballasts with photo sensor, occupancy sensor and wall box switches. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 16120 Conductors and Cables 2. Section 16140 Wiring Devices for light switches and wall -box dimmers 3. Section 16500 Lighting and 16501 Light Fixture Schedule for light fixture ballasts. 4. Section 16930 Low Voltage Lighting Control 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. LED: Light -Emitting Diode. B. PIR: Passive Infrared. C. PDT: Passive Dual Technology. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 16010 B. Product Data: Provide clearly marked and legible data sheets for each item of equipment being installed on the project. This shall include each major replaceable component that is part of a larger assembly. Data sheets should clearly indicate: 1. Equipment manufacturer, make, model number, size, nameplate data, etc. 2. Dimensional and performance data for specific unit provided as appropriate LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 WES i FIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3. Required environmental operating parameters 4. UL, FM and ETL listing and category 5. Manufacturer contact information including address, telephone number, facsimile number, email address, web site address and contact person or persons. 6. Local manufacturer's representative contact information including address, telephone number, facsimile number, email address, web site address and contact person or persons. C. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light -level sensors. 1. Lighting plan showing location, orientation, and coverage area of each sensor. 2. Interconnection diagrams showing field -installed wiring. D. Label List Submit list of proposed text for all labels prior to manufacturing for review and approval by Owner's representative. E. Warranty: Submit a copy of product warranty that complies with contract document requirements. Where these requirements exceed manufacturer's standard warranty include cost of extended warranty in contract price. F. Maintenance Requirements: Submit maintenance requirements manual or guidelines. This document should detail the requirements necessary to comply with the warranty. This is required for the submittal process and is in addition to the O&M requirements. G. Samples: Provide sample devices and finishes plus other samples when requested, as part of the submittal process 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling -mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Manufacturer shall have been in the business of manufacturing and providing service for lighting control equipment for similar capabilities and size, under the same name and ownership, for a minimum of three years preceding bid date of the project 2. All components and assemblies shall be factory pre -tested prior to installation 3. Factory trained technicians shall be on site for start-up, commissioning and training 4. Factory trained technicians shall be available for telephone support twenty four (24) hours a day, seven (7) days a week B. Regulatory Requirements 1. Underwriters Laboratories: Provide U.L. listed lighting control equipment. 2. Code of Federal Regulations: 47 CFR - FCC All assemblies are to be in compliance with FCC emissions standards specified in Part 15 for Class A application. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 2 WES1'HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: The manufacturer shall provide a written warranty agreeing to provide parts to replace any portion of the lighting control system equipment that fails due to material or workmanship for a period of twelve months from warranty commencement. B. Warranty Commencement Warranty shall begin at the point of substantial completion of the system installation, which is defined as the date when commissioning and owner training has been completed and the owner obtains beneficial use of the system. C. Warranty Replacement Parts: The manufacturer shall be able to ship replacement parts within 24 hours for any component that that fails due to material or workmanship during the warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the contract documents, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Douglas 2. Horton 3. Hubble 4. ILC 5. Intermatic, Inc. 6. Leviton/PCI 7. Lighting Control & Design (LC&D) 8. Lithonia Lighting 9. Lutron Microwatt 10. Microlite 11. NexLight 12. Novitas, Inc. 13. Paragon Electric Co. 14. Powerline Communication, Inc. (PCI) 15. SensorSwitch 16. Square D 17. TORK 18. TriaTek 19. Watt Stopper (The) 2.2 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. General Operation 1. The Occupancy Sensor system shall sense the presence of human activity within the desired space and fully control the on/off function of the loads automatically. Sensors shall turn on the load within 2 feet of entrance and shall not initiate "on" outside of entrance. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 3 WESfHELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2. Sensing technologies shall be completely passive in nature, in that the occupancy sensor system shall not emit or interfere with any other electronic device, or human characteristic. Acceptable known technologies are Passive Infrared (PM), or ultrasonic. 3. Upon detection of human activity by the detector, a Time Delay shall be initiated to maintain the light on for a field adjustable pre-set period. 4. Mounting a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2 inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. c. Time Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door. 5. Automatic Photo Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc to turn lighting off when selected light level is present. B. SWITCH -BOX OCCUPANCY SENSORS 1. General a. Sensor Time Delay shall be factory set for typical applications, and field adjustable from 30 seconds to 20 minutes. Photo sensor override shall be factory set in the off mode, but be field adjustable. All adjustments shall be concealed once installed. b. Sensor must be rated for 800 watts at 120 VAC, suitable for incandescent light fixtures, fluorescent light fixtures with magnetic or electronic ballasts, or 1/6 hp motors or rated for 1000 watts at 277 VAC, suitable for fluorescent light fixtures with magnetic or electronic ballasts, or 1/3 hp motors minimum. Sensor shall be capable of parallel wiring for 3 -way switching applications. c. Sensor must not protrude out from the cover plate more than 0.37 inches, and recess into the switch box more than 1 inch. Sensor must provide a vertical sliding Off/Auto override switch, and green LED motion indicator. 2. Passive Infrared (PIR) Technology a. PIR sensing, incorporating a nominal one half inch focal length Fresnel lens, designed to view at least 9 inches above and 9 inches below the horizontal plane when measured 10 feet from the sensor. The PIR beam pattern must be at least 170 degrees with 20 separate beams evenly spaced. 3. Passive Dual Technology (PDT) Technology a. PDT sensing must incorporate PIR with ultrasonic monitoring, which utilizes a passive microphone with automatic gain control (AGC) to sense both occupants moving and sounds. The PIR must be used to initiate an on condition; once on the PIR or ultrasonic monitoring shall keep the load on After the time delay expires and the load goes off, the ultrasonic monitoring shall remain active up to 10 seconds as a back-up grace period. b. Sensor must be designed for small spaces where the occupant's work area is within 20 feet of sensor. The PIR sensing, must incorporate a nominal one half inch focal length Fresnel lens, designed to view at least 9 inches above and 9 inches below the horizontal plane when measured 10 feet from the sensor. The PIR beam pattern must be at least 170 degrees with 20 separate beams evenly spaced. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 4 WES1r'ihLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 4. Large Area Wall Switch Sensors a. Sensor must be designed for large spaces where the occupants work area is up to 40 feet from the sensor. b. Sensor must be rated for 120 through 277 VAC and be capable of switching zero to 13 Amps of Electronic Ballast loads. Optional 2 -Pole units must be available, controlling up to 13 Amps each pole. Additional photo sensor override of either pole shall also be available. Power switching shall be performed with a mechanical relay in parallel with an AC Semiconductor to allow relay contacts to switch under a no load condition. Sensors must be capable of parallel wiring for 3 -way switching applications. c. Sensor must surface mount to single gang switch box, and accept accessory plates for multi -gang installations. Sensor must provide a vertical sliding Off/Auto override switch, (2 switches if 2 -pole device), and green LED motion indicator. d. Sensor Time Delay shall be factory set for typical applications, and field adjustable from 30 seconds to 20 minutes. Photo sensor override shall be factory set in the off mode, but be field adjustable. All adjustments and mounting screws shall be concealed once installed. e. PIR sensing must incorporate a nominal one inch focal length Fresnel lens design to minimize beam spacing, providing no more than a 20 inch gap when measured at a 40 foot distance. The PIR beam pattern must be at least 170 degrees with 30 separate beams evenly spaced. f. Passive Dual Technology (PDT) sensing must incorporate PIR with ultrasonic monitoring, which utilizes a passive microphone with automatic gain control (AGC) to sense both occupants moving and sounds. The PIR must be used to initiate an on condition; once on the PIR or ultrasonic monitoring shall keep the load on. After the time delay expires and the load goes off, the ultrasonic monitoring shall remain active up to 10 seconds as a back-up grace period 2.3 LINE VOLTAGE CEILING SENSORS A. Sensor shall be a self-contained dual voltage ceiling mounted device capable of directly switching loads upon detection of human activity. Sensor must be circular, and mount to either a single gang enclosure, or surface mount to a round surface raceway pancake box. B. Sensor must be rated for 120 through 277 VAC and be capable of switching zero to 600 Watts of Electronic Ballast loads. Sensors must be capable of parallel wiring for multi - sensor applications. C. Sensor Time Delay shall be factory set for typical applications, and field adjustable from 30 seconds to 20 minutes. Sensor must provide a green LED motion indicator. D. PIR sensing must utilize a high density Fresnel domed lens, providing a circular view pattern of at least 360 degrees by 56 degrees E. Passive Dual Technology (PDT) sensing must incorporate PIR with Ultrasonic monitoring, which utilizes a passive microphone with automatic gain control (AGC) to sense both occupants moving and sounds. The PIR must be used to initiate an on LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 5 WES 11-.1LLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION condition, once on the PIR or Ultrasonic monitoring shall keep the load on. After the time delay expires and the load goes off, the Ultrasonic monitoring shall remain active up to 10 seconds as a back-up grace period. 2.4 LINE VOLTAGE WALL MOUNT SENSOR A. Sensor must be designed for large spaces where the occupants work area is up to 40 feet from the sensor. Sensor must be mounted 8 feet above the floor, out of occupants reach 13. Sensor must be rated for 120 through 277 VAC and be capable of switching zero to 13 Amps of Electronic Ballast loads. Optional 2 -Pole units must be available, controlling up to 13 Amps each pole. Power switching shall be performed with a mechanical relay in parallel with an AC Semiconductor to allow relay contacts to switch under a no load condition. Sensors shall not require an electrical connection to neutral so that the device may be directly wired in series with local override switches. And, sensors must be capable of parallel wiring for multi -sensor applications. C. Sensor Time Delay shall be factory set for typical applications, and field adjustable from 30 seconds to 20 minutes. Sensor must provide a green LED motion indicator. D. PIR sensing must incorporate a nominal one inch focal length Fresnel lens designed to minimize beam spacing, providing no more than a 20 inch gap when measured at a 40 foot distance. The sensor must be corner mounted, and provide a 117 degree multi- level beam pattern. E. Passive Dual Technology (PDT) sensing must incorporate PLR with Ultrasonic monitoring, which utilizes a passive microphone with automatic gain control (AGC) to sense both occupants moving and sounds. The PIR must be used to initiate an on condition, once on the PIR or Ultrasonic monitoring shall keep the load on. After the time delay expires and the load goes off, the Ultrasonic monitoring shall remain active up to 10 seconds as a back-up grace period. Sensor shall be mounted either flat against the wall or in a corner 2.5 POWER PACKS AND SLAVE PACKS A. Power Packs and Slave Packs must be designed to power and accept signals from remote Low Voltage Sensors, or other control devices, and directly switch the line voltage of the desired load controlled. B. Power Packs must accept 120, 240, or 277 VAC utilizing a dual tap transformer. C. Power Pack and SIave Pack relay switching shall not require more than 3 milliamps of current at 15 to 30 VDC. D. Power Pack and Slave Pack relay switching shall be performed with a mechanical relay in parallel with an AC Semiconductor to allow relay contacts to switch under a no load condition. Switching capacity shall be 20 amps of all types of loads: Incandescent, Electronic Ballast, Magnetic, or Motor. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICE 16145 6 WES 1 H1 LD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION E. Power Packs shall be available in combination 2 -Pole units capable of switching two independent loads, 20 amps each. 2.6 PHOTO SENSORS AND DIMMING SENSORS A. Photocell and dimming sensors shall control the light level in the space by monitoring both the artificial light as well as available natural light. B. Photo sensors shall provide an On set point and a separate Off set point, thereby creating a dead band to prevent unnecessary cycling of the artificial lights. Set point setting shall be verified with a digital volt meter connected to test leads provided by the sensor. Sensor shall send an electronic, low voltage signal to a remote power pack or other control device which is directly connected to the load. 2.7 DAYLIGHT ZONE MULTI-LEVEL SWITCHING CONTROL A. The lighting fixtures in this room configuration shall be controlled by manual wall switches and automatic controls in response to occupancy and daylight contribution The wall switches and occupancy sensor together shall control all normal power lighting circuits in the room. The photo sensor shall control 50% of the lamps located in the daylight zone by switching them off in response to available daylight. The light fixtures located in the daylight zone shall be indicated in the contract drawings. B. Wall switches 1. As specified in section 16140 Wiring Devices. C. Electronic ballasts 1. As specified in sections 16500 Lighting and 16501 Light Fixture Schedule, quantity as required to control each lamp of each fixture individually as specified in the contract drawings. D. Occupancy sensor 1. Occupancy sensor shall be a ceiling -mounted low voltage device, powered by the DC voltage supplied by a remote power pack or other control device which is directly connected to the load. 2. Provide quantity of power pack and slave packs with control relays as required to control all designated circuits in the enclosed area. E. Photo sensor 1. Photo sensor shall be a low voltage device, powered by the DC voltage supplied by a remote power pack or other control device which is directly connected to the load. 2. Provide quantity of power pack and slave packs with control relays as required to control all designated circuits in the daylight area. 2.8 OUTDOOR PHOTOCELL SWITCHES LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 WES I HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION A. Solid state with [SPST][DPDT] dry contacts rated for 1800 VA tungsten or 1000 VA inductive, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, microprocessor input, and complying with UL 773A. 1. Light -Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 20 fc, with an adjustment for turn -on and turn-off levels within that range. 2. Time Delay: 15 -second minimum, to prevent false operation. 3. Surge Protection: Metal -oxide varistor type, complying with IEEE C62.41 for Category Al locations. 4. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEEC136.10, with base. Provide with stem mounting or stem -and -swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the North sky exposure. 2.9 TIME SWITCHES (TIME CLOCKS) A. Digital Time Switches: Electronic, solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display complying with UL 917. 1. Contact Configuration: [SPST] [DPDT] 2. Contact rating: [30A inductive or resistive, 240 Vac][20A ballast load, 120/ 240 Vac] a. Program: Single channel, 2 on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for each day of the week and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays. b. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay to substitute for on and off function of a program. c. Astronomical Time: All channels. d. Battery Backup: For schedules and time clock. B. Electromechanical -Dial Time Switches: Type complying with UL 917. 1. Contact Configuration: [SPDT][DPDT] 2. Contact Rating: [30A inductive or resistive, 240 Vac][20A ballast load, 120/ 240 Vac] a. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on and off function of a program. b. Astronomical time dial. c. Eight -Day Program Uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays. d. Skip -a -day mode. e. Wound -spring reserve carryover mechanism to keep time during power failures, minimum of 16 hours. 3. Digital Wall Box Time Switches: Electronic, solid-state programmable unit with numeric display. a. Contact Configuration: SPST b. Contact Rating: 0-800W ballasted 120-V ac, or 0-1200W ballasted 277-V ac. c. Program: 8 on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule. 2.10 MUL 11PLE CONTACTORS A. Description: Electrically operated and [mechanically] [electrically] held, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 8 WESrHELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high -inrush ballasts (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current). 2, Control -Coil Voltage: [120 V] [Match low voltage Lighting control power source.] 3. Enclosure: [Indoor NEMA 1] [Outdoor NEMA 3R] 2.11 CONTROL RELAYS A. Industrial Control Relays: Rated 600V, 20A convertible contacts. Square D Class 8501 XMO series. B. General Purpose Relays: Rated 120/ 240 volt, 10A. Square D Class 8501 Type K plug in series with screw terminal socket. 2.12 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL A. Modular Relay Panel: Comply with UL 508 (CSA C22.2, No. 14) and UL 916 (CSA C22.2, No. 205); factory assembled with modular single -pole relays, power supplies, and accessory components required for specified performance. 1. Cabinet: Steel with hinged, locking door. a. Barriers to separate low -voltage and line -voltage components. b. Directory: Mounted on back of door. Identifies each relay as to load groups controlled and each programmed pilot device if any. c. Control Power Supply: Transformer and full -wave rectifier with filtered dc output. 2. Single -Pole Relays: Mechanically held unless otherwise indicated; split -coil, momentary -pulsed type. a. Low -Voltage Leads: Plug connector to the connector strip in cabinet and pilot light power where indicated. b. Rated Capacity (Mounted in Relay Panel): 20 A, 125-V ac for tungsten filaments; 20 A, 277-V ac for ballasts. c. Endurance: 50,000 cycles at rated capacity. d. Mounting: Provision for easy removal and installation in relay cabinet. 2.13 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote -Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG, complying with Section 16120 Conductors and Cables. B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded copper conductors not smaller than No. 22 AWG, complying with Section 16120 Conductors and Cables. C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG, complying with Section 16120 Conductors and Cables. D. Install unshielded, twisted -pair cable for control and signal transmission conductors, complying with Section 16120 Voice and Data Communication Cabling. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 WES'i'FIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve at least 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 16120 Conductors and Cables. B. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 16120 Electrical Identification. B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements. 2. Operational Test Verify actuation of each sensor and adjust time delays. B. Remove and replace lighting control devices where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.5 SYSTEM STARTUP AND COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning shall take place prior to demonstration of system to Owner. After the system has been installed the Contractor shall provide manufacturer's recommended commissioning with factory trained and authorized technicians on-site, to: 1. Verify that the contractor has properly installed and interconnected all necessary components. 2. Verify correct operation of all system components. 3. Verify that all switch and contact inputs are in compliance with contract requirements. 4. Aim and adjust all occupancy sensors and photocell devices for proper operation. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 10 WES 1'FthLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.6 OWNER'S INS'T'RUCTIONS AND SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION A. System Demonstration 1. Schedule demonstration a minimum of two -weeks prior to system turn over and substantial completion. Schedule with owner's representative and electrical engineer. 2. Demonstrate complete system operation and contract compliance to designated owner's representative and engineer to prove system is functional and ready for comprehensive training. B. System Instruction 1. The Contractor shall after one week (minimum) written notification to Architect conduct an instruction session during which all maintenance and operational aspects of the system will be described and demonstrated to personnel selected by the Owner. The session shall be conducted by a Contractor's representative thoroughly familiar with the characteristics of the system. 0 & M manual information regarding the system shall be turned over to the Architect prior to scheduling the instruction session. 2. Training shall utilize the following draft documents: a. Draft O&M Manual b. Contractor's record drawings 3. The training effort shall validate the O&M Manual and record drawing documentation. END OF SECTION 16145 11 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 WES 1 FILLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16210 - ELECTRIC SERVICE PART :1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications, apply to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Provide permanent utility service entrance complete and fully operational. 1.3 UTILITY CHARGES A. Owner will pay the electric utility service connection charges directly. Contractor will be responsible for any utility cost associated with rework or re -inspection of the contractor's portion of the installation due to failure to follow utility standards and directions and for poor quality work identified by the utility upon inspection of the contractor's work scope. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONFORMANCE TO UTILITY STANDARDS A. Contractor shall obtain the latest utility standards for materials and installation requirements and comply fully. 2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT A. All service entrance equipment shall be provided in accordance with NEC requirements and utility design standards. B. UL listed for intended service application and installation location PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 METERING A. Provide kW and kWh meter bases, meter raceway and metering conductors per utility requirements, from current transformers (CTs) to meter location(s). ELECTRIC SERVICE 16210 1 WES rHELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.2 GROUNDING A. Provide service grounding and bonding per code. 3.3 WORK BY UTILITY A. Utility will provide: 1. Primary conductors and terminations 2. Service Transformer(s) 3. Termination of service entrance secondary conductors at utility connection point 4. Current transformers 5. Meter(s) 3.4 WORK BY CONTRACTOR A. Contractor shall provide: 1. All necessary work not being provided by utility 2. Service entrance raceway(s) and conductors(s), raceway route staking and grading, excavation, backfill and compaction per Division 2. 3. Grounding rods and grounding conductor at transformer vaults 4. Meter Base(s) per utility requirements. 5. All metering raceways and conductors per utility requirements 6. Key lock box for main electrical room when meter(s) are not located where utility has 24-hour exterior access 7. Current transformer enclosure(s) per utility requirements. 8. Building service entrance raceways and conductors per utility requirements 9. Conductor phasing identification on all conductors, at all termination points and all manholes, handholes and pull boxes 10. Service entrance equipment 11. Service entrance grounding per code 12. All required coordination with utility 13. Provide the service as required to completely conform to utility standards requirements END OF SECTION 16210 2 ELECTRIC SERVICE 16210 WESrHELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16230 - ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Provide engine -generator set(s) together with all required operating accessories properly assembled to give a complete and fully operational power generation system. The engine and alternator shall be the product of one manufacturer or a combination of two manufacturer's equipment regularly assembled by the supplier as a complete package in this size and configuration. The equipment manufacturer(s) and the authorized supplier shall have complete responsibility for the performance of the engine -generator set and its accessories. Set shall be new, latest production model factory assembled and tested prior to delivery to jobsite. B. Provide all necessary controls and accessories which, used with the engine -generator set, will make a complete operating package for installation up to 1,000 feet above sea level in an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. maximum, -10 degrees C. minimum. C. The power generation equipment supplies emergency power to legally required standby and optional standby loads. Automatic selective load pickup and load shedding is provided to assure adequate power to (1) emergency circuits, (2) Iegally required standby circuits, (3) optional standby circuits, in that order of priority. 1.3 TO QUALIFY AS AN ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER AND/OR SUPPLIER A. Fulfill the following requirements: 1. Shall have been in the business of distributing and/or installing and maintaining the specific type of engine -generation equipment under the present firm name for at least five years. 2. Shall be the authorized distributor of the represented generator set package for the geographic area for which it is being installed. 3. Shall have the capability of dispatching a maintenance or repair truck with a qualified factory trained repairman and spare parts to the job site within four (4) hours of a request for service on the equipment. Service dispatch shall be available 24 hours a day, everyday, including weekends and holidays. 4. Equipment shall be the product of a firm which has regularly assembled and/or manufactured such equipment for at least five years. B. Bidders will not be considered unless there is a local office (within 150 miles of project site), with factory -trained representatives who have been under their direct ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION EQUIPMENT 16230 1 WESI'F'LLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION employment for a period of at least one year. All bidders shall maintain a stock of spare parts which would minimize system down time in case of a component failure. C. Selling distributor shall be the service, startup, and warranty supplier for the generator set. Reassignment of these responsibilities is prohibited. 1.4 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS A. The engine -generator set and accessories shall comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code and NFPA 37 Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines. Set shall comply with NEMA Standards for all other requirements, not specified herein and shall be UL listed and labeled under standard 2200. 1.5 COORDINATION A. All equipment in this Section shall be considered part of the Emergency Power System and shall be supplied by the generator set supplier. The assembly of the generator(s) [and load bank] shall be the responsibility of one company, and the authorized supplier shall have the responsibility to interface, coordinate, and integrate the Electric Power generation Equipment [as directed by the supplier of the Emergency Power Control System]. The supplier of the Electric Power Generation Equipment shall be the company or firm that furnishes the equipment to the electrical subcontractor/. Representatives of the Electric Power Generation Equipment supplier shall be available for coordination meetings as requested by the engineer. 1.6 RATING A. The engine -generator set rating shall be based on operation of the set when equipped with all the necessary operating accessories (radiator fan, exhaust silencer, air cleaners, lubricating oil pump, lubricating oil filters, fuel priming pump, fuel injection pump, jacket water pump, governor, alternating current generator and exciter regulator). B. The engine -generator set shall be capable of producing not less than rated KW (with a 0.8 power factor load) continuously for standby power applications at the altitude and ambient temperature conditions as noted above. C. Motor starting capability shall be a minimum of kVA. D. On closing of the starting contact, each engine generator shall be capable of accepting full rated load and stabilizing at rated voltage plus or minus (+/-) 5 percent of rated frequency, within 10 seconds (including transfer switch transfer time). E. The engine -generator set shall be capable of accepting suddenly applied 50 percent rated load at 0.8 power factor with a voltage dip not exceeding 20 percent and returning to plus or minus (+/-) 2.0 Hertz rated frequency in 7.5 seconds. F. The engine -generator set shall be capable of accepting full rated load and stabilizing at rated voltage, within plus or minus (+/-) 5 percent of rated frequency, within 6 ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION EQUIPMENT 16230 2 WES 1'N'1hLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION seconds, and shall be capable of accepting the following loads with no more than 20% voltage dip. a. Base Load <Insert Note Here>. b. Time Delay Start 1 <Insert Note Here>. c. Time Delay Start 2 <Insert Note Here>. 1.7 SERVICE EQUIPMENT SIGN A. Provide a sign at the service entrance main disconnect(s) to identify type and location of on-site emergency power source per NEC 700-8. 1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS & SUBMITTAL DATA A. Prepare and submit for review prior to manufacture. Include the following information B. Dimensioned clearance drawings of the engine generator set including bolting template, earthquake restraints, and location of all stub ups for fuel and electrical connections. C. Literature describing the engine -generator set including the following data in tabulated form 1. Engine make and type 2. Number of cylinders 3. Make and type of generator 4. Generator electrical rating KVA, KW power factor and winding arrangement. 5. Number and type of bearings (for generator and for engine) 6. Type of exciter and voltage regulator 7. Type and manufacturer of engine governor 8. Certification of factory vibration test report and torsional analysis 9. Certified engine horsepower curves 10. Engine generator control and monitoring panel D. Drawings and/or literature describing the accessories including: 1. Batteries and rack 2. Battery charger and wiring diagrams 3. Jacket water heater 4. Silencer, exhaust adapter and other exhaust system components 5. Remote annunciator descriptions and wiring diagrams 6. Control wiring diagrams 1.9 WARRANTY A. The complete emergency power system (generator set, controls, and associated switchgear and accessories), as provided by the single source manufacturer shall be warranted by said manufacture against defects and workmanship for a period of five years or 1000 hours, whichever occurs first from the date of system, start up. Such coverage shall include parts, labor, travel expenses, and labor to remove/reinstall said equipment, per the manufacturers standard published limited warranty. ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION EQUIPMENT 16230 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Engine -generator set and accessories shall be: MANUFACTURER Baldor Generator Caterpillar Cummins Power Generation Katolite Kohler Simpower 2.2 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS WESiFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SUPPLIER The Power Company NC Power Systems Company Cummins Northwest, Inc. EC power Systems Pacific Detroit Diesel Allison, Inc. The Power Company A. Type: The engine shall be a water-cooled, four cycle, compression ignition engine of either vertical in-line or Vee -type. The engine shall be provided with an integrally mounted instrument panel including a water temperature gauge, lubricating oil pressure gauge, and engine running hourmeter. B. Horsepower: Certified engine horsepower curves shall be submitted showing the manufacturer's approval of the engine rating for standby application. The horsepower rating shown shall be a minimum of 1.5 HP/KW when corrected to the altitude and temperature conditions noted in DESCRIPTION above. C. Speed: The engine speed shall be based on <1200> <1800> RPM for 60 Hertz output. D. Governor: 1. The engine speed shall be controlled by a mechanical droop type governor with +1- .5% stability at any constant load from no load to full load, 3% droop from no load to full load, maximum transient of 5%, and recovery time of 1.5 seconds upon application or removal of full load. 2. The engine speed shall be controlled by an electronic isochronous type governor with +1- .25% stability at any constant load from no load to full load, 0% to 5% (adjustable) droop from no load to full load, maximum transient of 3%, and recovery time of .5 seconds upon activation or removal of full load. 3. The electronic governor shall be suitable for controlling the set(s) independently or in parallel with other sets having similar speed governing systems. Isochronous precision load sharing with electronic load measurement shall be provided so that each generator shares the total connected load equally to within +1- 5% of its rating for any load. E. Fuel System: 1. Fuel: The engine shall perform satisfactorily and meet all specification parameters when operating on a commercial grade of distilled fuel oil such as No. 2 heating oil. Diesel engines requiring premium fuels (higher than 40 cetane) are not permitted. ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION EQUIPMENT 16230 4 WES 1'FHELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2. Consumption Fuel consumption of the engine -generator set with all engine driven accessories shall not exceed 0.09 gallons of fuel per kilowatt-hour at any load between 50 and 100 percent rated load. 3. The fuel system shall be the normal fuel system used by the engine manufacturer. An engine fuel priming pump, an engine mounted fuel filter/ water separator and an electric solenoid shutoff valve in the supply line shall be provided. Flexible fuel connections shall be provided at the engine. A manual fuel shutoff shall be included, located upstream of the fuel filters. 4. Fuel Cooler: Provide a fuel cooler if the excess fuel returned from the engine is above the operational temperature limits defined by the manufacturer. F. Lubrication: The engine shall incorporate a gear driven lubricating oil pump for supplying oil under pressure to main bearings, crankpin bearings, pistons, piston pins, timing gears, cam shaft bearings and injection rocker mechanism. Provide full flow oil filters, conveniently located for servicing . The filters shall be equipped with a spring loaded bypass valve to insure oil circulation if the filters are clogged. A lubricating oil pressure gauge shall be provided. G. Air Filters: The engine shall be provided with one or more heavy duty, dry type air filters. H. Exhaust System: 1. Furnish with the engine a critical silencing type muffler and a stainless steel flexible exhaust adapter (at least 18 inches long) for each engine exhaust outlet to the muffler. The muffler shall have a minimum sound attenuation of 35 db at a frequency of 300 Hz. The muffler shall be protected by a high temperature corrosion resistant coating, be arranged for horizontal mounting above the engine, have provisions for supports separate from the engine and be fitted with a drain, Manufacturer: GT Exhaust Systems, Harco Manufacturing, Silex Manufacturing, or Maxim. 2. Exhaust manifold, flex and muffler connections shall be bolted flange type. 3• Cooling System: 1. The engine shall be furnished with a cooling system having a sufficient capacity for cooling the engine when the engine -generator set is delivering full rated load, with all auxiliaries, in the ambient temperature conditions as noted in paragraph 1.2 B. The engine shall be equipped with an engine driven pusher fan, water circulating pump and a thermostatic valve to maintain the engine at the proper temperature level. A water temperature gauge calibrated in degrees F (or degrees q with range adequate to monitor jacket water heater operation shall be provided. The cooling system shall be filled with a commercial grade of Ethylene Glycol containing anti -corrosives and water to 0 degrees F. 2. The radiator shall be provided with an expansion tank with filler cap, vacuum relief valve and low coolant level alarm switch 3. The radiator shall be provided with core guard, belt guard, fan guard, duct flange and mounting hardware with flexible pipe connections between the engine and the radiator. Starting System: 1. Starting Motor: A direct current electric starting system with a positive engagement drive shall be furnished with the engine. The motor voltage shall be as recommended by the engine manufacturer. ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION EQUIPMENT 16230 5 WESI FIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2. Jacket Water Heater: A water heater with integral thermostatic switch shall be provided to maintain engine jacket water at a temperature which will allow the engine -generator set to meet the 10 second acceptance of full rated load in an ambient temperature of 0 degrees F. The heater shall operate on <120> <208> <277> volts, single phase, 60 Hertz, A.C. 3. Batteries: Provide a lead -acid storage battery set of the heavy duty truck engine starting type. The battery voltage shall be compatible with the starting motor. The battery set shall have sufficient capacity to provide one (1) minute total cranking time at 0 degrees F. without recharging. 4. Battery Box: Provide a high density white or gray polyethylene seamless box (1/4" thick minimum) with removable polyethylene cover. Provide with seismic restraint battery hold down clamps or straps. 5. Battery Cables: Extra flexible, multi -strand copper insulated conductors, #4/0 minimum, with copper ring tongue type terminals for engine, battery type cable clamps for battery. 6. Battery Charger: A current limiting voltage compensated battery charger shall be furnished to automatically recharge the batteries. The charger shall include overload protection, silicon diode full wave rectifiers, voltage surge suppressors, D.C. ammeter and fused A.C. input. The charger shall operate on 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hertz, A.C. with an ampere output not less than 10 amperes. The charger shall be disconnected from the battery set during the cranking cycle or shall be capable of withstanding starting current voltage drop. Include a timer switch to provide an equalizing charge to the batteries. Provide an alarm contact for remote annunciation of battery charger loss of output. When located on set mount via vibration isolators. 7. Alternator: Provide a battery charger alternator with voltage regulator. K. Generator Controls 1. The generator set shall be provided with a microprocessor based control system to provide automatic starting, monitoring and control functions for the generator set. 2. Engine Controls. Engine mode selector switch labeled run-off- auto. When the selector switch is in the "off" position, the generating plant shall be locked out. Whenever the selector switch is placed in the "off' position while the engine is running it shall be immediately shut down. When the selector switch is placed in the "auto" position the engine generator shall be on standby and shall start whenever a power failure signal is received. When the engine selector switch is placed in the "run" position, the engine shall start and come up to speed. It shall continue to run until the selector switch is returned to "off" or "auto" position. This position is to be used for testing or for manual operation 3. Emergency Stop Switch. Red "mushroom head" push-button. Depressing the emergency stop switch shall cause the generator set to immediately shut down, and be locked out from automatic starting. Also initiate an Generator Controls Not in Auto alarm. 4. Automatic Starting Controls. The control system shall include a engine cranking system which allows for user selected crank time, rest time and # of cycles. Initial settings shall permit at least 3 cranking attempts of 15 seconds (adjustable) duration with 15 second (adjustable) rest period between cranking attempts. ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION EQUIPMENT 16230 6 WEST HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 5. Engine Cool down The control system shall include time delay stop function (adjustable 0-600 seconds) after removal of engine start signal. 6. Voltage level adjustment rheostat. (Recessed screw driver adjustable) L. Engine Status Monitoring. Provide the following display outputs: engine oil pressure (psi or kPA) engine coolant temperature (degrees F or C) engine oil temperature (degrees F or C) engine speed (rpm) number of hours of operation (hours) number of start attempts battery voltage (DC volts) M. Generator Monitoring. 1. Provide analog meters to display the following outputs: AC voltage (3 phase, line to line and line to neutral) AC current (all three phases) AC kilowatts Frequency 2. Provide digital meters to display the following outputs: Power factor ((0 to 1, lead or lag) AC kilowatt hours N. Generator Alarms 1. alarm system shall be provided with amber and red running lights or LED indicators to indicate the nature of the alarm. The alarm hom shall sound upon occurrence of any of the alarms described below. To reset the engine generator after a failure while in automatic operation the engine mode selector switch shall be rotated to the "stop" position then back to the "auto" position. 2. If the alarm horn is silenced for a failure, the next failure or alarm shall re- energize the alarm horn. 3. Alarm panel shall be provided with horn silence button and lamp test switch (or push to test indicator lights). 4. Terminal strip connections shall be provided for the remote annunciator panel and other remote alarm connections. 5. The following fail circuitry and alarms shall be provided. Low Coolant Temperature Amber alarm only Low Coolant Level Amber alarm only Approach High Coolant Amber alarm only Temperature High Coolant Temperature Red shutdown and alarm Approach Low Oil Pressure Amber Alarm only Low Oil Pressure Red Shutdown Overcrank Red shutdown & alarm ELEC'T'RIC POWER GENERATION EQUIPMENT 16230 7 WES't'r'IbLD SHOPPING TOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION Overspeed Red shutdown Sr alarm Overcurrent (circuit breaker Red Shutdown and alarm trip) Under frequency Red Shutdown and alarm Battery Charger Failure Amber alarm only Low Fuel Level Amber alarm only (1) High Fuel/Rupture Day Amber alarm only (2) Tank Control Not In Automatic red immediate shutdown & Ground Fault alarm Amber Alarm only (1) Combine low fuel main tank and low fuel day tank alarms (2) Optional alarms on day tank O. Wiring 1. All wiring shall be number coded at all terminations. Wiring shall be neatly bundled or contained within wireways. P. Main Line Circuit Breaker. 1. A main line molded case circuit breaker with auxiliary alarm contact shall operate both manually for norma] switching function and automatically for overload and short circuit protection. The trip unit for each pole shall have elements providing inverse time delay during overload conditions and instantaneous magnetic tripping for short circuit protection. Q. Crankcase Ventilation Filter: 1. Provide recirculation filter with replaceable filter element. Nelson EcoVent or equivalent by Racor. R. Day Tank 1. Double containment type (rupture basin). Electric shutoff solenoid on transfer pump intake. 2. High and low fuel alarms, red light operated from separate float switch mounted on tank, and with wiring and terminal block on tank to provide remote signal of alarm condition for high level and when less than two hours of fuel remains. Provide sight glass or level gauge. 3. Pump 1/3 HP, 120V., 1 phase, 60 Hertz, controlled by adjustable, two level float switch. Include rupture basin level switch to shutdown pump motor. 4. Size for a minimum of 4 hours of operation at full load. 5. As manufactured by Simplex, Pryco, or Tramont. S. Subbase Fuel Tank ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION EQUIPMENT 16230 WES 1 HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 1. Provide a dual wall sub -base fuel storage tank with gallons capacity (or 12/24 hours operation). 2. The tank shall be constructed of corrosion resistant steel and shall be UL 142 listed. 3. Include low level and leak detection switches. 4. Provide space for feeder stub ups to electrical connections at alternator. 5. The equipment, as installed, shall meet all local and regional requirements for above ground tanks. 2.3 GENERATOR SPECIFICATIONS A. The generator shall be 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hertz, rated not less than the KW size and voltage noted or as determined under RATING above at 0.8 power factor. The generator rating shall be applicable for continuous service in standby power applications. The temperature rise of the generator shall not exceed 130 degrees C based on operation at 40 degrees ambient when producing its full rated output continuously per NEMA MG1. B. The generator shall be a single bearing, rotating field, synchronous type built to NEMA standards with class H insulation rating limited to 130 degrees C above ambient. The excitor shall be brushless rotating full wave rectification excitor with solid state components. The generator shall be coupled directly to the engine flywheel through a flexible driving disc to assure positive alignment. C. Voltage Regulator. The voltage regulator shall control the exciter field to maintain the generator output voltage to within +/-1 % for all steady state load conditions from no load to full load, and for +/- 5% frequency variation and provide volts per hertz performance in transient conditions exceeding 5% engine speed variation. The regulator shall be a solid state device with three phase voltage sensing and built in electromagnetic interference suppression. Readily accessible voltage droop, voltage level and voltage gain controls shall be provided. Voltage adjustment rheostat shall be located in the generator control and monitoring panel. Provide fuse protection against overvoltage and overcurrent and protection for the regulator from under voltage and under frequency. Provide protection for the load and generator against loss of voltage sensing. [Provide paralleling module accessory for either reactive droop or cross current compensation between two (or more) generators.] 2.4 MOUNTING AND BALANCE A. The complete unit shall be mounted on a structural steel sub -base with sufficient rigidity to maintain alignment of the generator set. The emergency generator set shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory. The peak to peak amplitude of vibration velocity in the horizontal, vertical and axial directions shall not exceed 0.65 inch per second at the main structural components. B. Provide vibration isolation pads between the steel sub base and the floor consisting of neoprene waffle pad with steel plate. Mason Industries type WM or Korfund EU Series. Provide reinforced neoprene bushing and washers, Mason Industries Type HLIB and HLIW. ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION EQUIPMENT 16230 WES I tibLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Provide vibration isolators between the structural steel base and the floor consisting of steel or cast iron top and bottom housings incorporating one or more steel springs with built-in leveling bolts and built-in resilient chocks to control oscillation and withstand lateral forces in all directions. CalDyn RJSD Series, Mason Industries type FEQ or equivalent by Korfund. Model shall be selected and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Vibration isolators shall incorporate earthquake restraints to meet the seismic zone requirements of the area in which the generator will be installed. D. Provide concrete inertia base consisting of a steel channel outer frame with welded top and bottom, no. 4 minimum steel reinforcing bars on 12" centers both ways. Structure design will be by the manufacturer. Fully accessible vibration isolation springs similar to above shall be provided in welded steel housings at sides of the base. The isolation mountings shall support the unit and inertia base not less than 2" clear above the slab below. Provide four seismic restraint snubbers, one on each corner on the long sides of the base consisting of interlocking steel members with replaceable 3/4" thick neoprene rubber element. Install snubbers after the full equipment load is in place on the inertia base. 2.5 REMOTE ALARMS A. A remote derangement signal panel shall be provided in the location(s) shown on the drawings to indicate via a common alarm any of the abnormal conditions described in 2.2.N above. B. A remote annunciator and alarm panel shall be provided in the location shown on the drawings to indicate each individual alarm condition described in 2.2N above. C. The [remote annunciator] [derangement signal panel] shall be mounted in a 4" deep [surface] [flush] mounted enclosure. Provide engraved or silk screen legends for each indicator light and generator. The panel shall be provided with an alarm horn or buzzer, alarm silencing switch and a lamp test switch to test all the lamp filaments simultaneously. Annunciator wiring shall be number coded at all termination (color coding not acceptable.). 2.6 FUEL, PIPING, EXHAUST AND VENTILATION A. Refer to Division 15. The coordination of the mechanical systems with the generator set installation shall be the responsibility of the generator set supplier. 2.7 OUTDOOR WEATHER PROTECTIVE SOUND ATTENUATING ENCLOSURE A. The generator set shall be provided with a sound -attenuated weather protective exterior housing which allows the generator set to operate at full rated load in the ambient conditions previously specified. B. The enclosure shall reduce the sound level of the generator set while operating at full rated load to a maximum of 49 dBA (residential) measured at the property line in a free field environment. Housing configuration and materials used may be of any suitable ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION EQUIPMENT 16230 10 WES i'HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION design which meets application needs, except that acoustical materials used shall be oil and water resistant. No foam materials shall be used unless they can be demonstrated to have the same durability and life as fiberglass. C. The enclosure shall include hinged doors for access to both sides of the engine and alternator, and the control equipment with key -locking and pad lockable door latches for all doors. Door hinges shall be stainless steel. D. The enclosure shall be provided with an exhaust silencer which is mounted [inside] [outside] the enclosure, and allows the generator set package to meet specified sound level requirements. Silencer and exhaust shall include a raincap and rain shield. E. All sheet metal shall be primed for corrosion protection and finish painted with the manufacturer's standard color. All surfaces of all metal parts shall be primed and painted. Fasteners used shall be corrosion resistant, and designed to minimize marring of the painted surface when removed for normal installation or service work PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply implicitly with manufacturer's installation instructions and do not "turn over" engine or energize control system until specifically authorized by engine -generator supplier. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Verify access space and routing through the building structure. Remove and reinstall accessories as required. B. Provide a concrete housekeeping pad under generator. Pad shall be 6" greater in dimension (horizontal minimum) than base of equipment mounted thereon. Pad shall be 12" deep with top 3" above final finished grade with total weight at least equal to the weight of the generator set. The pad shall be rebar reinforced with #6, 12" o.c., both ways. Mount set via vibration isolators with 1/2" drilled in concrete anchors with 4 1/2" minimum embedment. Mounting system shall be of sufficient strength to prevent walking or overturning during an earthquake. C. Bolt the battery box to the floor. D. Extend the crankcase ventilation discharge tube to the downstream side of the engine radiator. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Stub up connecting services to generator set immediately adjacent to base such that exposed systems on floor are not required. Final connections to set shall utilize flexible pipe (Electrical in Sealtite flex) and stranded wire. ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION EQUIPMENT 16230 11 WES1FIJLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Provide circuits to battery charger, each heater and day tank(s). C. Ground generator neutral as a separately derived system per NEC 250-30. 3.4 EXHAUST INSTALLATION A. Install the muffler and adapter when the Contractor performing the Division 15 work is not required to make this installation. B. Provide exhaust piping with a water trap and drain cock between engine and muffler. Coordinate work with other trades. C. Provide calcium silicate insulation with glass fiber cloth lagging or fiberglass insulation wired in place over all interior exposed surfaces of the exhaust system piping and silencer. Provide tie on blanket insulation over flexible connection. D. Provide wall or roof thimble per manufacturer's recommendation and flash weathertight. 3.5 START UP A. Coordinate with supplier representative in performing startup, testing and instruction on systems. B. Install oil filters and air filters. C. Fill crank case with engine manufacturer's recommended lubricating oil. D. Fill cooling system with specified antifreeze. E. Fill fuel tank full for testing and instruction periods. 3.6 TESTING A. Prior to full load test, the set shall be operated at reduced load for a time period as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Prior to acceptance of the permanent installation, the engine- generator set shall be subjected to a full load (KW) test by the Contractor using a portable load bank (provided by supplier) to fully load the set for a period of two hours. The engine - generator supplier shall have a representative in attendance to conduct the test, make measurements, advise and assure that his equipment is properly operating and protected. Any defects in the equipment which surface from this test shall be corrected. Subsequent to test, the manufacturer's representative shall submit a test report indicating (at 15 minute intervals during test): 1. Generator load. 2. Voltage (permanent and calibrated test voltmeter). 3. Amperage output (permanent and calibrated test ammeter). 4. Ambient air temperature. ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION EQUIPMENT 16230 12 WES 1 HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 5. Coolant temperature. C. Additional testing shall demonstrate the following: 1. A simulated power outage shall demonstrate the automatic starting of the generator, transfer of transfer switch(es) and energization of emergency loads. 2. Simulated fault or alarm conditions of each item noted to be monitored. 3. Engine cool down cycle is set as noted. D. A certified copy of the test record shall be forwarded to the engineer and copies shall be included in the 0 & M manual. E. Corrective measures required shall be made at the expense of the Contractor and the test(s) repeated until all systems are complete and fully operational. Check filters and re -fill all fluids after tests are complete. R Notify Architect and Owner prior to scheduling tests. 3.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Provide per Section 16010 with additional information as noted below. B. 0 & M manuals shall be submitted to the engineer for review thirty (30) days prior to acceptance of the unit. C. Shall contain step by step instructions for startup and shutdown. The first page shall contain the name, address and phone number of the local representative to be called for service or parts. This shall be followed by complete parts lists by actual ordering catalog numbers. Also shall contain four copies each of test record forms and service record forms for Owner use. These forms shall show the proper interval for test, servicing and replacement of all components, lubrication, filters, anti -freeze, etc., including recommended specifications for all lubricants. D. The final reviewed manuals shall be turned over to the Owner prior to conducting the instruction and demonstration session. Obtain a receipt for the manuals and forward a copy of the receipt to the Engineer. E. A single copy of the service record forms, recommended operation and service practices for the unit shall be sealed in plastic and wall mounted in the generator room. 3.8 INSTRUCTION AND DEMONSTRATION A. The Contractor shall (after one week (minimum) written notification to Architect) conduct a 4 hour instruction and demonstration session during which all maintenance and operational aspects of the system will be described and demonstrated to personnel selected by the Owner. The session shall be conducted by a Contractor's representative thoroughly familiar with the characteristics of the system and the suppliers representative. This instruction session shall also include step by step instruction on the sequence of startup and shutdown of the unit, following the written operating instructions listed in the 0 & M manual, and shall include procedures to be followed in the event of audible/visual fault conditions occurring on generator annunciators. ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION EQUIPMENT 16230 13 WES1'HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Instruction on maintenance procedures shall include proper interval for system tests and duration, replacement interval for fuel, oil and air filters; lube oil and coolant change; interval for fluid Ievel checks (i.e. fuels, oil, lube oil, coolant and battery levels) as contained in the 0 & M manual test and service record forms. C. Upon completion of the instruction period, the Owner's representative shall complete his portion of the Job Completion Form, copies of which shall be included with the 0 & M manual and forwarded to the Engineer. D. Instructions shall be coordinated with those furnished under Section 16415, Automatic Transfer Switches, or 16416, Bypass/Isolation Transfer Switches. 3.9 FUEL A. After testing and instruction period refill fuel tank with a full supply of fuel. END OF SECTION 16230 ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION EQUIPMENT 16230 14 Saw' vtiw WES [FIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16390 - TEMPORARY POWER PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Assist the general contractor in providing temporary light and power service for all contracts. See Special Conditions of General Contract and Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Temporary lighting per Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA) requirements. 2.2 Maintain as required under Section 16050 "Existing Systems". 2.3 Temporary power outlets and boxes as required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 All services to be maintained for duration of other trade's requirements. END OF SECTION 16390 TEMPORARY POWER 16390 WES1'FIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16415 - AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Provide all automatic transfer switches complete, fully operational and fully tested. Conform with UL Standard 1008. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TYPE A. Transfer and retransfer to normal source shall be automatic. Automatic transfer switches shall be electrically operated, mechanically held and supplied with positive mechanical interlocking. The main contacts shall be equipped with a safe manual override capability. UL 1008 listed meeting tables 21.1, 23.1, 23.2. B. Sensing and control logic may utilize solid state components mounted on printed circuit boards. Construction shall allow individual function replacement in the field without requiring replacement of the complete solid state package. The control panel shall meet or exceed the voltage surge withstand voltage test in accordance with IEEE/ANSI C37.90a-1974. 2.2 RATING A. Shall have voltage, amperage and ampere withstand ratings as shown on the drawings. B. Transfer switches used to transfer from normal to emergency power shall be approved for emergency service, full continuous ampere rated (no derating) with make rating at 20 times and break rating at 6 times full load current rating. C. Provide fully rated 4th pole for switching of neutral in addition to phase conductors when generator neutral is grounded at the generator, or as shown on the drawings. 2.3 ACCESSORIES The following accessories shall be provided as a minimum in addition to those normally required for proper operation. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES 16415 1 WESIFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION A. Full three phase voltage failure with adjustable drop out and pick up. Set at 80% dropout, 90% pick up. B. Signals. Two pilot lights for indicating transfer position. Green - normal, red - emergency at transfer switch Auxiliary contacts for remote pilot lights. C. Test switch For simulating power failure. D. Time Delay Before Engine Starting: Adjustable ride through feature of approximately 0-10 seconds for start of engine generator and transfer on momentary loss of normal source. Set at 1 second. Include two auxiliary contacts, 1 N.O. and 1. N.C. for use for engine start signal. E. Retransfer. Adjustable time delay (with emergency failure by-pass) of 0 to 30 minutes for retransfer to normal. Set at 15 minutes. F. Generator Condition. Voltage and frequency sensitive lockout relay. Prevents transfer until voltage and frequency of generator have reached preset rating. Set at 95%. G. Time Delay Neutral - Provide time delay with transfer switch in neutral position and load disconnected from either source, adjustable .2 to 50 seconds, to prevent transfer between sources when sources are significantly out of phase. Set at 50 seconds. H. Block Transfer and Load Shed Relays - Provide relays in transfer switches and to prevent automatic transfer until a signal is received from the emergency generator control switchboard, and to initiate load shedding by driving the transfer switch to the neutral position. I. Phase Reversal Relay. Sensing relay to prevent transfer to new source when phases are reversed from designed phasing. J. Exerciser Clock. Shall set the day, time and duration of the generator exercise period and shall include a selector switch for choosing exercise with load transfer, without load transfer, or for bypassing the exercise period. K. Elevator Signal Contacts: Provide two time delay contacts that open 1-120 seconds (adjustable) before transfer in either direction and reset after transfer. 2.4 ENCLOSURE A. Each transfer switch shall be enclosed in an enclosure suitable for the environment in which it is located, with front opening lockable door. Provide enclosure suitable for front and side access only. 2.5 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepare and submit detailed shop drawings for review prior to manufacture. Include the following information: wiring diagrams, dimensions, front view and catalog information indicating complete electrical and mechanical characteristics. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES 16415 2 WES I FtLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.6 NAMEPLATES A. Provide engraved phenolic nameplates per 16100. Include name, voltage, phase, source (switchboard fed from) and load served. 2.7 MANUFACTURER A. All transfer switches shall be of the same manufacturer. Acceptable manufacturers are: Automatic Switch Company, Caterpillar, Cutler Hammer, Generac, Kohler, Lakeshore Electric, Onan, Russelectric, Thompson Technologies, Zenith PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOUNTING A. Wall mounted or free standing assembly with housekeeping pad as noted. Bolt to wall and/or floor in a manner similar to that for switchboards and/or panelboards. Verify space available with equipment sizes and code required working clearances prior to submittal of shop drawings. 3.2 WIRING AND GROUNDING A. Shall conform with applicable sections of these specifications. 3.3 OPERATION TEST A. Provide testing of transfer system coordinated with generator set(s) and start control panel to insure proper operation of transfer devices under actual operating conditions. Monitor and verify correct operation and timing of the following applicable items: 1. Normal voltage sensing relays. 2. Emergency voltage sensing relays. 3. Test switch 4. In-phase monitor or time delay neutral. 5. Engine start sequence. 6. Time delay upon transfer. 7. Interlocks and limit switch function. 8. Timing delay and re -transfer upon normal power restoration. 9. Engine cool -down time delay and shutdown. 3.4 SEQUENCE A. Any automatic transfer switch sensing loss of power shall start the emergency generator set and the set shall continue to run until after all transfer switches have returned to normal power (engine cool -down timer part of emergency generator set). AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES 16415 WES? FJIILD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Provide per Section 16010. Manuals shall in addition contain the following information: 1. Recommended test intervals. 2. Recommended service intervals. 3. Test and service record forms showing proper intervals for tests. 4. Recommended maintenance. 5. The first page of the manual shall contain the name, address and phone number of the local representative to be called for service and parts. 3.6 INSTRUCTION A. The Contractor shall after one week (minimum) written notification to Architect conduct an instruction session during which all maintenance and operational aspects of the system will be described and demonstrated to personnel selected by the Owner in conjunction with instruction period for Generator System Equipment, Section 16230. The session shall be conducted by a Contractor's representative thoroughly familiar with the characteristics of the system. 0 & M manual information regarding the system shall be turned over to the Architect prior to scheduling the instruction session. 3.7 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall warranty the transfer switches against failures which result, under normal use and service, from defects in workmanship and materials. Warranty shall be for parts and labor for two years from date of "Notice of Completion" and for parts for an additional three years after the expiration of the first two year period. END OF SECTION 16415 4 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES 16415 WES 1'r1ELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16425 - SWITCHBOARDS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Dead front type, U.L. listed, "fully rated" for available fault current, current limiting type, complete, fully operational and fully tested. Conform to NEMA Standard PB2, current revision. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. General Electric, Square D, Cutler Hammer, Siemens, IEM. 2.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES A. Prepare and submit for review prior to manufacture. Include dimensioned front, plan, and section views, bolting template, wiring diagrams, device sizings and layout, nameplates, types of washers and grade of bolts and all other information required to demonstrate conformance with contract documents. 2.3 COORDINATION STUDY A. Manufacturer to prepare coordination study. Study to indicate switchboard components are selectively coordinated for all levels of short circuit current. Submit settings and trip curves of all components. 2.4 SWITCHBOARD STRUCTURE A. Freestanding, steel with steel angle or channel framework; adequate strength and rigidity necessary to resist all conditions of use to which it may be subjected and to support all equipment, devices and appurtenances contained therein; front plates installed in sections so that all parts are front accessible without disturbing other parts. Removable lifting angle at the top and bottom of each shipping section. B. Front access only unless noted otherwise. SWITCHBOARDS 16425 1 WES ]FIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Finish: Gray, factory applied to all surfaces. 2.5 SWITCHBOARD DIMENSIONS A. Overall height: Maximum 92 inches (not including base channels). Length and depth: Not exceeding dimensions as scaled or noted in contract documents. Equipment exceeding dimensions noted not allowed. Base bid on equipment complying with contract documents. 2.6 SWITCHBOARD BUSBARS A. Tin plated aluminum or copper at manufacturer's option, factory fabricated; carried to terminals for connection to source noted. Brace switchboard components for symmetrical fault current shown plus asymmetrical offset (50,000 amp symmetrical bracing minimum). B. Busbar Joints and Connections: 1. Busbar to busbar: Lapped, silver or tin plated, low contact resistance, low temperature rise, bolted using Grade 5 bolts, belleville and flat washers. 2. Overcurrent devices: Bolted to busbars using Grade 5 bolts, belleville and flat washers. Exception Square D I -line and 30- 200A fused switches. 3. Conductor connections: Bolted to busbars using Grade 5 bolts, belleville and flat washers. Connectors for aluminum conductors per 16120. C. System of Bussing: Three phase, 4 wire, full size phase bussing and full size neutral bussing unless larger noted. D, Ground Bus: Full length ground bus bonded to frame conforming with U.L. 891 for minimum size except larger as required by code for grounding neutral conductor. 2.7 SWITCHBOARD COMPONENTS Include (but not limited to) the following: A. General: 1. Switches and fuses or breakers, amperage as shown, selectively coordinated for all levels of short circuit current. Set adjustable over current devices at factory. Fuse clips to be rejection type for Class R fuses. Fuses per 16475. 2. Overcurrent devices utilized shall include devices labeled "current limiting" which shall limit the available rms fault current at branch circuit panelboards to under 10,000 amps symmetrical for 120/208 volt and 14,000 amps symmetrical for 277/480 volt breakers. 3. Space for future fused switches or breakers noted including complete bussing and required hardware for mounting devices. Space for conductor current limiters when noted. 4. Cleats for securing conductors. Miscellaneous appurtenances as required for complete installation SWITCHBOARDS 16425 2 WFS I HELD SHOPP1NGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION B. When serving as a Service Switchboard: 1. UL 869 and Service Entrance UL labels. 2. Surge arrestors on all phases. Similar to Square D, J9200 series. 3. Utility Company metering equipment: Current transformer space, meter base(s), metering conductors and miscellaneous appurtenances required by serving utility. C. Owner instrumentation equipment: 1. Voltmeter - 3 1/2", 300 volt scale for 208 volt systems, 600 volt scale for 480 volt systems. Voltmeter selector switch, 7 position. 2. Ammeter - 3 1/2", 5 amp movement, scale to match current transformers. Ammeter selector switch, shorting type, 4 position. 3. 3 current transformers, 1% metering accuracy, 5 amp secondary, primary as noted. D. Ground Fault Protection Provide the following ground fault protection equipment on breakers (switches) indicated. 1. Current transformer (also called a sensor or current monitor) installed and connected to indicate the sum of all phase and neutral currents. (Zero sequence method.) A current transformer on grounding conductor is not acceptable. 2. Ground fault sensor (also called a ground break relay) operated by the current transformer. Trip point shall be adjustable (calibrated scale indication) from 20% (or 1200 amps whichever is lower) to 60% of the breaker (switch) rating. Sensor to include an adjustable time delay (calibrated scale indication) from .1 second to .4 second (approximately). 3. Monitor or test panel mounted on switchboard front whose functions furnish means to test ground fault system; monitor control voltage; indicate when sensor has tripped breaker (switch); and reset system. 4. Trip device on breaker (switch) operated by ground fault sensor. E. Ground current ammeter and current transformer with current transformer on the neutral bonding jumper. 2.8 NAMEPLATES A. Provide permanently attached engraved nameplates per Section 16010 for each switchboard, and every instrument, protective device and disconnect device. For each switchboard include name (3/8" letters), voltage, phase and U.L. short circuit rating (1/4" letters). For each protective device and disconnect include load (1/4" letters) and area served (1/8" letters) and fuse size and type when fused (1/8" letters). B. Provide one job nameplate with the following information: Project Name (3/8" lettering, all other 1/4") Architect Electrical Consultant (Sparling, Inc.) Electrical Contractor Year of Manufacture SWITCHBOARDS 16425 WES1'HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Nameplate color shall be: Normal System - white on black; Emergency System - white on red. D. Provide engraved nameplate (3/S" lettering) at service entrance equipment indicating type and location of on-site emergency power sources (e.g., Emergency Power: Diesel Generator, Location: Ground Floor, Room 14). 2.9 O & M MANUALS A. Provide complete operation and maintenance manual per Section 16010, including instructions on all devices contained therein. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOUNTING A. Bolt to floor using 1/2" diameter drilled in concrete anchors with 41/2" minimum inbedment in structural floor slab. Provide "housekeeping pad" per 16010. Set floor bolts in structural floor and extend through housekeeping pad with sufficient threads to attach switchboard. 3.2 WIRING A. Conform with applicable specification sections. Conductors and terminations shall conform with 16120. Secure all conductors to switchboard structure. 3.3 Verify space available with equipment sizes and code required working clearances prior to submittal of shop drawings. 3.4 GROUNDING A. Provide per 16452. 3.5 Provide Utility Company metering equipment, devices and wiring in conformance with serving Utility requirements. 3.6 DEDICA1t;0 SPACE A. Locate in dedicated spaces. Coordinate work so piping, ducts, etc. are routed around dedicated spaces above and in front of switchboards per code. END OF SECTION 16425 4 SWITCHBOARDS 16425 410 WES I HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16452 - GROUNDING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes grounding systems for service neutral power ground and for equipment grounds and bonding as required by code. B. Related Sections 1. 16740 Telephone, Computer Raceway Systems PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS A. Copper only, sized per code. Bare or green insulated in sizes #10 AWG or larger. Green insulated for size #12 AWG. 2.2 GROUND RODS A. 3/4" x 10' -0" -copper clad steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GROUNDING, GENERAL A. Provide all grounding for electrical systems and equipment as required by codes and as specified herein. 3.2 GROUND RODS A. Provide as shown and/or required. Connect the grounding conductor to each rod, GROUNDING 16452 WES I FIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.3 SIZE OF GROUND WIRE A. As required by National Electrical Code. Where ground wire is exposed to physical damage protect with rigid non-ferrous conduit as permitted by applicable code. 3.4 GROUND CONNECTION OF WATER PIPING A. Metal internal piping shall be grounded, as a part of this contract. 3.5 CONNECTION TO THE POWER GROUND BUS A. Provide connections in accordance with the codes; including but not limited to: 1. Raceway system 2. Switchboard 3. Service neutral 4. "Separately derived service" (transformer or emergency power supply) 5. Electrically operated equipment and devices B. No device or equipment shall be connected for electrical service which has a neutral conductor connected to a grounding conductor or to the frame within the device or equipment. 3.6 METHOD OF CONNECTIONS A. Make all ground connections and ground cable splice by thermal welding or copper compression set type connectors U.L. listed for grounding purposes. Grounding lugs, where provided as standard manufacturer's items on equipment furnished, may be used. 3.7 EXPANSION FITTINGS A. In conduit runs requiring an expansion fitting, a bonding jumper shall be installed around the fitting to maintain continuous ground continuity. 3.8 TESTING A. Conform to Section 16030. 3.9 GROUND CABLE CROSSING EXPANSION JOINTS A. Ground cables crossing expansion joints or similar separations in structures or paved areas shall be protected from damage by means of suitable approved devices or methods of installation which will provide the necessary slack in the cable across the joint to permit movement. Stranded or other approved flexible copper run or jumper shall be used across such separations. GROUNDING 16452 2 WES1'MELD SHOP1'INGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.10 RACEWAY BUSHINGS A. Provide insulated grounding bushing on service and feeder raceways at panelboards and switchboards. Provide ground conductor sized per code to ground bus. END OF SECTION 16452 New GROUNDING 16452 WESIHELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16460 - DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes dry type transformers rated 600 volts and below. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES Transformers shall be manufactured, tested and installed in accordance with the latest revision of the following Standards and Publications. A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI 057.12.91 IEEE Standard Test Code for Dry Type Distribution and Power Transformers. B. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 1. NEMA ST -20 Dry -Type Transformers for General Applications 2. NEMA TP -1 Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers 3. NEMA TR -1 Transformers, Regulators and Reactors R2000. 4. NEMA TP -3 Standard for the Labeling of Distribution Transformer Efficiency. 5. NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 1,000 volts maximum. C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1. UL 506 Standard for Specialty Transformers (for transformers rated 10 kVA and below) 2. UL 1561 Standard for Dry Type General Purpose and Power Transformers (for transformers rated 10 to 1500 kVA) D. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Conform to the contract document submittal requirements including Division 1, Section 16010, and additional requirements described in this specification section.. B. Demonstrate conformance with specification requirements. Provide typical load losses for each transformer size at 50%, 75% and 100% of full load rating. C. Include dimensioned front plan and section views, wiring and connection diagrams and bolting template. Submit information indicating minimum clearance requirements DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16460 WEST' IhLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION around transformer, and anchor bolt patterns. Indicate mounting methods and demonstrate loading compatibility with mounting surface. 11 Submit shop drawings for proposed channel assembly for suspending transformers. E. Submit lug schedule showing proposed lugs for each transformer. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated -type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Acme, Cutler Hammer, Federal Pacific, General Electric, Hammond, MagneTe1S, Siemens, Sola/ Hevi-Duty Electric, Square D, or Tierney. 2.2 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS A. Comply with NEMA ST 20 and list and label as complying with UL 1561. B. Provide transformers that are internally braced to withstand seismic forces specified in Section 16460 paragraph 3.2 A. 2.3 ENCLOSURE A. Steel panel enclosure over core, coil and terminal chamber with louvered openings for convection cooling. Cooling and terminal access shall be possible with both sides and rear of enclosure obstructed. Minimum 14 gage steel with appropriate reinforcement and lifting lugs B. Indoor: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2. C. Finish: Comply with NEMA 250 for "Indoor Corrosion Protection" Manufacturer's standard gray finish. 2.4 WINDINGS A. Separate primary and secondary. Windings shall have Class H insulation and shall be rated for continuous operation at rated kVA with temperature rise of not over 150 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16460 2 WFS HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION degrees C above a 40 degree C ambient, with a maximum hot spot temperature of 220 degrees C. B. Core and coil mounted on rubber isolation mounting pads. Windings and core and coil assembly shall be treated and built to resist the effects of dirt and moisture. C. Unless noted otherwise three phase transformers shall have a 480 volt delta connected primary and 208Y/120 volt, three phase, four wire secondary. Single phase transformers shall be 480 volt, single phase, primary, 120/240 volt, single phase, three wire secondary. D. Windings shall be copper or aluminum. E. Grounded electrostatic shield to reduce capacitive coupling where noted on the drawings. Include primary surge suppression and secondary filters similar to Square D Class 7450-FIL. Common mode noise attenuation-65db, 1.5 to 100kHz. F. Encapsulate windings with resin compound to seal out moisture and air for transformers indicated on the drawings. 2.5 PRIMARY TAPS A. Transformers rated 15 KVA and larger shall have full capacity taps, minimum of two 2- 1/2 percent above and four 2-1/2 percent below normal (rated) primary voltage. 2.6 RATINGS A. Continuous capacity rating not less than size noted. B. Efficiency 1. Transformers (except K rated, quiet type and ultra quiet type) shall comply with Class 1 efficiencies as set forth in NEMA TP -1, when tested in accordance with NEMA TP -2. Provide Energy Star label in accordance with NEMA TP -3. 2.7 CONNECTIONS A. Provisions for external connections shall be made by means of a terminal board employing lugs conforming to Section 16120 which are compatible with the external conductors installed All connections shall be accessible from front of cabinet. 2.8 NOISE LEVEL A. Manufacturer shall test for noise level compliance in accordance with ANSI C57.12.91, IEEE Standard Test Code for Dry Type Distribution and Power Transformers. B. Noise level shall not exceed 45 db for sizes less than 51 kVA, 50 db for 51-150 kVA, 55 db for 151-300 kVA and 60 db for sizes greater than 300 kVA. DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16460 3 WES i FIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Quiet type reduced noise level transformers shall have noise levels not exceeding 42db for sizes less than 51 kVA, 47 db for 51-150 kVA and 52 db for 151 to 300 kVA and 57db for greater than 300 kVA. D. Ultra quiet type transformers shall a have noise level shall not exceeding 35 db for all sizes through 300 kVA. Shall be similar to Tierney Quietran, specially constructed low - noise models. All ultra -quiet transformers shall be individually factory certified to have noise levels not exceeding 35 db. Forward certification to Engineer and include copy in the O&M Manual. 2.9 BUCK -BOOST TRANSFORMERS A. Description: Self -cooled, two -winding dry type, rated for continuous duty and with wiring terminals suitable for connection as autotransformer. Transformers shall comply with NEMA ST 1 and shall be listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 or UL 1561. B. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2. 2.10 CONTROL AND SIGNAL TRANSFORMERS A. Description: Self -cooled, two -winding dry type, rated for continuous duty, complying with NEMA ST 1, and Iisted and labeled as complying with UL 506. B. Ratings: Continuous duty. If rating is not indicated, provide at least 50 percent spare capacity above connected peak load. 2.11 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Approved Manufacturers: Mason Industries, Inc., Cal-Dyn, or Korfund. Mason Industries design series numbers used as references. B. Isolators shall be sized to safely accommodate weight of transformer. C. Pads 1. Vibration isolation shall exceed 95%. 2. Pads shall be constructed of Bridge Bearing neoprene rubber as defined by AASHTO. 3. When mounted on concrete, type SW pad, with standard dimensions used to match or exceed the footprint of the transformer base rail. Alternatively, and for other non -suspended applications, provide type SWM pad with steel plate to disperse weight and rubber grommet to isolate plate from mounting bolt. 4. D. Combination Isolators 1. Combination construction of rubber and spring. Vibration isolation shall exceed 98%. Furnish vibration isolation calculations with submittal. 2. Bridge Bearing neoprene rubber as defined by AASHTO. DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16460 4 WESTFIELD SHOPP NGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3. Ceiling suspension: Type DNHS spring and double deflection neoprene hangers. Cable for sway bracing shall be stainless steel with tensile strength exceeding transformer weight by 1000%. 4. Pad or wall mounting: Type SSLFH single spring steal mount suitable for seismic and restrained service. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3,1 GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's requirements for storage, handling, and installation. Include copy of manufacturer's recommendation in Operations and Maintenance manual. B. Remove all shipping blocks prior to installation. 3.2 MOUNTING A. General 1. Attach to the building structure to prevent overturning in the event of Seismic Zone 3 earthquake. All attachment nuts to have split and flat washer. 2. Mount on floor, wall or suspended from ceiling as indicated or as needed to coordinate with adjacent equipment. Set transformers level and plumb within 1/2 degree. 3. Compress pad or combination isolators to optimize vibration isolation at 60 Hz. B. Floor mounting 1. Refer to Section 16010 for housekeeping pad requirements. 2. Secure floor mounted types to floor via rubber pad isolators. 3. Mount transformer on combination isolator. C. Suspended Mounting 1. Enclosures designed for floor mounting, where suspended from structural ceiling, shall be suspended via trapeze constructed of two (minimum) horizontal structural channels hung via steel threaded rods attached to structural members or inserts in structural slab. Each rod to contain combination isolator ceiling hanger. Locking type nuts shall be used in assembly. 2. Provide cable sway bracing sized to resist a horizontal force of 162% of the operating weight acting in any direction for normal power transformers and 212% of the operating weight for emergency power transformers. 3. Channel, rod, cable, ceiling hanger and inserts shall be sized for not less than 400% load safety factor. D. Wall Mounting 1. On concrete and block walls, secure wall mounted types, or floor mounted types with wall brackets and appropriate anchors. For gypsum wall construction provide independent steel channel supports, secured to floor. 2. Size brackets and anchors to give 400% safety factor. Submit shop drawing of manufacturer's standard bracket or proposed channel assembly. DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16460 5 WES1'HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3. Isolate transformer via pad isolation between wail bracket and transformer. 4. Mount transformer on combination isolator. Provide additional hardware to interface between isolator and mounting bracket. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Provide raceway rough -in to allow for cable pulling and minimum cable bending requirements. B. 208/120 volt three phase and 120/240 volt single phase secondary transformers shall be considered "grounded neutral separately derived systems" and neutral shall be grounded per code. C. Transformer raceway connections shall be flexible metal conduit as specified in Section 16130. D. Voltage Tap Connections: Connect all transformers at "normal" tap. After facility is completely energized, measure secondary voltages and phase current at all transformers and service switchboard. Forward a list to Engineer and Architect for evaluation. Include copy in O&M Manual. Reconnect taps as subsequently directed. All costs associated with this work to be included in base bid. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide permanently attached engraved nameplates per section 16075 for each transformer. END OF SECTION 16460 6 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16460 WESIFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALI EXPANSION SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Dead front type, conforming with U.L. 67 and NEMA PB 1.1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Square D, General Electric, Cutler Hammer, Siemens, IEM. 2.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit for review prior to manufacture. Include complete description, front view, dimensions, device sizes and layout, and ground bus(s). B. Dimensions: Not exceeding dimensions noted or shown. 2.3 PANELBOARD TYPE A. Rated at proper voltage and current, bus bars of copper or aluminum, 3 phase, 4 wire, 100 percent neutral, unless noted otherwise. Multiple lugs where conductors in parallel or "feed through" or double lugs are shown. B. Bolted busbar to busbar connections. Conductor connectors to conform with 16120, bolted to busbars using Grade 5 bolts, beileville and flat washers. C. Separate ground bus bonded to panelboard cabinet. D. Isolated ground bus insulated from cabinet when noted. E. Service entrance label for service entrance equipment. 2.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND FUSED SWITCHES A. U.L. interrupting rating labeled. Ratings as noted. Minimum rating: PANELBOARDS 16470 1 WESIFthLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 208Y/120V Panelboards 10,000 AJC symmetrical 480Y/277V Panelboards 14,000 AIC symmetrical Fusible Panelboards 100,000 AIC symmetrical B. Circuit breakers: Conform with UL 489, labeled for 75°C conductors. Mount per panel schedules. Pre -threaded, bolt on type. Common trip on multiple pole breakers. Labeled 'SWD' when utilized for switching loads. C. Spares and spaces: Complete for future circuits. Where "Space" is indicated, provide space, bussing, device mounting hardware and steel knockouts in dead front. 2.5 CABINET AND FRONTS A. Flush or surface, as noted. Tight closing doors without play, when latched. Where two cabinets are located adjacent to each other in finished areas, provide matching trim, same height. Where remote controlled switch or contactor is mounted in panelboard, mount on same frame as panelboard interior, with dedicated access door and key lock B. Fronts: Lifting rest. Door -in -door, hinged at right side in addition to hinged door with flush key lock over dead front. Key identically. Match existing key system where applicable. C. Finish: Factory prime coat for cabinets located in finished areas. When located in unfinished areas, factory standard lacquer or enamel finish, gray or blue -gray color, over prime coat. 2.6 NAMEPLATES A. Engraved nameplates per Section 16075 permanently attached to panelboard front. Include panel name with 1/4" letters, area served, voltage, phase and wire (e.g., 2N1, 208Y/120, 3 phase, 4 wire, 480Y/277, 3 phase, 4 wire) in 1/8 inch characters. When project has more than one switchboard include switchboard fed from (e.g., Fed from SWBD. 4BP). B. Nameplate color: Normal system - white letters on black. Emergency system - white letters on red. 2.7 SYSTEM OF NUMBERING AND BUS ARRANGEMENT A. As noted on Panel Schedules. B. Panelboards rated for 400 or 600 amps shall accept 225 amp frame circuit breakers. PANELBOARDS 16470 2 WES 1 FIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOUNTING A. Firmly anchor cabinets directly or with concealed bracing to building structure, level, 6'-6" above finished floor unless otherwise required. When not located directly on wall, provide support frame of formed steel channel anchored to floor and ceiling structure. Install interiors after structure is enclosed. 3.2 WIRING A. Conform to applicable sections of these specifications and NEMA PB 1.1. Conductors and terminations per 16120. Coverplates in open knockouts. 3.3 CIRCUIT INDEX AND LABELS A. Typed circuit index with odd circuits on left, even circuits on right, listing each circuit by number with complete load designation, (i.e. Receptacle room lights room , etc.). Room names/numbers per actual room identification assigned by owner at project completion (assigned room numbers may differ from drawings). Mount inside door with transparent protective cover. Provide number labels on circuit breakers to match index. 3.4 WORK CLEARANCE A. Verify space available with equipment sizes and code required working clearances prior to submitting shop drawings. 3.5 GROUNDING A. Provide per 16452. 3.6 CABINET PAINTING A. Cabinets furnished prime painted: Field paint to match wall color. (See Division 9 Painting). 3.7 FEED THROUGH AND DOUBLE LUGS A. Provide feeder with amperage equal to incoming feeder to panels and sections fed via feed through or double lugs. PANELBOARDS 16470 3 WESTI4bLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.8 DEDICATED SPACE A. Locate in dedicated spaces. Coordinate project construction so piping, ducts, etc. are routed around dedicated spaces above and in front of panelboards per code. END OF SECTION 16470 4 PANELBOARDS 16470 W N N (-4en V1 r. O n 00 N 20.0 1 eel ,-1 ,-. in M O a; 0c0 O 1311.0 A vC M N pt a.,N ... -, O 0 N 1287.1 d N 0,6 al I, 857.6 1.8 C co 'D N Q 0 d N 00 hl ,--i 1'1 `.DN 1-4 O r• -• O (e; V) Wo L 44.9 O vl N N Ki N O M Cr: esi 41 O O N W -"" •--- N CO 00 en [� n m T N co 11 O1 CI O) h l-: .-. Tr 00 [r; N may en Q Oh U — • 4NVMkcr,,T ,-.,+--. N O N Tr o 0 lel 0 N N CO -, CO O CO 00 4.6 2.2 Q N 0o Q ,--i lei mr M V1 ,--- M ^- M fe; ' [- N 00 N 4 - N N o0 N 262.8 A I Elevator 41 I Lighting .i^U U y 0 .+ IRecept Connected Load Panel Total KVA Demand Load Panel Total KVA Panel Total Demand Amps 16470.1 LOAD CALCULATIONS 2N1B 00 O n.D 4 N N [- 00 M ,�-, rn ti Q 00 N I, Ov1 O0, d' Vy wi d ^" 2N1A VI Vi vl Ci t, 00 N [.4 - 00 N 121.4 A Lzn N --+ N O Oi oo N .- t, DO oo'- vi N N C v) M 2E2D O d C C '-' j 2E2A C Ci 0 O Q o O A W N 00 e 000D O O N N 2E1C 00 G 00 C O --i Cs hl 2E1B — — .-4 V7 4 2E1A 00ooQ o 6 - o, N wa"'22a b1 Connected Load Panel Total KVA Demand Load Panel Total KVA Panel Total Demand Amps 16470.1 LOAD CALCULATIONS \ f 00 r¥�& r`4) — D < s n # 2N2F - W-4—k3 mmq� R �9 . < _ 2N2D 0.4 1 R - .•-• a s S « q in %��n��� \ �m�wQk n d k � _ \ ����N co 4 k < - R 2N2A oo@« w— - �� mk # N < $ m \ N 2.2 VI - - - 1- vi \ - w®- gq »<1 a e r d w n % - Tr M w 2 0 % 0 q w-ggoer« /W—m�&el 00 q < cri rki ■ kk Rece t Connected Load Panel Total KVA Demand Load Panel Total KVA /� 4) �Q ..,!‘ 16470.1 LOAD CALCULATIONS 4E2D V O O1 a M r-. V7 .--. Q cc 4E2B M eV en N 00 N en N W00 Tr o: 01 00 N ,T'.i en 4E1F .--i 4E1E M O M C? M C O 4E1D 0o O oN N n e+i 4 d eh U (.L Tr .� . -, 00 c a e-1 v) of c vi GQ W v N 1.6 1 a ,o 4 un W1 er ri 00 - M M N .--, in n N h v'1 wi eh r-1 06 [- c'1 N N Tr wa+2 oc 1 Recept Connected Load Panel Total KVA Demand Load Panel Total KVA Panel Total Demand Amps 16470.1 LOAD CALCULATIONS -- O vi N M N N 30.0 I en N. in O� 120.4 A —1-1 —1Oo N DD M., [-: - 01 N � Mer M si Ah z 44.9 nooMn _, -et 'n r, o n d h as V—. 44.9 N .-. N M O �O N M T5 p� ON [- oo O Oo DO %.0 'd' N N G ^ L'8 O ~M vr 4N1A _ n N N vi 262.8 A W Os Ot %D wo oC 0 4E3B2 o coo 0 00 q a+ d o, 1:0en W N M• ;; n 4? oo• v� C, M n in 4E2F oo N 00 fV .0 [+i d en Ti W ' Mech LMotors x Connected Load Panel Total KVA Demand Load Panel Total KVA 0 aA1 16470.1 LOAD CALCULATIONS 4N3BB - - # 1 k \ _ n ,��%¥ n ,..-4* 06 « �2 _ \ % kn el- 4N2F _ wa¥— o 00 eV � oc;/ ci° — % * % n 4N2E L 2.7 �t00oq\ p$&kQ0 0 7 ¥ g - r Q CI 2 m \ ¢en en en Crrf 4 & 4N2D � k� / _ a 1239.0 / q P 1548.2 A 4N2C N w I_..._......32.5 36.5 wn_£ 7 \ n / _ < N / 4N2BB @ - m - o - '0 4N2B e Soo ON g m $ < R ON 4N2A 00 w- - • � a7 N R $ Nr Lei 4-1 In d Mech kU � Connected Load Panel Total KVA Demand Load Panel Total KVA k� %0 16470.1 LOAD CALCULATIONS 16470.1 LOAD CALCULATIONS p Tr O er O d h C CO r N .--i • 00 N 141 ch• V1 en06 M M Q h 111 N W rn N C 41.5 L O'sL6 O NN O 1065.3 .-4 Q V7 M .r 4S2C2D .O rpt N Qti .-. 1239.0 . n N 1548.2 A 4S2A2B 00 �O 875.2 00 O� O M 1020.4 1227.3 A _ 4S1E1F Cr:,00 fV h N N N. et . M• .Mr v1 .fin .-w 4S1C1D 00 0o0 N �D .~-i rn .~-* ,r O� N en 01 N M • .n - O N 4S1A1B M- ,.. p N N —. Nr N V'S N WI N 00 1/40 N 308.9 A tdD 44 W .4 Fa [ Motors 1 Recept Connected Load Panel Total KVA Demand Load Panel Total KVA Panel Total Demand Amps 16470.1 LOAD CALCULATIONS Demand Factor Up to 72%, per 620-14 O G ,-- x 125% 125% of Largest o 0 0 ,-, 125% of Largest 1 %0Sv lsaa `%00I N) VAGI 0I b g �y .4 N .--i-.: +�-• 238.1 3402.9 M fr1 N N ON %4 •N Q O Connected KVA eh� b N N .-r Tr V7 Cr ,,..,`° r M MOO ,--- re) � +--- - r'+ v.j 00 et 4175.4 5022.2 A O N wwa2 N Misc IMotors . V x Connected Load Panel Total KVA Demand Load Panel Total KVA Panel Total Demand Amps 16470.1 LOAD CALCULATIONS ed\PANELS.PNL t`t -.r x t3' e-- rpt r srN .-4 .-• r v CJ N A aL` N +� M N t, {, Nom' Circuit Breaker Code G — CFCI Hm HID Rated 5 s Shunt Trip C HACR Rated D., Switching Duty # _ see note A=AFCI z Load Tvtae Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Fender Factors NEC Feed Ainps Lighting 55.2 x 100% 55.2 66 x 125% 83 Motors 27.1 x 100% 27.1 33 125% of Largest 41 Type: Pane'. 14,00 Description Lighting SW Entry Signs --SW Entry Signs Spare gN US Lighting FX -9 Lighting FX -9A i Motors Sump Pump 1 'a' SI'lJ1 X W -F,, vfel, Lighting FX -IO Lighting INVERTER 1 U3 Lighting FX -9A 4 X is. Lighting FX -9A Lighting FX -9A Q X U. 3 Uf r. C .-. t' v r tr 4' t/ er. N^. 0, g tai Ca a we rd It I #a 20/1 CB 20/1 CB' 20/1 CB 1003 CB S ' 1 C] QUUULJUUULJUUU Ga Lo t� 07 tO W 41:141:11:0 CC Cd i:t 22SA Mai Surface h Single Lu A 11 C . . . 0 . • • . . • . • . • • . 4. tSI Connected KVA 1 31.0 CO U r^+ \'r'�,,•. Ca U r N 01 U r A 20/2 CB E 0..!tncettarntrsaaxxsmrgcoclgcomm— L) U r r N a U r^+ h U LJ . .+ rK �. p\''p..'gyp,. a a U r N U U tJ r r p\—`perp\oma a a LJ U r+ r. a N U r a U U r �_.\ m [ani U U N �A A re.: N r-7 NA el— A06 a., r'Z 6 r 1 007'0QEta ,N� YAK �_ry} d ,- js 1 i4 g.G9-oc;57 r'� frV r' 4 Xn } [V ��..i} 6 r P13 277/, Description Lighting FX -10 Lighting FX -10 Lighting FX -10 e wPDe �, o a I Spare Lighting FX -9A / FX -9 • ig% u; to E. 'mac v: Lighting FX -9A Lighting FX -10 Lighting FX -10 1 Lta • a 'roc kr, ct. n :i vs I. Lighting S CORRIDOR c4 2N W 0to LJ z Rev: Revised circuits marked + Existing circuits marked t Project 4: 812214 File: j:\$12214\Schell\PANELS.PNL r+ CrA i!a i\ i"7` .4 r 4 r,,, 444 n'r ti ,T. N [-5 !s tV N c.. er;tr: g.", va n O' ,,,, ed\PANELS.PNL Spading Panel Name: 2E1A /20/208V 30 4W 30A Main CB Type: €aneliioard Location: Area 1A Electrical R007111 Surface Mounted 10AX/0 ALC Serves: Zone A Single Lugs 5.75" Deep * Circuit Breaker Corse G = GFCI H= HID Rated 5 = Shunt Trip C HACR Rated D= Switching Duty # = see note A -' AFC! Load Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps m c ri ea w, iT%. e a s-• X .9. m t t rd N t0 s� Y�% N a. Vi Fe. G,€.C.San.C. , V) r. VI a V1 L vi A r. -';U iii :a.taeL.C, Vt Q3 VI yy�yy U sn b LA 4' ..0.m (4) Li 8 a, A 8 4.C.)lir° Le',' U 0 y U ;!'i �J Gt A», iii V t Ul `F CJ r., c r. N Cr '- N = . ei r N p 1--. ,, ill 0 #,, .0 , , 0 -. a 0 0 - 0 i., 0 .,.. Q -, 0 -.,. 0 T/0 1 /0 w. 000 -. -ti Cy p CI Q o ..r • • • • 0 • • • • • R • 0 • 41 CI Cp, • Msr1 ,N N cn jj C. tY Uf, _ e. - Cl e i - en W Y3 0 CsOS 0 C0 n L> — 0 O fl i/0 t /0 0 O te SDtO ,..... Connected KVA '4, 3 0-1 C G .1 Y. Meeh DRY PIPE AIR COMPR. CC,,,, Gi m !ilUliUc. Cs.,7 tLS.,, U fSJ 51i molt, 5II 4l Rev: Revised circuits marked ; Existing circuits marked t Project #; 812214 File: J:`812214\Schell\PANELS.PNL .. to, If h 0' ems+ ri , 1....‘ 4 N [4 n g t+' [r P tri A 4 Spatting, 11_ k Panel Name: 2E1B 120/208V 3 0 4W 30A Main CB Type: Panelboard Location: Area 113 Electrical firxmi Surface Mounted 10,000 AIC Serves: Zone A Single Lugs 5.25" Deep yt N I �! p 7C -,-. N...1 ad N N et, N CC IN M K M M Y ,I. • Circuit Breaker Code G a G PCI H= HID Rated 54. Shunt Trip C = HACR Rated D= Switching Duty # _ serf note A=AFCI i z Load 'Nye Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amp 1.6 • 4 Amps 1.6 4 4 .t4.rr Y 1-4 e.S V) •S tf: 2. ,/7 Y; it) v.: 2 tu,,� R„ Sly Y V x t/i m SCi Cy� 44 NS t,, eR vl 6 t/) R 0 4 V) R tfi r� 4E t!: S� 4 C/) e J) Vi i� 4 US '7 G G G ,^ G G C 0 G 0.10 t3 G 01.0 nio G 4 G •• .CZ :JL)l.1 acs` CO CC = CC V L)U > to s,-. r tn C CC IS in iJ A. < • s • • • • • r • • • • • • • • • • 7 • i • • < G ... t!1 b • U LLJUUUcar p, R co •., co . a 0 az I. . m V ez V. R G d^` �Q'8;818- '� CSS .8-8. 1G 8 o ' U -,777 z G G <� '.�' G G Q G .r G= 0 G G C 0= G G G :j �`+ Di Recept Utility Vault - West V J m Ad v iX • 3 y 43 °�' CY. F a��. G, ee.. v, U: G a u) rot G. c!1 G C:. tr: SJ ifs J Lq e. LS. EF: J1 i if) U a tri 0. if) e�! G. i!S a Tw If 'lleCgi 0. to P. LA ;l L. tR 8 R G') 8 '�S. VS Rev: Revised circuits marked j Existing circuits marked t Project #: B12214 Fite: j:\B12214\Sched\PANEIS.PNL r-, to r, a r- cr'" :* r N t'1 N t"1 C s Nay f^°'. t+, `~Q' Spading Panel Name: 2EIC 120/208V 30 4W 3OA Main CB '1'). pc: Pane!board Location! Area 1C Electrical Rom Surface Mounted 10,0110 AIC Serves; Zone B Single Lugs 5.75" Deep ` Circuit Breaker Code G ffi GFCI H= HID Rated 5 = Shunt Trip C HACR Rated D= Switching Duty # = see note A=AFC! a ILoad Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Facto Omand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps 0.8 2 Amps 0.8 2 3 C. 6 0 €!3 40to04 sn ;fl to I cn an 988 rn =.2` ,153 cJ3" 888 (A. 3' 8338 s i # a z ,.,..,_ coo,.... c —c,c coc"oco ata uu t—e... u Ut)Z SD 1/0Z s ,.e -, - ,. o cs • • • s • •s . • • ••• • • • • s• • • w • m Q o E Connected KVA 0.8 p� L u l"% e-, — ,-.. A iV U U e-e .-e "ti, tea. R e`i u -, `M. a L) .�..., F'^7 Z....: ci. Z. whir W iz e.6 �. c t, o Y•e m.+ y.. p.e = » = r Q C.e .i =0 T 3 ,m ca �0 1 p { ==c Q S!1 VS #15 V'. V4 VS VY Vi Vf i94 #!5 V3 is) til VE V] 1!3 V; LA u 22 z Ys A 5 x 4 tX la r w f ,...e., r..0,"' ter- r r o n 73 P. Pi c..da'`4 - Sparlingk. 1,... I Panel Name: 2E1D 120/208V 30 4W 30A Main CB Tye: Pane!board Location: Area 1D Electrical Room Sumacs Mounted 10.0(141 A1C Serves: ?_one B Single Lugs 5.75" Deep OC N " Y,7nC ,^.a r Cl r. `7t Y 2-4r' r- CO-....,(y N '1, CA AD f4 CC N [. N rri .!' in A6 M GC M ^ '7 C4 ', Circuit Breaker Code G = GECI H= HID Rated S = Shunt Trip C a HACR Rated t)= Switching Duty # m see note A=AFCI — toad Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps Equip 0.8 x 100% 0.8 2 x 100% 2 0.8 2 Amps 0.8 2 2 C C X: G. Le) L 0. C%1 r iii G Ln Ci. U) G LJ: `.. V; Cr U1 S.' Le) C. -Ln '.. C. un Space C. U's .. (h C. US tin C. U1 C . Ul C U) C.? C.? C? CI J C7 w Y.., CM Cs W Cs D :r C.: C3 C7 CW C? fi I.' C.i — -N. i.J r. 'per V 1.s N., 1J r+ \ Lir re r., r+ T. e... .... N WE T. f yr. n.9 r" r. rt r i r.... r' y lX� 6C3 rJ tf' r.% • 1 • 1 ■ • s Al. -- Ar • s • • • • • s • • s • • • f� < - qq C Z « L3 U Ma7amgKW"COO UUUUU OJ_Qo-.'.8—> i SA 1 i V Q 4 X 4 C? C C = 10 C] C7 C7 CC CZ CD Q ,O C? C7 4 C: C $ ... g t-C. ¢ c' U.1 Q w f0 U1 R U5 lj ill KS VI 9 UI rC U;' v VI4 al Space v Cil : th m U4 ns un e((9LV [n (T era U5 �S Rs UD - In ill Rev: Revised circuits marked + Existing circuits marked t Project #: 1312214 File: j:\B12214I,Sched\PANELS.PNL $ gir .M [may Ifl h 0, et .... $ r r rte+ r'. CA CA CA ff�' CA N N SS M M re r) NT . .......... Panel 2E2A 120/208V 30 4W 30AMain CB Tyle: f ant[txrat'i1 Awa 2A Electrical Room Surface Mounted I0,00tl AIC Zane A Single Lugs 5.75" Deep ern ?N�ciN'rv� ` (V e , tn� ar Circuit Breaker Code G = GFCI H= HID Rated S it Shunt Trip C = HACK Rated D.= Switching Duty = see note A = AFCI Load Type Con KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps 1 0 0 G © 2S Cir 0 C7 Cs E. 5 0 CS 0 l..; ,t V1 RS ;A et in it sr, A V} 1:. e4 V) t,� Po cr) b t5 in Et 7G V) L TS in b in FJ VI b @ V) L It V} 4 RS V) 5J M V) 4 rtS VI it RS V) A if} U i13 V G OAC O G G G O O OCG 0 0 0 0 01-0. G ^. r CO UUULiUU •--.` 'r. 5i CO r-- r. 'a. \ N N 0 r - CA CO ,-� 1 N CO r 1 7 0 .. r O - 0 0 - O rt 0 r, O^ r .. r1 © r• t-• 0 r+ v I. 4 0 C. CO G O de Z...., 1. C t • • r • • • • • • • • • • • 1 • • • • s • 0A 0 0 Ui UU`UUUU VA MA- N t V n1 7 w 7 O o L? L/t1 S' O . 0, C G 0 G 0 G tI0 o 0 0 C3 0. D T t a N �C.q V ;i K .0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0V0 C 9. t. D. Cf) 0. A. VI in 1: 6 in G. in LS. CSI V2 CeG. per, in P. in �., in St. t!: 6 to 6i. in in im NS 6 VI la, Ln i. Ch to G. S!; to p4 LI) Rev: Revised circuits marked 3 Existing circuits marked 1 - Project Project #: B12214 File: j:\B12214\Sched\PANELS_PNL Y. 4 .1 r.)fy ..., w r r r N N NI t'V Cr. el") t . re, M , 4tr Panel 2E2D 1211/208V 30 4W 30A Main 03 Type: Panelboard Area 2D Electrical Room Surface Mounted /0,000 Alt Zorn 8 Single tugs 535' Deep yk r! T x CACV .1, .0 to ii''!! -r �G BEY N v:. oC ii: f i ti= MD Hated S = Shunt Trip C = HACR Rated D= Swi tching Duty # _ KV note A = AFCI 9 Load Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps -4 PK r.. X t-. = as?. 8 x er $ a- «. 4- ID E. 4 C] Z O SS, do G. u3 C. u7 CM J fi4 CA Spare_ R..G.. u7 u`: v. CM un tn. Vi c.0. Vi cr. 3 u) Space I D. W1 D. QI D. WI .CP G. IA L. u? tr: 17 `4 .1n ,:n .. C 'nn nn nn cr. 4 no v O no ... 9 CP C) C) Ct Ci R Oq rt r. -y_. x5 ;JLJLJUti .:.. 'r '.O w.e CO r. '. CO on r^• 1.w '_ '\ r. r- r. r. r`• A fes. r9 1•. R. r. F'. 4, 1.4 r. .'• J I CO Ci Ci ci .� :. : • • • f • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • < `,. • Do u tJ i ii 8D L/OZ V �....- g V L! el iS r. 0^ r•. 4= r~ r .. 0/ 1 r, a s e. ti r, CP — o .•. CD r•• G r Y n a y "Z U rs Equip FACP In Sparc C . f . :n u; c1 C.. u; meds 4 Vs 4 us A. to G. Q. u; u: 4 sn u J1 v7 sJ; I Space . CA L. CA Rev: Revised circuits marked Existing circuits marked t Project 11: R12214 File: J:\812.214\Sehed\PANELS.PNL ac ...rr �nna7.��•.�� �`ilF4 4r) ierpc``pz, Spatting Panel Name: 2N1A 120/208V 30 4W 150A Main CB Type. Panel board Location: n: Area lA Electrical Room Surface Mounted 10,000 AIC Serves: Zane A Feed'Thru Lugs 5.73" Deep CF : -r! t 'EF-{' t �A �(t •zfcIN = UtU katel1 S = Shunt Trip C ' HACR Rated D= Switching Duty # = sE a nate A=AFCE F Load Type Conn KVA . NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Arnim Lighting 9.5 x 100% 9.5 26 x 125% 33 Recept 141 10 KVA 01,100%, rest 0)50% 12.1 34 x 100% 34 Equip 3.3 x 100% 3.3 9 x 100% 9 , Misc 7,2 x 100% 7.2 20 x 100% 20 I Mech 8.7 x'100% 8.7 24 125% of Largest 26 Equip ATM Equip VENDING MACHINE ................ Equip VENDING MACHINE Equip AUTO -DOORS i. Recept GENERAL OUTLET Recept PUBLIC TLEPHONE AREA Recept TENANT CORRIDOR Recept TENANT CORRIDOR Mech EP -27 Mech EF 22 Medi EF -.2E R itt L Mech DDC PANEL Spare Recept ESCALATOR Pft Recept ESCALATOR PIT Mech ACU -3 N :� d r• d Meeh EFS .iN. , N - 7C V ^y' �N * r4 SV YT `d' A' 6- • Cfl OO 00 U U rw r. perp. r Fi DO G U U r-. r- .,..-,, R, Chi C6 :0 i%t CU UUUUQUUULIUUUUULOULA :-. r- H r. '�. p1 a g R a R x1 r- ,- m CO CCS LC} w r rr — �. ; . .� *12 =w x1 r• .u,: co CO cs CO co r, r- r+ r. -+ �., e, `..� ',. ci N cV N co r. 'per M co to r. r. -.. ....I..N P r,2 0 a oz.= U .J F, .-i N Ca- co az J U r• r'• a s co0 !fl co to o U U U U r_ ,--1 r Spa N a a co iJ r., co co ao U U U r+ r. N (i©: U 1-» = Ci (i'S. coo = U U U L U ,M Y. r. 1.. ••, 1V N N DO U t-. N CO CO V U r. N, C`� f/ F o YU R eel i'r. stp�V M pq Q A �c�rjy § +p�Ng op gip�G r. 'ter- CV +^E . A 09E t c Tulse DIRECTORY Recept FLOOR OUTLETS TS Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Recept SEASON Al., OUTLET / STORE FRONT 1 Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE F O 1. Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Rept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT w Ci. ii 2' I Lighting WESTFIELD SIGNAGE l Recept ELEVATOR ROOM Misc ELEVATOR CAB Recept ELEVATOR ROOM Mise ELEVATOR CAIS Recept ELEVATOR ROOM Misc ELEVATOR CAB Recept TELE/ DATA ROOM Recept ELECTRICAL ROOM Rev: Revised circuits marked ; Existing circuits marked t Project #. 812214 File: J:\B12214\Sched\PANEES.PNL r, h Eri 74 rm• ti F.4 N nt N `I A M M A a �. Panel 2N1AA 120/208V ata 4W 150A Main lugs only Type: Panelboard Area l A Electrical Room Surface Mounted 10,000 AIC Zone A Single Lugs 5.75" Deep * cv ..°- 30 "N :2,' 4 GR A iCae ^ N" tin Fr sr Circuit Breaker Code G GFCI H.. HID Rated 5 Shunt Trip C @ HACR Rated D- Switching Duty * = see note A AFC' z Load Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps { toin rn yr .. P 8 8 x x x X 'A ('3 rn in O kr; e-; N at Q ifla 8p8 x r x ei ddy M Ill ri in r. rr a . G ic U loo VS r Q. C 4 r'i a9 OC .. Recept FLOOR OUTLETS 1 Recept FLOOR OUFLE'LS Recept FLOOR OUTLE1S Recept FLOOR OUTLh t S Recept FLOOR OUTLETS 2 Vr) w Uri :; cr7 Spare Spare Spare 2 in m c!3 8e� V2) i' UF3 8 kG17 y U 1 s� V VS Misc ELEV PIT §j ,p} ILZ t�s Ill : O 0-0 O O 0 0 C. O. a J O 0 0 + U rr ...... t J M 10 0 Ri UUU'ULUUUUUQt.t r•. I . rr a.. t `.. . '� R a FV a W -.. '., R Xi ..... "'-.-�., N I M M r 4. ",..,..,. : -R M cY.i .-i 4. a cxi ... . m t. -6 :-- r- - - Z• Zi r+ M C 4 ... 4 .•. v 04 U rr �, R 4‘i CG i. kli A B C • • • • • • .. • . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5 <N * • CJ Cq cJ NN 20/1 C1% 20/1 CB' 20/1 CB 20/1 CBS co :OM +G 10/1 CF 20/1 CB MMM UUU � � � 0-000."6"-Z:3->.' O1++,, a G ..) §Q§§§§§ j j „3,',.-4 A w A Q rr `%,ori! 4....... r- CL Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Rept FLOOR OUTLETS Recept FLOOR OUTLt t S Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Lighting WESTFIELD SIGNAGE L..ighting WFSTFIF.LD SIGNAGE Lighting RESTAURANT TOTEM SIGNACE Lighting RESTAURANT TOTEM SIGNAGE Lighting RESTAURANT TOTEM SIGNAGE Lighting RESTAURANT TOTEM SIGNAGE Rev: Revised circuits marked ; Existing circuits marked t Project Or: B12214 File ):\B12214\Sched\PANELS.PNL , tri un N r4. r ,:z N A' n [V & e7 P tR ... ,';=,tQr 4 Panel 2N111 120/208V 30 4W 1.50A Main CH Type_ nel o rd Area 1B Electrical Room Surface Mounted 10,(011 AIC Zone A Single Lugs 5.7S" (Deep " Circuit Breaker Code G =GEC' H= HID Rated S = Shunt Trip C HACR Rated D Switching Duty # = .see note A = AFC' Z Load TYre Corm KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps 1 V p 888 ...,-6 x x u IN oq oi ad C: cv m. e R u aeee $z5$- -" x x x t d > b4 or 4.-: Equip AUTO -DOORS Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Recept FLOOR OUTLETS R,tCf-pt FLOOR OUTLETS Recept FLOOR OUTLETS 11 Spare - - Spare Spare Spare 1 x Recept ESCALATOR PIT 1 rf 2i 3C 1 111.1 mmmmF UUUUUU RaRR UUQtUUUUUUN aRRRR!'+! RR 1.20/1 CBI 8'S to < . 111111 • • s s Q IS N 16 u co U N 20/1 CB 20/1 CB co U :J EC UQUU R'RaR CL1 ca co EC U 20/1 CB :20/1 CB co U az co U U 1 i U RRR an U po U , 4 u) § IN 2221 00 1,, SS E,-. r, Recept FLOOR OUTLETS ?disc DIRECTORY Recept TENANT CORRIDOR 1 Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT ...Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT z <f---=, 0. c -cEktcc C. rr wwwti M Z Recept VAULT Recept TELE DATA BOARD Recept ELECTRICAL ROOM Rey Revised circuits marked ; Existing circuits marked t Project #; B12214 Fife: J.\B12214\Sched\PANELS.PNL h T N c4 N r c� cA h T Sparlirr7L. Ei, 1 Panel Narc: 2NIC 120/208V 30 4W 150A Main CB Type: Panelboard Location: Area 1C Electrical Room Surface Mounted 10,000 AIC Serres, Zone B Single Lugs 5.75* Dep N ,y+ .-• e, r r. n r. N N N N .1G N GI P., M ei K '•t Nr Circuit Breaker Cock G Q GFCI 14= HID Rated S = Shunt Trip C HACR Rated D= Switching Duty # see note A s AFCI Load Tyne Cann KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps 1 Lighting 1.2 x 100% 1.2 3 x 125' 4 Recept 9.4 10 KVA 100%, rest ti' 50% 9.4 26 x 100% 26 Equip 2.1 x 100% 2.1 6 x 1001% 6 Misc 6.0 x 100% 6.0 17 x 100% 17 Medi 3.2 x 100% 3.2 9 125% of Largest 11 21.9 61 Amps 21.9 61 63 gyp. Recept TEN AT CORRIDOR Recept TENANT CORRIDOR Recept PUBLIC PHONE AREA Equip VENDING MACHINE Equip VENDING Iv7ACHINE 'Q. z U 7.13 f❑Lt Q z W 4 D U7 z 0 ,to Lighting DIRECTIONAL SUSPENDED SIGN J Mech DDC PANEL '� LL! Recept TELE/ DATA BOARD Recept ELECTRICAL ROOM Mech ACU -5 ::.i Recept ESCALATOR Load c X " LjN Im U — co U T. [m co U T. [m7 20/1 CB] mpm� U r. [Y tm5 U T. N 0o U .W m ymy..� 1✓ t FI 'gni` 4 I.. N co U f f E ;m U T. R `ani, U r• N rm U — IAV J ruy�'ca! U re RN U r co U TI �+2 to U — N rgo V n Fl az U M R Hca U r. 1. a 7.8 .:, E. G ..D . < . . . . . . . . • • . . < 0 ,... x gin UagAr9Vr4NCRRR&NNNmp_ApN m U **4rr `+ LA U co U T. CLS U r. •. m U O m U 4..• m U r \ L^ U r .....`w W U r.. m U T"4 `., co U •-4 \ m U I. `. on U V. v.. m m U U T. ,' ...,i m U r^! \ m U rel �+!`V m U r.+ \.. m U t CO U T. er. CD U T• 'e� . d Y y 3 K r' R yVil r Cs Description Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Receipt SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT I Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT 1— z c Lx. L1Z L 0 L. z Z ., c , Misc AUTO -DOORS Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Misc DIRECTORY I Misc AUTO -DOORS -a ©x te 8 11,5 gg++ Misc DIRECTORY Recept ELEVATOR ROOM Misr DIRECTORY W C3 Gc,4w w. pp;; rx I Misr ELEVATOR CAB Recept FLOOR OUTLE i S Misc DIRECTORY Recept LOADING AREA Rev: Revised circuits marked Existing circuits marked 1 Project Of: 1312214 File: j:\B12214\Sched`PANE S.PNL r✓ M: Lf1 M .T *-, r r r r N fV Vtt'�s [V N N c.) try cr: n), M <N Spatting Panel Name: 2NID 120/208V 30 4W 150 Main CB Type: Panetboard Location. Area 11)1 Electrical Roam !Surface Mounted 10,000 MC Serves; Zone B Feed Thru Lugs 5.75" Deep It!M "'S' -xL: AC '2 .fir tic e...N iN N N mi mi. m on Circuit Breaker Code G = GFCI H- HID Rated S = Shunt Trip C HCR Rated D= Switching Duty #t = see nate A = AFCI �"'_ M 15 Z Load Type Cann KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps I 88 Cl.' l Fl r4 m p3 R s a+ e [ems e w O 8 r• 4..... < 44 o r+ j�j Y i Le; µ E FN 0 Recept 'TENANT CORRIfX)R Recept TENANT CORRIDOR LRecept FLOOR OUTLETS si 3-1J f10 2tOO 13 aet fN)N Recept FLOOR OUT 0fit') Lt Recept FLOOR OUILET'S j i4LL. t Recept FLOOR OUTLEf5 Recept FLOOR OUTLETS ',Tempt FLOOR OUTLETS Recept FLUOR OUTLETS jl L_Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Recept FLOOR OUTLETS 1 Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Meeh ACU -4 Y t -i 41 t .$ `K MEM 500 S ay irl kn I[3 Afl ICi . til 1S T-+ * 5,9aR DI rte. U t,.i r.,. ',w m 'J =. U U — r. -...�.��'',a•..� NNgCma.c?icvrirRr"I P] U, r <m U U ..+r. it U e•r �? U rt co U .n 20/1 03 20/1 CB M U ,-I-1 ',„.•..sy.o�.,7.,, 22 U 22 U e.4 M CO L) U r.. :M .-+ R4. r -t^0 " t. rr cici Pr. • R • i • 4 • 4 • 4 • •< • SI •• ra La• U in sa CJUU ".. ",. N a m -p. N m_CSy .'Ui.is.+Uu,!)t.iC)U yam, �'1 K R co p!p N pm m ! W Ki in i A.,' R m . N co "''�. a iii co iUUU "s, Fi m ",w rs m .—.i r-. s' ',. R m Ui Sparl14Panel Name: 2N1E 120/208V 30 4W 100A Maim CB Type: Panelboard Location: Area 1 E Electrical Room Surface Mounted 10,000 AIC it N ''q' '+P =.. — .. .. '..0'9G N N N N N t.")tryr. inr s C; (AAA H= HID Rated S = Shunt Trip C = HACR Rated D= Switching Duty it = ;she note A = AFCI .. _ Load Tvt3e Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps I N CC t 1 r+ r • r+ G x x x gp w •-.OD +Cs .. 4-. r S 1: Cti to r i e X x x rt rr t: ti t+1..: r4 7 06 X. C.. A v.: r, Description Recept TENANT CORRIDOR V V if Equip HAND) DRYER Equip HAND DRYER Equip FAUCET SENSORS V v, V i V cn RVQ �I �V, alai V .a inLa Vii Spare Lighting WESTFIELD SIGNAGE 4. V 4 Lighting WESTFIELD SIGNAGE 1 N,'A„ is!. ui • u csao= UUUUUUUirUUUUU r+ ''-.. N r. ^. K 'to 1— r. � - p- R N racam n H \ ,._. A Lel +-Y pwp N wt'on ,-. �..+�... ig /n rw N r•• '. ttij m rw �„ R 1 .... -. �g on m UUUU rw r,. '.. ' ,..... • mm 4_ A Too. ri ....... I,A eD 1/0£ SJ t/oz Ton ,az UU W A \Com..,, ';`+ W rV ab tfY CA r tri C • R a • • ♦ • 1 R • 1 • i • R • • R • • • G Q h • U 00 UUUUUUU(..,UU a 00 N Cq Cla a a CO C0 a R CCS i `r CC, r J CQ R CO DRi 20/1 CB CO UUUUUUUUUta r t CA CSS R SA n oa i to m g[^ i CII CO it oa 'i Connected KVA IJ .............. . Description Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Rerept SEASONAL. OUTLET / STORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Lighting RESTAURANT TOTEM SIGNAGE Lighting RESTAURANT TOTEM SIGNAGE & a'. 2', V V' V V V t t; V Mech DDC PANEL Recept TELE/DATA BOARD w g Rev: Revised circuits marked Existing circuits marked t Project ft: B12214 Tile J:\812214\Scheel\PANELS.I'NL ... r: tr) A Cr, .. .. rrw rhe+ rtew N `'i N tr fr e'i M Panel 2N1F 120/208V 30 4W 150A 'Wain CH Type.' Panelboard Alma 1F Electrical Room Surface Mounted 10,X)0 AIC Zone C Single Lugs 5.75" Deep rQ ao a M sr rte g g A A P I:4 i 3 A Circuit Breaker Code G * GFCI H.. HID Rated S Shunt Trip C_ HACK Rated l Switching Duty # see note .......................__A4, AFCI.............._...._. ...................... Load Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor mind KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps I d -- o A x 4„, l~+3 � CA t-; N N W N M g 1,1 r x x e 0 .. en C4 04 ri ri r6 a• A 4 V' Ih N d i, t.. r. Recept TENANT CORRIDOR 22 Sin O u` Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Recepi FLOOR OUTLETS Recept FLOOR OUTLETS j Rexpt FLOOR OUTLETS Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Meeh DDC PANEL Mise ELEV T'IT Mech EF -25 Recept ESCALATOR PIT Recept ESCALATOR PTT C ua. .• in +§ § iA ski § § § § § § § & ,.+ R rT» UUUUUUUU r4 p OD 21 OD �r, w * ,r .. _ 'ate. �.. '� 1 8 a S. g N 00 0D Li, r. * �.. \ n a DM LA UUUUUUUUUUUU r r gyp.. ^� N a PO in r .-. �."j,. a f�f 0:1 03 W OD 1:0 .--e .- - — n+ .r p... 'pr `� lel N a g CA r ^rte^. A R3 r,. '.. ix, to w .,. . < • • • • • • • • • • • . • • O d , 1 ` it} UUUU r. 211/1 CB 20)1 CB 20/1 CB 20/1 CB 20/1 C13 :20/1 CB :0 OG . >- . r = C0 .-1 ,. = no r 20/1 03 '20/1 CB -20/1 CB 20/1 CS 20/1 CB' t0 e'4 OD s 04 e-' ot S le «: Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUT lir f STOREFRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Recept FLOOR OUTLETS 2L P U1 VI t'` c. Z. V3 V!, E it aI a. til `an Spare Spare Spare - Spare Recept ELEVA"TOR ROOM Misc ELEVATOR CAB ReceptTELE/DATA BOARD Recept ELECTRICAL ROOM Rev Revised circuits marked 1 Existing circuits marked t Project #: B12214 File: j:\B12214\Sched\PANELS.PNL r in {V ❑` r^" N If'7 C4 S+: C 5 C� L'r3 Q`: 5parlin Panel Name; 2N2A 120/208V 30 4W 150A Main CB Type. i'anelboard tAlt-anon: Area 2A Electrical RoomSurface Haunted HUM A{C Serves: Zone A Single Lugs 5.75" Deep * N " '••" OG'F" F. r! r 7. r z .� x .•+ til N(y N A int ",�,,pp P i 7G CJ h7 F. [r, !}, .0 [t'� tr: CC K'. o � N `7 " Circuit Breaker Code G GFCi H" HID Rated 5 is Shunt Trip C HACR Rated Da Switching, Do; # - see note A=AFC! c Z Load Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps I Lighting 1.2 x 100% 1.2 3 x 125% 4 Recept 9.2 I0 KVA 0)100%, rest Q?? 50% 9.2 26 x 100% 26 Equip 2.8 x 100% 2.8 8 x100% 8 Meeh 17.6 x 100% 17.6 49 125% of Largest 52 411 Equip VENDING --- 1 C.. Recept PUBLIC PHONE AREA La8 E2 tn i/ Recept TENANT CORRIDOR 1 4- '^ v Mech DDC PANEL Recept 3RD FLOOR Ib • Mech CU -1 t4 v s ? .a .-:.-, i� osa•~§ o rd cd SNE of i U M VLiUUUUUUUUUUUVUL)U -4 N m CR .-. t"- N K xi — m M S-A N 1:0 T". N CO r N M r. C is 4. A In !"I N in t N ay. T4 tF m r' N m ,..,- N CO N r m . P lR m n € m UU ,- 1 N m iilv !. 1 a n0 rd P G w • • • • • r • • • • • • • * • • • • • • • 0 < S ,G a * Cn UUUUUU M C0 r- r+ CO = ,-• 00 •• ;20/1 CBI M UUUUUUUUU r C v-+ r m n aa r OZ r+ CQ ,- SD ,-+ .:4-, 0 1 al UUUU r CO r CO , C] -, SG u° rr Ni C R. Recept SEASONAL OUTLEFS / STORE FRONT—1 Recept SEASONAL OUTLETS / STORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLETS / STORE FRONT Rerept Ol TDOMTERRAC E t.. .�.`, C .. ... IN a� .) C L Lighting WESTFIELD SIGN , < vi ...,, 2.k.... �' f r u -git 747 i tr: .-. ;4.) 7 ry iia -re 77 1 Recept TELE/ DATA BOARD 1 Recept ELECTRICAL ROOM Revised circuits marked $ Existing circuit marked fi Project #: B12214 File: j:\B12214\Sched\PANELS.PNL ,-+M,tnh atr 17.771-1 4gin€ gl r,vim�* r r�� .... Iii r.a.i. B(„j 'r ..7 .. .2 .! < „y y z .- Lf., In [^ ^y 0 z V F ri. N Q hJ 04 a C ee a.. 2¢ x .. 43 L = of iC. N -Q' z zc N —, -1' ..t ,B r vG T. pp N ryn N 'T i 7� :N N tP rr�� e'� AC t'^a O 7 Circuit Breaker Cotle G GFCI Ha. 111D Rated S. -Shunt Trip C HACK Rated Ds Switching Dutv # see note Ax,AFC! z Lnad Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Fent Amps Lighting 0.3 -- x 100% 0.3 1 x 125% 1 Recept 9.8 10 KVA t4100%, rest 0 50% 9.8 27 x 100% 27 Misc 1.8 x 100% 1.8 5 x 1f)0% 5 Meeh 12.6 x 10Q% 12.6 35 125% of Largest 38 Description Recept TENANT CORRIDOR jl Recept TENANT CORRIDOR Lighting DISRECTIONAI.SUSPENDED SIGN to rp vi Spare R tin ti to ed to :d r tC (rl p `.1.1' r3 {n vs^Jy if, i!} Meclr DDC PANEL Mcch CU -7 1 �p LSI k { .2 r. ^( �+ 2 to 2 ri NT' N. „K ' RI co CO UU N g co' ir[ , co o ^1: UU'JULJUUUUUUUU n Cil ' co F. co i�V co m co a co N PO N a = Ci co ca to iTV N ( ca b QUU ti mtrs i r in t^ oa E Irl is v —, -, . i. . • . . • + + . . . . . • . . . . E + • . Q Si CP U:.)UUL)t.)UUu;�vUU,Uu * >>>>—-----. i.i A m a3 N N Ca m 'W7 CO fYl ry Ca [V 121 [�`t ,".� cV m N On Ca N W ,4 20/1 CII 30/2 CB' � 20/1 C13 20/1 CB m U) p,. N m 'per. id ,�• V f•3 tNv � f F § O i N r tfpY, ?. ,--7 pN Kai Description Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Reit SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Recept KIOSK Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Recept KIOSK {�7�`(�i «�/. Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT .fie t/ Recept KIOSK MISC DIRECTORY Recept FLOOR OUTLETS Recept 3RD FLOOR 43 tr: . t,,t it Recept ELEVATOR ROOM Misc ELEVATOR CAB Rccept TELE/LATA BOARD Ri..,cept ELECTRICAL ROOM ............. . Rev. Revised circuits marked ; Existing circuits marked t Project #: B12214 File: J.\ B12214\SSched\PANELS.PNL 40 �„ e' �n 7. ti tN- N ri r:. ct*5 nit P-,, 4 r `_ kPanel 2N2C 120/208V 30 4W 150A Main 03 Type: Panelhoard Area 2E. Electrical Room Surface Mounted IO 00() AIC Zone B Eeed Thru Lugs 5.75" Beep It N er r GC L9 N 'T 14 r -i (`7 N N N N .r r t*,rn OC, . l.r =LAMA H= tilt" Ka tea S = Shunt Trip C HACR Rated U= Switching Duty # see note A = AFC! o Load Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC_Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps ZE 4satinr1;c1 %at. 8Z COI %OM x i701 11-300i 8 %1111.'' 8 8'Z %001 x S'Z ?F"d COI X L L'Z %001. k Lt drnbg 6i %001 x t►Z 5'01 %t1S 4 i 'UM!. 04 VAN 0I 01E idaaam I %SZ i x I I g'ti %OW x S`ti guit4211 %. a Recept TENANT CORRIL3OR R ept TENANT CORRFDC)R Recept GENERAL OUTLET Lt hting DIRECT1ONAI., SUSPENDED SIGN Lighting DIRECTORY Recept FOOD COURT Meth DDC PANEL Recept GENERAL OUTLET i Mist Equip HAND DRYER Equip HAND DRYER 7 i< r. t5 U 6U Meth EF -7 Meth EF -6 1 V ce fl. 8 CL 0 L ., Y. i § ti fd R 4-. M5;2 .-+ rri r- tR f N IA i1 .+ f� Q _ 03 20/1 CB 20/1 CB 20/I CB 20/1 CB —20/1 CB 20/1 CB 20/1 03 20/1 CR M CCS = - r.. - � CO y.. 1.. CO rrt -r 30/2 03 C0 m s"0 UUUUUU .i ,,, N� \ 1 n!fiaN`- :0 P" CO 7.... . = ,` .. .-. oiY M m • ■ • • < • • • • i • . • • • - • 4_ Q IS el sc w UUUUUUUUUUUUVUULUUUUU uRA'ARR:RFP4Figiat,'-'Kr.-4 i Connected KVA Load 360' 3 360 360 360 2,000 720 720 700 0 t 0. . r, N 4. Description Recept SEASONAL OUTLETS / STORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLETS Ei'S / STORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLETS / STORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLETS / STORE FRONT Rept SEASONAL OUTLETS / STORE FRONT Lighting WESTFIELD SIGN Recept COLUMNS Recept COOI.UMNS Equip ATM Spare Spare Z n Spare Mech FEF -1 Kepi ESCALATOR PLT Mech CP -2 Mist ELEC TRAP PRIMER Misc AUTO -000R Rept TELE/DATA 130ARD Rept ELECTRICAL ROOM 4- u E z .4 Or F. a o 2 at t �cr U. * ..rrkinr. ay -ti,- rn curia ier; , In, PanelSparting Name: 2N21) 120/208V ata 31h" 150A Main CB Type: Pone/board Location: Area 21) Electrical trical Roc'm Surface Mounted 10,1100 MC Serves: Zcene 8 Single Lugs 5.75" Deep *Circuit Breaker Code G at. GEC] 13= HID Rated 5 yr Shunt Trip C HACR Rated DSwitching Duty # see note A AFC' Load Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor -_ Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps 1 Lighting 0.4 x 100% 0.4 1 x 125% 1 Rccrpt 91 10 KVA 0)11X1%, rest 0 50% 9.1 25 x 100% 25 Medi 10.11 x 100% 10.0 28 125% of Largest 31 Description Recept TENANT CORRIDOR Recept TEN ANT CORRIDOR Recept TENANT CORRIDOR - i�w cr S aI7 L hft r3 40 M ms til Q{� ly R7 in. W in {�.. VI - v1 us L�,j . via Spare LMech t)T7C PANEL _ y 8 °Pa A 2 v X M C^.. t`, 5 3T`� n�I fY Ili EN 0.. ff� • (J QUUUUUUUUUUUUQUUU r-- RR Zi .-- fm r`. CC: r-1 R- CYi r W Jma C1 r^+ rw = r+ Fii Ca rw Rlagt9RvRF-i` ai r. al e-+ C7 Ca ^-s .-1 C 1 r+ C7 r-. CO r- R = el { CO U'Uti ':Fig Ca Oa r. r-, ri GI ars V w.a E • • r ► • • • ! • • ! • • • s • • • • Q _.._'—.4 m ui u • td..) fit J .=lUU N 5 e .-. P1 CY] ..+ N m r N fC5 r. to co UUUUU .. r. N N pa r» [�• im 'L" w ..r ev Ff L20/1 CB fA pa U.0 UUULd w r• N N G,: .-. N co .-. N; cp r-. •J co fV �" 1 3 Ca UUU ' 1 r- N Ca m,. .-+ r N N V Q 'x7 "'^ 1 3 O C C7 :C R r4 a = N , - . Lighting SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT 1 Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Z ix M -- t --. 5.4.15.4.1.. i» D Cr ¢ n Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FROM MWY i LI !+ J 0 << zzx n L V x \. t p-. D 0 nle i f Cdli!I Li sept FLOOR. OUTLETS Recept KIOSK III is --; 0 Ti Recept TELE/DATA BOARD net -flit ELECTR3 CA L ROOM Rev: Revised circuits marked Existing circuits marked f Project t!. 1112214 File: ):\Ti12214\Schad \ PANELSPNL * M-+ �'; lf] tr s.T r+ P9 .+ e-- s Nil r CP. r T. N'i fi�et;; R N CIP.N N r+ if: m N.m f*` t+". i'C 'Q' e Sparlingt- Panel Name: 2N2F 120/208V 30 4W 150A Main CB Type: Panclboard Location: Area 2F Electrical Rixxi3 Surface Mounted 1 {),{7{10 AIC Serves: Zone C Single Lugs 5.75" Deep * N -s 'C aC N"' ,..- a N N N* M 7 *. P. 4 -NT • Circuit Breaker Code G = GFCI H' HID Rated S = Shunt Trip C = HACR Rated D= Switching Duty ak — see note A=AFC! 1) Load Tvpe Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Farts NEC Feed Amps I Lighting 1.2 x HO% 1.2 3 x 12i% 4 Recept 8.7 10 KVA 4:??100%, rest it 50% 8.7 24 x l00% 24 Equip 2.1 x 100% 2.1 6 x 100% 6 Mise 1.2 x 100% 1.2 3 x 100% 3 Meeh 4.8 x 100% 4,8 13 125% of Largest 16 18.0 50 Amps 18.0 50 54 Recept TENANT CORRIDOR Recept FUBLIC: TELEPHONE AREA Recept TENANT CORRIDOR Equip VENDING Equip VENDING ui Lighting FX -7 Lighting N2FCTION \i. SUSPENDED SIGN ,EmE�tp 4. 43.. i(r) rraain Meth DDC PANEL 2 A 4 z EAS Sr w oe LWs, 2' • {a U r-- a V - LSV ULJUUULfUUUUUUUULJ e--+ a 1--' a rr a w a rr a r• N r-. a r+ K H N ..i a r+i N N e -r a r+ a t`V t 1 i :JUL) r- 1 r r ,r -. - to iii o t, •V F a • • • • • • • a • • • • • I` < p • CS V SCO L) rv. N CC U r+ w N cc U ..r-^• ` a 20/1 CS xa U ti„ 04N 20/1 CB] U "-.' is L.r ,cc. C+ to L) rr > Fi m U rs �.. tV as L) .•. '�. N rsi U l.4' gypp.. !'! CO U w N CO U 1•- t`f CO U C N 20/1 CB] AO U e-+ ..' N 20/1 CB ICO U 1r � g CO U r - �_. tgi CO U - R Connected KVA c Lighting SEASONAL OUTLET / SiORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT Recept SEASONAL OUTLET / STORE FRONT ]GYM _68_ a a 6666 w SG a eG �1L , .t x L Recept FLOOR OUTLETS C4 0 L I Recept FLOOR OUCLE7S t7 VS to to to 35 ZS Yr I Spare Recept TELE/DATA BOAR© 1 Recept ELECTRICAL ROOM Rev: Revised circuits marked * Existing circuits marked t I Project 1: B12214 Fila: J:\B12214\Sched\PANELS.PNL * e-. N; IA N ^J+ r:: w .z- N mm N ��}} N N p & 131 r'.'.3 t�z. [ M w^, Ti.' U i- r*4. a CSS C r, �. ta U w z In r! LP {.fl .+ 'Y' rr r ti Fzi r x L W t` ❑ CC rJ !99 C N N E 1i y ifl 3' r- r+ .. r: r. N Circuit Breaker Code G GEC! H+, HID Rated 5 R Shunt Trip C FiACR hated Da Switching [Duty $ see note A = AFC! - D Z Load Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps 1 es tVCVa r �aE'� l at �j' R n 8 G rri x x x ye en N N 'C Y r+ r- CG r-, •I.41 8e En ,' w 88 Pg re. ler X ". x x 4 44 r .."': -f 'V• tri y _ x 2 4 'T A. 1.,a v3 G. g d Lei i. � to t F '''.'i iijw F. f4t u t F pC dw t9 ;r tQO- 1I,Vitt1cnU1rnEP x 2 157 m Fc cr,R CG �s C4 w .-1 K: 4 C !F,S w 4rz cx ,1 �' M ri GC rr: !S7 Si'x1 uJ > 10 Xr• skr r ,--. 4 = U r+ KIM N I ! I M. UUUUUUUUUUU.,%UUVLJUU .... ,,. [V = w - N Cn r. tV M. r- ti Z .. — e�` CO r- - N iL M - n `r � C k eYl • Cr; t'`i M r-- CA .. � ,,. t CO rr: -se, 1.4 ..- '.... CO re o N CG aC r r. ..... (�[ = - —,. r n:1U r•. - tV r. 4R E • I. • • • E s fs • • • • • • 0 • 1 • ♦ • • \- < t 1C 4 U = UUUt: aging = an r- M .-, 2©/1 CBI m UUUUUUiJUUUUU r- xq8 Cb r. CA ....4 to AA tc ca '..'.�` .-. w re ma ea ' re. m 1« CA M a 5} 1'. 03 N A 1 fD UUU 1 P 1 1n r -c CA a-. yC ++.��. u 4 N G-1 spy 5 : - .. '+ Lighting WESCFIELD SIGN '.S LL YS �yy 1A 6], tf3 M 1r aaL� II. it W CS.. un 41 41 R. Ul r arpp A, V1 k R! Vl Spare Spam Spare Spare tE C4 if; tE� i r) E G. N U = ~2 -CU-6 McCh DDC PANEL ReieptTELE/DATA BOARD m Q U a —1 U w S:L £G Rey; Revised circuits marked ; Existing circuits marked t Project h: 1112214 File: j:\$12214\Schad\PAN ELS. PNL i�} F.' N P 1�'� A C� p� N er. 1A ,'R M F b' Sparlin7L. lt_ It, Panel Name: 4E1A 277/4FOV 30 4W 4UAMain CB Type:Panelboard Location: o: Arra 1A Electrical ROom Surface Mounted 14.(X) AEC Serves: Zone A Single Lugs 5.75' Deep N "7` C% .E.'' rte+ rte-+ 4:'••vim-. A PI f`4 CEJ C`1-? -Na' Circuit Breaker Cod G GFCI lig* HID Rated S = Shunt Trip C a HACR Rated D= Switching t)uty t! = see note A = AFCI W ILoad Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps 1 T ;Sala JO %5Z1, 1. 8'0 %Mt x in) trIN Z %R I x 1 Z.1 %001 X Z' 1 Sun tl``i!i X t 6» trv;tototoonviv,uaVIshtostaV:tocncn ^. L C. S. G- C. C"�. C. a. C. a- G. eY f4.. `4 . Space N g �. Q N Q N A 1 Li [D UtJUL.)UV t_ '�, US ..... ., t'� CO .-e off. ('1 LG i-' ' N CS r- \ t��E Sa rr -.,a, w- C] T. C r O r C3 N ....., r. = -. G r+ v .-. m V. 0 .r G e-� c) r'J \ •-- ! �1 18g o A 13 C • 1 • • • • • • • • • • 1 1 • • • _ • 1 • • • Q 1'. I. LID A/ �. 73 Y -...„ A DD U no C% w no V �. oz V �y •--F 7 .-. .-1 YM T-. T !-. .-i N T. - .-4 Connected KVA ,C X x u rr; ^. Ca ^ ^ O W CD Ca C CD G Ci C7 C CD C: Cs 1 Description [Lighting TENANT CORRIDOR LA LA n0 C A.1 cs QR [ Spare 0! an 4 u: Space Cr on toZ Cr cn n G7 fi. 41 t. C4 onCr n t: onC. n . on 9.. to 6., . to cn Rev: Revised circuits marked $ Existing circuits marked t Project il: 1312214 File: J:\)}12219\Schell\PANELS.PNL r- r: in A r, 1, ,- •.r-- cl CI r4 N fV vv., c; cis Mir; Ar Sparling ..Panel Name: 4E1B 277/4SOV aid 4W 40A Main CB ryp : Pane!board t.A*cation: Area 1 ft Fiectrical Rt?rarn Surface Mounted 14,000 AK' Serves: Zone A Single lugs 5.75" Deep k 4:- te t -, r r` CV NNe ene e* ,11 of r n,=; ` Circuit Breaker Code G GFCI H= HID Rated S = Shunt Trip C ffi HACR Rated D� Switching Duty # see note A AFC! 6 Load TvPe Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Forder Factors NEC Feed Amps It VI IQ R r. r" X x t4 .. V SP 2 X _ 4 Q 14 n r.. [V r4 tC '',.Z C3. lo tO 't E. s Zs-.-7 . P. P. f V'3snsnG'4i.,toulu) a V9 in ill t%5 i ttI 'sP. Mle. N rw V4 jr( y �C .. C LQ. © O C: C C. Q . \ea ® °-' -.9,, .9....'r., t...e.•r=. r- r. w7-. r. r. - 4••• 1^. ..� {I{ 14{ I" C7 ea IN, A R C • • • • 0 0 • 1 • • . • 0 • 0 Q 0 .... 40 i- 4 co t.) co G co t) C L) no CC- {.) (J > *33t!) O r WG C 'J ^= .:a.c. v tz C7 — Cl C Ck .C7 O :r C3 F. GL. L.il hhng TENANT CORRIDOR 1 r+ k Li. 1 IL m, VI f s LI; tt3 Q. Ce) to VG, i fr., Space .t VI c SJ in vis Iil til to stile Rev; Revised circuits marked,` Existing circuits marked t Project #: 012214 File: J:\$12214\Schell PANELS.PNL M [', tr -• y r r• tai i In Vi r� iii J An en en d+ Panel 4E1C 277/480V 3C?) 4W 4M Main CB Type: Pane/board Area IC Electrical Room Surface Mounted 1 ,i1f)tl ALC Zone B Single Lugs 5.75" Deep N tl7. Wr, N r-• r. .. r -+ (VCl q T' D N N ,ry t'1 d' C N R 't * Circuit Breaker Code G - GFCI H.. HID Rated S = Shunt Trip C = HACR Rated D., Switching Duty # = sax note A MCI G Load TYne Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps Lighting 1.1 x 100% 1.1 1 x 125% 2 Mech 0.8 x100% 0.8 1 125% of Largest 1 G .0 !S " Vl yy V9 w F To Cl, rJ ifi V., ES :% V iL in W %. tri 4+ EL i!1 EL VI 4, L. LI) W E Vi 44 F. i) C: Mpg. VE 4i S1 U7 :i cG G. [(1 44 EL Ln Space 1 N 1G C. U N 4- N Load_J ee • m os V u r. r.- n ^y,, oz Uo r'. r. r. T. r. r. I. 4- rK 4- ^ r1 - ,. r. \� ! Q 19 0 :� M Q • • • • r • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • < 5 0 ra l.1 U u t M.. i V N u `.... lti! u `+.. N u — a u `�. a - '- G r-• 3 r. C r. G -. 8 r. G - Cs .. r. "i ... r. ' 8 r. .. r,. .:.r i7 U 1 G u g ': r. r Lighting TENANT CORRIDOR Spare tIkr- r. i75 it iT cri ,;..,k 2-t, . ,,-9- t9- i V�1 t v9 tna Rev: Revised circuits marked t Existing circuits marked t Project 11_ B12i14 File: J:\B12214\Schell\PANELS.PNL —,..,t t \ =,Ptr2, .L° civrii il�ic:P,`rn�,r�nears Sporting Panel Name. 4E10 277/4ROV 30 4W 40A Main CS Type: PaneZl'oartf 3 oocation: Area ID Electrical Room Surface h3cninscd 14,000 A1C serves: Zone B Single Lugs 5.75" Deep MUM i ii ii ------2E1 D 1 42 t Circuit Breaker Code G s GPO H= HID Rated S = Shunt Trip C = HACR Rated D= Switching Duty i! _ see note A=AFCI Load Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps I Spare s111111 Space j v sn c" c v°a Space .�_ 1 Space v cn cn � t� tit ap ap a� r r x x Load 0 11 1111111 MINIM L L/C! 1/0 � _ 1G d C+ s4 ri C h rS � IHMENIUM7 1111 �MINN 111 111111111 U 11001101111111 Lighting LF -5, LF -12 11 II 41 I Space. Rev: Revised circuits marked $ Existing circuits marked t Projcct #: 1312214 File: J:\812214\Schee\PANELS,PNL x x Sparlingi 1._.Pate Name: 4EIE 277/480V 30 4W 40A Main CB Type: Pane!hoard Location: Area 1E Electrical Room Surface Mounted 14.00€) AIC Serves: Zone C Single Lugs x.75" Deep a M e 4; Iti ^7.:. ! N N N N Chi P A A A 4 'd • Circuit Breaker Code G GFCI Hs. H1D Rated S s Shunt Trip C = HACR Rated Ds. Switching Duty # see note AseAFC] t Z ILoad Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC FE'ier Factors NEC Feed Amps 0.3 0 Amps 0.3 0 0 F s., m a! a t=1., ti a, a a r R re Lt! ' LP y, it) t" Si tit t t VI t CR' e4' vCnkiA t t t R w £CuRRe LUL.i fJU A )LJ a00000000000-0_,.. �� ree ...... O I:.i r • • • • • • • • • • • • • - • • • • • • • • G • CJ u R u 8 u N u m u L� a i c e. 1/0 - tin c c a o A a`,c . d, is e Lighting TENANT CORRIDOR CnUul znttsncnsnsLIcni il n Space il Ln sr '2',J1 21 VI Key: Revised circuits marked Existing circuits marked t Project #: 1312214 \B12214\Sched\PANEL5.PN.. It rW C•: „ h 7, - H +.r�` .h^- .,» N C'"1 tfy� N f•i C: M N: t�'1 "Y' Sparling Panel Name: 4E1F 277/4SOV 30 4W 40A MainCB Type: PaneItxard t.c,cation: Arra 1 E Electrical Rot,tn Surface Mounted 14,0x1 AIC 'Serves: Zone C Single Lugs 5.7S" Deep F. [y ', +C . f <= cl st es. :tr cr.. M .fi * Circuit Breaker Code G GFCI H+= HID Rated 5 " Shunt Trip C HACR Rated D= Switching Duty / see note A R AFCI [T.oadTvpe Cann KVA NEC Dentand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps 1 N 0 A r+ tr} n M> — N n m V^' f"1 el — C 7.6 Q. 1. ,k S.E t VI . {f3 i a. St) E LP a. E a. tri U t. sn U a. to fli a.. VI P CA b a. z z b a. tri L a. z L n. to 8 as z r z �J z 8 a. tri 8 L, to C. v3 x , m '� 0 ".. tII �. 0 `.... CO A 0 - r.r-1 I. wi I-0 •,•. r, 1.--, H ..N pw N T" P_ •. 1_ ,...,�. 0 to 1J$ `...% < w ., • • • • • • s • • • : • • • t& O 41 €.) e.- N r !"t aw NM — r+ c R [ ii 4 c G c c C c G C3 tw c c c '..s. Connected KVA e Lighting TENANT CORRIDOR Lighting LI 5, LF -12, L.F-12A di] a"r th ilkVz 22,, Cn y ill (A qy tJ tr) �r C: to eW� tl'1 a vs l�J to �y U t(i U to V ch V fri V v3 V to Rev: Revised circuits marked ; Existing circuits marked t Project r/I 512214 Fite J:\B12214\Belted\PANEIS.PNL It .� Cri in R , r+ - ,.. r-+ --+ i4 r K(`i AN 1-. Sparlin - Panel Name: 4E2A 277/4800 30 4W 40A Main CB Type: Panelboard Location: Area 2A Electrical Room Surface Mounted 14,000 MC Serves pane A Single Lugs 5.75" gip N , .0 = CN YY r .0 r 00 r, O N [y N 'T fl JD NTN O N) N M. F t�, a3 Tr, N Yr Yr '.I T C, 7pd'6 LI n a it tZVat E Ito y al U .' C; Qs 3< Zg �r 0 Et) < 0 Load Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Fael ars NEC Feed Amps 1 $.9 11 Amps 8.9 11 13 G _ 4. Gii yy F t!3 Vi !4r GfS i V1 ' :7; 8 V'= J tfi L 8 J1 ii V1 �j U Up py U lip if, L yAI U7 41 in ifi N N y R. t2 , .., "- . i ,:,2 G C Ci ., Gam .^.. 0 C C C C v C Q G C U ww^,-'w�v� U U U t..0 U - - -n FV ao lc z. N .'.... ¢ . • • • • • • • ■ 0 • . ,c UN 23 UUUUUUV T. x T. N cc T., Cf ca TT T. ii tV en T. RC3 a3 T. = C' T. :] C78 O C3 C ".� 3 - , Ci , C 9 u • r X C o esi C^ 0 C'0 G CrC o. 0 C r p o 0 C Lighting TENANT CORRIDOR Z z 5 zi Lighting TENANT CORRIDOR Lighting DINING Lighting MALL Lighting; MALL 1 a.c,. n v; p c.. n en vi c..,L +n v, ui <n n cn dc.. In in awaiac. n to Rev: Revised circuits marked ; Existing circuits marked t Project 4: 812274 File: j:\B12214\Sched\PANELS.PNL Sparting Panel , Name4E28 277/480V 30 4W 40A Maier CB Type, Panelboard Location: Area 2B Eltsctrical Room5t►rfaC Mounted 14,tM)Q AIC Serves: Zone A Single Lugs 5.75" Dep " Circuit Breaker Cade G = GEC/ H HID Rated S a Shunt Trip C HACR Rated. D= Switching Duty # = see note A = AFCI Lead Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC .Feeder Factors NEC Peed Amps I 23 3 Amps — 2.3 3 3 Spare 1 s v;ark:;4,tov7<% v.crsu:u'sins uaa' scir x • 0 UUULLUU ... tea_ r r.ri `,.., c r, ,.. ... ',,., r* ^,., ..r r r* r+ e a -s ,.,. ,- ',, a r.. r.. , - •'. rpt v.!,-, 1 a ..r^• e ,, ,.. d - A 13 C • • • • • • 0 • r • 0 0 • • b .. 0 id CC UUUL)UL) ,, 1 N Cz ,-s '^., a CG r.s moi�+ Cd m ^,. a ma ,,.. ii m '"� a e. 8 �� ..1 o` .. r• 8 .. 8 sm. 8 r-, a r+ o r+ C r. r d '8 "we' .. In C r. 8 Connected KVA SV Z r- ID G7 :., .=' � .. a G ID O� 0000 C7 w CD E. t Ca' E : Lighting TENANT CORRIDOR 74 '.r.^ ,n �qE vi etu,�. V3 E' ct) to a y`` u P EL s. to ifL 8 Ute] s8 to 8 t to t i eC'' e5 ' t!, to to a til -8 Ch , Eli Rev: Revised circuits marked $ Existing circuits marked f Project #: 812214 File: j:\B12214\Schcd\PANELS.PNL �k r� M i[1 P. I-.-. rteo rte., r1-, if.. rl r4 N AN r4 3"t tori in V. Panel 4EZD 277/4#0V 30 4W 40A Main C13 Type: Pane!board Arra 213 Electrical Room Surface Mounted 14,000 AlC Zone B Single Lugs 5.75" Deep N or p x= ,N. � r• EN N r 'Q z T el,-, if- daii Cs=iitU VV. MillKateu 5 re Shunt Trip C = HACR Rated D Switching Duty # ® see note A AFC1 Z Load Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Ftltder Factors NEC Feed Amps M v 8 x x O 6 8p0 Y"" x x C+ .2' c 6 L1 N r^+ r. W. E N tf; - C g2.4 us E.' in to to Spare ul Vel v, 4n or, I Space VS to v) ul iR i Lfl in M N a. El El � F LNC] N • , = .^. = G = = = G : = :. — G G = +h O D • ra r -r r•. ..." Y 1-1 corGs:T!!! • s • • a a • < "% a L1 6 _ fte 6 I 9C _ C%2 _ N A] TI !A IT N C 1 D L/0 I/O = C C G LA) O 0 6 it pp V z X O ;.^ t^. c., tC C w 0 0 0^ 0 CW: 0 00 0 0 0 6. 'i' /'I �"• Lighting TENANT CORRIDOR 1: "y V; M i+, tT. F, W V, }4: 2, V) q it 2L VI t8 iL to .F 1 V .,, L V7 a G. VI ti C!5 $#�? 2,C, to VZ eQ> C: S GLgiJ i. CI J Cie t1i Space tQ{. a. N a 2. V} tr., ��i G. en Rev: Revised circuits marked $ Existing circuits marked 1 Project #: 1312214 File: ):\B12214\Schutt \PANE1.SPNL. ak Y fr, eft h a+ ti :: fF r•. �� c, r'• CT Y Y N f; VI N CV N per-, K M ear' m in ei [� Cry a C i r '�!` Panel Spading Name: 4E2F 277/480V 30 4W 40A Min CB Type: Panel and [.ncatic,n: Area 2F Etrclrie al RoomSurface Mounted 14,0 0l AIC. Servs Zone C Single Lug% 5,75' Deep ' Circuit Breaker Code G = GFC:! H= HID Rated S = Shunt Trip C m HACK Med D= Switching Duty to = ser note A=AFC! S ILad Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps 2.8 3 Amps 2.8 3 4 c c I- 6 a Y sn vii J) c`-,. Spare `v yr cn I Space Z to ' CA ' :n i cn r Sn cn' sA +n ti) * C: L) CO `., N F W^ moo, R CO r4 CC - Ma ncl , i \ a .-1 = -.1 so = = _.+ 17,.. ,.. e-1 0 —, =CI .-, — w� 0 r-, = r+ .a-.�..a = r•. 0.1.'1C::' i 4-. .-. C rN c. tNi u 4 • • • • • r • • • • • • • • • • ■ • • w LJ[ . 0 In R m. CLS U e .44 , L..1 E"'4 w. 20/1 CB = t.) ^ 'Mw 1:10. ) r1, `.. CO U t" 4 `r. eye 2* I"" e-. .7 .q 2* [%0 r+ .r, a.. .+ x.. C'. Connected KVA rs 3 80.-0 ri rn ca000tJ'0 0 0© 0 0 0 0 0 0 C w 2 0 u 1,- z Z Q Zr; :.7cn Space a uncn v n"u1sn,ncikc Uv Space 6sn51. v Rev: Revised circuits marked,t 1?sisting circuits marked t Project it; 1312214 File: J:\ B12214\Scltied\PANE1S.PNL str+ , us h i- r �» n t•-• r ! f t� rd a r ee r c+1 IL Spading:lilac. fist NI Riame: 4E3B 277/4801 30 4W 225A Main CB Type: Distribution Panel laxation; Rooftop Electrical Room Surface Mounted 18,000 AIC Serves: AREA 3B Single Lugs 5.73" Deep ., 5 Single Pole C/ B to Inverter Circuit Breaker Code CB = Circuit Breaker S Shunt Trip G GFCI M = Niotor Ckt Prot. H= HID Rated F Fused Switch C =1tACR Rated #c see nota t Z ILoad Tvne Conn KVA NEC Dernax d Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC feed Amps I t be be OS x 8r' x P .. r4 IN N t+ N 4.q06 c © p g x x x r^ r 3 2 rust NI •P c., o 5x.i Gil i ([� d as ai r a 6. 6. P., 0 40 U = U 40 U ria U III U CB al U CD L} ICI U co l La U Ir c•; -` < L rr <t: t., d, r < LL, Mre r <C 0. �. C< a. AZ �, < G. rr, r SQL a- et r <C C.. yr, r < C. rr. a< G. r.,C r < 0A/3P to C re: Q c . tr r <3 l i a4 ri 4.a KV A 2.0 KVA > SG Cr) ✓ti 1L P 1,3 KVA .moi' 14 cO > rK r1 1.3 KVA SL r,i 6.9 KVA 0.0 KVA ca 0.0 KVA ' 44 O _ Wig' < 51 EC CZ Li CI saJ fs.. rJa 'S a C] bF a. Panel 4E2.F W m'1.5 G a :n Space t� & a Gnnnn Rev: Revised circuits marked * Existing circuits marked t Project #: B12214 File: j:\ B12214\Sched\PANELS.PNL ., tv o Kr rn r, SO 7. r: j:\ B12214\Sched\ PAN ELS.PN I Spirting, Inc. Dist i'nl Name: 4E382 277/480V 30 4W 200A Main CB Type: Distribution Panel Location; Rooftop Electrical Room Surface Mounted 18➢(100 AIC Serves: Single Lugs 5.75" Deep M 1.. • Circuit Breaker Code CB = Circuit Breaker S Shunt Trip G = GFC1 M = Motor at Prot H= HID Rated F = Fused Switch CHACR Rated t=see note Load Tv ot Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps 1 Mcch 86.0 x 100% 86.0 103 125% of Largest 110 86,0 103 Amps 86.0 103 110 V J J M P, 0 LK r R d US ` tri K . in 35A/3P e+: < t en G. er < O G- 1.) < 0 p,. n-: < 0 m. rn < CP Gi. rtf, d 0 ;/Vo- R to < 0 — < G .a < r Jr?,.- N /1,5 KVA I _ 21.5 KVA < in N < X E3 < C Gi < X to g. < <r X o la ¢ X c G ,ar L4 Ci 0.0 KVA •.r 2 Mtch SEF -3 ...,7 1 1 Space 1 !IHIJ E Rev. Revised circuits marked ; Existing circuits marked t• Project S: B12.214 File: j:\612214\Sched\PANEtS.f NL [Tf tre. t ES z t+ EV r+'1 •1• t<1 O t- a0 a ,-. � fk.Pane! 4E3BR 277/480V 30 4W I00A Main lugs only Type: Pane!board Rooftop F,h!ctrical Room Mounted 1f.lk1() ATC Zone D Single Lugs 5.75" Dip r+a -s c x cv s Io r+1 r eg rr *Circuit Breaker Code G = GFCI li= HID Rated 5 = Shunt Trio C = HACR Rated D= Switching Duty # = see note A=AFCI D Load Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Dernand Amps NEC. Feeder Factors NEC Feel Amps 1 gl x CG ,43 x er .o CC va 0 4 ass CFF C m. sn to tr to ui to cn TI to L0 4) cr sn Ln to en to cn to ;n to ' UUUUt,JU ei�I t NN NA a=oo=c...; caMcn oo G •^ • •.r < 6 " q 7 U U U ". N 20/1 CB U U _ ',.....,,,,,,,,-.-.1-,,,,-.,-, rIN U _ 0^ Ce'OPOCG=cp==-0 om == am . W ms ^ - . 7.1 .,....1-k r.. E Lighting PARKING LOT l..il hting PARKING LOT Sparc L.igiti ng PARKING LOT nm!9EFLAvIi/t11UVuioLnulu,m L c. L m F. R .0 .G. c,. G. '. Revised circuits marked ; Existing circuits marked t Project #: 1312214 File: J-\B12214\Sched\PANEIS.PNL rc ,..r-inx.a ��`r% �car IQ�ic°vctr i^r�N� Spatting Panel Name: 4N1A 277/480V 30 4W 41J0A Main CB Type: I'anelboard Location: Area 1A Electrical Room Suth c Mounted 42,010 AIC Serves! Zane A Single Lugs 5.75" Deep NI ,I. c 0rvr.I020 e•-• ,. , r NN Ty r4ri� rc 005 00: 005 Mr. '3arer "Circuit Breaker Code G GFCI H= HID Rated S = Shut Trip C HACR Rated D= Switching Duty # see note A = MCI Z�k J [ Load Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Fend Amps l Lighting 15.2 x 100% 15.2 18 x 125% 23 Recept 14.1 10 KVA 0100%, rest 0 % 721 15 x 100% 15 Equip 33 x 100% 3.3 4 x 100% 4 Misc 7.2 x100% 72 9 x 100% 9 Motors 44.2 x 100% 44.2 53 125% a Largest 56 Elevator 134.7 tap to 72%, per 620-14 121.2 146 x 100% 146 Meth 8.7 x 100% 8.7 10 125% of Largest 11 Lighting TENANT CORRIDOR ! ' ht' 27 T i.rlrF m. t C 1', kV' A CY G UN' G �f 1 Space _ A'Viiviiw 9 1 Elevator 1 w i r•rir- -r- , _:-a�- 4—rwc :.i i rw === U U N U r�3 .:UtfU rf =cry= C G r3 , ei U o ry i= U ! 1 1 u va • is E ■ • • • • • • s- f • • • • • IS ,� ;' d U f L30/3 CB i i i 6 U i 3 E U € d 4 "f r •• <T r ri +"V N rP t -i CJ' L"i r3 rti .-% .-• ,...r iN f i' r -i !`� N ev c uc Motors ESCALATOR ------ESCALATOR k1TC}K Motors ESCALATOR --ESCALATOR I CALA'TC112 MMotors TRASH COMPACTOR 0E t 1 -------TRASH COMPACTOR Motors ROLL -UP 000RS --ROLL-UP DOORS --ROLL-UP DOORS Motors ESCALATOR Motors ESCALATOR 1 --ESCALATOR -----ESCALATOR t7 L 1 -a E Z Z Q wry ; z C .0 ^. "u . ! 41L c g., .-. eft tri A .-, r+ eh t • IA N .-t r• e -S yN . . r�r; Rtry {{�. i4! [V +N a — eV tet^,_ er, !n c' a cel r. M a .. fn gyp' t Sparting � Q Panel Name: 4N10 2:7/480V 30 4W 200A Main Tugs only Type: Pane'board Location: Areal Ekkctrical Rosen Surface Mounted 18,000 AIC Serves: Zone A Single Lugs 5.75 Deep N 'T J-N w S...I.+ .1. +i .-• aCtr rw N M N ,C N ex N n Tr; t' * i CZ -'t' -r Circuit Breaker Code G = GFCI 11= HID Rated 5 = Shunt Trio C HACK Rated I>. Switching Duty # 1° sere note A AFCI iri Zets ILoad Tvfie Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps 1 :»Errr.rr,Fih -. r gy ti .- r-• C. r-. Q X x X x 0 0 r n„j -. r" ."i eDhW r'f,^..yC a6 7C Sti 36 'e! 3� t N sly A e 8'fe x- x x x x d r m 0 '• GO h in N O V3 tlGtlCC7r,itri 4, ,-,, 110 WA C� Y "x G ci oG SF A '1'O C ae. y m G. E 4 tr O e -r r. d Lighting TENANT CORRIDOR Lighting LF -1 Lighting LE -6 Lighting LF-LLF-5, LF -b, LE -12 , ' S!1 k ,r9 `, m LP.: r4 i!7 :ti N C. m 5E 1 Ln 2v 1 --! a co U i R X V -a�-.. N CG U �. R L'G U pOp t•,1 ....1... O G P. 0;"----000-00000-R ••.”.r-. ' r-. .-E —. r•+ S."r� .-s yr u 011'r+ N '..3 .... C • 1 • 1 • • • • • • • • • 1 • • • • • • • en + U com U r« N U r«. N 20/1 CIA cocoa' U - n U N N U — tV 10� t/az U —Ms f� r-. O^. .+ rr .':OCs .- w- rr O _ O U er E I = U er [+.: i I Connected KVA y+ 1 G G O0 OO - O O G O o O O R r4 .R R r4 N f V' X F1 ri C i..i Lt, V? if, :f Ul if) VI tf. u• fl1 QG LA ul Ui SA Motors ESCALATOR —ESCALATOR 1 —ESCALATOR Motors ESCALATOR .0 I- 1 -------ESCALATOR Rev: Revised circuits marked Existing circuits marked t Project #: BI2214 File: ]:\B12214\Sched\PANELS.PNL it ... ' r- en h a e5 to r N iA�.{ i i er gL P. A ;7; r 4NIC 277/ 480V 30 4W 200A Main C$ Panel Panelbnard Arca IC Ele ,trkal Room Surface Mounted 42,tX)0 AEC Zone B Single Logs 5.75" Deep • Circuit Braker Code G Im GFCI H= HID Rated 5 = Shunt Trip C = HACR Rated D Switching Duty A = see note A=AFCI 1 O Load Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps l �fi,Mac h 7gt a :+ CZ 5D ,_8., - x x x x 6,t x e r rrr h. *Q er 4. c4 .L r. re in -14 CE‘ 0 x r x x x p x > 0 r .. b; r b eu CT N er a- 0 Nd ,r of OD r CSC 4e t ' _t�7' G tl+ .n a ii) 2 M 2 AA C7 G -. O; g Lighting TENANT CORRIDOR Lighting LE -12A, TY -1, LF -13 Lighting FX -6, FX -2A, LF -25 G ' ..i Via. V) m Si} G. .. C'. tZ v V7 T F. co-) A. V] G. IJ'4 i V] 1 Space Space---- .. G, V, i tk tfi V} F.,, t�C :�, f _' 7r7 II 1 N ttl CN r+ [moi` : . 0 Q {Q ".,S f ,an 0 0 0 G c 0` Q C OC tri ' 0,94V 1 ;moi` En an U U U .-, 0 ... iI cl ni al U ^`. N CZ .. t: .: D "--. ^` C C .. `s C `r 0 1. "" . ^. f "� 0-0 i � . C i C 'L.. `-w 1Z O 0 ice, i fi K: U < • • r • w • i ! • R • : • . • • f R a < Is :i M •--.� ULJuL �r,�1 u € 20/3 CB € 1I € U`€�€'U�€ 1I € U € € .» _ ' _ ,t�SLgy±E lA to V)e Vim. in [f :Y3 :r ',..2 `1 j —ROLL -UP P DOORS -----ROLL-UP DOORS Motors TRASH COMPACTOR 1 RASH LUMl=Ac. Tvlz TRASH COMPACTOR Motors ESCALATOR OR ----ESCALATOR -----FcrAI ATOIt Motors ESCALATOR -----ESCALATOR 0 (-- -0 j Rev: Revised circuits marked $ Existing circuits marked t Project #: 1312214 File J:\812214\SchedPANELS.FNL ti` U9 is :S N el 1-. re» rr-, N c�: t*1 +n 4,1 fV iN re, e m r ' E Sparling', k_ 1 Pani Name- 4N10 277/480V 30 4W 20XIA Main CB Type: Panelboard I acatinn_ Area ID Electrical Room Surface Mounted 22,1X)1 AIC Serves: Zone B Single Lugs 5.75" Deep * N eT AC 7G = N *M ,C cC ,1. ,C 7C C N .1 CO C N • Circuit Breaker Code G m GFCI H= HID Rated SShunt Tris C s HACR Ra ed I3gm Switching Duty #t sec note A = AFCI , I._Ckid'I'ytx Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps 1 r... r. n 2 r4 x x x x °°v',, i; r iM 4 z (1 d m as • 0 L x r. x x a 2 Q 14 ck Q r ri^rr x 0' ,7rx�W� c t. E I x f Lighting TENANT CORRIDOR Lighting LF -1 1 r b tO .� Lighting LF -a, LF -12. LE -13 Space tfa VI cr, U; ii') chu.)N G 41'3 c17 iA flame A. 1 '� 't t!N rr •C 90 rT 6 'tF .; Starling Panel N4mme:: 4N1F 277/480V 3O 4W 200A Main CB -Type: Panelboard Location: Area 1E Electrical .RLxrin Surface Mounted 18,01X) AIC Serres: Zone C Single Lugs 575" Deep * Circuit Breaker Code Cc= GFCT FiH HID Rated S Shunt Trip C. ' HACR Rated D= Switching Duty ii see note. A = AFC Load Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA L)r..m.and Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps Lighting 8.8 x 100% 8.8 11 x 125% 13 Ricept 2.9 10KVA ()100%,rest C050% 29 3 x100% 3 Equip 2.l x 100% 2.1 3 x 100% 3 Motors 13.7 x 100% 137 16 125% of Largest 20 Mech 7.3 x/00% 7.3 9 125% of largest 11 0 s. Lighting TENANT CORRIDOR tr: di r: 'L — m. 9C06 Lighting LF -12, FX-, FX -2A 0. U5 1:6 S1. un V"+. My ut MY 0. un '3. ut i!i O. Ul S5 GI . £/1 +. LI ft, Jb 11. GI ft UI 0"+r Ca. CIS v3 ;� a, ua w +.aC3 rq e est ind rr C G C3 ^. C3 C C: :3 C C. V Ca Z i � i 4) ' • tO GP 4.0 L C 0 V - CO U 4_ a._. '� 'ter. "�. `ti. ''� '�. �. O. G l� • • * • a • • .. O " U uuuuuu r. -....r��- N ,-4r. N N r. • N r. —' A r. ri N r. O r. 'J' rM C r+ O r, ' — ^,.7 a N ^-.. N 1~ - '8.-"A. U to .__ i�i v to -. N { 1 I ! i i. e.1 - G G ^ a., G C CS GMC °§ frl g r':7^ -' P 90 cr; C4 Y YE 3,73 3,733 C C. en in GI M LI t zn` r. .max'. . .1. cn Motors ROLL UP DOOR —ROLL UP DOOR ------ROU. UP DOOR Motors TRASH COMPACTOR [---TRASH COMPACTOR [—TRASH COMPACTOR Revised circuits marked + Existing circuits marked t Project/0: 512214 File: J:\612214\Sched\PANELS.PNL r en t... T M, in N rr[4 An [� N t '�nn rr. tomI ct Circuit Breaker Code G ' GECI Hft HID Rated S bt Shunt Trip C HACR Rated D' Switching Duty # see note A=AEC! 2 O z Load Type Coon KVA NEC Demand Fat -tor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps S }saliatn to RDSc I 1' Z'£ %OM. x Z ti Vali t•S %flitL x t'S 61-fi fl-Oe9.k)d '%Z..L 03 dH 6 !<t• luienalg 8t: Wsadi' 1 JO %SZI tit; OA %W L x (rac wWoys1 t; %OOL X t: ZZ %00L x ZZ ,sll1L tit %OM x E1 Fit 0S tsar '%00Eiilt VAN OE X;Z1 tdaaas L %M. x 9 0'S %ik3L X 4'S gu101211 . ` Lighting TENANT CORRIDOR J r7 .I Lighting LE -5, LF -12 . U � ci,u,tocni U c. a Z. e�7 s, l L t. ,anrvstou�toyrcnuntoc. V 4 A. 6, {� R n5 G. + c EL U 1 a. . qyy U G c.."' j N L y ,, 1.1, w fi N + 7C ' N ....0C .., 0.' C O G 0 .0 a^i. 0. Q 0 0 CO C.) '- ii Laca 1 r.... r4 0000.'. c eiei I/O L/0] r /at 1 acccc r: E I j sty — Sparling Name: 4N1F 277/480V 30 4W 200A Mai Location: Area 1F Eteclrical Room Surface M Serves: Zone C Single Lu; c..., e".. Q • • • • • • 0 r •• e • • • S Connected KVA 1 32.3 LJ MS uUu r`F CC CZ N CO f`! Ci4 uu: N CC t�� fV CC a 1 30/3 CB 1 30/3 CB I I E 1t [ Ei�U f 1 1--, rc44 C C D G O 7 en v t75 Mnl, § ,4ry k§ i§ �'ri'a,i.i41, R.§§ i i§ 1-1 R C!3 Spare Spare w W Motors ESCALATOR 1 —ESCALATOR --ESCALATOR Motors ESCALATOR —ESCALATOR —ESCALATOR Motors ESCALATOR —ESCALATOR —ESCALATOR Motors ESCALATOR Y 1 —ESCALATOR Rev: Revised circuits marked Existing circuits marked t Project #: B12214 File: j:\612214\Scheel\PANELS_PNL 4t .•.4 en inn a, r M N fV K1N t�� O� CI m freeys P IP e*�'. 39 41 Pend 4N2A 277/480V 30 4W 200A Main CB Type: Panelbx-ward Ana 20 Electrical Room Surface Mounted 42,(») AIC Zone A Single Lugs 5.75" Deep ik N 'CC aD CC = s" — H !�i N AN '•i [�y Nr, !r, A ti: !>' r Circuit Breaker Code G GFCI H= HID Rated S " Shunt Trip C = HACR Rated b Switching Duty # see note A w ASCI 15 Load Tvpe Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Atnps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps 90 t+ Cr. aIf} x. X X X Col rte-, r—. h1 I-0 NOGG at Ct7 tf E8V r• , ,- ,- x --x x .-_ f.l est 35 !"`i7` CV h. r, «K it,' �'ki p In h t � .. +t, Lighting EXTERIOR L Lighting, TENANT CORRIDOR Lighting MALL c Lighting EXTERIOR Lighting EXTERIOR II!H e, 1 N , 7 Z ctFF+ t Load R i r. --iir1..., ,n c" ° c ad' i•ir, r Ca ti r- /-1 r+ r- a, a, '�.. a, ARNMN - """ ,- .� it't00000CD=ti© r+ ,-r rr .,, r, _r - sw :rte a0 C." 1. 1 py t+i W „e • a • * • • ■ C^ s= in iC r r, r, te'" C ^ N RI N N W x n9 r... ^^o,, a t N e ''. = _ _ _ O C7 C ' Ca _ _ - I. ,- -. = = C = ",4 O °�^. 6 = > 1y G d X .s: '" es at ..7 t,iS Lf) tf; ' li to 4r m Li) kt!) Si) Iti+ L0 VS tf) ,C1) R ria 4'3 (TJ V) of tf7 f.1)V fi ji �a Rev: Revised circuits marked $ Existing circuits marked t Project #: B12214 File: j:\B12234\Sched\PANELS.PNL Itorfatfst•.�e,rr�.-,tvrri ENE.1crir,ir),mrrr., Sparling,,1nc. 111.. Dist Pnl Name: 4N2B 277/480V 30 4W 1,600A Main CB Type: Distribution Panel Location: Area 2B Electrical Room Surface Mounted 42,000 AIC Serves: Zone A Mechanical Loads Single Lugs 10" Deep E v iK ' Circuit Beaker Cod CB Circuit Breaker S = Shunt Trip G a CFCI M = Motor Ckt Prot. H= HID Rated F = Fuji Switch C HACR Rated # - see note I Load Type Corm KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feder Factors NEC Feed Amps I q — x c4 a «- a rW x , x , x iA Lr rw �» - et w w .n ac ar ,- K., ,-+ O r. Ifl a of see 8.88 C „.x x x x t"' r�, Q 0 r of Z. ST aC as 2 - -, :-t z E < e: M r.. P. ci .� t. 0 2, � E- 4 U ILS i #1 LJ G3 Li R] o] 1..)v CB m L k on U 1:0 U LC U it U [ CB l U (h 25A/3P ..., 0, re; c A. rtr i pp R. rr r ¢ S n� H w N 250A/3P enA. r. + A. M ¢A ci en ..., en r r+- en ..... S P. rn op< 1(17 KVA I toC f 4 .r r 187 KVA i- 'a� 6 O 'reoG 162,0 KVA k. p 449 KVA 1-. N r-I 24.4 KVA a. - Z N Mech MAC -1 1Q 22-3 .4 . 2 L l4'lech LAC -1K/ 1 KP Mech. LAC -1 L/1 LP N s n � fyl` ._l Motors ELEVATOR * .mow ca e! COu N Rev: Revised circuits marked $ Existing circuits marked t Project i<: B12214 File: J: \ B12214\Schad\ PANELS.PNL rw N en- r' ' In 10i it JQ 0... O P.. r. ry ../. Spading Panel Name: 4N2BB 277/480V 30 44V 1UOA Main tugs only Typo: PanctFxiard tncaiic+n: Area 1B Electrical Room Surface M1ournted 18,000 AIC Serves: Zone A Single Lugs 5.75" Deep ri o , 9 'r..+1.r. r�iNrir�3s`,€inres fry VPvim^ *Circuit Breaker Code C GFC1 Rated S IN. Shunt Trip C = HACR Rated D— Switching Duty # @ see. note A MCI iii z Lad Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Dernami Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps E+, rr -4 ,,. aP 8 of .- -+ C x ", h .9.. [+'i Cl .i ra .- Lighting TENANT CORRIDOR . Lighting MALL Lighting LF -6A, LF -22 1 ..t .4 w ..= -r ..4 Lighting LE -14 Lighting MALL Space to t C. LA Ci R. Li) tt rf} to G< tr, R. In to R t!! G S'i. , J'S Ci G. US W G. ill 61 O. V9 S5, 4.ni!1 4. C. R. J) s� e!' t, 4�Cq i. 1Y ,C N aC Gam, 0'0 C7 ^,. 0 0 0 0{<0 0CS C 0 *e.+ CC (...i MMIZCCI f....; ,, , ..)LJU0U .-r .•. r r+ - 1 /o 0 ! < a ,"'w to) C,i 0 • • • • • • • • • • • 44 • • • • • • • • ( • w 120 UUL)UUU r. a©s Ca .• 4p., t m = m5 .- r 'r.... '� t...! ,.., r.* ? .., r4 r•. r+ ,., ` w+ 9 r... Y I.." .. ,-.4w r+ • .0 - e- r 4 SG C, C GJ r 3 0000000.0000000 z 0 f 000 00 ~Em 3 [itill v.12- t " 01 cn % cn cn * tn. us ' A' to tn4- sn to is in° Rev: Revised circuits marked t Existing circuits marked t Project 1l: m.2214 File: j:\B12214\Sched\PANELS.PNL I rWI , r c - c4.1'- =-1-�'0.a r4AA,P Arg. Fr �t 4r rt= Htt3 Kate S = Shunt Trip C = H ACR Raked I Switching, Duty 4 _ �e note A = AFC! LLighting TENANT CORRIDOR 1 0 �� w Iii H LMech EBH•la ± .0 .i .0 ."i. .0 ± .0 LL ghting EXTERIOR Lighting EXTERIOR Lighting EXTERIOR Lighting MALL ' h M LALL 3g ting Lighting MALL 2 lc : ts.. 0 8 ' 8-ctir C N `{ � X iC ,ti GD +L, N" �S G f` Er r+ r. .— 4N2C 277/401V 30 4W 200A Main CB Area 2E Electrical Rixtm Surface Mounted Zone C Single Lugs • /on Y ! . tomt.``on1o1n1ror''"�o�{{(o(n�Irre,,�C�C>rCO/0/2�1m1/C/C�/C/Z� V T [� - U W U .-4 H V U P P" U I.) ro r.. V U - h V P" L f.. I I Ci 353 I 35.2 I 4 0 Load Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps Lighting 32.5 x 100% 32.5 39 Recept 113 10 KVA kt 100 restiF150% 10.7 13 Equip 2.7 x 100% 2.7 3 Mi .c 2.8 x 100% 2.8 3 Motors 20.0 x 1110% 20.0 24 Mech 36.5 x 1ti0% 36.5 44 0 • . • • . • • • . • . . • VO Irs e. U u r.,, R 'mopw N cc:s c�uU -. i cc .- i cc U ... rte.. .. a N epi I I 10 U O 1 'pmpt. CF 1 0v \ N{ �.. i 1 I GID ! ma 0 H pi O N Connected KVA 1 .0 eq. :C C:‘ [ X r+ .G' ./. L� =�p ^ M Cd e*� r: ,-; eri 4+; doc�t5 r, M M; es M on c�'�i t,-: rei Ai .R M M !ei er, v r. r ac -r K9 trT lac n eT 4 + rr r O QC I +rr Sc Lighting LF -2, LF -5B Lighting LF -5t3, LE -12, LF -19, LF -26, F-3 _J Lighting LF-7,1F-8,LF-9,LF-21 Lighting LF -1, FIA, LF -20, LF -13, LF -20 Lighting 3RD FLOOR Motors ESCALATOR I ---ESCALATOR -------ESCALATOR Motors ESCALATOR -MCAT ATOR -ESCALATOR Mech EWH-2 Z I2II 1 I Lighting LF -1 T. ('C1 r+ T. o Lighting LF -5B0 LF -27 1 Space Recept ON ROOF ............................... Rev: Revised circuits marked t Existing circuits marked t Project 4: B12214 File: J:\812214\Sched\PANELS.PNL l c. V r- , oe a L i v F" r m -. to 2, .,�.i 6 0 ni u; in M7 > N v, F. i „S rrt v et rr u` Cl'! 43 t, • Circuit Breaker Code CB = Circuit Breaker s «Shunt Trip G GFCO M « Motor Ckt Prot. H= H1D Rated F Q Fused Switch C « HACR Rated st > see note fit' I Load Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps 1 I r 01 to e r+ , r• x x A _ t'3 �N C7` — 8E _ e 0 x X , v r r .$s er t r+ ON ht — Q+ r r„ Overcurrent device • CB rrcc' V fmf'' V ° "=' U Iro U co U ren U }}cn,, U rCZ U ,to Q /w U �.r U %n U Vim{ U :4' i!t C1. r <p t{ ter. ` R . .ni t0.+) \ n rte. t0.'r7 '�. R r-� 0.t+`,` "•.. it, rr, tt,-, �. to r , Cu — ca [V ee"ri 1 c r}+o. ten �.. 1`tp�C t•» M 4 a. Crs < q 2. t . `� A R. t•; 4p f' C1.. en --- {fi 18.7 KVA < u ppiC.� N < u it: ,–, r• < p._ yr V3 9. < g tel O r.+ < u tea - r+ < u �C" .0 r < g IpCI T ,< Cr, S C u C3 e,i r+ < u CT a4 135.4 KVA a N1 it:G < tr: a °Q U Meth MAC -9 Mech LAC -11308P Mcch LAC -1C Mech LAC -1D/1 DP Meeh LAC-IH/IM' r+ U r U =`N N U Meeh LAC -2C/ U Mech MAC -3 An Ci est Rey: Revised circuits marked Existing circuits marked t Project H; B12214 Pile Ci12214\Sched\PANELS.PNL rl N to `S x11 `p R ao a 4 ,-, r r-`1 P. Sparling" - Panel Name: 4N2DD 277/4&0 ' 30 4W 100A Main lugs only Type: Panclbaard Location: Area 2D Electrical Room Surface Mounted 22 tglti AIC Serves: Zone B Single Lugs 5.75" Deep * raTrZacori+a • ..=.NfVNA- pit 7.*.A, pi: 41 Circuit Breaker Code G GFCI H= HID Rated 500 Shunt Trip C HACR Rated D= Switching Duty # a see note A = AFC! II O z Load Ter* Cann KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Fc til Amps 9h 9£ sdutv ES U. iJ Lighting TEN ANT CORRIDOR — w .Z r. .5 G'., .n Fs c i its sn C i!: ao J1 11 1 e, tt; r��! tf} S''',. Gam, t!) $r�� i+ u9 ci C� V3 c� iJ: Cn t!y rs G• Vl v G Sr u1 [. us x K ri U UCJU r ..... in- "n... ^ r+ t- r-. r. r -r .." r. e-+ r. r••r — 4.4 r -r — ti r^ r r --r x N 5 a. A . . . . . . . ¢ 5 v[` O C J g i V . co UUUU5,.1U T.. '"..,. — •.., — ^ r.. "a. r.» `., .-r r, r. .1--•— i/Q ,,../«r w+ n r j L/o r -r 1/0 1. , r -r Load C7 i. O O G7 O ^. © O "0 O O C. Ci ^ d _0 = �G' b G ‘ri 6 Spare 1 > iTi SC 'SS v. rf to f ��666 s3 US Vl t 5- ma' m Space Space Ci3 Rev: Revised circuits marked Existing circuits marked t Project Th 812214 File: J:\B12214\Sched\PANELS.PNL it .-. x^ in h a H w�r'r err r,.r r, -r N �`.. ut!�'� [W N ti P. M gi -7 Sporting, Inc. Dist Pnl Nance: 4NZE 277/480V 30 4W 1,600A Main CB Type: Distribution Panel Location: Area 2E Electrical Room 5urtate Mounted 22,000 AIC Serves: Tone C Mechanical Loads Single Lugs. 10" Deep i Remarks ` } * Cirettit Breaker Code CB = Circuit Breaker 5= Shunt Trip G GEC! M = Motor Ckt Prot. L-t'a i.iirl 1 Load Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps I Equip 2.7 x 100% 2.7 3 x 100% 3 Lighting 32.5 x 1tX1% 32.5 39 x 125% 49 Mech 970.1 x 100% 970.1 L167 125% of Largest 1,216 Misr 3.8 x lO0% 3.13 5 x 100% 5 Motors 44.9 x100% 44,9 54 125° of Largest 61 Recept 10.6 10 KVA 0100%, rest qi 50% 10.3 12 x 100% 12 t¥ ' \ \ % = Q m U = U _ U 31 U in U CC Ca Q U _ U cO U e c / $ § \ e T. [80A/3P <<<<r ] @ @ A $ $ P j [ 0A/3P ......_ 1 rei < 2 } < > g \ < < > > k» \ An < >> k k < k k 81.9 KVA 1 < < > > « g } < > g § 0.0 KVA 0.0 KVA < g \ < r g 2 < k 2 < > k / 3 Mech MAC -10 \ \fi Meeh LAC -IF ] \ I 2 k \ f 2 Mech LAC-2F/2FP Mech LAC-2C/2CP Mech LAC=211/241P 111111 . U k 4. t3 \ [ / s 7 q ) 'U kad Cd} / k $ 2 - § /} - .. r4 r- m,Z w m a,$_ - Q Q 2 . q Sparlin 111.. 14...• Panel Name: 4N2F 277,480V 30 4W 200A Main CB Type Panelboard location: Area 2F Electrical Room surface Mounted 14,(X)0 A1C Serves: Zone C Single Lugs 5.75" Deep 4t N •=t, '4:5 .,-, N ,-, -do .... st ,-- oc, r• 10 N N N •=r N NO N .a. N .0 0i N r-: 44. 14-, ,C 0-; w el 0 •rr N M. *Circuit Breaker Code G GFCI .1-144 HID Rated 54% Shunt Trio C F1ACR Rated D Switching Duty # 4% see note A AFC' Load TYPe Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand ,Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps Lighting 9.0 x 100% 9.0 11 x 125% 13 River t 8.7 10 KVA (8 100%, rest iii) 50% 8.7 10 x 100% 10 Equip 2.1 x 100% 2.1 3 x 100% 3 • Misc 1.2 x 100% 1.2 1 x100% 1 • Mech 4.8 x 100% 4.8 6 125% of Largest 7 25,8 31 Amps 25.8 31 35 1.vmar.granme•r:1••••101ell Z Lighting TENANT CORRIDOR 1 •• 1414 ...1 ••• ...: •t. .0.- ,,,.; 0', •-• ....1 Lighting LF-1,LF-22A, v' re'l i.J., ,Z z — f LSpace 1 Lri' 8 c in . i tr• 8 rt tr3" 8 ra tit 8 fal as. .1 IL rE e., X S5" L Space 1 Lyanel 2N2F ti. Z N I Li.1 Z N I 3 rr N tr, c . -../ . 3 GO a tn UUULJULJUI...) CO 6 t. in . • . . il• rn .1 wil, C/a . .o. 0, CO ., .1 = t. 1.1..: .v., -, ., ...... ...... "...... N.,'14, — v. .1 .4-. v. 1 . R. I . g ,........ } ,.....^..^^ rn St r - -- c-,.. z , M • • • • . • sk • • • • • s • • • • • 1 • • CC Qt` • = r 1 cc ',...) ire `...„ = L.) •• .....„ Da L.) •-• ......... m U .4 v.,. co (6) ....,„ co () ....,„ v. 1-4v 4.4 4. ,..1 ' I. — 1. ..• r• 1/0 .-, ,-. •• tio . > 44 .e ...,' I Li Load F li r... Spare Space Space Rev: Revised circuits marked Existing circuits marked t Project #: B1=14 File: j: \ B12214 \ &heti PANELS.PNL * ,-, ri; ix) 1.... 7 —. •.• r• r• r• .,-. N en NN in h N P" IN r• V`..- 0", r"..• in f,-;. I-- fr? V,. eri •-, 4,r U c M,--, r E CPSG t, c c y h "L.. • = -C 4 ❑o :n LE Rte. rt +r 0 k cNi 7f .0 . ,C-:, CO Y. © _ •P E x Circuit Breaker Cock CB = Circuit Breaker 5 Shunt Trip G GFCI M M Motor Ckt Prost. H= PiiD Rated F s Fused Switch C HACR Rated # *. see note Load Type Cann KVA NEC Demand Factor Demand KVA Demand Amps NEC Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps SO Etitr i' gdiliV cot L'S££ L %OOL x L 6'5 %i S * isai '%001 VAN tit 6.5 idaaa},t 5 %OM x 5'i %001 X 5'6 astyY CLE 49Ain 10 %9Z1. KC L'2LZ %OOt X 1'8LZ tl oW 89 %in x Si Fit, %00t X tr.5tr 2011th I L %001. x L Z. t'. %00 1. X Z.1 dmbb Overcurn nt device K. U co u U Co U U u pa V co ^ a en i L., ¢ = . g 0. ¢ 07, 0. ••. OA/3P D. < Cutr ¢F�� - ¢ K '� - pq etn 3 - �Fd 0.0 KVA < g G r r $.5 KVA < gaaaaabCU SFS 9G ¢ "t1 7' a G+C A� — < M ¢ ^J < ."„ 0 C CS a Yi in "+ < GC i Cn; ¢ X34 c? C 4.61 O < r+ .-. Pr � y i4lerh MEF -1 THRU 5 Medi MEF -6 THRU 10 Mech MEF -11 THRU 15 Mcch MAC -7N 4 Pane/ 2N38 CA 4 Dist Put 4E3B2 Panel 4N3BB Rev: Revised circuits marked Existing circuits marked t Project #: B12214 File: J:\ B122'14\Sched\PANE15.PNL J:\B12214 Sched\PANELS.PNL Spading ik. 111.,.. Panel Name: 4N3BB 277/480V 30 4W 10tIA Main lugs only Type: Panelboard Location: Rooftop Electrical Room Surface Mounted 22,000 AEC Serves: 7e�ne` D Single Lugs 5.75" Deep ir f' 'r .p D °r. r�� 7. -c 4 � n A A A + o v * Circuit Breaker Code G = GFCI H= HID Rated 5 = Shunt Trip C = HACR Rated D= Switching Duty * = sem note A=AFCI LAMA" Type Conn KVA NEC Demand Factor Deinand KVA Demand Amp NU' Feeder Factors NEC Feed Amps as x may , Sif-. G i4. Lighting PARKING 1 Lighting PARKING Lighting PARKING 1 Lighting PARKING ................ La z 2 R- c '9 j Lighting PARKING LIF� zz 2 a. r1 .t L. c •-. R. t to C�. 3! } Lai t R v a SiSr tf � V 1 c n :i. C n C+. c h P. IF: Space : h " Si..= vs «.1 E f4 t-4 r * = U r. ra CO uU`.a _ r-• N an rr RI `DM UUU:.:, r - ! a 4a r-1 as w ,1 a c -- CI ? 'J Q G' O 1 a .a."' -z-. C dCl = n; u • • • { • • l 1 • r • -- < • • s r 1 • • • • s • • • • w-wxxxxy < o p .0 G e,- Cr V x r..1 re', E d i (.) r• 0 UU0c.iv r.l 4 1 t''i N e.. [^I .1 Ci e- iV CS O 8 E C v -:-1-"- t/0 8 a O O ^.+' C > ae E • [1 = ` U. X r. ,C ([[t�{; • f!] is Ur1 ri1�pp El's G, Y a.Lf ;.� d v: fiyl {� 4) iN'l J V to ti i!1 i��FF i V J7 ? , VI Rev: Revised circuits marked ; Existing circuits marked t Project #: B122:14 File: J:\B12214\Sched\PANELS.PNL A v1 ` WESI'FthLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16472 - METER CENTERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide meter center(s) complete, dead front type as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. As listed in Section 16470 subject to full conformance with specifications. 2.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepare and submit for review prior to manufacture; include dimensioned front view, plan, section views, wiring diagrams, device sizings and layout, nameplates and all other information required to demonstrate conformance with contract documents. B. Verify space available with equipment sizes and code required working clearances prior to submittal of shop drawings. See 2.4 below. 2.3 METER CENTER STRUCTURE A. Shall be freestanding, steel with steel angle or channel framework; adequate strength and rigidity necessary to resist all conditions of use to which it may be subjected and to support all equipment, devices and appurtenances contained therein; front plates installed in sections so that all parts of the board are front accessible without disturbing other parts. A removable lifting angle shall be provided at the top and bottom of each shipping section(s). B. Shall be rainproof construction when located in an area exposed to outdoor air. 2.4 METER CENTER DIMENSIONS A. Overall height of meter centers shall not exceed 90 inches (not including base channels) or as noted on drawings. Length and depth shall not exceed dimensions as scaled on METER CENTERS 16472 WESI hLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION drawings. Manufacturers whose equipment dimensions exceed those indicated on the drawings shall notify the engineer in writing 10 days prior to bid date. These manufacturers may not bid the project unless they properly notify the engineer and qualify their bid as "Not Conforming to Contract Documents". Contractor shall base bid only on equipment which fully complies with contract documents. Cost of building modifications or meter center relocations, if permitted, or other additional work required to fit larger size meter centers than shown on drawings shall be borne totally by the Contractor. 2.5 FINISH A. Finish applied; standard gray color for all exterior and interior painted surfaces. Other colors may be considered. 2.6 METER CENTER BUSBARS A. Aluminum or copper at manufacturer's option, factory fabricated; carried to terminals for connection to service cables or busway. Brace switchboard components for symmetrical fault current indicated on drawings plus asymmetrical offset (100,000 amp bracing minimum). Aluminum bus shall be tin plated over its full length B. Busbar Joints: Bolted, lapped and silver or tin plated, having low contact resistance and low temperature rise. Use Belleville washers or approved special bolts with aluminum bus. C. System of Bussing: Three phase, 4 wire, full size neutral unless otherwise noted. Each phase shall have an equal number of meters connected per phase. D. Ground Bus: Full length ground bus conforming with the larger of U.L. 891 or 30% of incoming feeder for minimum size except larger as required by code for grounding neutral conductor. 2.7 METER CENTER COMPONENTS Includes, but not limited to: A. Breakers as noted on the plans. B. Circuit breakers shall be 22,000 A.I.C. and shall be UL listed for operation ahead of 10,000 A.I.C. breakers to permit their application at 22,000 ampere fault levels. C. Space for future breakers as noted including complete bussing and required hardware for mounting devices and meters. D. Miscellaneous appurtenances as required for a complete installation. E. Shall have a Service Entrance Type UL label. F. Shall be full fault current rated or properly coordinated with service overcurrent device. See drawings. METER CENTERS 16472 2 WESI'FIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION G. Provide meter base(s) and miscellaneous appurtanances as required by serving utility. Contact serving utility and conform to all their requirements. 2.8 NAMEPLATES A. Provide per Section 16010 for each and every meter, instrument, protective device and disconnect device for the entire meter center lineup. For each meter center include name, voltage and phase. For each protective device and disconnect include load (and fuse size and type when applicable). Provide one job nameplate with the following information: Project Name Architect Electrical Consultant (Sparling) Electrical Contractor Year of Manufacture B. Lettering size shall be suitable for the size of plate and information contained. Nameplates shall be engraved plastic (3/8" high minimum letters). Attach with screws. Nameplate color shall be: Emergency System - white on red; Normal System - white on black. 2.9 CLEATS A. Provide for securing all feeder cables within the switchboard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Floor mounted and shall be anchored to building structure to prevent overturning in the event of earthquake. Provide "housekeeping pad" per 16010. 3.2 When Meter Center includes Utility Company metering equipment it shall contain all devices and wiring to meet serving utility requirements. END OF SECTION 16472 411, Mh I ER CENTERS 16472 WES MELD SHOPPINGTOW N SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16475 - FUSES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the specifications for fuses (600V and below) and spare fuse cabinet. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 16010. Submit product data for each fuse type and size. B. Submit the following information: 1. Descriptive data and time -current curves 2. Let -through current curves for fuses with current -limiting characteristics 3. Coordination charts and tables and related data 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses from one source and by a single manufacturer. 1.6 SPARE FUSES A. At completion of project, furnish to the owner a quantity of spare fuses equal to 10% of the total quantity of each size and type of fuse used on the project, with a minimum of three (3) fuses of any one size and type. FUSES 16475 WES'F1r.LD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fuses by one of the following: 1. Bussmann 2. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co 3. Edison 4. General Electric 5. Gould Shawmut 6. Littelfuse B. Fuse sizes indicated on the drawings are based on <Insert Note Here>(manufacturer) current limiting performance and selectivity ratios. Submit requests for substitution of alternate manufacturers with a complete short circuit and coordination study for evaluation. 2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuse; class as specified or indicated; current rating as indicated; voltage rating consistent with circuit voltage. B. Current limiting, 200,000 AIC minimum interrupting capacity, unless noted otherwise. C. Circuits 601-6000 amps: Class L time delay D. Circuits 600 amps and less: Class RK1 or Class J E. Motor Circuits: Class RK5 dual element time delay or Class L (601-6000A) F. Transformer Primary Circuits: Class RK5 2.3 SPARE FUSE CABINET A. Wall -mounted 0.05 -inch -(1.27 -mm-) thick steel unit with full-length, recessed piano - hinged door key -coded cam lock and pull. Cabinet front and lock to match panelboard equipment specified in Section 16470. 1. Size: Adequate for orderly storage of spare fuses specified with 10 percent spare capacity minimum. 2. Finish Gray baked enamel. 3. Nameplate: Engraved "SPARE FUSES" in 1/2 inch letters on door. 4. Fuse Pullers: For each size fuse. FUSES 16475 2 ' WES 1'HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions to verify proper fuse locations, sizes, and characteristics. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses in fusible devices at job site just prior to energization. Do not accept equipment with fuses installed at factory. B. Arrange fuses so fuse ratings are readable without removing fuse. C. Install spare fuse cabinet in main electrical room or as shown on drawings. 3.3 CLEANING AND INSPECTION A. Clean fuses, tighten connections and inspect fuse holders prior to energization of the equipment. END OF SECTION 16475 FUSES 16475 'try' 110 WES 1 HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16476 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes separately mounted switches and circuit breakers. B. Provide all disconnects required by code for equipment furnished under this and other Divisions of these specifications unless disconnects are integral with equipment and acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. 1.3 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 16010. Submit product data for disconnect switches, fused disconnect switches, enclosed circuit breakers and accessories specified in this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following (same manufacturer for all products): 1. Cutler -Hammer 2. General Electric 3. Siemens 4. Square D DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16476 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. NON-FUSED: Heavy duty, quick make, quick break, single throw, horsepower rated with poles to open all ungrounded conductors. AIC rating same as upstream protective device with 10,000 AIC minimum. NEMA KS1. Toggle switches with padlocking provisions acceptable for circuits rated 20 amps or less. B. FUSED: As specified above with addition of fuse clips to accept only Class R fuses. Service entrance labeled for service disconnect switches. C. OPERATING HANDLE: Lockable in off position. Interlocked with cover to prevent opening when switch is closed. (Interlock to include defeating mechanism). 2.3 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Enclosed, Molded -Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with lockable handle. B. Characteristics: Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as indicated and interrupting rating to meet available fault current. C. Application Listing: Appropriate for application, including switching fluorescent lighting loads or heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. D. Manufacture same as Panelboards Section 16470. E. Circuit Breakers, 200 A and Larger: Trip units interchangeable within frame size. F. Circuit Breakers, 400A and Larger: Field -adjustable, short time and continuous -current settings. G. Current -Limiting Trips: Where indicated, let -through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, Class RK -5. H. Molded Case Switch Where indicated, molded case circuit breaker without trip units. I. Accessories: Provide shunt trip, under voltage and other accessories where indicated. 2.4 ENCLOSURE A. NEMA AB 1, Type 1, unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental conditions of installed location. B. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. C. Kitchen Areas: Type 4X, stainless steel. D. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4. E. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: Type 7 <A>, <B >, <C> or <D>. DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16476 2 WES I HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION F. Provide flush mounted enclosures for circuit breakers where indicated on the drawings. 2.5 NAMEPLATES A. Provide nameplates per Section 16075 Identification. B. Provide permanently attached nameplates (with mechanical fasteners) constructed of plastic (black on white) laminated material engraved through black surface material to white sublayer. Exception Emergency distribution system component labeling - white letters on red background. C. Include the following information: Load name, voltage and phase and fuse size and type (when applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install disconnect switches and enclosed circuit breakers level and plumb according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Securely mount adjacent to equipment on wall or acceptable mounting frame. Disconnect switches shall be mounted independent from the equipment they serve. Disconnects supported only by raceway are not acceptable. C. Wiring space within Disconnects, Fused Switches or Enclosed Circuit Breakers shall not be used for splices. D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.2 CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, and abrasions. END OF SECTION 16476 DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16476 3 �+r WES 1'11hLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16481- MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of work under this Section includes all requirements for motor controllers (starters); except motor control centers; to be provided and/or installed under this contract (for Motor Control Centers see Section 16482). Motor controls shall conform to NEMA standards for each specific purpose and be U.L. listed. B. The Contractor performing the Division 16 work shall furnish motor controllers for alI motors shown unless the controllers are included with the equipment furnished under other divisions of these specifications. The contractor performing the Division 16 work shall install all motor controllers including all controllers not factory assembled into equipment furnished under other divisions of these specifications or by Owner. All motors and motor controllers shall be complete and fully operational upon completion of the project. 1.3 MOTOR VOLTAGE INFORMATION A. Voltages available are 208 and 480 volt three phase; or 120, 208 and 277 volt single phase. Circuits are designed (in general) for motors with voltage ratings as follows: 1. Smaller than 3/4 HP -115 volts, single phase. 2. 3/4 HP and larger - 200 or 460 volts, three phase. B. Obtain submittals and shop drawings and verify motor sizes and voltages provided under other Divisions prior to commencing work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTOR STARTERS A. Magnetic motor starters: Shall conform to or contain items called for below and unless noted otherwise, shall be full voltage non -reversing for NEMA size 3 and under. Starters larger than NEMA size 3 shall be closed transition, autotransformer or wye- delta type. No starters smaller than NEMA size 0 and no half size starters are permitted. Wye -delta type must have motor designed for this use. Contractor is responsible for coordination. Conductors and terminations shall conform with 16120. MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Overload devices: Shall be melting alloy or bimetallic type. One overload shall be provided for each phase. Provisions shall be made for resetting the overload devices from outside the starter enclosure. Provide ambient compensated overload devices only when the motor is at a constant temperature and the controller is subject to a separate, varying temperature. Automatic reset overload devices are not permitted. C. Accessories: Each magnetic motor controller shall include phase loss protector, "HAND -OFF -AUTO" selector switch, 120 volt coil (unless noted otherwise), red running pilot light, green off pilot light, 100VA (minimum) control transformer (except for 115 volt motors), surge suppression kit, with fused primary and secondary, two spare auxiliary interlock contacts and all other accessories required or noted. D. Enclosures: All motor controllers shall be contained in an enclosure suitable for the environment in which the controller is mounted. Shall be NEMA 3R when exposed to weather. Other enclosures shall be per code or as noted. E. Combination motor controller: Shall be fused switch type (Class RK5), or motor circuit protector type rated for 22,000 RMS A.I.C. minimum unless noted otherwise and containing all accessories as listed above. If externally powered control circuits are used, provide an auxiliary switch on the disconnect switch or protector and fuse in lieu of the control transformer. Switch or protector shall be capable of being padlocked in the off position. F. Manual Starters: Shall be toggle switch type, lockable in the "off' position, with overload relays, pilot light and enclosure per above. 2.2 MANUFACTURER A. Allen Bradley, General Electric, Square D, Cutler Hammer. 2.3 NAMEPLATES A. Provide engraved phenolic nameplates per Section 16010. Permanently attach (with mechanical fasteners) on each controller, nameplates with the following information: Ioad and area served, voltage, phase and (when applicable) fuse size and type. 2.4 FAN SHUTDOWN RELAYS A. Contractor shall provide relay(s) with sufficient contacts to shutdown all fans over 2000 cfm upon receipt of fire alarm. See Section 16721. Coordinate relay coil voltage with fire alarm system supplier. MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481 2 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING A. Wiring shall conform to applicable sections of these specifications. Provide wiring from branch circuit overcurrent device to motor controller to motor terminals, including installation of starter and all connections. Motor controllers provided under Division 16 shall be combination type. Where starters furnished under other Divisions of the specification or by Owner do not include an integral disconnect switch, a separately mounted disconnect switch shall be provided. Provide raceway and conductors as shown for remote control, or interlock connections. Coordinate other control wiring with Division 15 of the Specifications. Provide overload elements in controllers sized to match motor nameplate full load amperes. Space within controllers shall not be used as a junction box. 3.2 SUPPORTS A. Securely mount to equipment, wall or acceptable mounting frame suitable to withstand earthquake forces. Controllers supported only by raceways are not acceptable. 3.3 FAN SHUTDOWN WIRING A. Provide 1/2" raceway with 2 #14 AWG conductors from each fan motor controller to the fire alarm shutdown relay(s). Provide wiring of interlock connections for all (over 2000 CFM) fan starter control circuits via Division 16 furnished fan shutdown relay to shutdown fans upon receipt of fire alarm. END OF SECTION 16481 3 MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481 WES1 MELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide lighting system complete and fully operational. B. Substitutions: 1. Bidders requesting approval to provide products other than those specifically listed in the Light Fixture Schedule shall submit requests in writing to the Architect and Lighting Designer ten days prior to the close of the bid period. Approval will be in the form of an addendum to the specifications issued to all registered plan holders. No requests for substitution will be considered after this date. 2. Substitution request shall include all information required under paragraph 1.4 SUBMITTALS. Requests for approval shall be accompanied by a working fixture sample (including lamps and a cord and plug). Provide the name of at least one installation where each proposed substitute has been installed for at least six months along with the name and phone number of the Architect, Owners representative and the Lighting Designer of Record. If required by the Architect, the proposed substitutes must be installed at the bidders expense in a location selected by the Architect. 1.3 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) LE5-1993: 1. Procedure for determining Luminaire efficiency ratings. B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): UL 496: Edison Base Lampholders UL 542: UL 676: UL 924: UL 935: UL 1029: UL 1570: UL 1571: UL 1572: UL 1574: Lampholders, Starter Holders for Fluorescent Lamps Underwater Lighting Fixtures Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts HID Lamp Ballasts Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures Incandescent Lighting Fixtures High Intensity Discharge Lighting Fixtures Track Lighting Systems LIGHTING 16500 WESTEIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Light fixture schedule series numbers are a design series reference and do not necessarily represent the exact catalog number, size, voltage, wattage, type of lamp, ballast, finish trim, ceiling type, mounting hardware, ceiling trim or special requirements as specified hereinafter or as required by the particular installations. Provide complete fixtures to correspond with the number of lamps, wattage and/or size specified. B. If there are discrepancies between fixture illustrations and the written description in the fixture schedule, the written description in the fixture schedule shall take precedence. C. Light fixture voltage shall match voltage of circuit serving the light fixture. D. Furnish and install a lighting fixture of the type indicated by number at each locations shown on the drawings. Where multiple fixtures in a room are of the same type, the type may be indicated only once. E. Specifications and scale drawings are intended to convey the salient features, function and character of the fixtures only, and do not undertake to illustrate or set forth every item or detail necessary of the work. 1. Minor details, not usually indicated on the drawings nor specified, but that are necessary for the proper execution and completion of the fixtures, shall be included, the same as if they were herein specified or indicated on the drawings. 2. The Architect shall not be held responsible for the omission or absence of any detail, construction feature, etc. which may be required in the production of the fixtures. The responsibility of accurately fabricating the fixtures to the fulfillment of this specification rests with the Contractor. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. For standard catalog items, provide original product sheets, -neatly and clearly marked- to indicate in complete detail the fabrication of all Iighting fixtures including overall and detail dimensions, finishes, metal gauges, glass thickness, type, fabrication methods, support method, ballasts, transformers, sockets, switches and types of wiring, electrical and mechanical connections, welds, fasteners, joints, end conditions, targeting and locking devices for adjustable fixtures, type of shielding, reflectors, trims, hinges, gaskets, provisions for relamping, and all other information to show compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Submittals shall have fixture types and project name clearly indicated and shall be prepared by the authorized manufacturer's representative serving the project area. A list of manufacturer's representatives (including address, telephone and fax numbers) identifying which light fixture types they represent shall be included with submittals. Submittals or requests for substitutions not meeting these requirements will be rejected. C. Include installation instructions clearly indicating work performed by others and materials adjacent to work of this section. D. For custom fixtures, modified fixtures or linear fluorescent fixtures mounted in continuous rows, submit scaled drawings prepared by the manufacturer showing LIGHTING 16500 2 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION details of construction, lengths of runs, pendant and power feed locations, accessory pieces, finishes, and list of materials. Contractor to provide manufacturer with field dimensions where required. E. Product Samples: For fixtures type FX-* and LF-* 1. Submit sample fixtures fore each type, finish, and color of fixture specified, including full size lens patterns 2. Submit for approval samples to the Architect and Lighting Designer when and where requested, the components tagged with the name of the project, and provided with a cord and plug, and specified lamps. Samples may not be returned. Allow two weeks from the date of receipt for thorough examination and review by the Architect and Lighting Designer. 3. Fixtures under the contract shall be identical to the approved sample fixtures. No fixture used as a sample will be allowed to be installed on the project. 4. In the event the submissions are disapproved, the fixtures will be returned to the Contractor to immediately make a new submission of fixture or fixtures meeting the contract requirements. 5. All charges for these shipments are to be prepaid by the Contractor. F. Mock -Lips 1. All custom fixtures require a submission of material finish samples, component approval, and a complete operating prototype fixture (including specified lamps) to be reviewed at the fabricator's shop prior to shipment of any material to the project. 2. Shop drawings for all lighting fixtures shall be received no later than 30 clays after award f contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating approvals to allow timely delivery to the project site. 3. Shop drawings and samples requested shall be submitted for approval before fabrication. Any material produced prior to the approval of shop drawings or samples, and not in conformance with the Contract Documents, shall be disapproved with the Contractor bearing full responsibility and cost. 4. When required and requested by the Architect and Lighting Designer, samples submitted as per above shall be subjected to photometric, thermal, mechanical, electrical or water testing at an independent test laboratory, at no expense to the owner. 5. No variation from the general arrangement and details indicated on the drawing shall be made on the shop drawings unless required to suit the actual conditions on the premises, and then only with the written acceptance of the Architect and Lighting Designer. All variations must be clearly marked as such on the drawings submitted for approval. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fixtures and components shall be new and listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or other testing lab acceptable to local jurisdiction. LIGHTING 16500 3 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 1.7 WARRANTY A. Ballasts: Provide manufacturer's warranty for a period of not less than five years. Warranty shall include parts and labor to replace defective ballasts. B. Exit Signs Utilizing LED Lamp Technology: Provide manufacturer's warranty for a period of not less than five years including parts and labor for full replacement of defective product. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Ballasts: Provide one case or 10% (whichever is less) of each type used on the project. Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt. B. Lamps: Provide one case or 10% (whichever is less) of each type used on the project. Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt. C. Fuses: Provide one case or 10% (whichever is less) of each type used on the project. Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt. D. Adjustable Accent Lights (track, recessed or surface mounted): Provide additional lenses, color filters and other accessories to be used during final focusing, as follows: 1. 20% or one case (whichever is less) of each lamp type (type, beam spreads, and wattages to be determined by the lighting designer). A spot and a flood lamp of the same wattage are considered to be two different lamp types. 2. 10% or one dozen each, (whichever is less) lenses, color filters and louvers (to be determined by the lighting designer). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Interior Light Fixtures: Finish ferrous mounting hardware and accessories to prevent corrosion and discoloration to adjacent materials. B. For weatherproof or vaportight installations, painted finishes of fixtures and accessories shall be weather resistant enamel using proper primers or galvanized and bonderized epoxy, so that the entire assembly is completely corrosion resistant for the service intended. Where aluminum parts come into contact with bronze or steel parts, apply a coating material to both surfaces to prevent corrosion. C. Fixtures shall be free of light leaks and designed to provide sufficient ventilation of Iamps to provide the photometric performance required. Ballasts and transformers shall be adequately vented. D. All sheet metal work shall be free from tool marks and dents and shall have accurate angles bent as sharp as compatible with the gauges of the required metal. Intersections and joints shall be formed true and of adequate strength and structural rigidity to LIGHTING 16500 4 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION prevent any distortion after assembly. Finish exposed edges so no sharp or ragged edges are exposed. All miters shall be in accurate alignment with abutting intersecting members. E. Lampholders shall hold lamps securely against normal vibrations and maintenance handling. F. Reflector Cones: 1. Provide minimum 45° lamp and lamp image cut-off for all vertically mounted lamps. For horizontal lamps provide minimum 33° cut-off. There shall be no visible lamp flashing in the cone. 2. Plastic materials shall not be used for reflector cones, unless noted otherwise in the Light Fixture Schedule. 3. Reflector cones shall not be riveted or welded to housing and shall be removable without tools. Retention devices shall not deform the cone in any manner. Trim shall be flush with finished ceiling without gaps or light leaks. Where the flange trim is separate from the cone, it shall have the same finish as the cone. 4. Reflector cones shall be of uniform gauge, not less than 0.032 -inch thick, high purity aluminum Alcoa 3002 alloy, free of spin marks or other defects. 5. Manufacture reflector under the Alzak process. Refer to fixture schedule for cone color and specular or diffuse finish requirements. For fixtures using compact fluorescent lamps, provide additional finish equivalent to Color-Chek _that eliminates iridescence. Submit one sample of each cone type for review when required in the fixture schedule. G. Fresnel Lens and Door Assembly: 1. Lens shall have uniform brightness throughout the entire visible area at angles from 45° to 90° from vertical, without bright spots or striations. 2. Lens shall have opaque risers painted neutral gray unless otherwise specified in the Light Fixture Schedule. 3. Finish of regress door shall be matte baked enamel paint in color as selected by the Architect. H. Light fixtures containing lamps which require protective shielding shall have tempered glass lenses. I. For adjustable fixtures, provide positive locking devices to fix aiming angle. Fixture shall be capable of being relamped without adjusting aiming angle. �. Fixtures recessed in suspended ceilings where the space above the ceiling is either an air supply or return plenum shall conform with NEC Article 300-22. K. Safety: Provide safety devices for removable fixture elements (cones, reflectors, lenses, etc.) to support removable elements when not in normal operating position. Safety devices shall be detachable if necessary and shall not interfere with fixture performance, maintenance or the seating of any fixture element, and not be visible during normal fixture operation. L. Pendant Mounted Fixtures: Provide for continuous row fixtures that span the junction of adjacent fixtures and suspend fixtures using pendant stems of single piece LIGHTING 16500 5 WES IFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION construction. When necessary for sloping ceilings or seismic code compliance, provide swivel type pendant hangers. Locate ballasts symmetrically or provide weights as required to maintain balanced, level fixtures. M. Exterior Fixtures: 1. Painted surfaces shall have an outdoor life expectancy of not less than 20 years without any visible rust or corrosion. 2. Diffusing materials shall be UV stabilized. 3. Finish colors shall be as specified. 22 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES A. Housing: Minimum code gauge steel or rigid aluminum construction painted after fabrication with high reflectance white paint (min. 89%). B. Light Shields: 1. Parabolic Louvers: Provide Alzak aluminum, specular or semi -specular as specified, with a low -iridescent finish. 2. Flat Translucent Diffusers: Shall be 100% virgin acrylic and have matte finish on exterior side (facing away from lamps). Diffuser shall be of thickness specified and shall be of sufficient density to completely obscure lamp image. 3. Flat Clear Lenses: Injection molded 100% virgin acrylic or clear tempered glass, thickness as specified. 4. Clear Patterned Lenses: Injection molded 100% virgin acrylic. For lenses with a male pattern of prisms or cones, specified minimum thickness refers to distance from flat surface to base of pyramids or cones, or to thickness of undisturbed material. For lenses with female pattern, specified minimum thickness refers to overall thickness of material. Lenses shall fully eliminate lamp image when viewed from all directions between 45-90° from vertical. From 0-45° the ratio of maximum brightness (under a lamp) to minimum brightness (mid -point between lamps) shall not exceed 3:1. Minimum thickness shall not be less than 0.125" with a minimum weight of 8 ounces per square foot. C. Frames: 1. Supply with concealed hinges and latching. Provide mitered corners with no gaps or light leaks. D. Lamp Mounting: 1. Mount lamps used in rapid start circuits 430 ma and below within 1/2" of grounded metal as long as the lamp. For 800 ma and 1500 ma lamps, mount within 1" of grounded metal as long as the lamp. 2. For rapid start circuits using single lamp ballasts, provide one grounding lamp holder per lamp. LIGHTING 16500 6 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.3 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) FIXTURES: A. Housing: Minimum code gauge steel, bonderized or equal rust protected or rigid aluminum construction. B. Finish: Visible surfaces. Powder coated paint unless otherwise specified. Color and finish as selected by architect. Concealed parts, (lamp holders, yokes, brackets, etc.) matte black. C. Lamp Holder Housing: Cast aluminum with integral heat radiating fins to assure cool lamp base operation. 2.4 WIRING A. Wiring shall be as required by code for fixture wiring. B. Flexible cord wiring between fixture components or to electrical receptacle and not in wireways shall have a minimum temperature rating of 105°C. C. Cords shall be fitted with proper strain reliefs and watertight entries where required by application. D. No internal wiring shall be visible at normal viewing angles, i.e. above 45° from vertical. E. Provide #18 AWG, 3 -wire flexible conduit connections (whips) for dual level switching as shown on Drawings for light fixtures recessed in accessible suspended ceilings. Provide 3 -wire whips for all dual level switching. Wire count on wire whips is not shown on Drawings and shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide proper wire count for the lighting control as shown on Drawings. 2.5 BALLASTS: A. Fluorescent General Requirements: 1. Lamps shall be operated on the type of circuit the lamp was designed for (preheat, rapid start, instant start, programmed start, etc.). T8 lamps shall be operated on rapid start ballasts only. Ballasts shall provide normal rated lamp life as stated by lamp manufacturers. 2. Ballasts shall be HPF (greater than 90%), UL listed, and ETL certified. Magnetic ballasts shall be CBM certified. For projects applying for utility funding, ballasts shall meet utility requirements. Provide ballasts with thermal protection unless otherwise specified. Ballasts shall be Class P. 3. Confirm voltage requirements with Electrical Drawings. Ballasts shall operate lamps correctly within +/-10% voltage variation without damaging ballasts. 4. Ratings: a. "A" sound rating for 430 ma and 265 ma b. "B" sound rating for 800 ma c. "C" sound rating for 1500 ma LIGHTING 16500 7 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 5. Low temperature and/or outdoor application: Provide ballasts suitable for low starting temperature where light fixture is located outdoors, in freezer or refrigerator or other location where ambient air temperature will be below 50 degrees F. 6. Dimming Ballasts: Type required by dimmer manufacturer for proper operation and to maintain UL listing of dimming system components utilized. Total harmonic distortion shall not exceed 20% at any point within the dimming range. B. Electronic Fluorescent Ballasts: In addition to the general requirements, provide electronic ballasts where required in the Light Fixture Schedule as follows: 1. Ballasts in conformance with the following regulatory requirements: a. EMI and RFI limits set by the FCC (CFR47, Part 18 and FCC Part 18,15j), IEEE Publication 587, Category A (transients). b. Minimum efficiency standards of Public Law 100-357. c. Starting sequence consistent with ANSI Standard C82.1-1993. 2. Reduced light output ballasts (ballast factors below 87%) are not acceptable except as noted otherwise in the Light Fixture Schedule. 3. Total harmonic distortion shall be less than 15% of the input current. Current crest factor shall be less than 1.7. Operating frequency shall be between 25 and 60 kHz with no visible flicker. 4. Ballasts shall operate in ambient temperatures up to 105°F (40°C). 5. Rapid start ballasts shall be wired in series (or in parallel if manufactured accordingly). 6. Ballasts for single ended lamps shall be program start, with end of life protection. 7. Manufacturers: Advance, GE/Magnatek, ESI, Osram/Sylvania. C. High Intensity Discharge: 1. HPF type (minimum power factor 90%). 2. Sound Rating: "low noise" or "extra quiet". 3. Each ballast shall be individually protected by an in-line fuse in a Bussman fuseholder type HLR for 120 and 277 volt, type HEX for 208, 240 and 480 volt. 4. Metal Halide: Constant Wattage Autotransformer (CWA) except for lamps below 175 watts without ignitors where high resistance auto transformer type will be acceptable. Use Advance Transformer "Smart Cap" ballast where required by lamp selection. 5. High Pressure Sodium: Magnetic regulator or constant wattage ballast. Electronic ballasts where required by lamp selection. 6. Manufacturers - Magnetic Ballasts: Sylvania, Holophane, Jefferson, Advance, Universal. 7. Where ceramic metal halide lamps (Philips Master Color) are specified, use electronic ballasts. 8. Manufacturers - Electronic Ballasts: Aromat (for 39, 50, 70,100 and 150 watts); Advance (for 39, 50, 70,100 and 150 watts); Altman (150 watts), Innova (150 watt S/E T-6), Reliable (39WPAR20, 50, 70 and 100 watts), OSRAM (exMotorola) (70 watts) and Hatch (39 and 70 watts). LIGHTING 16500 8 WES I FIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.6 LAMPS A. Each lamp type in the Project shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer. B. Fluorescent: 1. Medium Bi -pin, T5 program start, T8 rapid start, T12, compact TT , DTT and TRT; 30001C color temperature and 80+ Color Rendering Index (CRI) unless otherwise noted. Use TCLP compliant lamps unless they are unavailable for type of lamp specified (brand names are GE - Ecolux, Osram Sylvania - Ecologic and Phillips - ALTO). 2. Where T5HO lamps are utilized on a dimmable circuit, only GE and Sylvania lamps may be used. 3. Manufacturers: General Electric, Philips, Osram Sylvania or as noted in the Light Fixture Schedule. C. High Intensity Discharge Type: 1. For indoor applications provide color corrected HPS (minimum 65 CRl) or color corrected metal halide (minimum CRI 65). For exterior applications provide clear metal halide or high pressure sodium unless specified otherwise. 2. Refer to fixture schedule for specific metal halide and high pressure sodium lamps required. Mercury Vapor shall not be used. 3. Acceptable manufacturers: General Electric, Osram Sylvania, Philips, Venture or as noted in the Light Fixture Schedule. 2.7 SOCKETS A. Fluorescent: Suitable for lamp and ballast type employed. B. H.I.D.: Porcelain for mogul or medium base lamps, pulse rated as required. Keyed for all position oriented lamps. For other lamp types, as required by base type. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES, GENERAL A. Provide mounting accessories and trims as required for wall and ceiling construction types shown in Finish Schedule and on Drawings. B. Verify weight and mounting method of fixtures and provide suitable supports. Fixture mounting assemblies shall comply with local seismic codes and regulations. C. Refer to architectural reflected ceiling plans for coordination of lighting fixture locations with mechanical and fire safety equipment. Where conflicts occur, coordinate with Architect prior to installing any of the systems. D. Install fixtures with vent holes free of air blocking obstacles. LIGHTING 16500 9 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION E. Lighting fixtures located in recessed ceilings with a fire resistive rating of 1 -hour or more shall be enclosed in an approved fire -resistive rated box equal to that of the ceiling. F. Adjust aperture rings on all recessed fixtures to be flush with the finished ceiling. G. For fluorescent lamps operated on dimming ballasts, operate lamps at full output for 100 hours (continuous burn) before dimming. H. Adjust variable position lampholders for proper lamp position prior to fixture installation. I. Blemished, damaged or unsatisfactory fixtures or accessories shall be replaced. J. For pendant mounted fixtures, mounting height is from finished ceiling to top of pendant light fixture. For wall mounted fixtures, center on outlet box unless otherwise noted. Verify mounting provisions and other requirements prior to order of light fixtures and provide as required. K. In accessible suspended ceilings, provide 72" flexible conduit wiring connection (flexible tubing not permitted) from a rigidly supported junction box. L. All finishes shall be unmarred upon project completion. Repair or replace damaged finishes. M. Replace all burned out or inoperative lamps at the end of the construction prior to Owner occupancy. 3.2 DIFFUSERS AND ENCLOSURES A. Remove protective plastic covers from lighting fixture diffusers only after construction work, painting and clean-up are completed. Remove all dirty lamps, reflectors and diffusers; clean and reinstall. When cleaning "Alzak" reflectors, use a manufacturer recommended cleaning solution. Reflectors damaged or impregnated with fingerprints shall be replaced at no cost to Owner. 3.3 SUPPORT OF FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES A. Recessed type: For light fixtures supported by the ceiling suspension system, provide four Caddy #515 support clips (one each corner) which lock light fixture to ceiling tees after light fixture is installed. In addition, provide for each light fixture two #14 earthquake chains or #12 wires secured at diagonally opposite fixture corners (for fixtures weighing less than 56 pounds) to structural members above suspended ceiling. For plaster or gypsum board ceilings provide plaster frame compatible with light fixture. Contractor shall coordinate fixture trim with ceiling type. B. Surface Mounted Type: 1. Where mounted on accessible ceilings, support from structural members above ceiling by means of hanger rods through ceiling or as approved. LIGHTING 16500 10 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2, Continuous Runs of Fixtures: Laser sight to assure fixtures are straight when sighting from end to end, regardless of irregularities in the ceiling. Where light fixtures are so installed, omit ornamental ends between sections. C. Pendant Mounted Type: 1. For fixtures with rigid pendants, supply swivel ball aligners at canopy to comply with local seismic requirements. 2. Where suspended from accessible ceiling, support fixture from structural members above ceiling by means of hanger rods through ceiling or as accepted. 3. Continuous Runs of Light Fixtures: Laser sight to assure fixtures are straight when sighting from end to end, regardless of irregularities in the ceiling. Where light fixtures are so installed, omit ornamental ends between sections. 3.4 SUPPORT OF HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE FIXTURES A. As specified for incandescent light fixtures, except provide access as required for ballast. Provide earthquake chains when light fixture is supported by the ceiling suspension system. For remote ballasts, isolate ballast from structure. 3.5 CEILING LIGHT FIXTURE SUPPORT A. Where ceiling is of insufficient strength to support weight of lighting fixtures installed, provide additional framing to support as required. 3,6 COORDINATION A. Give ample notice of special openings required for placing equipment in building; avoid cutting completed work. B. Furnish materials and labor for work under this Section in ample time, and in sufficient quantities so work may be installed in proper sequence to avoid unnecessary cutting of floors and walls. C. Coordinate and schedule work with work of others, Utility Company and Telephone Company, to avoid delay in proper installation and completion of respective work. 3.7 ACCESSIBILITY A. Install equipment such as junction boxes and pull boxes, fixture housings, transformers, ballasts, switches and controls, and other apparatus that must be reached periodically for operation and maintenance, easily accessible. LIGHTING 16500 11 WES 1EIhLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.8 CLEANING A. Immediately prior to occupancy, clean reflector cones, reflectors aperture plates, lenses, louvers, lamps and decorative elements. Destaticize lenses after cleaning, install free of finger and dirt marks. Lamp shall also be clean and free of dust upon completion. END OF SECTION 16500 12 LIGHTING 16500 zz O v) itinavza a6 0 O J N W W � LL Z N W W V 0 DESCRIPTION MODEL NUMBER MANUFACTURER 12-22-05 DESIGN DEVELOPMENT ▪ m et - ea E C m t0 i L aW1 "'S C co a 'N co y C U • d N? y 'e C 11'J 8 E m r 0 C NI. v L C m ~ = m H 3 • i mwcc L 8o 2' c=2a+= E .§ a.Q' QHc- o cz,12 in W C C 7 �+�, '"�� '� C E a Y C E@ m C K m C m co'nyaa a.0asCD 0 gm Emcy v - d �'� SO•r�kiJ in .0 • a52n x in u Qc CCm .. S'cm�,om m E ai $ ��'m mw N 0 EE ▪ C 8 w •C H y C OC mO 0. V C -Tc V y $ =g2e = E W Eas o `�� � �-r' ° n� ..12 E a) c m • E•-� r� e L "C • g air 2~ ati E 0_ @ )I• L 0.5 • E E' c m U a eo o a Bei 2°-:§ g= CD n m a •B li = v i 0 m x m r m ut ' al WC co m x y C m+ C C m C C m r 3, • c0�;v �'�$ 0o Ecol m m., t�8� E m19 it, 8b . xy o °��'3m ; m y co Q y C C 0.8 SO . 0 • U yi CO _ L so - 7 C W-- m O m C C 7 .0 w 00 .`r„ To (A g v .e [u a C v m [D v = cn § 'o y � re -0 W Fl: Two F32T8 FIA: One F32T8 Three F32T8 Three F32T8 co y u) a) m al C in co y V1 y a1 S'q CO a) C m y C tlf UJ y C y {/) m C m a1 'C .2 47f�NM m��m�� Ai co �a• Cia m• cnmm�}m mMN 55��� (�cy m m.0 m C m 0:1 to Nv)c.i0 U� V cNAg u�5 p�aa� NNWtO �3co � M au)01-0-6 ca N etNNN>-, UUcgHco) � J O vNNNcnln cg co E to E co a1 co L. l4 W m O W W SO x .m. _ fl , CO X m d- d W X •C 2 - .5 X l6 • co x m.2 = 'E E?'C,. E'E 2'CS� E'C?(005 E .E o m�! rnWrn!rm m E c?'C o°m@o • Uo co LL! aaai 0w J❑ Z UJ20 JI U J 2 0 J IU 2 J U ,J 2 O J Z -a_ LL LL LNL u- w.- 5 w D (7 z 1- ((9 J .-- DESCRIPTION 5 MODEL NUMBER MANUFACTURER a 12-22-05 DESIGN DEVELOPMENT One MI -1175 Clear §_ K 03g IW -CO g0§5 .o rn c e o c to , Ck 2� i■k 2ek ,\.ce co c is E . Ey o2 ©�©_ i- § 2 c £ G • EE2 I- EE§ E] t k2. >' k�-1ci .0 .jC. Cr' X2- as ✓ _JcEac©-0.V. 4)1 C §$as 22 \/1 U) ai k�(0 =`� - 2k�� .fkk$ §k�2■ m m w W E O c. D E = $ = o• . c to u) 2 2 • @ CD • 2 .2 § E -12 $ in a) $ a) kk� Ukkk co co �CO 2� 8xx 8xX2 I - 5k waUq 2a0q f aIa2t kk\q\ �J k %aLua Etc E2§ -J0M wD.m-J wan.J NOTE: Architectural lighting fixture schedule included separately with "Architectural Light Fixtures" specification and cut sheets. All -Purpose Wall Brackets Intended_ For multi-purpose areas such as corri- dors, utility rooms and lavatories where "%or' high vertical illumination is required. Features Available in 2', 3and 4' models. Suitable for wall or ceiling mounting. Can be mounted vertically or horizontally. For individual mounting. Steel housing with opal acrylic diffuser standard. Clear, prismatic #12 pattern acrylic lens and front metal fascia avail- able. Easy -maintenance design. Standard end - caps are spring-loaded for easy diffuser removal — no tools required. Listings — UL Listed (standard). CSA Certi- fied or NOM Certified (see Options). Ordering Information er es WC Series WC WC WC Number „P. 1,2 Not included. 17 20 25 30 32 40 rar110 type 17W T8 1241 20W T12 (241 25W T8 (361 30W T12 (361 32W T8 (48") 40W T12 (481 Diffuser type (blank) Matte white opal acrylic Al2 /12 pattern acrylic FAC Matte white opal acrylic with front metal fascia FA12 #12 pattern acrylic with front metal fascia Availability and Oithenstons„:, . Number Lamp Width Depth Length in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) 4%{11.7) 4%(11.7) 24 (61.0) 4% (11.7) 4%(11.7) 36 (91.4) 4% (11.7) 4%(11.7) 48 (121.9) of lamps type 1,2 17, 20 1,2 25,30 1,2 32,40 WC 120 277 347 MVOLT* Others available. • 120-277V. Must specify GEB101S. Example: WC 232 120 GEB CO 10 GEB Electronic ballast, 520% THD GEB10IS T8 electronic ballast, 510% THD, instant start GEBIORS T8 electronic ballast, 510% THD, rapid start Si On/off pull -switch (all lamps), lower lefts CO Grounded convenience outlet, lower right' ES Energy-saving ballast MB Architectural matte black finish CSA CSA Certified NOM NOM Certified NOTES: 1 120Vonly. ... • • . : • ;.;,•. • •••••• • TXC Hi -Tee Ordering Information tligh Pressure SlzdiVM TXC 250S' 400S' Metal Halide TXC 175M 200M 250M' 300M 320M 350M 400M' 450M A23 A23 A23 A23 A23 A23 A23 A23 A23 A23 Drawings are for dimensional detail only and may not represent actual mechanical configuration. Dimensions are shown in iacbes (centimeters) unless otherwise noted. TXCA23 Overall height 22-114 08.51 Reflector height 15.1/4 (36.71 Diameter. 23 (5841 Enclosed Aluminum Optical For areas that require vertical illumination and glare control at low mounting heights. Ideal for general open areas, retail spaces and aisles. Consult factory for Environ- mental Compatibility chart. Housing — Rugged, heavy-duty, die-cast aluminum with white polyester powderfin- ish. Electrical components horizontally op- posed and heat-sinked to ballast housing for cooler operation. Ballast— Copper wound and 100% factory tested. Solid-state ignitors are encased and potted (HPS). High power factor. con- stant -wattage a utotra nsfo rm er. 180°C Class H insulation system. Meets ANSI C82 ballast standards. UL listed. Optics — Injection -molded, virgin acrylic Tens and highly reflective, white polyester powder painted reflector. UV stabilized. Hinge and lens retainer latches facilitate tool -less removal for maintenance and err° cleaning. Inhibits entrance of outside con- taminants. Meets UL lamp rupture con- tainment specifications. Installation — Pendant splice box threaded for %" conduit (standard). Other mounting options available. Socket — Glazed porcelain, vertically ori- ented socket with copper alloy, nickel - plated screw shell and center contact. UL listed 1500W, 600V, 4KV pulse rated. Listings — UL Listed to U.S. and Canadian safety standards. NOM Certified. UL listed for damp locations. -30°C to 40°C ambient operations. 55°C available. UL wet loca- tion available. 120 2082.3 2402,3A 277 347 4802,3 TB5 TBV6 See pages 388-399. Purse freer H.ao. sauart/temp Systems TXD' Example: TXC 400M A23 TB Due to recent technological enhsncemems, metal halide lamps and ballasts now provide optimum performance and energy savings. Sea Lamps & Ballasts, page 587. Laatp/R:4rrs Data Wattage Behest Binh Pressure_Sadium iMog/Clear( 250 CWA 400 CWA Metal Halide (Moy/Clear! 250 CWA 400 CWA Weight S/Mtg. Lbs. Kg. Height 23 10 1.6 29 13 1.8 21 10 1.7 25 11 1.7 NOTES: 1 TXD consists of TX housing and A23 optical assembly shipped in one carton. Available with tapped bal last or 480V only. To order, change TXC designation to TXD. Available only in wattages indicated. 2 RequiresCWlorRLBoption inCanada for MN. Available for 175-450W only. 3 Requires MRS orCWl option in Canada for HPS, available for7o-400W only. 4 220V and 240V, 50 Hz and 60 Hz ballasts available tor use with U.S. metal halide and high pressure sodium lamps. 5 Optional multi -tap be II ast (120,205,240, 277V; 120, 277,347V in Canada.} 8 Optional five -tap ballast (120,208,240,277,480V1. Avails ble for 250, 400and 1000 MH (CWA Only). Polycarbonate lens: Replace A in optical nomenclature with P fur polycarbonte lens. HID lamps are available with luminaires. Consultfactory.Metal halide luminaires will operate comparable -wattage mercury vapor lamps. Enclosed Steel Housing Intended For low to medium mounting heights and harsh environments where dust, dirt, hu- N62.J midity or moisture is present. Ideal for canopies, shipping docks, refrigerated areas, food processing and other non- hazardous environments. eatures Fully gasketed, totally enclosed fixture is available in heavy-duty steel or alumi- num housing (AL option) with a baked white enamel finish. A shatter -resistant 15% DR acrylic diffuser (50% DR avail- able) is secured by captive, corrosion - resistant pivot latches. Ballast — Thermallyprotected,resetting, Class P, HPF, non -PCB, UL listed, CSA certified ballast is standard. Sound rating depends on Tamp/ballast combination. Wiring and Electrical — AWM, TFN or THHN wire used throughout, rated for required temperatures. Mounting -- For unit or row installations, surface or suspended mounting. Wet location DMSW available for ceiling mount only. Listings — UL Listed (standard). CSA Certi- fied or NOM Certified (see Options). Suit- able for damp locations. DMSW is listed for wet locations. Ordering Information Series Number 01.lam s DMS Damp-�-✓,�.. location 1.2,3' Lamp Htype 32 32W T81481 40 40W T12 (481 38W Slimline (481 60W 800mA 1481 44W T8 (481 75W Slimline (96") 110W 800mA (96-) 59W T8 Slimline (961 86W T8 380mA (961 DMSW Wet Not included. 48 location 48H0 For tandem double -length unit. add prefix T. Example: TOMS Series Lamps per cross section Lamps per fixture 4878H0 96 96H0 96T8 96T8H0 vailabili DMS, DMSW 1,2,3' 1,2,3 and Dimensions Lamp type 32, 40, 48T8H0 48, 48HO, 48T8H0 Diffuser -type (blank) Acrylic, 15% DR AR High -impact acrylic, 50% DR DP Deep acrylic, 15% DR i ARDP High -impact deep acrylic, 50 DR2 DMS DMSW Example: DMS 2 96T8 120 GEB AL Width in. (cm) 85/, (20.9) Depth in. (cm) 5% (13.3) 6'/ (15.31 Length in. (cm) 50!'. (129.4} DMS, DMSW (OP or ARDP) 1, 2, 3' 1, 2, 3 32, 40, 48, 48H0, 48T8H 0 851,120.9) 671 (15.3) 505/1. (129.41 TDMS, TDMSW 1, 2,3' 2,4,6 32, 40, 48, 48H0, 48T8H0 DMS, DMSW 1, 2 1,2 96, 96H0, 96T8, 96T8H0 8%120.9) 8'/, (20.9) 6'I. (15.3) 98'/re (251.3) 6'/, (15.3) 98'/u (251.3) NOTES: 1 3 -lamp models only available with T8 lamp source. 2 Deep lens is standard on 4' slimline, HO 19OOmA) and 8' axtures.To match deep appearance on 4' rapid sten, order DP or ARDP option. 3 Please order accessories as separate catalog numbers. 4 Cold weather ballasts (CW orCW20) for use ,t40°F ambient temperatures or below. 120 277 347 MVOLT` Others available. 120-277V. Must specify GEa1or5. DEB tons o4CCIBSSOTies Electronic ballast, 520% THD GEB10IS T8 electronic ballast, 510% THD, instant start GEBIORS T8 electronic ballast, 510% THD, rapid start AL Aluminum body WLF Field -installable wet location fittings to stem -hang DMS on W rigid conduit (2 per package). For factory - installed fittings on top, order WLF as an option. CSA CSA Certified NOM NOM Certified Sae page 99 for others. Drawings for dimensional detail only. May not represent actual mechanical configuration. Dimensions are shown in inches (centimeters). • Ordering Information c For optional aluminum channel, add suffix AL to catalog number. Example C 2 96 120 AL See Options. For tandem double -length unit, edd prefix T. 1 Example: TO 1,2 Not included. 17 20 24H0 25 30 32 36 36H0 CF39 40 CF40 48 48H0 CF50 CF55 60T8 72 72H0 96 96H0 96T8 96T8H0 17W T8 (241 20W T12 (24") 35W T12 800mA (2412 25W T8 (361 30W T12 (361 32W T8 {481 30W slimline (36") 45W T12 800mA (3612 39W TT5 RS (161 40W T12 (481 40W TT5 RS (24•) 39W T12 slimline (481 60W 112 BOOmA (4812 50W TT5 RS (24") 55W TT5 RS (24") 40W T8 (601 55W slimline (72") 85W T12 800mA (7212 75W T12 slimline (961 11OW T12 800mA (9612 59W TB slimline (961 86W T8 380mA (9612 NOTES: 1 Tandem CF lamp types available in one -lamp only. 2 HO models available with aluminum channel onlvor Steel channelwith electronic ballast. 3 Order two 36' reflectors for 72' fixtures and two 48" reflectors for96' fixtures. 4 Maximum depth to center of lamps. •• General -Purpose Channels swai< :sa For applications that require low to medi- um illumination levels. Suitable for gener- al purpose applications. cel'° yeah Steel channel (standard) with high -gloss, baked enamel finish. Optional aluminum channel available — features corrosion-resistantfasteners for use in damp and harsh locations. Combination end plates/channel connec- tor furnished for either unit -mounted or continuous -row application. White or specular reflectors available. Channel cover retained by quarter -turn fastener. Listings — 120V, 277V and MVOLT are LIL Listed and CSA Certified (standard). See Options for 347V and NOM Certified. 120 277 347 MVOLT* Others available. 120-277V. Must $pacify GE61OIE. 1$600Th 114 One 4 -lamp ballast GEB Electronic ballast ,520% TH 0 GEB10HS T8 electronic ballast, 10% THD, instant start GERMS T8 electronic ballast, S10% THD, rapid start LPF Low power factor (for 20W or 30W only) HPF High power factor (for 20W or 30W only) ES Energy-saving ballast Example: C 2 96 120 ES AL Aluminum body CSA CSA Certified (347V only) NOM NOM Certified See page 98 for others. Reflector Accessories (Order separately) CASK Asymmetric CSMR Symmetric 24 24' nominal 36 36' nominal' 48 48' nominal' (blank) White SSR Specular silver, steel Lamps Lamps Nominal per cross per length Series section fixture Lamp type Width in. (cm) 11'6 2' CIC AL C/C AL C AL 1, 2 1, 2 CF39 491, (10.6) 1, 2 1, 2 17, 20, CF40, CF50, CF55 49he (10.6) 1,2 1,2 24H0 49/16 (10.6) Depths in. (cm) 2'5)16 (7.5) 219/16 (7.5) 3'Sh6 (9.6) Length in. (cm) 18 (45.7) 24 (61.0) 24 (61.0) 3' 4' CIC AL TC/TC AL TC AL TC/TC AL C/C AL C AL 1,2 1,2 25,30 1 2 CF39 1,2 1,2 36H0 CF40, CF50, CF55 32, 40,48 4BH0 5' CIC AL TC/TC AL TC/TC AL CIC AL C AL 6' 1 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 2 1,2 1, 2 1,2 6078 4'/1e (10.6) 2"Ira (7.5) 60 (152.4) 49116 (10.6) 41/al (10.6) 4=Ila (10.6) 216/1,e (7.5) 215he (7.5) 31the (9.6) 36 (91.4) 36 (91.4) 36 (91.4) 4'/1e (10.6) 4a/le (10.6) 49he (10.6) 2"he (7.5) 2"/15 (7.5) 3"/iii (9.6) 48 (121.9) 48 (121,9) 48 (121.9) 1 2 1.2 1, 2 2 4 1, 2 1, 2 25, 30 25, 30 72 72H0 411$ (10.6) 49116 (10.6) 43fie (10.6) 491, (10.6) 21611a (7.5) 215/s (7.5) 215/1, 17.5) 319/26 (9.S) 72 {182.9) 72 (182.9) 72 (182.9) 72 (182.9) 8' TC/TC AL TC/TC AL C/C AL C AL 1 2 32, 40 2 4 32, 40 1,2 1,2 96, 9618, 96T8H0 1,2 1,2 96H0 49/10 (10.6) 43/16 (10.6) 49/1,0 (10.6) 49f, (10.6) 21h/ii (7.5) 96 (243.8) 21911, (7.5) 96 (243.8) 2'Sha (7.5) 96 (243.8) 372/, (9.6) 96 (243.8) Parabolic Troffers, 4" Louvers ended Deep -cell parabolic luminaires for use in open area applications and electronic offices where optical control, visual com- fort and light cut-off are important _tea 4" -deep premium -grade aluminum louvers in choice of finishes, shipped in thermally sealed polyethylene wrapper. Automated assembly, mitered corners and interlocking construction assure precise parabolic shape. Choice of cell configuration and Tamping. Compatible with virtually all ceiling types and air functions. For complete descrip- tions, see pages 94 and 96. Low -iridescent louver material standard in fixtures with silver finish louvers. Fixtures available in metric sizes. Surface - mount versions also available. Consult Lithonia Lighting sales representative. Listings - UL Listed (standard). CSA Certi- fied (see Options). Ordering Information Series 2PM4 2' wide uur r, function B No air function 2.3.4 A Air supply/ Not included. return Heat removal Dual function supply/return/ removal H D Mounting �m ry 0 Lay -in grid F Flanged MT Modular fit -in ST Screw slot NOTES: 1 Not available on3-Iampfixtures. Use U31. 2 Popular cell configurations are shown in bold type. 3 Some options increase fixture depth. Consult Lithonia Lighting sales representative if plenum depth is a tactor. 4 For 614"(16.Gcmldeep 2 U40or2 U316,specify 1Coption. Nominal Number size Series of lamps 2 2 3 4 2x2 2PM4 Lamp type 17�11WT8(24') 20 20W T12 (241 U31 31WT8U (1%" leg) U316 31WT8U (6' Ieg)1 32 32W T8 (48'1 40 40W T12 (48'1 U40 40W T12 U (6' Ieg11 CF40 40W 115 124'1 Availability and Dimensions Lamp Number of cells( type (Rows x number in row) U40, U316 6(2x3), 9(3x3), 12(3x4), 16(4x4) 17, 20, U31, CF40 6(2x3), 9(3x3), 12(4x3(, 16(4x4) 17, 20, U31, CF40 9(3x3), 1213x4), 16(4x4) 17, 20, CF40 6(2x3), 9(3x3), 12(4x3), 16(4x4) PM4 Paramax® Example: 2PM4 G B 3 32 MD 120 GEB Number of cells 6,9, 12, 16 19, 24,32 Height' in. (cm) 1 rsuver'finisfl LO Low -iridescent anodized diffuse silver LS Low -iridescent anodized specular silver 7e/1e (19.2)` 61 (16.5) 61 (16.5) 61 (16.5) 2 2x4 2PM4 3 4 32, 40 12(2x6), 16(2x8), 18(3x6), 24(4x6), 32(4x8) 32, 40 18(3x6), 24(3x8), 32(4x8) 32, 40 12(2x6), 16(2x8), 18(3x6), 24{4x6), 32144} 6tt/le (17.0) 611/14 (17.0) 611/te (17.0) 1/3 One 3 -lamp ballast 1/4 One 4 -lamp ballast GEB Electronic ballast, 520% TH D GEB101S T8 electronic ballast, 510% THD, instant start GEB1ORS Ta electronic ballast, 510% THD, rapid start CSA CSA Certified See pages 90 & 91 for others. iai a 120 277 347 MVOLT" Others available. 1211-277V. Must specify GEBIWIS. • • • ( '7 frA L/THON/A LIGHT/NG' FEATURES INTENDED USE Ideal for applications requiring attractive, quick installation exit signs and low energy consumption. CONSTRUCTION Engineering -grade thermoplastic housing is impact -resistant, scratch -re- sistant and corrosion -proof. UL94V-0 flame rating (UL94-5VA with CSA op- tion). UV -stable resin resists discoloration from natural and man-made light sources. Rugged unibody housing snaps together with no additional mechanical fasteners. Faceplate and back cover are interchangeable on housing. Positive snap -fit tabs hold faceplate securely, yet pry out easily for lamp compartment access. Universal directional chevron inserts are easily removed and reinserted. Uniform graphics illumination without shadows or hot spots. Reinforced, im- pact -resistant color panels. Letters 6" high with 3/4' stroke. U.S. Patent No. 5,526,251, 5,611,163 and 5,954,423. Other patents pending. LAMPS LEDs mounted on printed circuit boards. Expected LED life over 25 years. Low energy consumption — less than one watt. INSTALLATION Universal (top, end or back) mounting. Easily removed mounting knockouts. J -box pattern on back panel. Housing snaps to canopy with four positive - locking tabs. Cam -locking pin tightly secures housing to canopy. LISTING M. listed (standard). CSA Certified, C-860 end C22.2 No.9 or NOM Certified (see Options). Meets UL, NFPA 101 (current Life Safety Code), NEC and OSHA illumination standards, and State of Minnesota energy-efficient legislation requiring less than 20W consumption. WARRANTY Three-year total customer satisfaction warranty. For details, see Product Selection Guide. Catalog Number Notes Type Thermoplastic Exits LUM LED Lamps AtiV QUANTUM® ORDERING INFORMATION Choose the boldface catalog nomenclature that best suits your needs end write it on the appropriate line. Order accessories as separate catalog number. LQM LaM LED Face type S Stencil A Aluminum appearance stencil12 P Pend" Accessories Housing color (blank) Black' W White Order as separate item. ELA WGEX Back -mount wireguard ELA WGEXT Top -mount wireguard ELA WGEXE End -mount wireguard ELA LDC6 120/347 ELA LDC12/48 120/347 ELA OMDC6 CSA ELA LOMSORTIE 6V DC input for LED lamps, dual voltage AC input 12V -48V DC input for LED lamps, dual voltage AC input s 6V DC emergency (amps s19 SORTIE stencil face & sign panels 1 Number of faces 1 Letter color 1 Single face" R Red 3 Single face G Green' with extra faceplate and color panel IInput voltage' 120/277 Dual voltage' 120/347 Dual volt- agez.s NOTES: Not available with CSA option. 2 See back of spec sheet for special housing dimensions. Consult factory for compatible accessories. 3 Special wording available in red or green. Consult factory. 4 Some special voltages available. Consult factory. 5 Only available with CSA option. 6 lIt listed es emergency lighting equipment. 7 Not available with fl option. 8 Not available with Aluminum (AI face type. 9 Letters 6' high with 7/10" stroke. 10 For other voltages, replace DC6 with DC12 or DC24. 11 Only available with options. Example: LQ.M S W 311 1201277 Options2 (blank) FI X2 DC6 DC12 DC24 DC48 LOU LDC12/48 SALIDA CSA NOM DL None Fire alarm flashing interface'2 Primary and secondary AC inputs provided12' t 6V DC lamps and sockets1' 121/ DC lamps and sockets'," 24V DC lamps and socketsw 48V DC lamps and sockets'u 61/ DC input for LED lampsm 12V -- 48V DC input for LED tamps Salida signage'l" CSA Certified' NOM Certified for Mexico'2 Listed for damp location'' Emergency Sheet #: LaM AMEX -100 LQM LED, Quantum SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRICAL 'nary Circuit MOUNTING All dimensions are inches (millimeters). Shipping weight 2.6 lbs. (1.2 kgs.) Rated Supply Input Max. pe LED lifer voltage watts amps 120 .62 .05 Red LED 25+ years 277 .69 .06 --�-, 347 .77 .05 5-5/8 Green LED 25+ years 120 .62 05 (147) 277 .74 .06 _i_.l Supplemental Emergency Circuit Lamp Nominal No. of Electrical Inputs Type description Tamp voltage faces watts amps DC6 Two 06S6/6V candelabra -base 6 1 ort 12 2 incandescent DC12 Two 06S6/12V candelabra -base 12 1 ort 12 1 incandescent DC24 Two #6S6/24V candelabra -base incandescent DC48 Two 0656/48V candelabra -base incandescent LDC6 CSA LQM LED 6V DC input LDC12 CSA LQM LED 12V DC input LDC24 CSA LQM LED 24V DC input 32 CSA LQM LED �' %4 32V DC input LDC48 CSA LQM LED 48V DC input 24 1 or 2 12 .5 48 1 or 2 12 .25 6 1 ort 0.96 .16 12 1 ort 1.20 .10 24 1 or 2 1.24 .05 32 1 or 2 1.28 .04 48 1 or 2 1.36 .03 1 Based on continuous operation. 2 Electrical input shown is total for exit sign operating at indicated supply voltage. KEY FEATURES LED Unique LEDs provide extremely long life and low energy consumption. ExIT, 7-5/6 (1 ) 11-3/4 (298) o� o �o o q'o 4 11-3/4 5-M (149) (298) b4-1/2 1 (114) 7-5/8 3.13/16(193) (97) T 8-3/8 (213) 1 With Options lincluding: aluminum appearance stencil, panel faceplates and black housing) — 4 1401 i END �^ 12-1/4 {3111 t 7-1/2 1190) BACK e-1/8 (155) 12-1/4 1311) TOP (124) (1241 If 8-1/4 T (209) T 7-1/2 —17 (190) s9 1 j L/THO'N/A L/GHT/NG® AnniailtyBrands Company paf1'y Sheet#:LQM ©1993 Acuity Lighting Group, inc., Rev. 04/05 Lithonia Lighting Acuity Lighting Group, inc. Emergency Systems Group One Lithonia Way, Conyers, GA 30012 Phone: 800-3344694 Fax: 770-981-8141 In Canada:160 avenue Labrosse, Point-Cfaira, P.O.,1-19R 1A1 www.fithonia.com 'Sew/ WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16620 - BATTERY INVERTER UNIT PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Provide battery inverter unit and emergency lighting and power system complete and fully operational. B. Under normal mode the connected load shall be on. Under emergency mode the unit shall provide rated output power for a minimum period of 90 minutes. In the event of power failure, the batteries shall supply the load. Upon restoration of line power, the unit shall recharge its battery system and maintain it at full charge. Transfer between the normal and emergency mode shall be fully automatic. Output shall be 277V, single phase (normally off and normally on) and 120V, single phase (normally off and normally on). 1.3 WARRANTY A. The unit shall be guaranteed against defective workmanship and material for a period of one year after final acceptance. Lead acid batteries shall be warranteed for 10 years, 5 years full replacement and 5 years prorated. Warranty shall be confirmed by warranty registration card supplied with each unit. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Chloride, Lithonia, Holophane, Exide. 2.2 BATTERIES A. Shall be nickel cadmium type. The batteries shall be specifically designed for long life "stand-by" applications. Batteries shall have sufficient capacity to power the inverter at the rated load for a minimum of (90) minutes. The batteries must operate in an ambient temperature of 104 degrees F (40 degrees C). BA'I'I'ERY INVERTER UNIT 16620 WES 1'k'11;LD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.3 BATTERY CHARGER A. Shall be completely automatic, solid state, dual rate and shall be capable of providing 90% battery charge in twelve (12) hours or less. The charger may be a constant voltage type (with temperature compensation) self -protected from short-circuit in its output. The charger shall provide a float rate charge to maintain the batteries at their full charge with minimum water use. Charger shall include a DC voltmeter and ammeter. 2.4 INVERTER A. Shall be provided with volt-ampere and voltage ratings shown on the drawings. The output frequency shall be 60 Hertz +/-2%. The 'voltage regulation shall be better than 7% for 10-100% load and high to low battery. The output waveform shall be sinusoidal with less than 5% THD at full load. The maximum transfer time shall be less than 1 second. The inverter shall be capable of powering any combination of incandescent and fluorescent loads to 100% of its volt-ampere rating. The output shall be suitable to power the fixtures and lamps shown on the drawings. A DC input voltmeter and AC output voltmeter and ammeter shall be provided integral to the inverter and mounted on the enclosure. Shall be capable of powering switched loads to its full volt-ampere rating. 2.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. The battery inverter unit shall operate at full ratings in temperatures to 40 degrees C in a dry location, without the use of fans or other mechanical cooling. 2.6 CONTROL AND SUPERVISION A. The battery inverter unit shall contain high/low battery voltage alarm, battery voltmeter, electrolyte level monitor/alarm, AC load voltmeter, test switch, automatic low voltage battery disconnect and Utility On pilot light. The electrolyte level monitor shall use an intrinsically safe battery probe or an optical system for level detection. The control system shall contain automatic battery loading controls to load the batteries. The system shall be set to use the batteries each three or six months to greater than 50% discharge by powering normally connected emergency lighting for at least one hour. 2.7 LOAD CENTER A. The battery inverter unit shall be equipped with internal load centers as shown with (6) 20 amp bolt -on circuit breakers. Circuit breakers shall be as specified herein. Two circuits shall be normally open and shall close on loss of building power. 2.8 ENCLOSURE A. All components of the battery inverter unit shall be contained within a steel enclosure with hinged doors. Provide lock and six (6) keys. The enclosure shall have separate BATTERY INVERTER UNIT 16620 2 WES 1 HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION compartments for electronics and batteries. The enclosure shall be no larger than shown on the drawings. Provide with floor stand at bottom and wall bracket at top. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING A. Install all emergency system wiring separate from normal system wiring as required by NEC Article 700. 3.2 TESTS A. Test completed systems operation and verify that emergency lighting is provided for the required 1-1/2 hour period. 3.3 HOUSEKEEPING PAD A. Provide housekeeping pad as specified in Section 16010. END OF SECTION 16620 BATTERY INVERTER UNIT 16620 WES I HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16721- FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fire alarm systems with manual stations, detectors, signal equipment, controls, and devices. B. Related Sections 1. Division 8 Section "Hardware" for door closures/holders, electric door locks, and release devices that interface with fire alarm system. 2. Division 15 Section "Fire Protection" for waterflow, valve tamper switches and post indicator valves that interface with fire alarm system. 3. Division 15 Section "Controls" for interface between mechanical HVAC control system and fire alarm system. C. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and /44.01 conditions of Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) C. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) D. National Fire Protection Association (NEPA) 1.4 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Provide the system in compliance with the following: 1. NEPA Codes, Standards and Manuals (latest issue enforced) a. 70 - National Electrical Code b. 72 - National Fire Alarm Code c. 90A- Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 2. Uniform Fire Code (UFC) FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 WEST HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3. Washington Administrative Codes (WAC) a. WAC 296-46 Safety Standards - Installing Electric Wires and Equipment b. WAC 51-40-1101 Chapter 11, Accessibility c. WAC 51-44 State Building Code Adoption of the Uniform Fire Code d. 4. Other Codes a. Local fire code, building code, mechanical code, electrical code, rules and interpretations required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 13 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Each and all items of the Fire Alarm System shall be listed as a product of a fire alarm system manufacturer under the appropriate category by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and Factory Mutual (FM), and shall bear the UL and FM labels. All control equipment shall be listed under UL Category UOJZ as a single control unit. Partial listing is NOT acceptable. B. In addition to UL-UOJZ requirement mentioned above, the system controls shall be UL listed for Power Linnited Applications per NEC 760. All circuits must be marked in accordance with NEC article 760. C. All control equipment shall have transient protection devices to comply with UL 864 requirements. 1.6 CONTRACTOR DESIGN A. The contract drawings indicate the general nature of the fire alarm system, but do not necessarily show all components required. The drawings are intended to aid the contractor and/or subcontractor and/or supplier in providing the complete fire alarm system required. Raceways, routing and wiring are not shown on the drawings and it shall be the responsibility of the fire alarm system supplier to design raceway routing and wiring and to show the same on shop drawings. B. Evacuation alarm sound level: The number of fire alarm notification devices shall be increased if required by the AEU. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. General: Make submittals in accordance with Section 16010. B. Product Data: Submittals shall include a compilation of manufacturer's catalog or specification sheets of all system components. Items being provided shall be clearly indicated. Any variations of the submittal from the specifications shall be clearly indicated. Include the following additional information: 1. Point Schedule 2. Complete schedule of customized English message formats of alarms and troubles for system. 3. Battery systems and standby battery load calculations. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 2 '%✓ ' WESTFIhLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 4. Fire Alarm zone and address schedule including alphanumeric description for each monitor and control point. 5. Actual graphic drawings. 6. Outputs zone schedule for off -premise UL Central Station Monitoring. 7. Complete sequence of operations for all fire alarm system functions. 8. C. Shop Drawings 1. Riser Diagrams. Fire alarm supplier and/or subcontractor shall develop CAD based original fire alarm riser diagram to show main geographical fire alarm zones and point to point wiring requirements. 2. Floor Plans. CADD based floor plans shall be drafted to show conduit routing, device locations, end of line resistors, wire count and color coded wiring between device locations on each plan. Show room names and numbers for each room where a fire alarm device is located. 3. Release of CADD files for shop drawings. Contractor may request to utilize the project CAD drawing files in producing shop drawings. Request shall be made by signing Sparling's "Agreement for Release of CADD Files" letter. 4. Ownership. All original shop drawings shall become the property of the owner at the completion of the project. D. Submissions to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for Submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals", make an identical submission to authorities having jurisdiction. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Architect for review. E. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with requirements. F. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. Comply with NFPA 72. G. Certificate of Completion: Comply with NFPA 72. H. Operation and Maintenance Manual: Per Section 16010. Include record drawings, Certificate of Completion, and test results. 1.8 TECHNICAL BID PROPOSAL A. Technical Bid Proposal: The fire alarm system supplier shall submit with his bid a technical proposal of adequate depth to fully define the system offered. Data of a business nature is not required. Manufacturer shall list references with telephone numbers for proof that he has had experience in installing fire alarm systems of this type. As a minimum, the technical proposal shall include the following: 1. Description of the configuration and operation of the proposed system. 2. Include catalog cut sheets or other descriptive material of major components. 3. A complete copy of the fire alarm system specification with each subparagraph noted with the comment, "compliance," "deviation," or "alternate." FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 WES MELD hLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION a. By noting the term "compliance," it shall be understood that the manufacturer is in full compliance with the item specified and will provide exactly the same with no deviations. b. By noting the term "deviation," it shall be understood that the manufacturer prefers to provide a different component in lieu of that specified. Manufacturer shall indicate all deviations. c. By noting the term "Alternate," it shall be understood that the manufacturer proposes to provide the same operating function but prefers to do it in a different manner. 4. Items specifically called for in this specification are to provide for specific performance and quality of components desired and shall not restrict any manufacturer from furnishing an equivalent product for the performance an operation intended as described above. Two copies of the technical proposal from the proposed fire alarm system supplier shall be submitted to the Owner at the time of or prior to the bid opening. 1.9 TO QUALIFY AS AN ACCEPTABLE SUPPLIER AND/OR SUBCONTRACTOR A. Have the ability to provide the fire alarm system indicated in the contract documents from the criteria contained in the specification and the information shown on the drawings. B. Provide AHJ approved shop drawings which show complete system plan views indicating equipment layout, device layout, raceway routing and sizing, point to point wiring, termination and connection diagrams and wire numbers for all conductors and terminations. C. Prior to bid determine the complete system components required to conform to local code and AHJ requirements. Include the cost of all components to all contractors in bid price. D. To have been in the business of installing and maintaining the specific type of system equipment under the present firm name for at least five years. E. To have distributing and/or installing the specific brand and model line of system equipment for at least three years prior to the date on the contract documents. F. To have the capability of dispatching a maintenance or repair truck with a qualified repairman to the job site within four (4) hours of a request for service on the equipment. 1.10 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Alarm System Supplier and/or Subcontractor Requirements: 1. Coordinate the installation of the fire alarm system including the preparation of shop drawings in conformance with 16721,1.7. 2. Furnish and load all software required to implement a complete monitoring and control system. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 4 1441.4 WESTFIhLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Contractor Requirements: 1. Submit shop drawings to the "Authority Having Jurisdiction" (AHJ} as defined in NFPA 72. The AHJ for this project is the local Fire Marshal < and the Washington State Fire Marshal.> One copy of the above shop drawings with this approval evidenced shall be included with the submittal required by Section 16010. 2. Provide raceway, back boxes, wiring, and power circuits for the fire alarm system, and install the devices ready for final termination at the Fire Alarm Panel by the Fire Alarm System Subcontractor. Contact the fire alarm system subcontractor prior to bidding to determine exact requirements and include all costs in the bid price. 3. Provide all 120V power circuits to fire alarm control equipment and remote power supplies. Remote power supplies are not shown. Contact the fire alarm system subcontractor prior to bidding to determine exact 120V power requirements and include all costs in the bid price. 4. In addition, the contractor shall schedule periodic inspections by the AHJ during the course of the installation and shall make any minor corrections, deletions, relocations or additions to the system as required for acceptance of the completed system by the AHJ. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all required permits. 5. Coordinate the interface requirements between mechanical control systems and the fire alarm system. 6. Performance Test: Final approval of the fire alarm system is contingent upon a successful performance test, accomplished by the installer and witnessed by the Fire Marshal. 1.11 DESCRIPTION A. General: Non -coded, addressable -analog fire alarm system with manual and automatic alarm initiation; automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors; and multiplexed signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only. Provide a complete and fully operational fire detection and alarm system which fully complies with the local fire code currently enforced at the project location. If any conflict occurs between government adopted code rules and these contract documents, the codes are to govern. B. General: Extend the existing non -coded, addressable -analog fire alarm system to provide a complete and fully operational fire detection and alarm system which fully complies with the local fire code currently enforced at the project location. If any conflict occurs between government adopted code rules and these contract documents, the codes are to govern. 1.12 GENERAL OPERATION A. The system shall be solid state, microprocessor based, using a true digital format between the Central Processing Unit (CPU) and each addressable device. Systems which do not transmit digital data between CPU and devices over a one (1) pair cable are not acceptable. System shall be able to communicate with a minimum of 100 addressable devices per pair of wires. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 WESIHIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Adding points within the system, up to its maximum point capacity shall not require memory additions. C. The control panel shall be initially configured to monitor a minimum of 380 addressable points. Control panels, transponders and remote power supplies shall be sized to accommodate 20% future growth beyond the scope of the initial project. All secondary power supply batteries shall be sized for future system growth. Spare battery capacity required by NFPA 72 and local codes shall be in addition to future system growth capacity. D. Under normal condition the fire alarm control panel shall display a "SYSTEM NORMAL" message and the current time and date. E. Should an abnormal condition be detected the appropriate LED (AIarm, Supervisory, or Trouble) shall flash. The panel audible signal shall pulse for alarm conditions and sound steadily for trouble and supervisory conditions. F. The panel shall display the following information relative to the abnormal condition of a point in the system. These three characteristics relative to an abnormal condition of a point shall be displayed simultaneously: 1. Custom location label (80 characters minimum) 2. Type of device (Le. smoke, manual station, waterflow) 3. Point status (i.e. alarm, trouble) G. All information displayed by the fire alarm control panel shall also be capable of being transmitted and displayed on any system CRT and printer or graphic terminal. H. Provide live and pre-recorded voice annunciation in the occupied areas of the building. Provide combination horn/strobe system in mechanical areas and garages. Subordinate Control Panel on floors indicated, to interface with the Master Control Panel, and to provide power and monitoring of initiating devices, indicating devices, fireman's handsets, and control devices. Master Control Panel shall continuously poll the subordinate control panel(s) to receive and send alarm, supervisory and control data. 1.13 OPERATION OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Operation of any initiation device shall immediately cause all of the following: 1. All fire alarm speakers to sound a three pulse temporial tone pattern (per ANSI S3.41) followed by a voice message chime tone and pre-recorded voice message throughout the facility until silenced by a switch at the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) or until the system is reset. Visual alarm lights throughout shall flash repetitively until the system is reset. 2. Auxiliary controlled devices shall operate until the alarm condition is corrected and the system reset. 3. Full English language annunciation of the alarm condition, type and location at the FACP display. An audible signal shall sound and the alarm condition shall flash on the FACP display and CRT until acknowledged. Emergency instructions shall be displayed in English for the operator. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 6 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 4. Automatically transmit a general alarm and common trouble alarm to the local Fire Department via the Owner's monitoring company. 5. Send a signal to the mechanical control system to identify when each of the following areas are in alarm: 6. Upon receipt of the signal the Mechanical Control System will automatically initiate fan control sequence. Coordinate all fan control requirements with mechanical. B. Air handling equipment to be automatically shutdown only when activated by the smoke detector located in the supply air duct downstream of the filters. Both the supply fan and its related exhaust fan shall be shut down by the same sensor. C. History Logging: The system shall log and store 300 events in an alarm log and 300 events in a trouble log. These events shall be stored in random access memory with battery protection. Each event shall include the time and date of the events occurrence. D. A drill switch is to be provided at the Fire Alarm Control Panel to sound an evacuation alarm signal but not send an alarm to the Fire Department. E. The system, including annunciation, and remote annunciation shall be completely supervised to sound an audible and visual trouble signal upon the occurrence of any open or grounded circuits except that auxiliary control circuits (door holders, and fan shutdown) and smoke detector remote indicator lights need not be supervised. An open or grounded zone circuit or annunciator circuit shall illuminate the trouble lamp and sound the trouble alarm at the control panel. F. Sprinkler System Monitoring Coordinate the Fire Alarm System with the Sprinkler System to provide circuits for detection and annunciation as required by the AHJ to supervise PIV, OSY and gate valve positions. Provide circuits for detection and annunciation of water flow. Each water flow device and it's associated valve position switch shall have their own address. Activation of any tamper switch shall activate the system supervisory trouble light. Differentiation between valve tamper switch and open/or grounds in the initiation circuit wiring shall be provided. G. Elevator Capture. Provide circuitry to the elevator controllers to indicate when an alarm has been initiated by the associated elevator lobby smoke detectors to initiate recall. Coordinate exact circuitry required with elevator subcontractor. Provide circuits from FACP to corresponding elevator controller. H. Bypass Switches: Provide the following bypass switches for testing purposes: 1. Elevator Bypass - to prevent recalling the elevators. 2. Door Release Bypass - to prevent releasing the smoke doors. 3. Fan Control Bypass - to prevent shutdown of fans or starting of elevator and stairwell pressurization fans. 4. Remote Alarm Bypass - to prevent the transmission of a fire alarm to the remote monitoring agency. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 7 WESIFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION I. Provide live and prerecorded voice evacuation announcement in all occupied areas of the building. 1. The automatic responses of the system shall be augmented by the manual activation of the communications system(s). 2. An operator at the voice command station shall have the ability to use the microphone to transmit live emergency voice paging messages. 3. Voice system microphone shall be in location approved by the AHJ. 1.14 DEFINITIONS A. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel. B. LED: Light -emitting diode. C. Definitions in NEPA apply to fire alarm terms used in this section. 1.15 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Existing Fire Alarm Equipment: Maintain fully operational until new equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service and label existing fire alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building. B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of the new fire alarm system, disconnect and remove existing fire alarm equipment and restore damaged surfaces. 1. In coordination with the architect, these materials shall be made available for his inspection and decision as to whether the Owner will retain possession. Items selected for retention shall be turned over to the Owner. These items shall be delivered to a location on the premises selected by the Owner. Take reasonable care to avoid damage to this material. If the contractor fails to conform to this requirement, he shall purchase and turn over to the Owner replacement material of like kind and quantity. 2. All material not selected for retention by the Owner and debris shall be removed from site and legally disposed of by the contractor. 1.16 INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS The contractor is responsible for coordinating the system with owner furnished and other contractor furnished systems and equipment. The work consists of but is not limited to the following: A. Mechanical Control Panels. Division 15 automatically controls all smoke dampers. Provide a dry contact with wiring to mechanical control panels to signal a fire emergency mode. B. Duct Smoke Detectors. Duct smoke detectors and associated sampling tubes installed by Division 15 contractor. Provide final connections and testing of duct smoke detectors. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 8 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Elevators: 1. Fire Emergency. Control module dry contact with wiring to the elevator controllers to signal a fire emergency mode for automatic elevator recall. 2. Elevator Lobby Smoke Detectors. To signal smoke in an elevator lobby to the FACP. 3. Elevator power shut down control circuit shall be monitored for presence of operating voltage. Loss of voltage shall cause a supervisory signal at the control panel and remote annunciators 4. Fire Signal Speakers. Provide speakers for all elevators. Coordinate installation with Division 14. 1.17 SPARE COMPONENTS A. Furnish the Owner with the following spare components: 1. Quantity Item 2. 2 Manual stations. 3. 4 Smoke Detectors of each type on project. 4. 2 Heat Detectors of each type on project. 5. 6 Smoke/heat detector bases. 6. 4 Fire Alarm Speakers 7. 4 Visual Alarm Lights 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Provide per 16010. Record drawings shall clearly indicate: 1. Actual routing of all raceways and location of all junction boxes. 2. Actual cable types, numbers and routing. 3. Actual system wiring diagrams, connection diagrams and interface of all components in the system. 1.19 UNIT PRICES A. Provide unit prices to add/delete the following: Manual Pull Station Smoke Detector Duct Smoke Detector Heat Detector Fire Alarm Chime Fire Alarm Speaker Visual Alarm Light Monitoring Module FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION Control Module (control relay) Remote Indicating Light Unit prices shall include shop drawings, engineering, and any system programming required for each device. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. All equipment shall be the product of a single manufacturer except that certain individual components which are regularly used as part of the system may be the product of a different manufacturer. Approved manufacturers: 1. Simplex Time Recorder Company 2.2 PRINTOUT OF EVENTS A. On receipt of the signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble), and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print system reset event, including the same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printout of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events. 2.3 FACP ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY A. Plain -English-language descriptions of alarm, supervisory, and trouble events; and addresses and locations of alarm -initiating or supervisory devices originating the report. Display monitoring actions, system and component status, system commands, programming information, and data from the system's historical memory. 2.4 AUTOMATIC REPORTING A. Provide for connection via telephone line to an approved monitoring agency. System shall report both alarm and trouble signals for each major geographic zone. Conform with applicable requirements of NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code. Owner will pay initial charges and contract with the monitoring agency for interface device(s) and monthly charges subsequent to completion of the project. 2.5 CENTRAL FACP A. Cabinet Lockable steel enclosure. Arrange interior components so operations required for testing or for normal maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than one unit is required to form a complete control panel, fabricate FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 10 WESIF ELDSHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION with matching modular unit enclosure to accommodate components and to allow ample gutter space for field wiring and interconnecting panels. 1. Identify each enclosure with an engraved, red, laminated, phenolic -resin nameplate with lettering not less than 1/2 inch high. Identify individual components and modules within cabinets with permanent labels. 2. Mounting: Flush. 3. Mounting: Surface. B. Alarm and Supervisory Systems: Separate and independent in the FACP. Alarm - initiating zone boards consist of plug-in cards. Construction requiring removal of field wiring for module replacement is unacceptable. C. Control Modules: Include types and capacities required to perform all functions of fire alarm systems. D. Indications: Local, visible, and audible signals announce alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions. Provide each type of audible alarm with a different sound. E. Resetting Controls: Prevent the resetting of alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals while the alarm or trouble condition still exists. F. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at the FACP and addressable system components, including annunciation, supervision, and control. 1. Display: A minimum of 80 characters; alarm, supervisory, and component status messages; and indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke detector sensitivity and other parameters. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands. G. Voice Alarm: An emergency communication system, includes central voice alarm system components complete with microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators. Features include the following. 1. Three alarm channels to permit simultaneous transmission of different announcements to different zones or floors automatically and by using the central control microphone. All announcements are made over dedicated, supervised communication lines. 2. Status annunciator indicates the status of various voice alarm speaker zones and the status of firefighters' two-way telephone communication zones. 2.6 SUBORDINATE CONTROL PANELS A. Provide microprocessor -based subordinate control panels, located on floors indicated. To provide direct interface, supervision, and termination points for initiating and indicating circuits, control circuits, firemen's communications circuits, and digital communications with the Main Control Panel. Provides DC power for field devices, and audio power amplification and switching for loudspeaker circuits. B. In the event of communications loss with the FACE', the subordinate control panel must be capable of reacting to all its connected input devices and applying its own stand - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 11 WESIF1hLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION alone local mode programming instruction to determine the status of all its connected outputs. C. Integral firemen's handset and paging microphone. D. Provide sufficient cabinet space, power supply capacity, etc., to increase the number of field devices and zone circuits by at least 20 percent. E. Power amplifiers shall be sized for at least 20 percent spare capacity, based on a minimum tap power of 2 watts per speaker, and assuming a minimum load of 50 speakers per floor. F. Provide sufficient strobe outputs to provide 20 percent spare capacity, based on the rated current of the strobes. G. Provide termination, power and control for firemen's handsets of the floors served by the panels, and communications with the other floors via the Master Control Panel. H. Each subordinate control panel shall be provided with a maintenance free battery backup system sized for the hours specified herein. 2.7 EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Provide all necessary equipment enclosures, power supplies, batteries, signal, relay and zone modules, drivers, interfaces and amplifiers of types and capacities to perform all functions of the fire alarm system. B. Provide secondary (standby) power capacity meeting the requirements of NFPA 72. 2.8 REMOTE LCD ANNUNCIATOR A. Description: Duplicate annunciator functions of the FACP for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Also duplicate manual switching functions of the FACP, including acknowledge, silence, reset, and test. 1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Class 1. 2. Mounting: Surface cabinet, NEMA 250, Class 1. B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display same as the FACP. Controls with associated LED's to permit acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals identical to those in the FACP. 2.9 GRAPHIC LOBBY ANNUNCIATOR A. Manufacturer: H.R. Kirkland GP -6. Shall include low current LEDs, common trouble circuit, power on light, audible alert, lamp test, tamperproof LEDs and display, stainless steel doors. Graphics custom painted per architect's direction. Submit color boards for review after the graphic layouts have been approved by the AHJ. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 12 WESI'HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.10 TRANSIENT PROTECTION DEVICES A. All control equipment shall have transient protection devices to comply with UL 864 requirements: 1. Provide an Isolated Loop Circuit Protector (ILCP) device on all fire alarm initiating circuits, alarm indicating appliance circuits, signaling line circuits which extend beyond the main building by either aerial, underground or other methods, walkways, bridges or other above ground connectors. 2. The ILCP shall be located as close as practicable to the point at which the circuits leave or enter the building. 3. The ILCP grounding conductor is to be a No. 12 AWG wire having a maximum length of 28 feet to be run in as straight a line as practicable and connected to a building ground electrode system (unified ground) per Article 800 of the National Electrical Code. 4. The ILCP is to have a line to line response time of less than one (1) nanosecond capable of accepting greater than 2000 amps (9 joules each line) to earth. Shield to earth current is to be 5000 amps maximum. 5. The ILCP shall be protected by a high dielectric insulating material and of small enough size to mount in a standard 4" square 2 -1/8" deep electrical box. 6. Spark gap devices or devices incorporated in or installed within the fire alarm control panel in Iieu of the specified ILCP are not acceptable. 7. All ILCP's shall comply with UL 497B requirements. 2.11 SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY A. General: Components include gel cell sealed batteries, charger, and an automatic transfer switch 1. Battery Nominal Life Expectancy: 2 years, minimum. B. Battery Capacity: Comply with NEPA 72. C. Battery Charger: Solid-state, fully automatic, variable -charging -rate type. Provide capacity for 150 percent of the connected system load while maintaining batteries at full charge. If batteries are fully discharged, the charger shall recharge them completely within four hours. Supervise charger output as part of system power supply supervision. D. Integral Automatic Transfer Switch: Transfers the load to the battery without loss of signals or status indications when normal power fails. 2.12 ONE-WAY VOICE COMMUNICATION A. The system shall incorporate one-way voice communication and tone generation. B. A central audio control module shall be provided for the necessary alarm message/tone generation, main and remote microphone connections and mixer/pre- amplifier circuits. Continuous supervision shall be provided along with specific information as to the type of failure should a problem occur (e.g. main microphone trouble, tone trouble, etc). Audio outputs shall have individual gain control. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 13 WES1'FHELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION C. A hand held, push to talk microphone shall be provided, recessed within a protective panel -mount enclosure. The microphone shall be a noise -canceling communication type with a frequency range of 200 Hz to 4000 Hz and shall be equipped with a self- winding five foot long coiled cable. An LED indicator shall be provided to indicate the microphone push -to -talk button has been pressed and speaker circuits are ready for transmission. The microphone shall be supervised for disconnection. This function shall also be provided at the voice command center with a key lock. D. An audio control switch module shall be furnished to provide manual access to audio operations for authorized personnel. The module shall include an "ALL Circuits" switch, "Aux Tone 1" switch and "Audio Trouble Reset" switch. These switches and associated LED indicators shall be supervised for disarrangement or failure. E. Audio power amplifiers shall be furnished with a self-contained filtered 24VDC power supply, transformer, and amplifier monitor circuits. The amplifiers shall provide a 70V RMS output with a frequency response of 120 Hz to 12,000 Hz. Provide sufficient amplification to operate all system speakers simultaneously plus twenty (20) percent spare capacity. No one amplifier shall provide audio power for more than 15 percent of the speaker load for the building, F. Provide at least one back-up amplifier capable of replacing any failed amplifier at each amplifier bank or node with audio amplifiers. G. The speaker circuits shall be capable of supplying 25V RMS audio power from the system amplifiers. Supervision for open, short, or ground fault conditions shall be provided. Individual and distinct trouble indications shall be provided for each fault. H. Digitized tones for alarm three pulse temporial and auxiliary requirements (wail, horn, chime, etc.) shall be provided. I. Manual voice paging sequence 1. The system shall be configured to allow selective voice paging. Upon activation of any speaker manual control switch, two (2) attention getting beeps shall sound over the speakers indicating an impending voice message will occur. 2. If any speaker manual control switches are activated, the control panel operator shall be able to make announcements via the push -to -talk paging microphone over the pre -selected speakers. This shall be accomplished by means of an "ALL Circuit" switch. The system shall allow zoning such that each building or individual floors can be paged. 2.13 MANUAL PULL STATIONS A. Description: Fabricated of metal or plastic, and finished in red with molded, raised - letter operating instructions of contrasting color, 1. Double -action mechanism requiring two actions, such as a push and a pull, to initiate an alarm. 2. Break glass type with 10% (six minimum) spare glass elements. 3. Station Reset: Key or wrench operated, rated for the voltage and current at which it operates. 4. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory -fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 14 WEST HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION integral battery -powered audible hom intended to discourage false alarm operation. 5. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory -fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. 6. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate manual -station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP. 2.14 SMOKE DETECTORS A. General: Include the following features: 1. Operating Voltage: 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Self -Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation except resetting the control panel. 3. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components are mounted in a module that connects in a tamper-resistant manner to a fixed base with a twist -locking plug connection. Terminals in the fixed base accept building wiring. 4. Integral Visual -Indicating Light: LED type to indicate when detector has operated. 5. Sensitivity: Can be tested and adjusted in-place after installation. 6. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FAC'. 7. Remote Controllability: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors are analog - addressable type, individually monitored at the FAQ' for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP. 8. All smoke detectors located adjacent to roll down smoke doors or motorized smoke doors shall be provided with a relay base. B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Include the following features: 1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-celI receiver. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A. C. Ionization Detector: Include the following features: 1. Responsive to both visible and invisible products of combustion. 2. Self -compensating for changes in environmental conditions. D. Beam Type Smoke Detector: Each detector consists of a separate transmitter and receiver with the following features: 1. Adjustable Sensitivity: Six -level range, minimum. 2. Linear Range of Coverage: 600 feet, minimum. 3. Tamper Switch: Initiates trouble signal at the central FACP when either transmitter or receiver is disturbed. 4. Separate Color -Coded LEDs: Indicate normal, alarm, and trouble status. Report any detector trouble, including power loss, to the central FACP as a composite "trouble" signal. E. Duct Smoke Detector: Photoelectric type. 1. Sampling Tube: Design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 2. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor -control circuit. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 15 WES I'FIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.15 OTHER DETECTORS A. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F (57 deg C) or rate of rise of temperature that exceeds 15 deg F (8.3 deg C) per minute, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke detector bases. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACT. B. Heat Detector, Fixed -Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 190 deg F (88 deg C). 1. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke detector bases. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP. 2.16 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Description: Equip for mounting as indicated and have screw terminals for system connections. 1. Combination Devices: Factory -integrated audible and visible devices in a single - mounting assembly and enclosure. 2. Provide Rand] Industries 5" square, 2-7/8" deep outlet box with plaster ring. B. Bells: Electric -vibrating, 24-V dc, under -dome type; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind the bell. When operating, bells provide a sound -pressure level of 94 dB, measured 10 feet from the bell. 10 -inch size, unless otherwise indicated. Bells are weatherproof where indicated. C. Chimes, Low -Level Output: Vibrating type, 75 dB minimum rated output. D. Chimes, High -Level Output: Vibrating type, 81 dB minimum rated output. E. Horns: Electric -vibrating -polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Horns produce a sound -pressure level of 96 dB, measured 10 feet from the horn. F. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971 with clear lens. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1 -inch -high letters. Flash rate shall not exceed two flashes per second nor be less than one flash per second. Maximum pulse duration shall be 0.2 seconds with a maximum duty cycle of 40 percent. Shall be suitable for installation in a single gang outlet box. Color of housing shall be white in finished areas such as offices and corridors, red housing in unfinished areas such as garage and mechanical areas. 1. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 2. Combination visual/audible notification devices allowed only when shown. G. Voice/Tone Speakers: 1. High -Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W. 2. Low -Range Units: Rated 1/4 to 2 W. 3. Mounting: Flush, semirecessed, surface, or surface -mounted; bidirectional as indicated. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 16 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 4. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to the acoustical environment of the speaker location. 5. Speakers shall be UL listed for emergency alarm systems. 2.17 REMOTE DEVICE LOCATION -INDICATING LIGHTS AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES A. Description: LED indicating light near each smoke detector that may not be readily visible when standing in the room. Light is connected to flash when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. The lamp is flush mounted in a single gang plate. A red, laminated, phenolic -resin identification plate at the indicating light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating the signal and room where the smoke detector. 2.18 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching door plate. 1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force. 2. Wall -Mounted Units: Flush mounted, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc. 4. Rating: 120-V ac. B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware. 2.19 MONITOR MODULE A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a multiplex system address for listed fire and sprinkler alarm -initiating devices with normally open contacts and for heat detectors located in high ambient temperature areas. 2.20 CONTROL RELAY MODULE A. Description: Microelectronic control module listed for use in controlling smoke/fire dampers, door release service and other control functions. 2.21 REMOTE MICROPHONE A. Description: Supervised microphone control at a remote location for manual paging. With "Ready to Talk" LED and keyed switch for controlled access. 2.22 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMIi'i'ER A. Listed and labeled under UL 864 and NFPA 72. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 17 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the FACP panel, and automatically captures one or two telephone lines and dials a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with the central station(s), the signal is transmitted. The unit supervises up to two telephone lines. Where supervising two lines, if service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, the unit initiates a local trouble signal and transmits a signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. When telephone service is restored, unit automatically reports that event to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, the local trouble signal is initiated. C. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. Battery capacity shall be adequate to comply with NFPA 72 requirements. D. Self Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station. 2.23 RADIO ALARM TRANSMITTER A. Listed and labeled under NFPA 72 and NFPA 1221. Comply with 47 CFR 90. B. Description: Manufacturer's recognized commercial product; factory assembled, wired, and tested; and ready for installation and operation. 1. Packaging A single, modular, NEMA 250, Type 1 metal enclosure with a tamper-resistant flush tumbler lock. 2. Signal Transmission Mode and Frequency: VHF or UHF 2-W power output, coordinated with operating characteristics of the established remote alarm receiving station designated by Owner. 3. Normal Power Input: 120-V ac. 4. Secondary Power: Integral -sealed, rechargeable, 12-V battery and charger. Comply with NFPA 72 requirements for battery capacity. 5. Antenna: Omnidirectional, coaxial half -wave, dipole type with driving point impedance matched to transmitter and antenna cable output impedance. Wind - load strength of antenna and mounting hardware and supports shall withstand 100 mph with a gust factor of 1.3 without failure. 6. Antenna Cable: Coaxial cable with impedance matched to the transmitter output impedance. 7. Antenna -Cable Connectors: Weatherproof. 8. Alarm Interface Devices: Circuit boards, modules, and other auxiliary devices, integral to the transmitter, matching fire alarm and other system outputs to message generating inputs of the transmitter that produce required message transmissions. C. Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the FACP, or from its own internal sensors or controls, and automatically transmits signal along with a unique code that identifies the transmitting station to the remote alarm receiving station. The message transmitted corresponds to standard designations for the fire -reporting system to which the signal is being transmitted and includes separately designated messages in response to the following events or conditions: 1. Transmitter Low -Battery Condition: Sent when battery voltage is below 85 percent of rated value. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 18 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2. System Test Message: Initiated by a manual test switch within the transmitter cabinet or automatically, at an optionally preselected time, once every 24 hours with transmission time controlled by a programmed timing device integral to transmitter controls. 3. Transmitter Trouble Message: Actuated by failure, in excess of one -minute duration, of the transmitter normal power source or derangement of the wiring of the transmitter or any alarm input interface circuit or device connected to it. 4. Local Fire Alarm System Trouble Message: Initiated by events or conditions that cause a trouble signal to be indicated on the building system. 5. Local Fire Alarm System Alarm Message: Actuated when the building system goes into an alarm state. Identifies zone or device that initiated the alarm. 6. Local Alarm System Supervisory Alarm Message: Actuated when the building alarm system indicates a supervisory alarm. 2.24 FIRE ALARM TERMINAL CABINETS A. NEMA Type 1 enclosure, hinged door front with flush hinge, latch and lock. Provide terminal blocks in all cabinets with 25% spare capacity. Box and front shall be steel, painted red with label "Fire Alarm". Flush mounted. 2.25 GUARDS FOR PHYSICAL PROTECTION A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, notification appliance, or other device requiring protection. 1. Factory fabricated and furnished by the manufacturer of the device. 2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device. 2.26 WIRE A. Non -Power -Limited Circuits: Conductors shall be 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color -coded insulation. 1. Low -Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum, stranded copper (maximum of seven strands). 2. Line -Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum, solid or stranded copper. B. Power -Limited Circuits: NFPA 70, Types FPL, FPLR, or FPLP, as recommended by manufacturer. 227 RACEWAYS, OUTLETS AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Shall conform to specification sections "Raceways" and "Outlet and Junction Boxes". B. Provide 5" square by 2-2/7" deep outlet boxes with plaster ring for all flush mounted notification appliances. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 19 WESII.ILLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2.28 SURVIVABLE CIRCUITS A, Where required by applicable codes and standards provide survivable circuits using one or more of the following methods: 1. Fire Alarm Circuit Integrity (CI) Cable, 2 -hour fire rated per UL 1724. 2. Electrical Circuit Protective Systems (FRIT) - System No. 17 of the UL Building Materials Directory. 3. Installation in a 2 -hour rated shaft or enclosure. 4. Installation in a 2 -hour rated stairwell in a building fully sprinklered in accordance with NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SYSTEM SUPPLIER AND/OR SUBCONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Determine the complete system raceway, wiring and outlet box requirements. B, Provide and/or supervise all wiring, wiring terminations and connections. C. Provide and/or supervise all equipment installation. D. Perforin and/or supervise all testing during and after installation. E. Certify in writing to the Architect at completion stating that system has been inspected, tested and is complete and fully operational in accordance with contract documents. F. Instruct and/or assist the contractor in instructing Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the system. 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Manual Pull Stations: Mount semiflush in recessed back boxes. B. Water -Flow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler valve station required to be supervised. C. Ceiling -Mounted Smoke Detectors: Not less than 4 inches from a side wall to the near edge. For exposed solid joist construction, mount detectors on the bottom of joists. On smooth ceilings, install not more than 30 feet apart in any direction. D. Wall -Mounted Smoke Detectors: At least 4 inches, but not more than 12 inches, below the ceiling. E. Smoke Detectors near Air Registers: Install no closer than 3 feet. F. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Duct smoke detector and sampling tubes installation by Division 15 contractor. 1. Duct smoke detector shall be listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air -handling system is operating. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 20 WES1 FthLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2. Sampling tubes shall extend the full width of the duct. 3. Coordinate installation with Division 15 sheetmetal installer. 4. Provide a remote indicator light when the detector is above a suspended ceiling or in an area which is not readily accessible. G. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location. H. Audible Alarm -Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush -mounted back boxes with the device -operating mechanism concealed. I. Visible Alarm -Indicating Devices: Install wall mounted devices such that the lens is not less than 80 inches and not greater than 96 inches above the finished floor. Ceiling mount devices allowed where shown and shall be approved for ceiling application. More than two visible notification devices in the same room or adjacent space within the field of view shall flash in synchronization. Synchronization of devices not in the same field of view is allowed. In corridors where there are more than two devices in any field of view, they shall be spaced a minimum of 55' apart or they shall flash in synchronization. J. Device Location -Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor when the device is not visible when standing in the room. K. FACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor. L. Annunciator: Install with the top of the panel not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor. M. Antenna for Radio Alarm Transmitter: Mount to building structure where indicated. Use mounting arrangement and substrate connection that will resist 100 -mph (160 - km/h) wind load with a 1.3 gust factor without damage. 3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Provide all wiring complete per system requirements. Wiring shall be contained in steel raceways and red color junction boxes when required by code. Seal raceways to prevent air passage at each smoke detector. Permanent wire markers shall be affixed to all conductors at terminations and splices. Numbering system shall be consistent with shop drawings. All terminations shall be T&B "Sta-Kon" (or equivalent) self insulated, flanged or forked tongue lugs where connected at screw type terminals. B. Wiring within Enclosures: Wiring in main control cabinet shall be neatly arranged and bundled with tie wraps. Separate power -limited and non -power -limited conductors as recommended by the manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp - on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 21 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION C. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made. D. Color -Coding: Color -code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color -code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color -code for supervisory circuits. Color -code audible alarm -indicating circuits differently from alarm -initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm -indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red. E. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one -hour -rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signal from other floors or zones. F. Provide 1/2" raceway and wiring from the control panel to the main telephone terminal board as required for alarm transmission to the monitoring company. G. Provide 1/2", 3 #12 from control panel to 20 amp C.B.s with lock -on device in a 120 volt panelboard. Panelboard on emergency distribution system when applicable. H. Survivable Circuits: a. A single notification appliance circuit shall not serve more than one notification zone. b. Failure of equipment or a fault on one or more insulation wiring conductors of one notification appliance circuit shall not result in functional loss of any other notification appliance circuit. c. Notification appliance circuits and any other circuits necessary for the operation of the notification appliance circuits shall be protected from the point at which they exit the control unit until the point that they enter the notification zone that they serve using one or more of the following methods: 1) A 2 -hour rated cable assembly 2) A 2 -hour rated shaft or enclosure 3) A 2 -hour rated stairwell in a building fully sprinklered in accordance with NEPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Paint power -supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM." When the fire alarm system primary power is served from a branch circuit panelboard the panel cover shall be labeled "FIRE ALARM PRIMARY SOURCE" and the branch circuit breakers serving the fire alarm system provided with "lock -on" devices. 3.5 GROUNDING A. Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's written instructions to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common -mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 22 WES1FIhLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding. C. Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity as indicated. Comply with installation requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding." D. Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. For audio circuits, minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common -mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Provide 5 -ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance. E. Ground radio alarm transmitter system and equipment as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.6 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide where required for access to system components. Access doors are not shown on the drawings. B. Provide door, mounting frame and trim for access openings in ceiling. Door shall have fire rating equivalent to that of the ceiling it is installed in. Nominal door opening shall be 24" x 24" with hinge fully concealed. Latches shall be flush screwdriver operated type. In latched position, door shall seat firmly against frame at all points and there shall be no warps, sags or open gaps. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and connections and to supervise pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system. Report results in writing. B. Pretesting: After installation, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform complete pretesting. Determine, through pretesting, the compliance of the system with requirements of Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones, and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test results. C. Report of Pretesting: After pretesting is complete, provide a letter certifying the installation is complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of witnesses to preliminary tests. D. Final Test Notice: Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing. E. Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to procedures outlined in NFPA 72. Minimum required tests are as follows: 1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. 2. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation -testing device. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 WESfFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the circuit resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on record drawings. 4, Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual. 5. Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under open circuit conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to class of wiring used. 6. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at the control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion. 7. Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved operation and maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance items at each station, including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and using all communications options. For each item, observe related performance at all devices required to be affected by the item under all system sequences. Observe indicating lights, displays, signal tones, and annunciator indications. Observe all voice audio for routing, clarity, quality, freedom from noise and distortion, and proper volume level. 8. Test Both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner specified. F. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets Specifications and complies with applicable standards. G. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test results in the form of a test log. Submit log on the satisfactory completion of tests. H. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily completed. 3.8 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and marred finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. 3.9 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below: 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and maintaining equipment and schedules. Provide a minimum of 8 hours' training. 2. Training Aid: Use the approved final version of the operation and maintenance manual as a training aid. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 24 WES I'H'1ELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice. 3.10 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, controls, and sensitivities to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three requested visits to Project site for this purpose. 3.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1. Provide all information as required by Section 16010. 2. Include record drawings, letter of certification and record drawings. END OF SECTION 16721 41, Imo FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16721 WES 1'HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16724 - SMOKE DAMPER CONTROL PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide 120 volt power, fire alarm control connections, control module (CMX), wiring and relays to control smoke/fire dampers specified under Division 15. B. Contractor Design: Raceways, routing, and wiring are not shown on the drawings. Contractor shall be responsible for design of conduit routing and wiring and to show the same on shop drawings. System shall be in steel raceways. 1.3 OPERATION A. Provide control modules on each floor for each of the fan systems (supply, exhaust, return) serving the floor. Derive 20 amp, 120 volt power from the nearest panel serving the floor on which dampers are located. Provide emergency circuit if fan serving the area is on emergency power. Derive control circuits from fire alarm transponder(s). Monitor the fan running status via the fire alarm system. Program the control modules to close when the fan is running and open when the fan is stopped. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Assemble product data in submittal brochure as specified in Section 16010. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Floor Plans: Submit CAD based shop drawings to show device locations, raceway routing, and color coded wiring between devices. Show panelboard and circuit numbers serving each damper. Show room names and numbers for each room where a fire/smoke damper is located. 2. Detail Plans: Prepare original Auto CAD based drawings showing termination and connection diagrams at control modules and relays. 3. Release of CAD Files: Contractor may request to utilize Sparling CAD files for assistance in producing shop drawings. Request shall be made by signing Sparling's "Agreement for Release of CAD Files" letter. SMOKE DAMPER CONTROL 16724 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SMOKE DAMPERS A. Electrically operated, single phase, 120 volt, two position. Dampers close upon de- energization. Damper and electric activator are specified under Division 15. 2.2 CONTROL RELAYS A. Heavy duty plug-in relay, 10 amp rated contacts. IDEC RHIB-U-AC120 with SHIB-05 socket. 2.3 ENCLOSURE A. NEMA 1 with hinged cover, 8"h x 12"w x 4"d. Provide nameplate per section 16010 with 1/2" lettering on each cover "SMOKE DAMPER RELAYS". 2.4 NAMEPLATES A. Provide nameplate per Section 16010 with 1/8" lettering on each relay to identify which fan it is associated with. (i.e. "Supply Fan SF -1") PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTROL SEQUENCE A. Signal from fire alarm system is sent to control module (CMX) to close smoke/fire dampers. Smoke dampers to open immediately when control module (CMX) is reset. 3.2 ENCLOSURE A. Install in the electrical room serving the project area. 3.3 SMOKE DAMPERS A. Provide 120 volt connections from the control module/relay(s) to all smoke dampers in the project area. Separate circuits/controls are required for each supply, exhaust and return fan. 3.4 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Provide per 16010. Record drawings shall clearly indicate: 1. Actual routing of all raceways, and location of all junction boxes. SMOKE DAMPER CONTROL 16724 2 WES 1'r'lELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 2. Actual cable type, numbers and routing. 3. Actual system wiring diagrams, connection diagrams and interface of all components in the system. 3.5 TESTING A. With the fan stopped, visually inspect each smoke damper to insure that it is closed. With the fan running, visually inspect each smoke damper to insure that it has opened. Submit test report to engineer. END OF SECTION 16724 vier litsv SMOKE DAMPER CONTROL 16724 WES 1'FILLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16740 - TELEPHONE, COMPUTER RACEWAY SYSTEMS I'ART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections 16130 Raceways and Boxes 16745 Telecommunications Cabling System. C. Other References EIA/TIA-569A TIA/EIA/ANSI-J-STD-607-A 1.2 DESCRIPTION Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications A. Provide raceway systems for the installation of the telephone cables and computer wiring. Installation shall include raceways, outlet boxes, plaster rings, outlet box cover plates and terminal back boards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2,1 WALL OUTLETS A. Shall consist of a 4-11/16" square, 2-1/8" deep (minimum) box, with knockouts for 3/4", 1", and 1-1/4" conduits, as manufactured by Steel City, OZ/Gedney or equal. B. Shall consist of a 5" square, 2-7/8" deep box as manufactured by Randl Corporation. C. Surface wall outlets shall be 4" square, 2-3/4" deep (minimum) and shall match and be manufactured by the surface metal raceway manufacturer. 2.2 FLOOR OUTLETS A. See Section 16132 for flush floor outlets. TELEPHONE, COMPUTER RACEWAY SYSTEMS 16740 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION B. See Section 16133 for poke-thru floor outlets. 2.3 OUTLET DEVICE RING A. Provide single gang device ring. B. Provide two gang device ring. C. Coordinate device ring requirements with cable/outlet installer 2.4 DEVICE PLATES A. Provide device cover plates for all unwired or 'future" outlets. Plates shall match device plates specified in Section 16140 except with no device openings. 2.5 PULL WIRE A. Shall be plastic having not less than 200 -pound tensile strength. 2.6 TELEPHONE TERMINAL BOARDS A. Shall be 3/4 inch plywood backboard 8' feet high by 4" wide or as indicated in plans. APA interior grade Douglas Fir A -C. Shall be fire retardant with flame spread rating not more than 25 when tested according to ASTM E84. 2.7 TELECOM GROUND BAR, TELECOM MASTER GROUND BAR (TGB, TMGB) A. Copper bus bar, 10 x 4 x 1/4" with a minimum of six (6) 3/8 -inch and four (4) 1/2 -inch diameter holes on 2 -inch centers with screw lugs to secure ground wire terminations. Suggested Product: Universal Bus Bar #10622-010 or similar by Everett Machine Works or as detailed on the drawings. Mount with 4 -inch insulated stand-off brackets. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WALL OUTLETS IN UNINSULATED INTERIOR WALLS WITH ACCESSABLE CEILINGS A. Provide an individual conduit from each outlet location to an accessible ceiling space. B. Provide a cut -in ring, a 1" grommeted hole through the wall top plate, and a pull string in wall. C, Provide an individual conduit from each communications outlet to an accessible Iocation at cable tray or to a telephone terminal backboard. TELEPHONE, COMPUTER RACEWAY SYSTEMS 16740 2 WES 1 FthLD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.2 WALL OUTLETS IN UNINSULA t'EU INTERIOR WALLS WITH NON-ACCESIBLE CEILINGS, EXTERIOR WALLS OR INSULATED INTERIOR WALLS A. Provide an individual conduit from each outlet location to an accessible ceiling space. B. Provide an individual conduit from each communications outlet to an accessible location at cable tray or to a telephone terminal backboard. 3.3 FLOOR MOUNTED OUTLETS A. All conduits from floor outlets shall terminate in a space on the same floor as the outlet. B. Provide an individual conduit from each outlet location to an accessible ceiling space. C. Provide an individual conduit from each communications outlet to an accessible location at cable tray or to a telephone terminal backboard. 3.4 FLOOR OUTLETS/ BOXES IN SLAB ON GRADE A. Provide an individual conduit from each outlet box to a consolidation point interior to the building within 25 feet of the point whey the conduit exits the slab. B. Provide an individual conduit from each outlet box to the serving Telecom Room. 3.5 SYSTEM FURNITURE CONNECTIONS A. Provide an individual conduit from each wall connection location to an accessible ceiling space. B. Provide an individual conduit from each wall connection outlet to an accessible location at cable tray or to a telephone terminal backboard. C. Provide an individual conduit from each furniture system communication/power pole location to an accessible ceiling space. D. Provide an individual conduit from each furniture system communication/power pole location at cable tray or to a telephone terminal backboard 3.6 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY CONNECTIONS A. Provide an individual conduit from each surface raceway to an accessible ceiling space. B. Provide an individual conduit from each surface raceway at cable tray or to a telephone terminal backboard. TELEPHONE, COMPUTER RACEWAY SYSTEMS 16740 WES I HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3.7 CONDUIT SIZING TABLE A. Provide conduits for communications outlets sized as follows: Wall Phones <3/4">,<1"> Wall Outlets (except wall phones) 1" Single Gang Floor Mounted Outlets/Boxes 1" Multiple Gang Recessed Floor Outlets/Boxes <1">,<1-1/4"> System Furniture - per every (2) workstations 1" System Furniture - per every (3) workstations 1-1/4" Surface Metal Raceway - per 12 ft of SMR 1" Surface Metal Raceway - per 20 ft of SMR 14/4" 3.8 RACEWAYS A. Shall conform to specification Section 16130 Raceways and Boxes with the additional requirement that no length of run shall exceed 100 feet and shall not contain more than two 90 -degree bends or the equivalent without a code size pull box. Provide pull boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements. Locate pull boxes in straight runs only, not as a replacement for an elbow. B. Ccnduits with an internal diameter of two inches or less shall have a bend radius at least 6 times the internal conduit diameter. Conduits greater than two inches shall have a bend radius at least 10 times the internal conduit diameter. C. Provide an insulated bushing on all conduits terminated in a cabinet and/ or pullboxes. D. Terminate conduits stubbed out above accessible ceiling space so that the conduit is parallel with the ceiling and provide an insulating bushing. E. Terminate conduit at cable trays at an accessible location within 6" of tray with an insulated bushing and provide bonding jumper or terminate conduit to the cable tray with an insulated bushing. 3.9 PULL BOXES A. Pull boxes shall be sized per the following table: PULL 130X SIZING (inches) Conduit Trade Size Width Length Depth Width increase for additional conduit 1 4 16 3 2 1-1/4 6 20 3 3 14/2 8 27 4 4 2 8 36 4 5 2-1/2 10 42 5 6 3 12 48 5 6 TELEPHONE, COMPUTER RACEWAY SYSTEMS 16740 4 WESI'HELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 3-1/2 12 54 6 6 4 15 60 8 8 3.10 PULL CORDS A. Nylon type, shall be included in all raceways over 10 feet long. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. 3.11 GROUNDING A. Provide a Telecom Master Grounding Bar in the telecommunications entrance facility B. Provide a Telecom Grounding Bar in each telecom room C. Telecom Bonding Conductor and Telecom Bonding Backbone (TBB) 1. Provide a telecom bonding conductor between the building electrical service entrance equipment ground and the telecom main ground bar (TMGB). 2. Provide a telecom bonding backbone conductor (TBB) between the TMGB and each telecom room ground bar (TMB). Unless otherwise indicated on the Grounding Riser, the TBB conductors shall follow the configuration of the telecom backbone. D. Panelboard Bonding: For each telecom room, provide a bonding conductor between the ground bus of each panelboard serving electrical equipment within the telecom room and the TGB serving the room. E. Structural Steel Bonding: Provide a minimum #6 conductor from the TMGB or TGB to a readily accessible point on a vertical member or permanently electrically bonded horizontal member of the structural steel system of the building. F. Pathway Bonding: 1. Bond all metal pathways (conduits, cable tray, cable runway) within telecom rooms to the TMGB or TGB, with the exception of floor and wall sleeves. G. Telecom Grounding/Bonding Conductor Sizing: Maximum Length Wire Size (AWG) 4m (13ft) 6 6m (20 ft) 4 8m (26 ft) 3 10m (33 ft) 2 13m (41 ft) 1 16m (52 ft) 1/0 20m (66 ft) 2/0 Over 20m (66 ft) 3/0 H. Label each grounding and bonding conductor as follows: "IF THIS CONNECTOR OR CABLE IS LOOSE OR REMOVED, PLEASE CALL THE BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS MANAGER." TELEPHONE, COMPUTER RACEWAY SYSTEMS 16740 5 • WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION I. Refer to Section 16452, Grounding, for additional grounding requirements. 3.12 RACEWAY RISER SLEEVES A. Riser raceways to be installed through floors with tops 6 inches above each floor to give continuous cable riser capability. Stuff sleeves with an approved non-combustible material such as rock wool to maintain floor fire separation. 3.13 REMODEL SPACES A. Remove in active and abandoned telephone and computer conductors that serve spaces remodeled, only after receiving approval from the owner. B. Notify owner in writing when active telephone and computer conductors serving occupied spaces and must be relocated due to the remodel. END OF SECTION 16740 TELEPHONE, COMPUTER RACEWAY SYSTEMS 16740 6 WES11,1ELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION SECTION 16999 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Summary of procedures and requirements for project closeout of electrical portions of work. Conform also with other portions of the Contract Documents. Final payment to Contractor is subject to full completion of this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Reproducible, Xerox drawings. See 16010. 2.2 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (0 & M) MANUALS A. Hardboard, screw post, imprinted covers. Tabbed dividers between categories. See 16010. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REQUEST FOR FINAL PUNCH LIST A. To request a final electrical punch list, forward a letter to Sparling, Inc. stating; "The electrical work on this project is complete, all punch list items to date are complete, items 1-14 in Section 16999 are complete and the project is ready for final punch list observation". 3.2 JOB CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE A. Perform the following procedures for project closeout of electrical portions of work PROJECT CLOSEOUT 16999 1 WESTFIELD SHOPPINGTOWN SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION 1. Perform testing, tests and documentation per 16030. 2. Provide engraved nameplates on electrical equipment. 3. Refinish electrical equipment finishes which are damaged. 4. Clean light fixtures per 16010. 5. Color code junction boxes per 16130. 6. Provide spare fuses and cabinet per 16452. 7. Type panel schedules with actual "as -built" circuit descriptions. 8. Number alI circuit breakers. 9. Obtain final electrical inspection. Include copies in 0 & M manual. 10. Give written one year warranty in 0 & M per 16010. 11. Furnish Record Drawings per 16010. Obtain signature on Job Completion Form. 12. Furnish 0 & M Manuals per 16010. Obtain signature on Job Completion Form. 13. Give instruction periods to owner's personnel per 16010. Obtain signature on Job Completion Form. 14. Obtain letter of certification from fire alarm system supplier and forward to Sparling per 16721. 15. Obtain letter of certification from communications system supplier(s) and forward to Sparling. 16. To request final acceptance of project, fill out Job Completion Form in 16010 and forward to Sparling. Note: If inspectors have not signed form, a copy of signed - off permits will suffice. 17. Include with Job Completion Form, a copy of the final punch list with the word "DONE", and the date and Contractor's initials after each item on the list. END OF SECTION 16999 2 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 16999